63005en PDF

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 16i / 18i / 21i / 20i Model A
Maintenance Manual
GFZ-63005EN02 October 1999

GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
Copyright 1999 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration).
CNC maintenance involves various dangers. CNC maintenance must be undertaken only by a qualified
technician.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder.
Before checking the operation of the machine, take time to become familiar with the manuals provided by the
machine tool builder and FANUC.
Contents
1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s2
2. WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s3
3. WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s5
4. WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s6
5. WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . s7
s1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B63005EN/02
1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the maintenance personnel (herein referred
to as the user) and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and
Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a
Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s2
B63005EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2 WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION
WARNING
1. When checking the operation of the machine with the cover removed
(1) The users clothing could become caught in the spindle or other components, thus
presenting a danger of injury. When checking the operation, stand away from the machine
to ensure that your clothing does not become tangled in the spindle or other components.
(2) When checking the operation, perform idle operation without workpiece. When a
workpiece is mounted in the machine, a malfunction could cause the workpiece to be
dropped or destroy the tool tip, possibly scattering fragments throughout the area. This
presents a serious danger of injury. Therefore, stand in a safe location when checking the
operation.
2. When checking the machine operation with the power magnetics cabinet door opened
(1) The power magnetics cabinet has a highvoltage section (carrying a mark). Never
touch the highvoltage section. The highvoltage section presents a severe risk of electric
shock. Before starting any check of the operation, confirm that the cover is mounted on
the highvoltage section. When the highvoltage section itself must be checked, note that
touching a terminal presents a severe danger of electric shock.
(2) Within the power magnetics cabinet, internal units present potentially injurious corners and
projections. Be careful when working inside the power magnetics cabinet.
3. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.
Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing
a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or
by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the
correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
4. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
s3
WARNING
5. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each
machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
user.
6. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
user.
s4
3 WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT
WARNING
1. Always turn off the power to the CNC and the main power to the power magnetics cabinet. If
only the power to the CNC is turned off, power may continue to be supplied to the serve section.
In such a case, replacing a unit may damage the unit, while also presenting a danger of electric
shock.
2. When a heavy unit is to be replaced, the task must be undertaken by two persons or more. If
the replacement is attempted by only one person, the replacement unit could slip and fall,
possibly causing injury.
3. After the power is turned off, the servo amplifier and spindle amplifier may retain voltages for
a while, such that there is a danger of electric shock even while the amplifier is turned off. Allow
at least twenty minutes after turning off the power for these residual voltages to dissipate.
4. When replacing a unit, ensure that the new unit has the same parameter and other settings as the
old unit. (For details, refer to the manual provided with the machine.) Otherwise, unpredictable
machine movement could damage the workpiece or the machine itself, and present a danger of
injury.
s5
4 WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS
WARNING
1. When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a parameter, close the machine
cover. Never use the automatic operation function immediately after such a modification.
Instead, confirm normal machine operation by using functions such as the single block function,
feedrate override function, and machine lock function, or by operating the machine without
mounting a tool and workpiece. If the machine is used before confirming that it operates
normally, the machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece,
and presenting a risk of injury.
2. The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so that those parameters usually
need not be modified. When a parameter must be modified for some reason, ensure that you
fully understand the function of that parameter before attempting to modify it. If a parameter
is set incorrectly, the machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or
workpiece, and presenting a risk of injury.
s6
5 WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY

MAINTENANCE
WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered highvoltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such as
programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators panel
or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
contents of the CNCs memory will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.10 of this manual.
s7
WARNING
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked and
Touching the uncovered highvoltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators panel
or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.10 of this manual.
s8
WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the
blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered highvoltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
s9
B63005EN/02 PREFACE
PREFACE
Description of 1.Display and operation

this manual
This chapter covers those items, displayed on the screen, that are related
to maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also provided at the
end of this chapter.
2.LCD mounted type i Series hardware
This chapter describes the configuration of the hardware, lists the
hardware units, and explains how to replace printedcircuit boards.
3.Standalone type i Series hardware
4.Matters common to both LCDmounted type and Standalone type
i Series hardware
5.Data input/output
This chapter describes the input/output of data, including programs,
parameters, and tool compensation data, aswell as the input/output
procedures for conversational data.
6.Interface between the CNC and PMC
This chapter describes the PMC specifications, the system configuration,
and the signals used by the PMC.
7.Digital servo
This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust the
reference position return position.
8.AC spindles
These chapters describe the spindle amplifier checkpoints, as well as the
spindle tuning screen.
9.Trouble shooting
This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event of
certain problems occurring, for example, if the power cannot be turned on
or if manual operation cannot be performed. Countermeasures to be
applied in the event of alarms being output are also described.
Appendix
The appendix consists of a list of all alarms, a list of maintenance parts,
and boot system.
This manual does not provide a parameter list. If necessary, refer to the
separate PARAMETER MANUAL (B63010EN) and Series 20iTA/FA
PARAMETER MANUAL (B63380EN).
p1
PREFACE B63005EN/02
This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviated
names may be used.
Applicable models Product name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 16iTA 16iTA

T series or T series
(twopath control)*1
FANUC Series 160isTA 160isTA
FANUC Series 16iMA 16iMA

M series or M series
(twopath control)*1
FANUC Series 160isMA 160isMA

T series or T series
(twopath control)*1
FANUC Series 180iMA 180iMA M series
FANUC Series 210iTA 210iTA T series
FANUC Series 210iMA 210iMA M series
FANUC Series 20isTA 20iTA T series for Lathe
FANUC Series 20isFA 20iFA M series for Milling
*1) With twopath control function.
NOTE
Some function described in this manual may not be applied
to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS manual
(B63002EN)
p2
B63005EN/02 PREFACE
Renaming of PMC The manual presents programming descriptions for the PMC models
Models listed in the following table. None that some models have been renamed;
in the product name column, the old names are enclosed in parentheses,
while the new names appear above the old names. However, the previous
specifications are still applied to the renamed models. Thus, when using
the renamed models, users should:
D Read the old names shown in this manual as the new names.
D Read the old names appearing on the units as the new names.
Table. PMC Model Name
Product name Abbreviations
FANUC PMCMODEL SA1 PMCSA1

(Old name: FANUC PMCMODEL RA1) (PMCRA1)
FANUC PMCMODEL SA5 PMCSA5

(Old name: FANUC PMCMODEL RA5) (PMCRA5)
FANUC PMCMODEL SB5 PMCSB5

(Old name: FANUC PMCMODEL RB5) (PMCRB5)
FANUC PMCMODEL SB6 PMCSB6

(Old name: FANUC PMCMODEL RB6) (PMCRB6)
p3
PREFACE B63005EN/02
Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to MODEL A of Series 16i, Series
18i, Series 160i and Series 180i.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related Manuals

Specification
Manual name
number
DESCRIPTIONS B63002EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B63003EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B63003EN1
OPERATORS MANUAL FOR LATHE B63004EN
OPERATORS MANUAL FOR MACHINING B63014EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B63005EN *
PARAMETER MANUAL B63010EN
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler/Macro Executer) B61803E1
FAPT MACRO COMPILER PROGRAMMING MANUAL B66102E
FANUC Symbol CAPi T OPERATORS MANUAL B63304EN
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING B61804E1

FUNCTION I FOR LATHE OPERATORS MANUAL

FUNCTION II FOR LATHE OPERATORS MANUAL

FUNCTION I FOR MACHINING CENTER
OPERATORS MANUAL
FANUC Super CAPi T OPERATORS MANUAL B63284EN
FANUC Super CAPi M OPERATORS MANUAL B63294EN
p4
B63005EN/02 PREFACE
Related manuals of
SERVO MOTOR Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR series, series
series, series
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS B65142E
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR series PARAMETER MANUAL B65150E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS B65152E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series PARAMETER MANUAL B65160E
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER series DESCRIPTIONS B65162E
FANUC SERVO series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B65165E
FANUC SERVO MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS B65232EN
FANUC SERVO MOTOR series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B65235EN
FANUC SERVO MOTOR series (I/O Link Option) B65245EN

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
p5
B63005EN/02 Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p1
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1 Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.2 Function Keys and Soft Keys (for 20i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.2.1 Slot Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.2.2 Setting Module Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.3 Configuration Display of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.3.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.3.2 Configuration of PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.3.3 Software Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.3.4 Module Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.4.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.4.3 Clearing Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.4.4 Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.5 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.5.1 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.5.2 Deletion of External Operator Messages Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.5.3 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.5.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.6 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.6.1 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.6.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.6.3 Setting The Input Signal or Output Signal to Be Recorded in The Operation History . . . . . . . 38
1.6.4 Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.6.5 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
1.7 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.7.2 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.8.1 Displaying Diagnostic Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.8.2 Contents Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.9 CNC STATE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.10 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1.10.1 Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1.10.2 Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1.10.3 Graphic of Wave Diagnosis data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1.10.4 Data Sampling for Storage Type Waveform Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.10.5 Outputting Waveform Diagnosis Data (Storage Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1.10.6 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
c1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B63005EN/02
1.11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

1.11.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.11.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1.14 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
1.15 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
1.15.1 Screen Display and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
1.15.2 Maintenance Information Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
1.16 COLOR SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1.16.1 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1.16.2 Color Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1.16.3 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
1.16.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
1.17 CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
1.18 POWER MOTION MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.18.1 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.18.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.18.3 Parameter Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
1.18.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
1.19 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
1.19.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
1.19.2 Screen Display and Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
1.19.3 Status Screen Display and Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
1.19.4 Setting Screen Display and Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
1.19.5 Registered Data Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
1.19.6 FANUC TwoByte Character Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
2. LCDMOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

2.1 STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
2.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2.2.1 Series 16i/160i/160is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2.2.2 Series 18i/180i/180is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
2.2.3 Series 21i/210i/210is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
2.2.4 Series 20i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTORS AND CARDS . . . . . . . . 162
2.4.1 FS16i/18i/21i/20i Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2.4.2 PC FunctionEquipped FS160i/180i/210i Motherboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2.4.3 PC FunctionEquipped FS160is/180is/210is Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
2.4.4 Inverter PCBs and Connector Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2.4.5 C Board, Serial Communication Board, CAPII Board, and Symbol CAP iT Board . . . . . . . 208
2.4.6 SubCPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.4.7 RISC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
2.4.8 Data Server Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
2.4.9 Loader Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
c2
B63005EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.4.10 HSSB Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

2.4.11 I/O LinkII Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
2.4.12 PROFIBUS Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
2.4.13 Ethernet Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
2.4.14 DeviceNet Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
2.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
2.5.1 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
2.5.2 MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
2.5.3 Printed Circuit Boards of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
2.5.4 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
2.6 REPLACING THE MOTHERBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
2.7 MOUNTING AND REPLACING THE PC CARD (MMX PENTIUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
2.8 MOUNTING AND REPLACING THE CE CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
2.9 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
2.10 REPLACING BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
2.11 REPLACING FAN MOTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
2.12 REPLACING LCD BACKLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
2.13 HEAT GENERATED IN EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
3. STANDALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
3.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
3.2.1 Series 16i/160i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
3.2.2 Series 18i/180i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
3.2.3 Series 21i/210i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
3.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
3.4 CONNECTOR AND CARD CONFIGURATIONS OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS . . . . . . . . 304
3.4.1 Main CPU Board of Series 16i/18i/21i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
3.4.2 SubCPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
3.4.3 RISC Board, Data Server Board, RISC + Data Server Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
3.4.4 C Board, Serial Communication Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
3.4.5 HSSB Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
3.4.6 CAPII Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
3.4.7 I/O LinkII Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
3.4.8 Ethernet Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
3.4.9 DeviceNet Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
3.4.10 PROFIBUS Master Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
3.4.11 PROFIBUS Slave Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
3.4.12 FLnet Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
3.5 UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
3.5.1 Basic Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
3.5.2 Printed Circuit Boards of Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
3.5.3 LCD/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
3.5.4 Other Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
c3
3.6 MOUNTING AND REMOVING AN OPTION BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

3.6.1 Mounting and Removing the Main CPU Board and a FullSize Option Board . . . . . . . . . . . 341
3.6.1.1 Removing the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
3.6.1.2 Mounting the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
3.6.2 Mounting and Removing a MiniSlot Option Board (Except DeviceNet Board) . . . . . . . . . . 343
3.6.3 Mounting and Removing the DeviceNet Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
3.7 MOUNTING AND REMOVING THE BACK PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
3.7.1 Removing the Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
3.7.2 Mounting the Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
3.8 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
3.9 REPLACING THE BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
3.10 REPLACING A FAN UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
3.11 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE LCD UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
3.12 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
3.13 HEAT GENERATION OF THE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
4. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCDMOUNTED TYPE AND

STANDALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
4.1 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.1.1 Demounting a Card PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4.1.2 Mounting a Card PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
4.2 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.2.1 Demounting a DIMM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
4.2.2 Mounting a DIMM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
4.3 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT EXCHANGER OF HEAT PIPE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
4.4 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
4.5 DISTRIBUTED I/O SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
4.6 REPLACING FUSES ON VARIOUS UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
4.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS OUTSIDE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.8 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4.8.1 Separation of Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4.8.2 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
4.8.3 Signal Ground (SG) Connection of Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
4.8.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
4.8.5 Cable Clamping and Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
4.9 NOTES ON USING THE MDI UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

5.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
5.2 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
5.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
5.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
5.2.3 Outputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
c4
5.2.4 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

5.2.5 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
5.2.6 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
5.2.7 Outputting Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
5.2.8 Inputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
5.2.9 Inputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
5.2.10 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
5.2.11 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
5.2.12 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
5.2.13 Inputting Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
5.3 INPUT/OUTPUT SUPER CAP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
5.3.1 Input/Output of Conversational Data in a Lump(Super CAP M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
5.3.2 Input and Output of Each File (Super CAP M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
5.3.3 Input and output of CAP Data (Super CAP T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
5.3.4 Input and Output of Each File (Super CAP T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
5.4 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING CAPII DATA (16iT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
5.5 DUMP/RESTORE OF CAPII DATA (16iT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
5.5.1 Kind of Data in Sub Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
5.5.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
5.6 CLEARING CAPII DATA (16iT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
5.6.1 Deleting File Name and Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
5.6.2 Clearing CAPII Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
5.7 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
5.7.1 Setting Input/OutputRelated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
5.7.2 Inputting and Outputting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
5.7.3 Inputting and Outputting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
5.7.4 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
5.7.5 Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
5.7.6 Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
5.8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT USING A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
6. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

6.1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
6.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
6.2.1 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
6.2.2 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
6.2.3 Builtin Debug Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
6.2.4 System Reserve Area of Internal Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
6.2.5 Execution Period of PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
6.3 PMC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
6.3.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
6.3.2 PMCLAD Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
6.3.3 PMCDGN Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
6.3.4 Memory Display (M.SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
6.3.5 PMCPRM Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
6.4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
6.5 LIST OF INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
6.6 LIST OF ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
c5
7. DIGITAL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

7.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
7.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
7.2.1 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
7.2.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
7.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
7.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
7.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
7.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
7.4.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
7.4.3 Associated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
8. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

8.1 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
8.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
8.1.1.1 Method A of gear change for machining center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
8.1.1.2 Method B of gear change for machining center (PRM 3705#2=1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
8.1.1.3 For lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
8.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
8.1.2.1 Display method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
8.1.2.2 Spindle setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
8.1.2.3 Spindle tuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
8.1.2.4 Spindle monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
8.1.2.5 Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on spindle tuning screen . . . . . . . 551
8.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
8.2 AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
8.2.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
8.2.1.1 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
8.2.1.2 Calculation of S analog voltage and related parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
8.2.1.3 Tuning S analog voltage (D/A converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
9. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
9.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
9.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
9.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . 565
9.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
9.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
9.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
9.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
9.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . 588
9.8 THE DISPLAY ON THE LCD UNIT FLASHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
9.9 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES CANNOT BE PERFORMED
INPUT/OUTPUT CANNOT BE PERFORMED PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
9.10 ALARM 85 TO 87 (READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
9.11 ALARM 90 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
9.12 ALARM 300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
c6
9.13 ALARM 300 (V READY OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

9.14 ALARM 404 (V READY ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
9.15 ALARM 462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
9.16 ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
9.17 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
9.18 ALARM 701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
9.19 ALARM 704 (SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
9.20 ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
9.21 ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK STARTUP FAILURE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
9.22 ALARM 5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT)
ALARM 5135 (FSSB: ERROR MODE)
ALARM 5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR)
ALARM 5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT)
ALARM 5198 (FSSB: ID DATA NOT READ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
9.23 ALARM 5136 (FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
9.24 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
9.25 ALARMS 910 AND 911 (SRAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
9.26 ALARMS 912 TO 919 (DRAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
9.27 ALARMS 920 AND 921 (SERVO ALARMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
9.28 ALARM 926 (FSSB ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
9.29 ALARM 930 (CPU INTERRUPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
9.30 ALARM 935 (SRAM ECC ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
9.31 ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
9.32 ALARM 951 (PMC WATCHDOG ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
9.33 ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM ON AN OPTION BOARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
9.34 ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM WITH AN UNKNOWN CAUSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
9.35 ALARM 974 (FBUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
9.36 ALARM 975 (BUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
9.37 ALARM 976 (LOCAL BUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
9.38 SERVO ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
9.39 SPC ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
9.40 SPINDLE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES (CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
A.2 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
A.3 ALARMS (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726

B.1 MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
c7
C. BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728

C.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
C.1.1 Starting the Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
C.1.2 System Files and User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
C.1.3 Boot Slot Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
C.2.1 System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
C.2.2 System Data Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
C.2.3 System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
C.2.4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
C.2.5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
C.2.6 MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
C.2.7 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
C.2.8 LOAD BASIC SYSTEM Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
D. MEMRY CARD SLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749

D.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE OF STANDALONE TYPE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . 754

E.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
E.2 LAYOUT OF THE 7SEGMENT LED AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
E.3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
E.3.1 Operation Before PowerOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
E.3.2 Function Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
E.3.3 SevenSegment LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
E.3.3.1 NC status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
E.3.3.2 LED display during automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
E.3.3.3 LED display when the push switch is pressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
E.3.3.4 LED display when a system alarm is issued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
E.3.3.5 Display on the 7segment LED at poweron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
E.3.4 Operation of Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
E.4 SUPPORTED EDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOTUP AND IPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764

F.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
F.3.1 Boot Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
F.3.1.1 System data manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
F.3.1.2 SRAM operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
F.3.1.3 File operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
F.3.2 IPL Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
F.3.2.1 Functions on the IPL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
c8
F.4 OTHER SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777

F.4.1 CNC Alarm Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
F.4.2 Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
F.4.3 Option Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
G. FSSB STARTUP PROCEDURE/MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780

G.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
G.2 SLAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
G.3 AUTOMATIC SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
G.3.1 [Sample Setting 1] General Configuration (SemiClosed Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
G.3.2 [Sample Setting 2] General Configuration (Closed Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
G.3.3 [Sample Setting 3] When the CAxis is a Cs Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
G.3.4 [Sample Setting 4] Tandem Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
G.3.5 [Sample Setting 5] When the Simple Electronic Gear Box (EGB) Function is Used . . . . . . 792
G.4 MANUAL SETTING 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
G.5 MANUAL SETTING 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
G.6 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
G.7 ACTIONS FOR TROUBLE ENCOUNTERED AT STARTUP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
G.8 EXAMPLES OF SETTINGS USING OTHER CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
G.8.1 Example 1: Learning Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
G.8.2 Example 2: When a 2Axis Amplifier is Shared by Two Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
G.9 FSSB DATA DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
G.9.1 Amplifier Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
G.9.2 Axis Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
G.9.3 Amplifier Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
H. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
c9
B63005EN/02 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION
This chapter describes how to display various screens by the function

keys. The screens used for maintenance are respectively displayed.
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER
POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.5 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES
RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.6 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.7 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.9 CNC STATE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.10 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . 84
1.11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN
AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1.14 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED
WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
1.15 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN . . . . . . 112
1.16 COLOR SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1.17 CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
1.18 POWER MOTION MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.19 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCREENS . . . . . . . . . 131
1
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B63005EN/02
1.1 Operations and soft key display staturs for each function key are described
below:
FUNCTION KEYS
AND SOFT KEYS
1.1.1 To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a soft
key. Soft keys are also used for actual operations.
Soft Keys
The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressing
each function key.
The symbols in the following figures mean as shown below :
: Indicates screens
: Indicates a screen that can be displayed by pressing a

function key(*1)
[ ] : Indicates a soft key(*2)
( ) : Indicates input from the MDI panel.
[ ] : Indicates a soft key displayed in green (or highlighted).
: Indicates the continuous menu key (rightmost soft key)(*3).
*1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently.
*2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the option configuration.
*3 In some cases, the continuous menu key is omitted when the 12 soft keys
type is used.
2
POSITION SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS
POS
Absolute coordinate display
[ABS] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
Relative coordinate display
[REL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
[Axis name] [EXEC]

[PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
Current position display
[ALL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
[Axis name] [EXEC]

[PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
Handle interruption
[HNDL] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
Monitor screen
[MONI] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
3
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG
in the MEM mode
1/2
PROG
Program display screen
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed
[O number] [O SRH]
(1) [N number] [N SRH]
[REWIND]
[P TYPE]
[Q TYPE]
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
Program check display screen
[CHECK] [ABS] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed
[REL] [O number] [O SRH]
[N number] [N SRH]
[REWIND]
[P TYPE]
[Q TYPE]
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
Current block display screen
[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed
Next block display screen
[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed
Program restart display screen
[RSTR] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed
(2)(Continued on the next page)
4
2/2
(2)
[FL.SDL] [PRGRM] Return to (1) (Program display)
File directory display screen
[DIR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT] (File No. ) [F SET]

[EXEC]
Schedule operation display screen
[SCHDUL] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] [CAN]

[EXEC]
(Schedule data) [INPUT]
5
in the EDIT mode
1/2
PROG
Program display
(O number) [O SRH]
(Address) [SRH]
(Address) [SRH]
[REWIND]
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.)
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[DELETE] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[EXEDT] [COPY] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
[CRSR]
[BTTM]
[ALL]
[MOVE] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
[CRSR]
[BTTM]
[ALL]
[MERGE] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
[BTTM]
[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]
(Address) [AFTER] [SKIP]

[1EXEC]
[EXEC]
6
2/2
(1)
Program directory display
[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program
[READ] [CHAIN]
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
Graphic Conversational Programming (T series)
[C.A.P.] [PRGRM] Return to the program

[G.MENU]
(G number) [BLOCK] (Data) [LINE]
When a G number is omitted, [CHAMF]
the standard screen appears. [CNR.R]
[INPUT]
Graphic Conversational Programming (M series)

[G.MENU]
(G number) [BLOCK] (Data) [INPUT] INSERT
When a G number is omitted, the standard screen appears.

[(OPRT)] [INPUT]
Floppy directory display
[FLOPPY] [PRGRM] Return to the program

[DIR] [(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[READ] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
7
in the MDI mode
PROG
Program display
Program input screen
[MDI] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed
[START] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(Address) [SRH]
(Address) [SRH]
[REWIND]
[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed"
8
in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode
PROG
Program display
[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed
9
in the TJOG or THDL mode
PROG
Program display
Program input screen
[MDI] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed
(Address) [SRH]
(Address) [SRH]
[REWIND]
[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed
10
PROG
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key
(When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed in all modes)
1/2
PROG
Program display
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BGEND]

(O number) [O SRH]
(Address) [SRH]
(Address) [SRH]
[REWIND]
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.)
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[DELETE] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[EXEDT] [COPY] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
[CRSR]
[BTTM]
[ALL]
[MOVE] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
[CRSR]
[BTTM]
[ALL]
[MERGE] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
[BTTM]
[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]
(Address) [AFTER] [SKIP]

[1EXEC]
[EXEC]
11
2/2
(1)
[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT]

[READ] [CHAIN]
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
Graphic Conversational Programming

[G.MENU]
(G number) [BLOCK] (Data) [LINE]
When a G number is omitted, the standard [CHAMF]
screen appears. [CNR.R]
[INPUT]
Floppy directory display
[FLOPPY] [PRGRM] Return to the program

[DIR] [(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[READ] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
12
Soft key transition triggered by the

OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (T series)
function key OFFSET
SETTING
1/2
OFFSET
SETTING
Tool offset screen
[OFFSET] [WEAR] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

[GEOM] (Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR]
(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[CLEAR] [ALL]
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
Setting screen
[SETING] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
Work coordinate system setting screen
[WORK] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

(Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
Macro variables display screen
[MACRO] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

(Numeral) [INPUT]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
13
2/2
(1)
Pattern data input screen
[MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT]
Software operators panel screen
[OPR]
Tool life management setting screen
[TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

[CLEAR] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
Yaxis tool offset screen
[OFST.2] [WEAR] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

[GEOM] (Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[CLEAR] [ALL]
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
Workpiece shift screen
[WK.SHFT] [(OPRT)] (Numeral) [+INPUT]

(Numeral) [INPUT]
Chuck/tailstock barrier setting screen
[BARRIER] [(OPRT)] (Numeral) [INPUT]

(Numeral) [+INPUT]
[SET]
Baxis tool offset screen
[OFST.B]
14
Soft key transition triggered by the

OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (M series)
function key OFFSET
SETTING
1/2
OFFSET
SETTING
Tool offset screen
[OFFSET] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[CLEAR] [ALL]
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
Setting screen
[SETING] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
Work coordinate system setting screen
[WORK] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
Macro variables display screen
[MACRO] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

(Numeral) [INPUT]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
15
2/2
(1)
Patten data input screen
[MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT]
Software operators panel screen
[OPR]
Tool life management setting screen
[TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

[CLEAR] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
16
SYSTEM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM
1/3
SYSTEM
Parameter screen
[PARAM] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
Diagnosis screen
[DGNOS] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]
PMC screen
[PMC] [PMCLAD] [SEARCH] [TOP]

[BOTTOM]
[SRCH]
[WSRCH]
[NSRCH]
[FSRCH]
[ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
[TRIGER] [TRGON]
[TRGOFF]
[START]
[DUMP] [SEARCH]
[DPARA]/[NDPARA] [BYTE]
[TRGSRC] [WORD]
[INIT] [D.WORD]
[WINDOW] [DIVIDE]
[CANCEL]
[DELETE]
[SELECT]
[WIDTH]
(1) (2) (3)
(Continued on the next page)
17
(1) (2) (3) 2/3

[DUMP] [SEARCH]
[BYTE]
[WORD]
[D.WORD]
[DRARA]/[NDPARA]
[PMCDGN] [TITLE]
[STATUS] [SEARCH]
[ALARM]
[TRACE] [T.DISP]/[TRCPRM]
[EXEC]
[M.SRCH] [SEARCH]
[INPUT]
[ANALYS] [SCOPE] [SGNPRM]
With [DELETE] [START]/[STOP]
PMCRC [INIT] [TSRCH]
only
[ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
[EXCHG] [SELECT] [TO] [EXEC]
[CANCEL]
[ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
[PMCPRM] [TIMER]
[COUNTR]
[KEEPRL]
[DATA] [G.DATA] [C.DATA]
[G.CONT] [GSRCH]
[NO.SRH] [SEARCH]
[INIT]
[SETTING] [YES]/[MANUAL]/[ROM]
[NO]/[AUTO]/[RAM]
[STOP]/[RUN]
[I/O] [EXEC]
[CANCEL]
(No.)
[SPEED] [INPUT]
[INIT]
[MDI]/[ROM]
System configuration screen
[SYSTEM]
(4)
(Continued on the next page)
18
(4) 3/3
Pitch error compensation screen
[PITCH] [(OPRT)] (No.) [NO SRH]

[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]
Servo parameter screen
[SV.PRM] [SV.SET] [ON:1]

[(OPRT)]
[SV.TUN] [OFF:0]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[TRACE]
[SV.TRC] [(OPRT)]
[TRNSF]
Spindle parameter screen
[SP.PRM] [SP.SET] [ON:1]

[(OPRT)]
[SP.TUN] [OFF:0]
[SP.MON] [INPUT]
Waveform diagnosis screen
[W.DGNS] [W.PRM]
[W.GRPH] [STSRT]
[TIME]
[TIME]
[HDOBL]
[HHALF]
[STSRT]
[CH1]
[CH1]
[VDOBL]
[VHALF]
[STSRT]
[CH2]
[CH2]
[VDOBL]
[VHALF]
19
MESSAGE SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Alarm display screen
[ALARM]
Message display screen
[MSG]
Alarm history screen
[HISTRY] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR]
HELP SCREEN
Soft key transition triggered by the function key HELP
HELP
Alarm detail screen
[ALARM] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]
Operation method screen
[OPERAT] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]
Parameter table screen
[PARAM]
20
GRAPHIC SCREEN (T series) Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH
Tool path graphics
Mode 0 GRAPH
Tool path graphics
[G.PRM] [(OPRT)] [NORMAL]
[GRAPH] [(OPRT)] [ZOOM] [HEAD]

[ERASE]
[PROCES]
[EXEC]
[STOP]
[ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [ACT]

[HI/LO]
A.ST/Path graphics
Mode 1 to 3 GRAPH
A.ST/Path graphics
[G.PRM] [(OPRT)] [NORMAL]

[ENTRY]
[A.PRM] [(OPRT)] [NORMAL]

[ENTRY]
[GRAPH] [(OPRT)] [HEAD]

[ERASE]
[PROCES]
[EXEC]
[STOP]
[SIDE]
[FRONT]
[OPEN]
[ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [EXEC]
[HI/LO]
21
GRAPHIC SCREEN (M series) Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH
Tool path graphics
GRAPH
Tool path graphics
[PARAM]
[EXEC] [(OPRT)] [AUTO]

[STSRT]
[STOP]
[REWIND]
[CLEAR]
[ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [EXEC]

[]
[]
[POS]
[]
[]
Solid graphics
GRAPH
Solid graphics
[PARAM]
[BLANK] [(OPRT)] [ANEW]

[+ROT]
[ROT]
[+TILT]
[TILT]
[EXEC] [(OPRT)] [A.ST]]

[F.ST]
[STOP]
[REWIND]
[REVIEW] [(OPRT)] [ANEW]

[+ROT]
[ROT]
[+TILT]
[TILT]
[PARAM]
[3PLN] [(OPRT)] [ ]
[]
[]
[]
[]
22
1.1.2 The function selection soft keys are intended to select screens. Their
Function Keys and Soft functions are equivalent to those of the function keys. For example,
pressing function selection soft key [ POS ] selects the same screen that
Keys (for 20i)
is selected using the POS function key.
The function selection soft keys are displayed when bit 0 of parameter No.
3101 (FSK) is 0. They are not displayed when the bit is 1.
The following function selection keys are available.
[ POS ] [PRGRM] [SETING] [SYSTEM] [(CHAP)]
[ MSG ] [ ] [CUSTOM] [ ] [(CHAP)]
The following table lists the function selection soft keys and the
corresponding function keys.
Function selection soft key Corresponding function key
[ POS ] POS
[PRGRM] PROG
[SETING] OFFSET
SETTING
[SYSTEM] SYSTEM
[ MSG ] MSG
[CUSTOM] CUSTOM
GRAPH
Pressing soft key ([CHAP]) displays the chapter selection soft keys.
NOTE
This manual uses the function keys to select screens.
When using the function selection soft keys instead of the
function keys, read each function key name in the
descriptions as the corresponding function selection soft
key.
23
Function key 1 Pressing one of the chapter selection soft keys displays the
corresponding screen.
CHAP If a desired chapter soft key does not appear, press the continuous
menu key.
In some cases, several other chapters can be selected in a chapter.
Function selection 2 When the desired chapter screen appears, press the operation
soft key Chapter
selection key
selection key to display the items you want to operate.
3 To return to the chapter selection soft key display, press the return
OPRT
menu key.
If bit 0 of parameter No. 3101 (FSK) is 0, pressing the return menu
key displays the function selection soft keys again.
Chapter selection
soft key Operation
selection soft key
The actual display procedure varies from one screen to another.
For specific operations, see the respective descriptions.
Return menu key Continuous menu

key
24
1.2
SCREEN DISPLAYED
IMMEDIATELY AFTER
POWER IS TURNED
ON
1.2.1 Types of PCBs mounted on the slots are displayed.
If a hardware trouble or an incorrect mounting is found, this screen is
Slot Status Display
displayed.
D Slot state screen
SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY
0: 003E4000 0:
1: 30464202 1:
2: 00504303 2:
3: 3:
4: 4:
5: 5:

Physical slot number (2ndary side)

Module ID of the PCB mounted (*1)
Physical slot number (primary side)
*1) Module ID of PCB
ff j j
Internal slot number

Module function (software ID)
Type of PCB (module ID)
D Module ID
ID Name
D5 Series 16i motherboard
C5 Series 18i motherboard
CC Series 160i motherboard
EC Series 180i motherboard
CD Serial communication board: remote buffer/DNC2
Serial communication board: DNC1
C language board
CAP II board
CE SubCPU board
CF RISC board
A3 Data server board
D3 Loader control board
AA HSSB interface board
C9 PC function card
25
D Software ID 40 : Main CPU

41 : C language
43 : Sub CPU
49 : CAP II
4A : Remote buffer
4F : PMCRE
53 : Loader control
59 : RISC board for highprecision contour control
5E : HSSB interface (with PC)
1.2.2
Setting Module Screen
END : Setting
B0F101 completed
SLOT 01 (3046) : END Space :

SLOT 02 (0050) : Setting incom-
pleted
Module ID
Slot number
1.2.3
Configuration Display
of Software
CNC control
B0F101 software
SERVO : 909001 Digital servo

SUB : xxxxxx ROM
OMM : yyyyyy Sub CPU
(Remote buffer)
PMC : zzzzzz
Order made
macro/macro
compiler
PMC
26
1.3 After the system has been installed correctly, you can find the PCBs
installed and the softwares integrated on the system configuration screen.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
SCREEN
1.3.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key.

Display Method
(2) Press soft key [SYSTEM], then the system configuration screen is
displayed.
(3) The system configuration screen is composed of three screens and
PAGE
each of them can be selected by the page key PAGE
.
1.3.2
Configuration of PCBs
D Screen
Software series of mod-
ule with CPU
SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT) PAGE01
SLOT MODULE ID SERIES VERSION

00 10D5 : 40 B0F1 0002 Software version
01 00CF : 66 B435 0001 of module with
CPU
Software ID (type)
Module ID
Slot No.
(80X8F is 2nd side)
27
D Module ID
ID Name
C5 Series 18i motherboard
CC Series 160i motherboard
EC Series 180i motherboard
CD Serial communication board: remote buffer/DNC2
Serial communication board: DNC1
C language board
CAPII board
CE SubCPU board
CF RISC board
A3 Data server board
D3 Loader control board
AA HSSB interface board
C9 PC function card
D Software ID 40 : Main CPU

41 : C language
43 : Sub CPU
49 : CAP II
4A : Remote buffer
4F : PMCRE
53 : Loader control
59 : RISC board for highprecision contour control
5E : HSSB interface (with PC)
28
1.3.3
Kind of software
Software Configuration Software series
Screen
SYSTEM CONFIG (SOFTWARE) 01234 N12345
PAGE:02
SYSTEM B0F0 0001 Software version
BASIC+OPTIONA1 Software
SERVO 9090 0001 configuration
PMC(SYS) 406A 0001
406B 0001
4099 0001
PMC(LAD) FS16 0001 Character written
MACRO LIB BZG1 0001 on PMC title screen
MACRO APL AAAA BBBB Character written
BOOT 60M3 0004 on macro compiler
GRAPHIC1 600W 001Z or on CAP.
MEM **** *** *** 12:14:59

[ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][(OPRT)]
1.3.4 Configuration of the modules displayed on PCB.

(1)
Module Configuration
Screen
SYSTEM CONFIG (MODULE) 01234 N12345
PAGE:03
SLOT 00 MOTHER BOARD (2)
AXIS CTRL CARD : 0D

DISPLAY CTRL CARD : 0E
CPU CARD : 01
FROM DIMM : 47
SRAM DIMM : 23 (4)
DRAM DIMM : 86
PMC CPU : 01
(3)
MEM **** *** *** 12:14:59
[ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][(OPRT)]
Contents of display
(1) Slot number (The number is corresponding to PCB configuration
screen)
(2) Type of PCB mounted
(3) Name of card PCB or DIMM module
(4) Hardware ID of mounted card PCB or DIMM module
Refer to 2.4.3 Printed Circuit Boards of the Control Unit for
correspondence with each hardware ID and drawing number.
PAGE
Pressing the PAGE key PAGE
displays the system configuration
screen of other PCBs.
29
1.4
ALARM HISTORY
SCREEN
1.4.1 Alarms generated in the NC are recorded. The latest 25 alarms generated
are recorded. The 26th and former alarms are deleted.
General
1.4.2 (1) Press MESSAGE

key .
Screen Display
(2) Press soft key [HISTRY] and an alarm history screen is displayed.
PAGE
(3) Other pages are displayed by PAGE
or key.
ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345
97/04/18 20:56:26
506 OVERTRAVEL : +X
97/04/18 19:58:11
000 TURN OFF POWER
97/04/18 19:52:45
000 TURN OFF POWER
97/04/18 19:48:43
300 APC ALARM : XAXIS ZERO RETURN REQUEST
97/04/18 18:10:10
507 OVERTRAVEL : +B
[ ALARM ][ MSG ][ HISTRY ][ ][(OPRT)]
1.4.3 (1) Press soft key [(OPRT)].

Clearing Alarm History (2) Press soft key [(CLEAR], then the alarm history is cleared.
1.4.4 When an external alarm (No. 1000 to 1999) or a macro alarm (No. 3000
Alarm Display to 3999) is output, the alarm history function can record both the alarm
number and message if so specified in the following parameter. If
recording of the message is not set or if no message is input, only an
external alarm or macro alarm is displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 EAH
[Data type] Bit

#3 (EAH) The alarm history function:
0 : Does not record the messages output with external alarms or macro
alarms.
1 : Records the messages output with external alarms or macro alarms.
30
1.5 This function enables the saving of external operator messages as a

record.
EXTERNAL The record can be viewed on the external operator message history screen.
OPERATOR
MESSAGES
RECORD
1.5.1 (1) Press the MESSAGE function key.

Screen Display
(2) Press the rightmost soft key [>>].
[ALARM] [MGS] [HISTRY] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]>>

(3) Press the [MSGHIS] soft key.
PAGE
(4) To display the previous or subsequent screen, press the PAGE

or
key.
MESSAGE HISTORY O1234 N12345 Date,

time, and
97/04/01 17:25:00 PAGE : 1
page
No. **** Message
No.
Up to 255 characters Display

range
MEM STRT MTN FIN ALM 17:25:00

[ ][ MSGHIS ][ ][ ][ ]
1.5.2 (1) The recorded external operator message can be deleted by setting the
MMC bit (bit 0 of parameter 3113) to 1.
Deletion of External
Pressing the [CLEAR] soft key erases all the records of the external
Operator Messages operator message.
Record
(2) The MS1 and MS0 bits (bits 7 and 6 of parameter 3113) specify the
number of records to be displayed on the external operator message
history screen. When the bits are changed, all external operator
message records retained up to that point are erased.
31
1.5.3
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 MHC
#0 (MHC) The records of an external operator message:

0 : Cannot be erased.
1 : Can be erased.
#6, #7 (MS0,MS1) These bits set the number of characters to be retained in each record of an
external operator message, as well as the number of records, as shown in
the following table:
MS1 MS0 Number of charac- Number of records
ters in each record
0 0 255 8
0 1 200 10
1 0 100 18
1 1 50 32
* An external operator message of up to 255 characters can be specified.

Combining the MS1 bit and MS0 bit (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No.
3113) selects the number of records by limiting the number of
characters to be retained as the record of an external operator message.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OMH
#2 (OMH) The external operator message history screen is:

0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
NOTE
After setting this parameter, briefly turn the power off, then
on again.
1.5.4 When the number of an external operator message is specified, the system
Notes starts updating the records of the specified message. The system
continues to perform update until another external operator message is
specified or until an instruction to delete the records of the external
operator message is specified.
32
1.6 This function displays the key and signal operations performed by the
operator upon the occurrence of a fault or the output of an alarm, together
OPERATION with the corresponding alarms.
HISTORY This function records the following data:
(1) MDI key operations performed by the operator
(2) Status changes (ON/OFF) of input and output signals (selected signals
only)
(3) Details of alarms
(4) Time stamp (date and time)
1.6.1
Parameter Setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 OHS OPH
[Data type] Bit

#4 (OPH) The operation history screen is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
#7 (OHS) The operation history is:
0 : Sampled.
1 : Not sampled.
3122 Interval at which the clock time is recorded in the operation history
[Data type] Word

[Units of data] Minutes
[Valid data range] 0 to 1439
The clock time is recorded to the operation history at specified intervals.
If zero is set as the interval, ten minutes is assumed. The time is recorded
only when data is recorded within the corresponding interval.
33
1.6.2
Screen Display
D Displaying the operation
(1) Press the SYSTEM
function key.
history
(2) Press the continue menu key [ ]. The [OPEHIS] (OPERATION
HISTORY) soft key are displayed.
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key twice. The operation history screen is
displayed.
OPERATION HISTORY O1234 N12345

Page : 123
No.DATA No.DATA No.DATA
01 97/06/03 11 F0000.7 21 F0001.0
02 08:40:00 12 F0000.5 22 <POS>
03 <DELETE> 13 F0001.0 23 <PROG>
04 F0000.6 14 F0000.5 24 <RESET>
05 MEM 15 P/S0010 25 EDIT
06 G0009.0 16 97/06/03 26 O
07 G0009.1 17 09:27:49 27 1
08 G0009.2 18 <PROG> 28 2
09 ST 19 <RESET> 29 3
10 ST 20 F0000.7 30 4
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

[ TOP ][ BOTTOM ][ ][ ][PG.SRH]
On the operation history screen, the soft keys are configured as shown
below:
[ ] [ PARAM ] [DGNOS] [PMC]
[SYSTEM] [(OPE)] [ ]
push
[ ] [W.DGNS] [ ][ ] [OPEHIS] [(OPE)] [ ]
push
[ ] [ OPEHIS ] [SGSEL] [ ] [ ] [(OPE)] [ ]
push
[ ] [ TOP ] [BOTTOM] [ ] [ ] [PG.SRH] [ ]
(4) To display the next part of the operation history, press the page down
PAGE
key . The next page is displayed.
To display the interface between two pages, press cursor key or
. The screen is scrolled by one row. On a 14inch CRT screen,

pressing the cursor key scrolls the screen by half a page.
These soft keys can also be used:
1) Pressing the [TOP] soft key displays the first page (oldest data).
2) Pressing the [BOTTOM] soft key displays the last page (latest
data).
3) Pressing the [PG.SRH] soft key displays a specified page.
Example) By entering 50 then pressing the [PG.SRH] key, page 50 is
displayed.
34
Data displayed on the operation history screen

(1) MDI keys
Address and numeric keys are displayed after a single space.
Soft keys are displayed in square brackets ([]).
Other keys (RESET/INPUT, for example) are displayed in angle
brackets (<>).
A key pressed at poweron is displayed in reverse video.
For twopath control, the operations of path 2 are displayed in the
same way, but preceded by S_.
1) Function key: <POS>, <PROG>, <OFFSET>, etc.
2) Address/numeric key: A to Z, 0 to 9, ; (EOB), +, , (, etc.
3) Page/cursor key: <PAGE>, <CUR>, <CUR>
4) Soft key: [SF1], [SF2], etc.
5) Other key: <RESET>, <CAN>, etc.
6) Key pressed at poweron: <RESET>
(2) Input and output signals
General signals are displayed in the following format:
G0000.7
The mark indicates that the signal is

turned on.
The mark indicates that the signal is
turned off.
Indicates the bit.
Indicates the address.
Some signals are indicated by their symbol names.
SBK (Indicates that the single block switch is turned on.)
35
Mode selection signals and rapid traverse override signals

are displayed as indicated below:
Input signal
Name displayed
MD1 ND2 MD4 REF DNC1
0 0 0 0 0 MDI
1 0 0 0 0 MEM
1 0 0 0 1 RMT
0 1 0 0 0 NOMODE
1 1 0 0 0 EDT
0 0 1 0 0 H/INC
1 0 1 0 0 JOG
1 0 1 1 0 REF
0 1 1 0 0 TJOG
1 1 1 0 0 THND
Input signal
Name displayed
ROV1 ROV2
0 0 R100%
1 0 R50%
0 1 R25%
1 1 RF0%
(3) NC alarms
NC alarms are displayed in reverse video.
P/S alarms, system alarms, and external alarms are displayed together
with their numbers.
For other types of alarms, only the alarm type is displayed. (No details
are displayed.)
For twopath control, the operations of path 2 are displayed in the
same way, but preceded by S_.
Example) P/S0050, SV_ALM, S_APC_ALM
(4) Time stamp (date and time)

The following time data (date and time) is recorded:
1) Date and time of poweron
2) Date and time of poweroff
3) Date and time when an NC alarm occurs
4) The clock time is recorded at predetermined intervals, together
with each new calendar day.
36
1) The poweron time is displayed as shown below:

97/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day
09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second
2) The poweroff time and the time when an NC alarm occurred are
displayed in reverse video.
If a system alarm occurs, the date and time are not recorded.
3) At predetermined intervals, the clock time is displayed in reverse
video. Set the interval in minutes in parameter No. 3122. If zero
is set, the time is stamped at tenminute intervals.
Each new calendar day is displayed in reverse video.
NOTE
The clock time is recorded for a specified interval only when
data is stored within that interval.
D Input signal or output

(1) P ress the SYSTEM function key.
signal to be recorded in
the operation history (2) Press the continuous menu key [ ]. The [OPEHIS] (operation
history) soft key is displayed.
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key, then press the [SGSEL] soft key. The
operation history signal selection screen is displayed.
OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000
No. ADDRES SIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL

01 X0000 00001000 11 G0000 00000001
02 X0004 10000000 12 G0004 00000011
03 X0008 00001100 13 G0008 00000111
04 X0009 00111000 14 G0003 00001111
05 X0012 00001111 15 G0043 01100000
06 Y0000 01000000 16 ********
07 Y0004 00110000 17 ********
08 Y0007 00011100 18 ********
09 Y0008 00011100 19 ********
10 Y0010 00011100 20 ********
>
EDIT **** *** * * * 00:00:00
[OPEHIS] [SGSEL] [ ] [ ] [ (OPE) ]
37
1.6.3 (1) On the operation history signal selection screen, press the [(OPE)] soft
Setting The Input key.
Signal or Output Signal OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000
to Be Recorded in The
Operation History No. ADDRES SIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL
01 G0004 00000010 11 ********
02 ******** 12 ********
03 ******** 13 ********
04 ******** 14 ********
05 ******** 15 ********
06 ******** 16 ********
07 ******** 17 ********
08 ******** 18 ********
09 ******** 19 ********
10 ******** 20 ********
>
EDIT **** *** *** *** 00:00:00
[ ALLDEL ][ DELETE ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][ ]
(2) Press the cursor key or to position the cursor to a desired

position.
(3) Key in a signal type (X, G, F, or Y) and an address, then press the INPUT
key.
Example) G0004 INPUT
Signal address G0004 is set in the ADDRES column. The

corresponding position in the SIGNAL column is initialized to
000000000.
(4) Select the bit to be recorded.
To select all bits of the specified signal address, press the [ON:1] soft
key while the cursor is positioned to 00000000 .
To select a particular bit, position the cursor to that bit by pressing the
cursor key or , then press the [ON:1] soft key. To cancel
a selection made by pressing the [ON:1] soft key or to cancel a
previously selected signal, press the [OFF:0] soft key.
(5) Up to 20 addresses can be specified by means of this signal selection.
These addresses need not always be specified at consecutive positions,
starting from No.1.
(6) Pressing the [ALLDEL] and [EXEC] soft keys deletes all data. If the
[ALLDEL] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by pressing
the [CAN] key.
(7) To delete a selected signal address, position the cursor to the
corresponding position then press the [DELETE] and [EXEC] soft
keys. In the SIGNAL column, asterisks ******** are displayed in
place of the deleted data. In the ADDRES column, the corresponding
position is cleared.
If the [DELET] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by
pressing the [CAN] key.
38
(8) Pressing the return menu key [ ] causes the [OPEHIS] (OPE) soft
key to be displayed again.
D Input signals and output
signals to be recorded in
the history NOTE
1 A cross () indicates that a signal will not be recorded. Also,
any signal for which an address is not specified will not be
recorded, either.
2 A circle (f) indicates that a signal can be recorded.
3 A signal indicated by its symbol name will also be displayed
by its symbol name.
1. M/T addresses
MTPMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 f f f f f f f f

PMCCNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 f f f f f f f f

G004 f f f f FIN f f f
G005 f f f f TFIN SFIN f MFIN
G006 f f f f f *ABS f SRN
G007 RLSOT EXLM *FLUP f f ST STLK f
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP f f f *IT


G019 RT f f f f f f f
39
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G043 f f f f f
G044 f f f f f f MLK BDT1
G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2
G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 f SBK f

G061 f f f f f f f RGTA

G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G102 J8 J7 J6 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1

G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
G108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1
G110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1
G112 LM8 LM7 LM6 LM5 LM4 LM3 LM2 LM1
G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1
40
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G116 *L8 *L7 *L6 *L5 *L4 *L3 *L2 *L1
G118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1
G120 *ED8 *ED7 *ED6 *ED5 *ED4 *ED3 *ED2 *ED1

G126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1

G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
G132 f f f f +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
G134 f f f f MIT4 MIT3 MIT2 MIT1

PMCMT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y000 f f f f f f f f

CNCPMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 f f f f f f f f

41
2. List of Address for 2path control

MTPMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

PMCCNC (Signals for tool post 1)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0




G043 f f f f f

42
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G102 J8 J7 J6 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1

G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 SMI1
G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1
G116 *L8 *L7 *L6 *L5 *L4 *L3 *L2 *L1

43
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


PMCCNC (Signals for the 2path)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0



44
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G1043 f f f f f


G1100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G1102 J8 J7 J6 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1

G1106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 SMI1
G1114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1
45
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1116 *L8 *L7 *L6 *L5 *L4 *L3 *L2 *L1



PMCMT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

CNCPMC (Signals for the 1path)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

CNCPMC (Signals for the 2path)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

46
1.6.4 Recorded data can be output to an input/output unit connected via a

Inputting and reader/punch interface. An output record can be input from the
input/output unit.
Outputting the Set the input/output unit to be used in setting parameters No. 0020 and
Operation History Data 0100 to 0135.
To output the data, set a code in the ISO bit of a setting parameter (bit 1
of parameter No. 0020).
D Output (1) Select EDIT mode.
(2) Press the SYSTEM key, then select the operation history display screen.
(3) Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] in this
order.
The data output to the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FANUC FA Card is
stored under file name OPERATION HISTORY.
D Input (1) Select EDIT mode.
(2) Press the SYSTEM key, then select the operation history display screen.
(3) Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], , [READ], and [EXEC] in this
order.
D Output data format 1. MDI/soft key
2. Signal
3. Alarm
4. For extension (date or time)
5. MDI/soft key of path 2
6. Signal of path 2
7. Alarm of path 2
The header and recorded operation data are output, in this order. The
operation history data is divided into four parts by identifier words. Data
other than the identifier words depends on the type.
T(identifier word)
T0 : Header
T50 : MDI/soft key
T51 : Signal
T52 : Alarm
T53 : For extension (date or time)
T54 : MDI/soft key of path 2
T55 : Signal of path 2
T56 : Alarm of path 2
47
1) Header
T 0 C O P E R A T I O N
H I S T O R Y ;
C: Data word
2) MDI/soft key
T 5 0 P 0 to 1 H * * ;
P0: Usually
P1: At poweron
H **: Key code (See the following table.)
3) Signal
T 5 1 P 0 to 6 N 0 to 255 H * * , * * ;
New data Old data

P0: X0000 and above
P2: G0000 and above
P4: Y0000 and above
P6: F0000 and above
N***: DI/DO number
H **: Signal information data (hexadecimal)
48
4) Alarm
T 5 2 P 0 to 10 N * * * * ;
P0: P/S No. 100

P1: P/S No. 000
P2: P/S No. 101
P3: P/S No. 0001 to 254
P4: Overtravel alarm
P5: Overheat alarm
P6: Servo alarm
P7: System alarm
P8: APC alarm
P9: Spindle alarm
P10: P/S alarm No. 5000 to 5999
P15: External alarm
N****: Alarm number (for P/S alarm, system alarm, and external
alarm only)
5) For extension (date or time)
Date T 5 3 P 0 to 1 E 0 D * * * * * * * * ;
Time T 5 3 P 0 to 1 E 1 D * * * * * * ;
P0: Usually
P1: At poweron
E0: Date
E1: Time
D*..*: Data Example) October 29, 1997
D 1 9 9 7 1 0 2 9
49
6) MDI/soft key of path 2
T 5 4 P 0 to 1 H * * ;
P0: Usually
P1: At poweron
H **: KCB code (See the following table.)
7) Signal of path 2
T 5 5 P 2, 6 N 1000 to 1255 H * * , * * ;
New data Old data

P2: G1000 and above
P6: F1000 and above
N***: DI/DO number
H **: Signal information data (hexadecimal)
8) Alarm of path 2
T 5 6 P 0 to 10 N * * * * ;
P0: P/S No. 100

P1: P/S No. 000
P2: P/S No. 101
P3: P/S No. 001 to 254
P4: Overtravel alarm
P5: Overheat alarm
P6: Servo alarm
P7: System alarm
P8: APC alarm
P9: Spindle alarm
P10: P/S alarm No. 5000 to 5999
P15: External alarm
N****: Alarm number (for P/S alarm, system alarm, and external
alarm only)
50
Key codes (MDI/soft key)

(00H to 7FH)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Space 0 @ P
1 ! 1 A Q
2 2 B R
3 # 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 % 5 E U
6 & 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 ( 8 H X
9 ) 9 I Y
A ; * : J Z
(EOB)
B + K [
C < L
D = M ]
E . > N
F / ? O
51
(80H to FFH)
8 9 A B C D E F
0 Reset F0
* *
1 MMC F1
* *
2 CNC F2
* *
3 F3
*
4 Shift Insert F4
* *
5 Delete F5
* *
6 CAN Alter F6
* *
7 F7
*
8 Cur Input POS F8

* * * *
9 Cur PROG F9
* * *
A Cur Help OFFSET

* * SETTING
*
B Cur SYSTEM
* *
C MESSAGE
*
D CUSTOM
GRAPH
*1*
E Page CUSTOM FR
* * *
F Page Fapt FL
* * *
*1:On the smallsized keypad, ED corresponds to the CUSTOM

GRAPH key. On a
standard keyboard, ED corresponds to the GRAPH key and EE to the
CUSTOM
key.
* : Command key
52
1.6.5 (1) While the operation history screen is displayed, no information can be
Notes recorded to the history.
(2) An input signal having an on/off width of up to 16 msec is not recorded
in the history. Some signals are not recorded in the history.
(3) Once the storage becomes full, old data is deleted, starting from the
oldest record. Up to about 8000 key information items can be
recorded.
(4) The recorded data is retained even after the power is turned off. A
memory all clear operation, however, erases the recorded data.
(5) The operation history function cannot execute sampling when the
OHS bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 3106) is set to 1.
(6) Set the date and time on the setting screen.
(7) The time needed to input and output 6000 operation records at a rate
of 4800 baud is as follows:
Output:About 5 minutes
Input: About 2 minutes and 30 seconds
This file corresponds to a paper tape of about 180 m in length.
53
1.7
HELP FUNCTION
1.7.1 The help function displays alarm information, operation method and a
table of contents for parameters. This function is used as a handbook.
General
1.7.2 Press HELP key on any screen other than PMC screen, then a help screen
Display Method
appears.
(However, it is not available when PMC screen/CUSTOM screen is
displaying)
D Display of help screen
HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345
***** HELP *****

1. ALARM DETAIL
2. OPERATION METHOD
3. PARAMETER TABLE
[ALARM] [OPERAT] [PARAM] [ ] [ ]
D Help for alarm (1) When an alarm is generated, press soft key [ALARM], then a help
message of the alarm is displayed.
HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345
NUMBER : 010
MSAGE : IMPROPER G CODE
FUNCTION :
ALARM :
A G CODE NOT LISTED IN GCODE TABLE
IS BEING COMMANDED
ALSO GCODE FOR FUNCTION NOT ADDED
IS BEING COMMANDED
[ALARM] [OPERAT] [PARAM] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Pressing soft key [OPERAT],(alarm No.), and soft key [SELECT]
in this order, a help message corresponding to the input alarm number
is displayed.
54
D Help for operation (1) Press [2 OPR], then a menu for operation method is displayed.
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345
1. PROGRAM EDIT
2. SEARCH
3. RESET
4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI
5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE
6. OUTPUT
7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
8. OUTPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
9. MEMORY CLEAR
[ALARM] [OPRERAT] [PARAM] [ ] [(OPRT)]
(2) Press [OPERAT], (an item number) and soft key [SELECT], then an
operation method of the item is displayed.
PAGE
Pressing PAGE key PAGE
or displays another pages.
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345

<<1.PROGRAM EDIT>> 1/4 Current
page/ Total
DELETE ALL PROGRAMS page
MODE :EDIT
SCREEN :PROGRAM
OPR :(09999) (DELETE)
DELETE ONE PROGRAM

MODE : EDIT
SCREEN : PROGRAM
OPR :(0+PROGRAM NUMBER) <DELETE>
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [SELECT]
55
D Parameter table Press soft key [3 PARA], then a parameter table is displayed.
HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N12345

1/4 Current
page/ Total
SETTING (NO.0000~ ) page
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (NO.0100~ )
AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (NO.1000~ )
COORDINATE SYSTEM (NO.1200~ )
STROKE LIMIT (NO.1300~ )
FEED RATE (NO.1400~ )
ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (NO.1600~ )
SERVO RELATED (NO.1800~ )
DI/DO (NO.3000~ )
[ ALARM ] [OPERAT][ PARAM ] [ ][SELECT]
PAGE
Another screen can be selected by the PAGE key PAGE
or .
56
1.8
DISPLAYING
DIAGNOSTIC PAGE
1.8.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key.

Displaying Diagnostic
(2) Press soft key [DGNOS], then a diagnostic screen is displayed.
Page
1.8.2
Contents Displayed
D Causes when the 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL An auxiliary function is being
machine does not travel executed.
in spite of giving a 001 MOTION Travel command of cycle
command operation is being executed.
002 DWELL DWELL Dwell is being
executed.
003 INPOSITION CHECK Inposition check is being done.
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Feedrate override is 0%.
005 INTERLOCK/START LOCK Interlock or start lock is input.
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK Waiting for spindle speed
arrival signal.
010 PUNCHING Data is being output through
reader/puncher interface.
011 READING Data is being input through
reader/puncher interface.
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP Waiting for the end of index
table indexing
013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Manual feedrate override is 0%.
014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP,RRW OFF NC is in reset state.
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH External Program Number
Search External program
number search is being done
016 BACKGROUND ACTIVE Background is being used.
57
D Cause of the cycle start

LED turned off 020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Input of emergency stop signal

Input of external reset signal
Reset button On of MDI
Input of reset & rewind
Servo alarm generation
Switching to other mode, Feed hold
Single block stop
D State of TH alarm
030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH ALARM Position of the character that
caused TH alarm. The position
is counted from the head.
031 TH DATA Data of the character that caused
TH alarm.
D Screen hard copy status
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 035 ER3 ER2 ER1 ABT END
#0(END): Screen hard copy was completed normally.

#1(ABT): Screen hard copy was discontinued.
#2(ER1): An invalid parameter value was specified for screen hard copy.
#3(ER2): An attempt to use a memory card for screen hard copy failed.
#4(ER3): An error occurred during writing to a memory card for screen hard copy.
58
D C executor status
DGN 045 C executor status
[Data type] Bit

C executor status
0: Normal.
2: Inoperable because of an incorrect FROM content.
3: Inoperable because the power was switched on with the M and 0 keys held
down.
5: Inoperable because of insufficient SRAM area; increase the SRAM area size.
Alternatively, inoperable because of an incorrect C executor library version; use
a new C executor library.
6: Inoperable because of an internal error.
10: Inoperable because of an incorrect C executor library version; use a new C

executor library.
11: Inoperable because of an incorrect FROM content.
D Details of serial pulse

coder #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
#7(OVL): Overload alarm

#6(LV): Insufficient voltage alarm
#5(OVC): Over current alarm
#4(HCA): Abnormal current alarm
#3(HVA): Overvoltage alarm
#2(DCA): Discharge alarm
#1(FBA): Disconnection alarm
#0(OFA): Overflow alarm
59
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 201 ALD EXP
Overload 0 Motor overheat

alarm 1 Amplifier overheat
Disconnec- 1 0 Builtin pulse coder (hand)
tion alarm 1 1 Disconnection of separated type pulse
coder (hard)
0 0 Disconnection of pulse coder (software)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
#6(CSA): Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal

#5(BLA): Battery voltage is low (warning)
#4(PHA): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is erroneous.
#3(RCA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#2(BZA): Battery voltage became 0.
Replace the battery and set the reference position.
#1(CKA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Internal block stopped.
#0(SPH): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 203 DTE CRC STB PRM
#7(DTE): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.

There is no response for communication.
#6(CRC): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#5(STB): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#4(PRM): The alarm is detected by the servo, the values specified in the parameter is
not correct.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
#6(OFS): Abnormal current value result of A/D conversion of digital

#5(MCC): Contacts of MCC of servo amplifier is melted.
#4(LDA): Serial pulse coder LED is abnormal
#3(PMS): Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial pulse coder C or feedback
cable.
60
D Details of standalone
type serial pulse coder
alarms #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 205 OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
#7(OHA): Overheat occurred in the standalone type pulse coder.

#6(LDA): An LED error occurred in the standalone type pulse coder.
#5(BLA): A low battery voltage occurred in the standalone type pulse coder.
#4(PHA): A phase data error occurred in the standalone type linear scale.
#3(CMA): A count error occurred in the standalone type pulse coder.
#2(BZA): The battery voltage for the standalone type pulse coder is zero.
#1(PMA): A pulse error occurred in the standalone type pulse coder.
#0(SPH): A soft phase data error occurred in the standalone type pulse coder.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 206 DTE CRC STB
#7(DTE): A data error occurred in the standalone type pulse coder.

#6(CRC): A CRC error occurred in the standalone type pulse coder.
#5(STB): A stop bit error occurred in the standalone type pulse coder.
D Details of invalid servo This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC.
parameter alarms (on the If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203)
CNC side) is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT
#0(MOT): The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
#2(PLC): The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#3(PLS): The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
#4(DIR): The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter No.
2022 (the value is other than 111 or 111).
#6(AXS): In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside the
range of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For example, 4 is
specified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values specified in the
parameter are not consecutive.
D Position error amount

DGN 300 Position error of an axis in detection unit
Feed rate [mm/min] 1

Position error=
60 servo loop gain [1/sec] Detection unit
D Machine position
DGN 301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unit
61
D Reference position shift

function
DGN 302 Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid point
[Data type] Twoword axis

[Units of data] 0.001 mm (metric output), 0.0001 inch (inch output)
[Valid data range] 0 to "99999999
D Position deviation with
fine acceleration/
deceleration enabled
DGN 303 Position deviation with fine acceleration/deceleration enabled

[Unit of data] Detection unit
D Reference counter
DGN 304 Reference counter for individual axes

D Displacement detection
DGN 305 Position feedback data between Z phases of individual axes

If displacement detection is enabled, the feedback data between the Z
phases of different axes is represented in the detection unit.
62
D Cause of the APZ bit (bit

4 of parameter 1815)
brought to 0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 310 DTH ALP NOF BZ2 BZ1 PR2 PR1
#0(PR1): The setting of the following parameters has been changed: Parameters
1821, 1850, 1860, 1861.
#1(PR2): The setting of the ATS bit (bit 1 of parameter 8302) has been changed.
#2(BZ1): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (Inductosyn).
#3(BZ2): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (separate position detector).
#4(NOF): The Inductosyn output no offset data.
#5(ALP): Before the pulse coder detects a full single rotation, reference position
establishment by parameters was attempted.
#6(DTH): A controlled axis detach signal/parameter was input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 311 DUA XBZ GSG AL4 AL3 AL2 AL1
#0(AL1): An APC alarm was issued.

#2(AL3): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (serial pulse coder).
#3(AL4): An abnormal rotation speed (RCAL) was detected.
#4(GSG): The G202 signal was brought from 0 to 1.
#1(AL2): A disconnection was detected.
#6(DUA): While the dual position feedback function was being used, the difference
in error between the semiclosed loop side and the closed loop side
became too large.
#5(XBZ): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (serial separate position
detector).
D FSSB status
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 320 CFE ERR ERP OPN RDY OPP CLS
Indicates the internal status of the FSSBC.

#0(CLS): Closed.
#1(OPP): Running OPEN protocol.
#2(RDY): Open and ready.
#3(OPN): Open.
#4(ERP): Running ERROR protocol.
#5(ERR):
#7(CFE): Encountered configuration error.
(The actual slave type does not match the one specified in the conversion
table.)
63
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 321 XE3 XE2 XE1 XE0 ER3 ER2 ER1 ER0
Indicates the cause of an FSSBC error.

#0(ER0): INFORMED ERROR
#1(ER1): (RESERVE)
#2(ER2): Master port disconnection
#3(ER3): External EMG input
Indicates the cause of an FSSBC error resulting from a request from a
slave.
#4(XE0): (RESERVE)
#5(XE1): Slave port disconnection
#6(XE2): Master port disconnection
#7(XE3): External EMG input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 330 EXT DUA ST1 ST0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#0, #1(ST0, ST1): Indicates the type code for an actually connected slave.
ST1 ST0 Type Address
0 0 A Servo amplifier
0 1 (B: RESERVE) (Currently nonexistent)
1 0 C Standalone type detector inter-

face unit
1 1 (RESERVE) (Currently nonexistent)
#2(DUA): 0 : The slave of interest is not on the first axis of the twoaxis amplifier.
1 : The slave of interest is on the first axis of the twoaxis amplifier.
#3(EXT): 0 : The slave of interest does not exist.
1 : The slave of interest exists.
64
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 331 DMA TP1 TP0 HA2 HA1 HA0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
XX
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#0, #1, #2(HA0, HA1, HA2): Indicates the host LSI address specified as a DMA destination.
#3, #4 (TP0, TP1): Indicates the type code of a specified slave.
(See the above descriptions about ST0 and ST1.)
#5(DMA): Indicates a value determining whether to allow DMA to occur.
NOTE
A combination of parameter Nos. 330 and 331 corresponds
to one FSSB slave unit. Up to ten slave units are available.
Slave units and the associated diagnosis numbers

Slave unit 01 Diagnosis No. 330, No. 331
D Details of invalid servo

parameter setting alarms
(on the servo side)
DGN 352 Detail number for invalid servo parameter setting alarm
Indicates information that can be used to identify the location (parameter)

and cause of an invalid servo parameter setting alarm (servo alarm No.
417).
This diagnosis information is valid when the following conditions are
satisfied.
D Servo alarm No. 417 has occurred.
D Bit 4 of diagnosis No. 203 (PRM) = 1
D The series and editions of the current servo software are:
Series 9090/E(05) and subsequent editions
Series 90A0/A(01) and subsequent editions
See the following table for the displayed detail numbers and the
corresponding causes. For further detail information that could be used
to take measures, refer to FANUC AC Servo Motor Series Parameter
Manual (B65150E).
65
D Detailed descriptions
about invalid servo
parameter setting alarms
Detail Parameter
Cause Measure
number number
0233 2023 A value specified as the number of veloc- Decrease the value specified as the num-
ity pulses is greater than 13100 when ini- ber of velocity pulses to within 13100.
tialization bit 0 = 1.
0243 2024 A value specified as the number of posi- Decrease the value specified as the num-
tion pulses is greater than 13100 when ber of position pulses to within 13100.
initialization bit 0 = 1.
0434 2043 The internal value of the velocity loop in- Decrease the value specified in the veloc-
0435 tegration gain has overflowed. ity loop integration gain parameter.
0444 2044 The internal value of the velocity loop pro- Use a function for changing the internal
0445 portional gain has overflowed. format of the velocity loop proportional
gain.
0474 2047 The internal value of the observer param- Change the setting to: (1) (desired
0475 eter (POA1) has overflowed. setting)/10
0534 2053 The internal value of the dead zone com- Decrease the setting until the invalid pa-
0535 pensation parameter has overflowed. rameter setting alarm will not occur any
longer.
0544 2054 The internal value of the dead zone com- Decrease the setting until the invalid pa-
0545 pensation parameter has overflowed. rameter setting alarm will not occur any
longer.
0686 2068 The internal value of the feedforward co- Use the position gain magnification func-
0687 efficient has overflowed. tion.
0688
0694 2069 The interval value of the velocity feedfor- Decrease the velocity feedforward coeffi-
0695 ward coefficient has overflowed. cient.
0696
0699
0754 2075 The setting of the parameter listed at the This parameter is presently not in use.
0755 left has overflowed. Specify 0 in it.
0764 2076 The setting of the parameter listed at the This parameter is presently not in use.
0765 left has overflowed. Specify 0 in it.
0783 2078 The conversion coefficient parameter Set a value in this parameter.
listed at the left has not been set up for a
fullclosed loop linear motor (for the Se-
ries 9080 only).
0793 2079 The conversion coefficient parameter Set a value in this parameter.
listed at the left has not been set up for a
fullclosed loop linear motor (for the Se-
ries 9080 only).
66
Detail Parameter
Cause Measure
number number
0843 2084 No positive value has been set for the Specify a positive value as the flexible
flexible feed gear numerator. feed gear numerator.
Alternatively, the following condition ex- Alternatively, satisfy the following condi-
ists: Feed gear numerator > denominator tion: Feed gear numerator x denomina-
tor (except for phase A/Bspecific
standalone type detector).
0853 2085 No positive value has been set as the Specify a positive value as the flexible
flexible feed gear denominator. feed gear denominator.
0884 2088 The internal value of the machine velocity Decrease the machine velocity feedback
0885 feedback coefficient has overflowed. coefficient.
0886 Alternatively, use the damping control
function, which has an equivalent effect.
0883 2088 A value of 100 or greater was specified in The maximum allowable value for the ma-
the machine velocity feedback coefficient chine velocity feedback coefficient for
for an axis with a serial standalone type axes with a serial standalone type detec-
detector. tor is 100. Decrease the setting to within
100.
0926 2092 The interval value of the advance feedfor- Use the position gain magnification func-
0927 ward coefficient has overflowed. tion.
0928
0996 2099 The internal value for suppressing N Decrease the setting of the parameter
pulses has overflowed. listed at the left.
1123 2112 No value has been entered for the AMR Specify the AMR conversion coefficient.
conversion coefficient parameter when a
linear motor is in use.
1183 2118 No value has been specified in the semi/ Specify a semi/fullclosed loop error
fullclosed loop error threshold parameter threshold value for the parameter listed at
for a fullclosed loop linear motor (for the the left.
Series 9080 only).
1284 2128 If the value specified as the number of ve- Decrease the value for the parameter
1285 locity pulses is small, the internal value of listed at the left to within a range where no
the current control parameter overflows. alarm will occur any longer.
1294 2129 If the value specified as the number of ve- Reset a to a smaller value when the
1295 locity pulses is large, the internal value of setting of the parameter listed at the left is
the current control parameter overflows. broken up into: a 256 + b
1393 2139 The setting of the linear motor AMR offset Decrease the setting of the parameter
has exceeded 45. listed at the left to within 45.
1446 2144 The cutting feedforward coefficient for the Use the position gain magnification func-
1447 cutting/rapid traversespecific FAD function.
1448 tion has overflowed.
1454 2145 The cutting velocity feedforward coeffi- Decrease the velocity feedforward coeffi-
1455 cient for the cutting/rapid traversespe- cient.
1456 cific FAD function has overflowed.
1459
8213 1821 No positive value has been set in the ref- Specify a positive value in the parameter
erence counter capacity parameter. listed at the left.
67
Detail Parameter
Cause Measure
number number
8254 1825 The internal value of the position gain has Use the position gain magnification func-
8255 overflowed. tion.
8256
10016 2200 bit 0 The internal value of a parameter used to Do not use the runaway detection func-
10019 detect runaway has overflowed. tion (specify bit 0 = 1).
10043 1815#1 A fullclosed loop has been set up for a A fullclosed loop cannot be specified for
2010#2 linear motor (except for the Series 9080). linear motors.
10053 2018#0 The scale reverse connection bit has The scale reverse connection bit cannot
been set up for a linear motor. be used for linear motors.
10062 2209#4 The amplifier in use does not support the If you want to use this amplifier, reset the
HC alarm avoidance function. function bit listed at the left to 0.
If you want to use the HC alarm avoid-
ance function, use an amplifier that sup-
ports it.
D Error detection
DGN 360 Cumulative command pulse count (NC)

Indicates the cumulative count of movement commands distributed from
the CNC since the power was switched on.
DGN 361 Cumulative compensation pulse count (NC)
[Data type] Word axis

Indicates the cumulative count of compensation pulses (backlash
compensation, pitch error compensation, etc.) distributed from the CNC
since the power was switched on.
DGN 362 Cumulative command pulse count (SV)

Indicates the cumulative count of movement command and compensation
pulses received at the servo section since the power was switched on.
68
DGN 363 Cumulative feedback pulse count (SV)

Indicates the cumulative count of position feedback pulses received from
the pulse coder by the servo section.
D Diagnostic data related

to the Inductosyn
absolute position
detector
DGN 380 Difference between the absolute position of the motor and offset data
M (absolute position of the motor) S (offset data)

(pitch interval)
The remainder resulting from the division is displayed.

[Units of data] Detection units
DGN 381 Offset data from the Inductosyn
Off set data is displayed when CNC calculates the machine position.
[Units of data] Detection units
D Serial spindle
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 400 SAI SS2 SSR POS SIC
This data indicates the offset data received by the CNC while it is
calculating the machine coordinates.
#4(SAI) 0 : Spindle analog control is not used.
1 : Spindle analog control is used.
#3(SS2) 0 : Spindle serial doesnt control 2nd spindle.
1 : Spindle serial control 2nd spindle.
#2(SSR) 0 : Spindle serial control is not performed.
1 : Spindle serial control is performed.
#1 (POS) A module required for spindle analog control is
0 : not mounted
1 : mounted
#0 (SIC) A module required for spindle serial control is
0 : not mounted
1 : mounted
69
DGN 401 Serial spindle alarm state of 1st spindle
DGN 402 Serial spindle alarm state of 2nd spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE
#0 (CRE): A CRC error occurred. (Warning)

#1 (FRE): A framing error occurred. (Warning)
#2 (SNE): The transmission/reception target is invalid.
#3 (CER): An error occurred during reception.
#4 (CME): No response was returned during automatic scanning.
#5 (SCA): A communication alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side.
#7 (SSA): A system alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side.
(These problems cause spindle alarm 749. Such problems are mainly
caused by noise, disconnection, or instantaneous poweroff).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 409 SPE S2E S1E SHE
Refer to this diagnosis when alarm 750 has generated.

#3 (SPE) In spindle serial control serial spindle parameters
0 : Satisfy start condition of spindle unit
1 : Do not satisfy start condition of spindle unit
#2 (S2E) 0 : 2nd spindle started normally in spindle serial control.
1 : 2nd spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.
#1 (S1E) 0 : 1st spindle started normally in spindle serial control.
1 : 1st spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.
#0 (SHE) 0 : Serial communication module is correct on CNC side.
1 : An error occurred in serial communication module on CNC side
DGN 410 Load meter of 1st spindle [%]
DGN 411 Speed meter of 1st spindle [min1]
DGN 412 Load meter of 2nd spindle [%]
DGN 413 Speed meter of 2nd spindle [min1]
DGN 414 Position error in 1st spindle synchronous control mode
DGN 415 Position error in 2nd spindle synchronous control mode
DGN 416 Absolute value of synchronization error between 1st and 2nd spindles
DGN 417 Feedback information of 1st spindle position coder
DGN 418 Position error of 1st spindle position loop mode
70
DGN 419 Feedback information of 2nd spindle position coder
DGN 420 Feedback information of 2nd spindle position coder
DGN 421 Feedback information of the position coder of the third spindle
DGN 422 Position deviation in the position loop mode of the third spindle
DGN 423 Feedback information of the position coder of the fourth spindle
DGN 424 Position deviation in the position loop mode of the fourth spindle
DGN 425 Firstspindle synchronization error
DGN 426 Secondspindle synchronization error
DGN 427 Thirdspindle synchronization error
DGN 428 Fourthspindle synchronization error
No. 425 to 428: Indicates the absolute value of a synchronization error in synchronization
mode where each spindle is treated as a slave axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 430 SS4 SS3 SSR SIC
#4(SS4) 0 : Specifies not to use the fourth spindle under spindle serial control.
1 : Specifies to use the fourth spindle under spindle serial control.
#3(SS3) 0 : Specifies not to use the third spindle under spindle serial control.
1 : Specifies to use the third spindle under spindle serial control.
#2(SSR) 0 : Spindle serial control (third and fourth spindles) not in progress.
1 : Spindle serial control (third and fourth spindles) in progress.
#0(SIC) Indicates whether a module necessary for spindle serial control (third and
fourth spindles) has been installed, as follows:
0 : Not installed
1 : Installed
DGN 431 Alarm status of the third serial spindle
DGN 432 Alarm status of the fourth serial spindle
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 438
Information about communication errors for spindle serial control (third

and fourth spindles).
For contents, see the descriptions about diagnosis No. 408.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#3(SPE): Indicates the state of the serial spindle parameter (third and fourth
spindles) for spindle serial control, as follows:
0 : The start condition for the spindle unit is satisfied.
1 : The start condition for the spindle unit is not satisfied.
71
#2(S4E): 0 : The fourth spindle was started normally under spindle serial control.
1 : The fourth spindle was not started normally under spindle serial
control.
#1(S3E): 0 : The third spindle was started normally under spindle serial control.
1 : The third spindle was not started normally under spindle serial
control.
#0(SHE): Indicates the state of the serial communication module (third and fourth
spindles) on the CNC side as follows:
0 : Normal
1 : Abnormal
DGN 440 Thirdspindle load meter indication [%]
DGN 441 Thirdspindle speedometer indication [min1]
DGN 442 Fourthspindle load meter indication [%]
DGN 443 Fourthspindle speedometer indication [min1]
DGN 445 Firstspindle position data
DGN 446 Secondspindle position data
DGN 447 Thirdspindle position data
DGN 448 Fourthspindle position data
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Pulse
This parameter is valid when bit 1 of parameter No. 3117 = 1.

To display the position data of a spindle, execute spindle orientation.

to rigid tapping
DGN 450 Spindle position error during rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Detection units
DGN 451 Spindle distribution during rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

DGN 454 Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tapping
[Data type] Twoword

72
DGN 455 Instantaneous difference for the move command, calculated in terms of the spindle,
during rigid tapping (signed, accumulated value)
[Data type] Twoword

DGN 456 Instantaneous difference for the travel error, calculated in terms of the spindle,
during rigid tapping (signed)
[Data type] Word

DGN 457 Width of synchronization error during rigid tapping (maximum value)
[Data type] Word

D Twospindle polygon This data indicates the status of the polygon synchronization mode.
machining
(T series only)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 470 SC0 LGE SCF PST SPL
#0(SPL): Spindle polygon synchronization is in progress.

#1(PST): Spindle polygon synchronization mode is starting.
#2: Spindle polygon synchronization mode is being released.
#3: The spindle speed is being changed in spindle polygon synchronization
mode.
#4(SCF): The spindle speed has been changed in spindle polygon synchronization
mode.
#5: Not used
#6(LGE): In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the two spindles have different
loop gains.
#7(SC0): In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the specified speed is zero.
73
CAUTION
1 If SPL and SCF are set to 1 and #1, #2, and #3 are set to 0 in polygon synchronization mode,
the operation is normal.
2 If the status does not change, even though PST is set to 1 and the program is stopped in a block
including G51.2, one of the spindles cannot attain the polygon synchronization speed. This
may occur when the spindle cannot be activated because the PSTU bit (bit 7 of parameter No.
7603) is set to 0.
3 LGE is set to 1 when the speed is changed in polygon synchronization mode if the serial spindle
control unit uses different loop gains for the first and second spindles during spindle
synchronization.
When this function is used, the two spindles must be controlled with an identical loop gain. The
warning is displayed in DGN, but the warning does not cause an alarm. (The serial spindle
control unit switches parameters according to the statuses of CTH1, CTH2, and other signals.)
4 SCO is set to 1 if either of the following occurs: The combination of the programmed S value
and spindle control signals including *SSTP <G0029, #6>, SOV0 to SOV7 <G0030> and
multispindle control signal <G0027> causes 0 or a value smaller than the resolution of spindle
control to be programmed (the programmed value multiplied by 4095/highestspindlespeed
is smaller than 1).
Alternatively, SIND control <G0032, G0033> is used and the programmed output is 0.
When SCO is set to 1, the spindle speed becomes 0, setting bit 0 of DGN 471 to 1 and disabling
the ratio of polygon synchronization rotation. This, however, is handled as a result of the
program, and does not cause P/S alarm No. 5018.
74
This data indicates the cause of P/S alarm 5018 or 218.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 471 NPQ PQE NSP SUO QCL PCL
#0 to #3 Cause of P/S alarm No. 5018

P/S alarm No. 5018 can be cleared by issuing a reset. The cause indication
is retained until the cause is removed or until polygon synchronization
mode is released.
#4 to #7 Cause of P/S alarm No. 218
If P/S alarm No. 218 occurs, polygon synchronization mode is released.
The cause indication, however, is retained until P/S alarm No. 218 is
cleared by issuing a reset.
#0: The speed specified for spindle polygon synchronization is too low. (The
unit speed becomes 0 for internal operations.)
#1(PCL): The first spindle (master axis in polygon synchronization) is clamped.
#2(QCL): The second spindle (slave axis in polygon synchronization) is clamped.
#3(SUO): The speed specified in spindle polygon synchronization is too high. (The
speed is restricted to the upper limit for internal operations.)
#4(NSP): A spindle required for control is not connected. (The serial spindle,
second spindle, etc. is not connected.)
#5: A negative Q value is specified while the QDRC bit (bit 1 of parameter
No. 7603) is set to 1.
#6(PQE): The P value or Q value, specified with G51.2, falls outside the
predetermined range. Alternatively, the P and Q values are not specified
as a pair.
#7(NPQ): Although the P and Q values are not specified with G51.2, an R value is
specified. Alternatively, none of the P, Q, or R value is specified.
CAUTION
Bit 0 is set to 1 even when the specified spindle speed is 0 (bit 7 of DGN 470 is set to 1). This,
however, does not cause P/S alarm No. 5018 to be output (because the programmed speed
is 0). P/S alarm No. 5018 occurs when bit 7 of DGN 470 is set to 0, while bit 0 of DGN 471 is
set to 1. Normal spindle speeds will not cause this alarm to be output.
NOTE
1 PCL indicates that the speed specified for the master axis exceeds the maximum speed for the
first axis, specified in parameters No. 3741 to 3744, causing, the specified speed to be limited
to the maximum speed.
PCL is not set to 1 provided the first spindle is connected correctly.
2 QCL is set to 1 when the polygon synchronization speed specified for the second spindle (slave
axis in polygon synchronization) exceeds the value set in parameter No. 7621, causing the
actual speed to be limited to the specified value.
3 SUO occurs if the number of distributed pulses for ITP exceeds 32767, that is, if the speed
specified for the first axis, divided by the specified P value, exceeds 59998. In other words,
SUO occurs when a speed in excess of 59998 rpm is specified for the first axis if P is set to 1.
75
The specified synchronization mode status is displayed.
DGN 474 Rotation ratio of the master axis in spindle polygon synchronization
(specified P value)
In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the rotation ratio (specified P

value) of the current master axis (first spindle) is displayed.
DGN 475 Rotation ratio of the slave axis in spindle polygon synchronization
(specified Q value)
In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the rotation ratio (specified Q

value) of the current slave axis (second axis) is displayed.
DGN 476 Phase difference between two spindles in spindle polygon synchronization
(specified R value)
In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the current phase difference

(specified R value) is displayed.(The units are the minimum input
increment for the rotation axis of the machine.)
If the RDGN bit (bit 5 of parameter 7603) is set to 1, the shift amount
specified for the serial spindle (number of specified pulses, calculated at
a rate of 4096 pulses per 360 degrees) is displayed.
This diagnostic data indicates the actual speed of each spindle in

synchronization mode.
DGN 477 Actual speed of the master axis for spindle polygon synchronization (rpm)
In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the actual speed of the master

axis (first spindle) is displayed.
DGN 478 Actual speed of the slave axis in spindle polygon synchronization (rpm)
In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the actual speed of the slave

axis (second spindle) is displayed.
CAUTION
The values of DGN 477 and DGN 478 are displayed without being sampled. The displayed
values may vary from the actual values. Use these values for guidance only.
76
D State of remote buffer

(protocol A)
DGN 500 Send command
1: SYN 2: RDY 3: RST 4: ALM

5: SAT 6: GTD 7: RTY 8: SDI
DGN 501 Receive command
1: SYN 2: RDY 3: ARS 4: AAL

5: CLB 6: SET 7: DAT 8: EOD
9: WAT 10: RTY 11:RDI 12: SDO
DGN 502 State of remote buffer
0: Not ready
1: Reset state
2: Operation state
3: Alarm state
4: Circuit disconnection
D Open CNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 510
This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available to
general users).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 511
This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available to
general users).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 512 THH THL PRA
This data indicates the cause of a system alarm that has occurred in Open
CNC.
#0(PRA) 1 : A RAM parity error occurred in shared RAM.
#2(THL) 0 : The temperature of the harddisk of Open CNC is too low.
1 : Normal
#3(THH) 0 : The temperature of the harddisk of Open CNC is too high.
1 : Normal
#4 0 : Normal
1 : An NMI has occurred in HSSB.
77
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 513
Indicates the internal information about the HSSB (open CNC). (Hidden
function)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 515
Indicates the internal information about the HSSB (channel 2). (Hidden
function)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 516
function)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 517 THH THL PRA
Indicates the internal information about the HSSB (channel 2) as follows.

#0(PRA): 0 : Normal
1 : A RAM parity error has occurred in shared RAM.
#3, #2(THL, THH):
THL THH Status
0 0 A battery alarm has occurred in the intelligent terminal.
1 0 A hightemperature condition has occurred in the intelli-

gent terminal.
0 1 A lowtemperature condition has occurred in the intelligent

terminal.
1 1 Normal (connected to the PC)
#4: 0 : Normal
1 : An NMI has occurred in the HSSB.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 518
function)
78

to a smalldiameter peck
drilling cycle (M series
only)
DGN 520 Total number of retractions during cutting after G83 is specified
Executing the G83 command clears the value to zero.
DGN 521 Total number of retractions made by receiving the overload signal during cutting
after G83 is specified
Executing the G83 command clears the value to zero.
DGN 522 Position on the drill axis from which retraction is started
The units are the same as the minimum input increment.
DGN 523 Difference between the position on the drill axis from which the previous retraction
was started and the position from which the current retraction is started
The units are the same as the minimum input increment.

to ATC for ROBO
DRILL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 530 A99 A98 A97 A96 A95 A43
* Check the contents of this data if alarm 251 is output.

#5 (A99): A pry alarm occurred while the tool was being changed.
#4 (A98): After the power was turned on or after an emergency stop was released,
M06 was specified before the first reference position return. While the
tool was being changed, machine lock was enabled for the Zaxis.
#3 (A97): M06 is specified in canned cycle mode. M06 is specified in a block
containing the command instructing reference position return. M06 is
specified in tool compensation mode.
#2 (A96): The current tool number parameter (parameter No. 7810) is set to 0.
#1 (A95): M06 is specified while the Zaxis machine coordinate is positive.
#0 (A43): A prohibited T code is specified after M06.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 531 585 584 583 582 581 580 502
#6 (585): Spindle servo alarm (excessive error during ATC magazine indexing)
#5 (584): Invalid sequence during positioning and ATC (system error)
#4 (583): Spindle servo alarm (LSI overflow)
#3 (582): Spindle servo alarm (excessive drift)
#2 (581): Spindle servo alarm (excessive error during travel)
#1 (580): Spindle servo alarm (excessive error in the stop state)
#0 (502): Large spindle distribution (system error)
79

to simple synchronous
control
DGN 540 Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple synchro-
nas control
DGN 541 Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple synchro-
nas control
DGN 540 indicates the difference in the position error between the master
and slave axes when a single axis pair is subjected to simple synchronous
control. DGN 541 is used when two or more pairs are subjected to simple
synchronous control. The position error is indicated for the master axis.
DGN 540 and 541 indicate values in detection units. They are displayed
only with the M series.

to the dual position
feedback function
DGN 550 Closed loop error
[Data type] 2word axis

[Valid data range] 99999999 to +99999999
DGN 551 Semiclosed loop error

DGN 552 Error between semiclosed and closed loops
[Data type] word axis

DGN 553 Amount of dual position compensation

80
The data items displayed on the diagnosis screen are obtained at the
following positions:
Semiclosed loop
error (No. 551)
Motor
Command
+ + +
S Kp Speed Machine
- + control
-
Servo amplifier
Ps
Conversion
coefficients
Closed loop error (Parameters No. 2078 and 2079)

(No. 550) Amount of dual
+ position compensa-
Time
tion (No. 553)
constant
+ - +
S (Parameter No. 2080)
- +
Error between semi

Pf closed and closed
loops (No. 552)
D Status after execution of

manual tool
compensation (for the T
series only)
DGN 560 Status after execution of manual tool compensation
0: Manual tool compensation ended normally.

1: The data of the T code command is out of the allowable range.
2: The offset value is out of the allowable range.
3: The offset number is out of the allowable range.
4: The CNC is running automatically or moving the axes.
5: The CNC is in tool tip radius compensation mode.
6: The CNC is not in JOG or HNDL (INCR) mode.
7: The setting of a CNC parameter is invalid.
81
1.9
CNC STATE DISPLAY ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010
X 217.940
Y 363.233
Z 0.000
PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
Indicates the current status of the CNC.

Display example and explanation
(1) (2) (3) (4) (7) (8)
(5)
(1) Mode selection status

MEM: Automatic operation (memory operation)
MDI: Manual data input/MDI operation
EDIT: Program editing
RMT: Remote operation
JOG: Jog feed
REF: Reference position return
INC: Incremental feed mode = step feed (if no manual pulse
generator is available)
HND: Manual handle feed mode
TJOG: Teaching in jog feed mode
THND:Teaching in handle feed mode
(2) Automatic operation status
STRT: Automatic operation has started (and program execution is
under way).
HOLD:Automatic operation has been suspended (execution of a
block has been discontinued, and automatic operation has
stopped).
STOP: Automatic operation has stopped (a block has been finished,
and automatic operation has stopped).
MSTR:The tool is returning or being repositioned when the tool
retract and return function is executed.
****: Other status (when the power is switched on, or automatic
operation has ended)
82
(3) Automatic operation status

MTN: Programspecified axis movement is under way.
DWL: Programspecified dwell command (G04) is being executed.
***: Other status
(4) Auxiliary function status
FIN: The completion signal FIN for an auxiliary function is being
awaited.
***: Other status
(5) Emergency stop and reset status (displayed at the location of items
mentioned in (3) and (4))
EMG : Emergency stop status
RESET: CNC reset status (The state in which the reset signal or
the MDI RESET key remains active.)
(6) Alarm status
ALM : An alarm condition has been detected.
BAT : The lithium battery voltage is low (the battery is to be
replaced).
Blank: Other status
(7) Clock display: Hour:minute:second
(8) Program editing/running status
Input: Data is being input.
Output:Data is being output.
SRCH: A data search is under way.
EDIT: Editing such as insertion or modification is under way.
LSK: Label skip enabled at data input (until valid information is
read).
PTRR: Retract or return/repositioning is under way when the tool
retrack and return function is used.
HPCC: Highprecision contour control mode.
AICC: AI contour control mode.
RVRS: Reversing based on the retrace function.
RTRY: Readvancing based on the retrace function.
RVED: Reversing based on the retrace function has ended.
Blank: Editing is not under way.
83
1.10 Tuning becomes easier by graphically displaying servo error amount and
torque command, etc. (Graphic option is required).
WAVEFORM
DIAGNOSTIC The following two types of waveform diagnosis functions are supported:
FUNCTION (1) Oneshot type
The oneshot type waveform diagnosis function can graphically
display, as a waveform, any variation in those data items listed below.
The start of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge
of a machine signal. This function facilitates the adjustment of the
servo and spindle motors.
a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and
thermal simulation data for the servo motor of each axis
b. Composite speed for the first, second, and third axes
c. Spindle motor speed and load meter value
d. On/off state of a machine signal specified with a signal address
(2) Storage type
The storage type waveform diagnosis function enables the storing
of any variation in the data items listed below and, if a servo alarm
occurs, the graphical display (as a waveform) of the stored data. The
end of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge
of a machine signal. This function facilitates the estimation of
erroneous locations. Stored data can be output via the reader/punch
interface.
a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and
thermal simulation data for the servo motor for each axis
NOTE
1 To output stored waveform data, the optional reader/punch
interface must have been installed.
2 The waveform diagnosis function is enabled when bit 0
(SGD) of parameter No. 3112 is set to 1. Note, however, that
a graphics card is necessary to display waveforms.
1.10.1 (1) Set a parameter to utilize the servo waveform diagnostic function.
Setting Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 3112 SGD
#0(SGD) 0 : Do not display servo waveform (usual graphic display).

1 : Displays servo waveform (usual graphic display function cannot be
used).
(2) Turn off the power once and turn it on again.
DGN 3120 Time between servo alarm and sampling stop (storage type)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
84
1.10.2 1. Press the SYSTEM key to display a system screen such as aparameter.
Waveform Diagnostic
Parameter Screen 2. Press the continuous menu key several times, and the soft key
[W.DGNS] is displayed.
3. Press [W.DGNS], then the parameter screen for the waveform
diagnosis is displayed.
Set the necessary data items. Position the cursor to the item to be set,
enter the corresponding data, then press INPUT . Data items for which
***** is displayed cannot be set. To assist in data setting, the frame on
the right side of the screen displays help information for that data to which
the cursor is positioned. Help information which cannot fit into a single
frame is split into several pages, which the user can scroll through using
PAGE
the page keys PAGE
and .
WAVE DIAGNOSE (PARAMETER) O1234 N12345
GRP CONDITION 100 GRP CONDITION
SAMPLING TIME *****MS (ONES TYPE)

0:START
TRIGGER ******* 1:START&TRG
2:START&TRG
(CH1) (CH2) (MEMORY TYPE)
100: DATA OF
DATA NO. 11 22 MEMORY
UNIT 1000 10 1/3
SIGNAL ******* *******
> S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52
[W.PRM] [W.GRPH] [ W.MEM ] [ ] [ ]
D Waveform diagnosis (1) Display start condition

parameters (oneshot
0 : Starts data sampling upon the [START] key being pressed,
type)
samples data for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
1 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first rising edge of
the trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples data
for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
2 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first falling edge of
the trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples data
for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
(2) Sampling period: Set the period during which data will be sampled.
Valid data range: 10 to 32760
Units: ms
(3) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the
start of data sampling, when 1 or 2 is set for the start condition.
Example) G0007.2: ST signal
85
(4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for
which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 8).
Data No. Description Units
00 Does not display a waveform.
0n Servo error (8 ms) for the nth axis (positional devi- Pulses
ation) (detection units)
1n Pulse distribution for the nth axis Pulses

(move command) (input increments)
2n Torque for the nth axis (actual current) % (relative to maxi-

mum current)
5n Actual speed for the nth axis min1
6n Command current for the nth axis % (relative to maxi-

mum current)
7n Thermal simulation data for the nth axis % (OVC alarm ratio)
90 Composite speed for the first, second, and third axes Pulses
(input increments)
99 On/off state of a machine signal specified with a sig- None

nal address
10n Actual spindle speed for the nth axis % (relative to maxi-
mum rotation
speed)
11n Load meter for the spindle for the nth axis % (relative to maxi-
mum output)
161 Difference in position error calculated on the spindle Pulses (detection

basis unit)
(5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units are
automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless
the units must be changed for some reason.
[Unit] 0.001
(6) Signal address: PMC address and bit number. Set in the same way as
that for trigger, when the data number is 99.
86
D Waveform diagnosis (1) Display start condition

parameters (storage 100 : Draws a waveform for the stored data.
type)
(2) Sampling period: Invalid
(3) Trigger: Invalid
(4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for
which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 8). Numbers for which
no data is stored cannot be specified.
Data No. Description Units
00 Does not display a waveform.
1n Pulse distribution for the nth axis (move command) Pulses

(input increments)
2n Torque for the nth axis (actual current) % (relative to maxi-

mum current)
5n Actual speed for the nth axis min1
6n Command current for the nth axis % (relative to maxi-

mum current)
7n Thermal simulation data for the nth axis % (OVC alarm ratio)
(5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units are
automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless
the units must be changed for some reason.
[Unit] 0.001
(6) Signal address: Invalid
87
1.10.3 1. Press soft key [W.GRPH], then graph of waveform diagnosis is

Graphic of Wave displayed.
Diagnosis data
WAVE DIAGNOSE (GRAPHIC)
CH1 CH2
1.0 1.0
0.5 0.5
0 0
0. 0.
5 5
1. 1.
0 0
[START] [TIME] [TIME] [HDOBL] [HHALF]
2. Press soft key [(OPRT)], then the following soft keys are displayed.
The following three sets of soft keys are displayed by the key.
[START] [TIME] [TIME] [HDOBL] [HDOBL]
[START] [CH1] [CH1] [VDOBL] [VHALF]
[START] [CH2] [CH2] [VDOBL] [VHALF]
1) [START ] : Starts Graphic data

2) [TIME] : Shift the waveform of channel 1 and 2 rightward
3) [TIME] : Shift the waveform of channel and 2 leftward
4) [HDOBL] : Double the time scale of the waveform of channel 1
and 2
5) [HHALF] : Half the time scale of the waveform of channel 1 and 2
6) [HDOBL] : Double the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2
7) [VHALF] : Half the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2
8) [CH1] : Shift the zero point of channel 1 upward
9) [CH1] : Shift the zero point of channel 1 downward
10) [CH2] : Shift the zero point of channel 2 upward
11) [CH2] : Shift the zero point of channel 2 downward
D Drawing a waveform for The oneshot type waveform diagnosis function draws a waveform for a
oneshot type waveform specified data item in real time as the data is sampled. The sampled data,
diagnosis however, is not stored and thus cannot be output later.
To sample data for oneshot type waveform diagnosis, press the

[START] key on the WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) screen. Then, data
is sampled when the specified start condition is satisfied. Data sampling
continues for the specified period.
88
Pressing the [SATART] soft key starts data sampling. While sampling
is being performed, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once data
sampling has been completed, a waveform is automatically displayed.
WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345
CH1 CH2
EDIT **** ******

D Drawing a waveform for To use storage type waveform diagnosis, set 100 for the display start
storage type waveform condition. The maximum data width for storage type waveform diagnosis
diagnosis is 32760 ms. Data must be sampled before starting drawing. The next
page explains sampling in detail.
Pressing the [START] soft key loads stored data. While the data is being
loaded, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once the data has
been loaded, a waveform is displayed. The date on which the data was
stored is displayed at the top left of the screen. If the [START] soft key
is pressed while data is being stored, storage is stopped and the waveform
for the data stored up to that point is displayed. The WAVE DIAGNOS.
(MEMORY) screen indicates whether data is being stored.
WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345
CH197/01/13 12:15:00 CH2
EDIT **** ******

89
1.10.4 (1) Press the SYSTEM function key. Pressing the menu continuation key [ ]
Data Sampling for displays the [W.DGNS] soft key. Press this soft key to display the
Storage Type WAVE DIAGNOS. (PARAMETER) screen.
Waveform Diagnosis
(2) Press the [W.MEM] soft key to display the WAVE DIAGNOS.
(MEMORY) screen. The operation selection soft keys appear.
The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as follows:
WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) O1234 N12345
CONDITION: 100 TRIGGER: G0123.4
DATA KINDS SAMPLING AXIS

POS ERROR XYZABCUV
MOTION CMD XYZABCUV
CURRENT (%) XYZABCUV
SPEED (RPM) NONE
TORQUE CMD NONE
HEAT SIMLT XYZABCUV
SMPL TIME : 2. 0SEC
DATE : MEMORY
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]
(3) The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as

follows:
[W.PRM] [W.GRPH] [ W.MEM ] [ ] [ ]
Press
[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]
[ ] [ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 1.10.4 Soft keys
(4) Using the cursor, set the necessary data items. To set the sampling
axes, position the cursor to the data item to be set, enter the names of
the axes for which data will be sampled for that data item, then press
[SELECT] or INPUT . The axis names are displayed to the right of the
data items.
Example) XYZ + [SELECT] or INPUT
Once the sampling axes have been selected, the sampling period for each
axis is displayed. Subsequently pressing the [START] soft key starts data
sampling.
90
CAUTION
1 Data items for which ***** is displayed cannot be set.
2 To change the sampling axes, enter new axis names then
press the [SELECT] soft key. Pressing the [SLELCT] soft
key without entering an axis name results in no sampling
axis being set.
3 If the sampling axes are changed during data sampling,
data sampling is stopped. In this case, press the [START]
soft key to restart data sampling for the new sampling axes.
4 Initially, no sampling axis is set.
D Storage data parameters (1) Storage stop condition

100: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm.
101: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the
detection of the rising edge of the trigger signal.
102: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the
detection of the falling edge of the trigger signal.
The maximum stored data width is 32760 ms. If the storage stop
condition is not satisfied within 32760 ms, data is overwritten, starting
with the oldest data.
Parameter No. 3120 can be used to delay data storage being stopped
by a specified period (ms), after the issue of a servo alarm.
(2) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the
stopping of data storage, when 101 or 102 is set for the stop condition.
Example) G0007.2: ST signal
(3) Data type: The following table lists the types of data for which a
waveform can be displayed.
Data type Description Units
POS ERROR Servo error (8 ms) for the nth axis Pulses
(detection units)
MOTION CMD Pulse distribution for the nth axis Pulses

(input increments)
CURRENT (%) Torque for the nth axis % (relative to maxi-

mum current)
SPEED (RPM) Actual speed for the nth axis min1
TORQUE CMD Command current for the nth axis % (relative to maxi-
mum current)
HEAT SIMLT Thermal simulation data for the nth axis %

(OVC alarm ratio)
(4) Sampling axis: The axes along which data will be sampled are
displayed.
(5) Sampling period: The sampling period for each axis is displayed.
(6) Date of storage: While data is being sampled, MEMORY blinks in this
field. When data sampling stops, the date at that point appears in this
field.
91
1.10.5 Waveform diagnosis data of servo alarm format can be output to an I/O
Outputting Waveform device, as follows:
Diagnosis Data 1) Select EDIT mode.
(Storage Type) 2) Press the SYSTEM key, then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY)
screen.
3) Press the [W.MEM], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys, in this
order.
For details of input/output to/from the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA
Card, see Output to FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card, below.
WAVE DIAGNOSE (MEMORY) O1234 N12345
CONDIGION: 100 TRIGGER: G0123.4
DATA KINDS SAMPLING AXIS

POS ERROR XYZABCUV
MOTION CMD XYZABCUV
CURRENT (%) XYZABCUV
SPEED (RPM) NONE
TORQUE CMD NONE
HEAT SIMLT XYZABCUV
SMPL TIME : 2.0SEC
DATE : 97/01/13 12:15:00
EDIT **** *** *** 12:15:52

[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]
[ ] [ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ]
Press
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ CAN ] [ EXEC ]
Press
D Output to FANUC Floppy 1) Select EDIT mode.

Cassette or FA Card
2) Press the SYSTEM key, then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY)
screen.
3) Open the write protect tab on the floppy disk or card.
4) Press the [W.MEM], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys, in this
order.
The waveform diagnosis data is output to a file named WAVE
DIAGNOS, to which the number of the last file is assigned.
If a file named WAVE DIAGNOS already exists in the floppy disk or
on the card, P/S alarm 86 is issued. A floppy disk or card can contain
only one file for waveform diagnosis data. If the existing WAVE
DIAGNOS file contains unnecessary waveform diagnosis data of
servo alarm format, delete that file before attempting to output new
data. The procedure for deleting a file is described later.
92
D Directory display The directory in the cassette or card is displayed by means of the
following procedure:
1) Select EDIT mode.
2) Press the PROG function key to select the program screen.
3) Press the continuous menu key , then press [FLOPPY].

PAGE
4) Press page key .
The directory is displayed.
D Deleting a file A file stored on a cassette or card is deleted by means of the following
procedure:
1) Select EDIT mode.
2) Press the PROG function key to select the program screen.
3) Set the write protect switch on the cassette or card to enable writing.
4) Press [FLOPPY].
5) Press [DELETE].
6) Enter the file number, then press [F SET].
7) Press [EXEC].
The file corresponding to the specified file number is deleted. The
number of each file subsequent to the deleted file is decremented by
one.
93
D Output format In the servo alarm format, the header, date and time, selected axes, and
waveform diagnosis data are output in this order. Data items are identified
by nine identifier words. Output data other than the identifier words
varies with the data type.
T(identifier word)
T0 : Header
T60 : Positional deviation
T61 : Move command
T62 : Actual current
T63 : Actual speed
T64 : Command current
T65 : Thermal simulation
T68 : Selected axes
T69 : Date and time
1) Header
T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;
C: Data word
2) Data word
T 6 9 D * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;
D *..*: Data Example: 12:14 59 seconds on June 23, 1997
T 6 9 D 1 9 9 2 0 6 2 3 , 1 2 1 4 5 9 ;
3) Selected axes
T 6 8 P * * D * * , * * , X * * ,
P0: Positional deviation

P1: Actual speed
P2: Move command
P3: Command current
P4: Actual current
P5: Thermal simulation
D*.. *: Axis number (1 to 8)
94
4) Waveform diagnosis data
T 6 0 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
T 6 1 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
T 6 2 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
T 6 3 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
T 6 4 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
T 6 5 D * * , * * , * * , X * * ,
D *..*: Waveform diagnosis data x number of axes
NOTE
1 Records are classified into header records and data
records.
2 % is used as an endofrecord code.
3 Each record starts with an identifier and ends with an
endofblock code.
4 Either the ISO or EIA code system is used.
5 The output code type is specified with parameter ISO (bit 1
of No. 0100). For ISO code, parameter NCR (bit 3 of No.
0100) is used to specify whether the endofblock code is
<LF> only, or a sequence of <LF> <CR> <CR>.
6 Parameter NFD (bit 7 of No. 01X1, where X is the channel
number) is used to specify whether a feed code is output
before and after the data.
7 No identifier word is output for a data item for which no axis
is selected.
8 The above file corresponds to a paper tape of about 200 m
in length.
1.10.6 (1) Once the storage is full, the oldest data is overwritten.
Notes (2) Storedtype waveform diagnostic data is not lost, even when the
power is turned off.
(3) The waveform diagnostic function is disabled when parameter SGD
(bit 0 of No. 3112) is set to 0.
(4) Set the correct date and time using the setting screen.
95
1.11 Load meter of the servo axis and the serial spindle and the speed meter
can be displayed.
OPERATING
MONITOR
1.11.1 1. Set a parameter to display operating monitor. (Bit 5 (OPM) of

Display Method parameter No.3111)
2. Press the POS key to display the position display screen.
3. Press continuous menu key , then soft key [MONI] is displayed.

4. Press the soft key [MONI], then the operating monitor screen is
displayed.
OPERATING MONITOR O0001 N00001

(LOAD METER)
X : * * * 80% S1: 201%
Y : * * * * * 0% (SPEED METER RPM)
Z : * * * * * 0% S1: * * * 1500
PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T 0000

[ [ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
CAUTION
1 The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200%.
2 The bar graph for the speed meter shows the ratio of the
current spindle speed to the maximum spindle speed
(100%). Although the speed meter normally indicates the
speed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicate
the speed of the spindle by setting bit 6. (OPS) of parameter
3111 to 1.
3 The servo axes for their load meters are displayed are set
to parameter No. 3151 to 3. If parameters 3151 to 3153 are
all zero, the load meter of the basic axes are displayed.
4 For color display, the bar of the load meter that exceed
100% shows purple color.
96
1.11.2
Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 3111 OPS OPM
[Data type] Bit

OPM Operating monitor display is:
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
OPS The speed meter on the operating monitor screen displays:
0 : Spindle motor speed
1 : Spindle speed
DGN 3151 Axis number for which the first servo motor load meter is displayed
DGN 3152 Axis number for which the second servo motor load meter is displayed
DGN 3153 Axis number for which the third servo motor load meter is displayed
DGN 3154 Axis number for which the fourth servo motor load meter is displayed
DGN 3155 Axis number for which the fifth servo motor load meter is displayed
DGN 3156 Axis number for which the sixth servo motor load meter is displayed
DGN 3157 Axis number for which the seventh servo motor load meter is displayed
DGN 3158 Axis number for which the eighth servo motor load meter is displayed
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, 1, ... number of controlled axes
These parameters specify the numbers of the axes for which load meters
for servo motors are to be displayed. Up to eight load meters can be
displayed. Set 0 for those axes for which no load meter is to be displayed.
97
1.12
LIST OF
OPERATIONS
Reset
Data
Param- Func-
protec-
Function eter Mode tion Operation
tion
write=1 button
key
Resetting run hour [(OPRT)] [RUNPRE][EXEC]
POS
Resetting no. of [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE][EXEC]

machined parts POS
Resetting OT alarm At Pow-

er ON
P and CAN
Resetting alarm 100

CAN and RESET
Registration from MDI

Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
SYSTEM
Parameter no.[NO.SRH]Data INPUT
Inputting MDI or

parameters E.Stop (PA- PWE =0 RESET
RAM)
Inputting offset
OFF OFFSET
SETTING Offset number[NO.SRH]Offset value INPUT
values
Inputting setting
OFF MDI OFFSET
SETTING Setting no.[NO.SRH]Data INPUT
data
Input of PMC
parameters, counter OFF [PMCPRM][COUNTR] or [DATA]Data INPUT
and data table MDI or SYSTEM
Inputting PMC E.Stop

parameters (PMC) [PMCPRM][TIMER] or [KEEPRL]Data INPUT
(Timer, keep relay)
POS POS (Display of relative coordinate)<AXIS> [ORIGIN]

Tool length
JOG Jog the tool to measuring position
measurement OFFSET
SETTING
OFFSET
SETTING
Offset no.[NO.SRH]<AXIS>[INP.C]
98
Input/Output with FANUC Cassette

Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
Heading a file EDIT
PROG N File no.[ " ][F SRH][EXEC]
Deleting a file OFF EDIT

PROG N File no.[ " ][DELETE[EXEC]
Collating a program EDIT

PROG Heading a file O Program number[(OPRT)]
[ " ][READ][EXEC]
Inputting From FANUC Cassette

Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
Inputting EDIT or [(OPRT)][ " ][READ][EXEC]
SYSTEM
parameters E.Stop
(PA-
RAM)
Inputting PMC E.Stop
parameters SYSTEM
[ " ][I/O](CANNEL NO) 1 INPUT
(PMC) (DEVICE NAME) [FDCAS](KIND OF DATA) [PA-
RAM][READ](FILE NO) File no. INPUT [EXEC]
Inputting offset OFF EDIT OFFSET

(Heading a file no.)[(OPRT)][ " ][READ][EXEC]
values SETTING
Registering a OFF EDIT

program PROG
N File no. INPUT [ " ][READ][EXEC]
Inputting macro OFF EDIT

variables PROG N File no. INPUT [ " ] O
Program no. [READ][EXEC]

MEMO <START>
PROG
RY
99
Output to FANUC Cassette

Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
[(OPRT)][ " ][PUNCH][EXEC]
SYSTEM
Output of
EDIT
parameter (PA-
RAM)
[ " ][I/O](CANNEL NO) 1 INPUT (DEVICE

Output of PMC SYSTEM
EDIT NAME) [FDCAS] (KIND OF DATA) [PARAM] [WRITE]
parameter
(PMC)
(FILE NO) * 1 INPUT [EXEC]
[(OPRT)][ " ][PUNCH][EXEC]

Output of offset EDIT OFFSET
SETTING
Output of all
EDIT PROG O 9999[ " ][PUNCH][EXEC]
programs
Output of one
EDIT PROG O Program no.[ " ][PUNCH][EXEC]
program
Output of macro [ " ][MACRO][(OPRT)][ " ][PUNCH][EXEC]

EDIT OFFSET
SETTING
variables
Search
Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
Searching a MEMO
program number RY PROG O Program no.[O SRH]
or EDIT
Searching a MEMO
sequence number PROG Program no. search N Sequence number[NSRH]
RY
Searching an
address word Data to be searched[SRH] or[SRH] or
EDIT PROG
(cursor key)
Searching an
Address to be searched [SRH] or[SRH] or
address only EDIT PROG
(Cursor key)
Searching an offset Offset no.[NO.SRH]
number OFFSET
SETTING
Searching a Diagnostic number[NO.SRH]

SYSTEM
diagnostic number
(DGNOS)
Searching a Parameter no.[NO.SRH]
SYSTEM
parameter number

(PA-
RAM)
100
Edit
Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
Display of memory [LIB]
EDIT PROG
capacity used
Deleting all OFF

EDIT PROG O 9999 DELETE
programs
OFF
Deleting a program EDIT PROG O Program no. DELETE
Deleting several N Sequence no. DELETE

OFF EDIT PROG
blocks
(Deleted up to a block with a specified sequence no.)
OFF
Deleting a block EDIT PROG EOB DELETE
OFF
Deleting a word EDIT PROG Searching a word to be deleted DELETE
OFF
Changing a word EDIT PROG Searching a word to be changedNew Data ALTER
OFF Searching a word immediately before a word to be

Inserting a word EDIT PROG
searchedNew Data INSERT
Collation
Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
ON [(OPRT)][ " ][READ][EXEC]
Collating memory EDIT PROG
Playback
Data
Param- Func-
protec-
tion
write=1 button
key
TEACH
IN Jog the machine X , Y or Z INSERT
Input of NC data JOG/ PROG

HAN- NC data INSERT EOB INSERT
DLE
101
Clear
Data
Param- Func-
prote-
ction
write=1 key
key
Memory all clear
M/T : RESET
AND DELETE
On 2path are controlled

At
power Path1 : CAN AND 1
ON
Path2 : CAN AND 2
Loader is controlled : CAN AND 5

Parameter/offset
clear M/T : RESET
At Path1 : RESET
AND 1
f Power
ON Path2 : RESET AND 2
Loader is controlled : RESET AND 5 (Parameter
only)
Clearing a program
M/T : DELETE

At
f Power Path1 : DELETE
AND 1
ON
Path2 : DELETE AND 2
Loader is controlled : RESET AND 5

Program under
edition at power PROG AND RESET
off(PS101)
PMC RAM *
At Main CPU : X AND 0 (O)
Power
ON 5
Loader is controlled : X AND
Additional SRAM
area clear M/T : O (O) AND DELETE
At On 2path are controlled

Power
ON Path1 : O (O) AND 1
Path2 : O (O) AND 2
* PMC ladder program is not cleard in FROM.
102
NOTE
For the 20i, memory all clear operation based on (7) and (9)
is also effective.
Manual operation
KEY PWE Func-
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 tion key
Manual refer-
Turn on Reference point return switch Turn on +X, X, +Z, or Z
ence point JOG
Reference point return switch LED lit.
return
Turn on +X, X, +Z, or Z Use JOG FEEDRATE to set jog feedrate

Jog feed JOG
Press Rapid traverse button, if required.
Incremental Use Move distance selection switch to select move distance Turn on
INC
feed +X, X, +Z, or Z Press Rapid traverse button, if required.
Use Axis selection switch to select axis to be operated Use Handle

Manual
HND magnification selection to select magnification Turn manual pulse
handle feed
generator.
Display
Function KEY PWE Func-
Mode Operation
SW =1 tion key
Amount of
program
EDIT PROG [ DIR ]
memory in
use
Command Command value being executed, and previously specified modal value
value display
[CURRNT]
Command value being executed, and next command value to be

executed
[ NEXT ]
MEM Command value entered from MDI, and previously specified modal
or PROG value
MDI
[ MDI ]
Program in memory being executed
[PRGRM]
Executable blocks in memory and current position
[CHECK]
103

Mode Operation
SW =1 tion key
Current Representation of the position in the workpiece coordinate system

position
display [ ABS ]
Representation of the position in the relative coordinate system

POS
[ REL ]
General position indication
[ ALL ]
Alarm display
MESSAGE [ALARM ] when an alarm condition has occurred.
Alarm history
display MESSAGE [HISTRY]
Screen erase
Press the CAN and function keys simultaneously. The function key
causes redisplay.
Screen
switching
between NC
SHIFT and HELP
and loader
Graphics functions (T series)

KEY PWE Func-
SW =1 tion key
Parameter GRAPH [G.PRM]

setting
Select a graphics drawing screen.
[GRAPH]
Begins and ends drawing.
During automatic operation or manual operation

Tool path
GRAPH
drawing Erase a drawing screen.
[(OPRT)] [ERASE ]
Enlarge graphics.
[ ZOOM ]
NOTE
For the smallsize MDI, read the GRAPH function key in this
CUSTOM
table as the GRAPH function key.
104
Graphics function (M series)

Mode Operation
SW =1 tion key
Parameter
setting
GRAPH [PARAM]
Tool path Select a graphics drawing screen.

drawing
[GRAPH]
GRAPH
Begin and end drawing.
During automatic operation or manual operation
Tool path dia-

gram data Press the GRAPH key several times Display PATH GRAPHIC
setting GRAPH (PARAMETER) screen [PARAM ] Enter numerals using numeric
keys INPUT
Tool path
drawing Press the GRAPH
key several times Display PATH GRAPHIC
(PARAMETER) screen [EXEC] [(OPRT)] [ AUTO ] or [START]
Suspend drawing
[ STOP ]
MEM GRAPH
Execute.
[START]
Suspend
drawing Draw starting at the top of the program.
[REWIND] [START ]
Enlarging
Press the GRAPH key several times Display PATH GRAPHIC
part of the
tool path GRAPH (PARAMETER) screen [SCALE] [(OPRT)][][][][] P c
drawing
or M # [EXEC]
Currenttool
position mark GRAPH
Press the GRAPH key several times Display SOLID GRAPHIC
display
(PARAMETER) screen [ POS ]
Machining
profile Press the GRAPH key several times SOLID GRAPHIC
drawing data GRAPH
(PARAMETER) screen Enter numerals using numeric keys
setting
INPUT
Blank figure
drawing Press the GRAPH key several times SOLID GRAPHIC
(PARAMETER) screen [BLANK ] [(OPRT)] [ ANEW ]

GRAPH
[+ ROT][ ROT][+TILT ][TILT ]
105

Mode Operation
SW =1 tion key
Machining
profile draw- Press the GRAPH key several times SOLID GRAPHIC
ing (PARAMETER) screen [EXEC] [(OPRT)] [ A.ST ] or [ F.ST ]
Suspend drawing
[ STOP ]
MEM GRAPH
Execute.
[ A.ST ] or [ F.ST ]
After drawing
is suspended Display the start of part program.
[REWIND] [ A.ST ] or [ F.ST ]
Redrawing
of SOLID
GRAPHIC Press the GRAPH key several times SOLID GRAPHIC
(PARAME- GRAPH
(PARAMETER) screen [REVIEW] [(OPRT)] [ ANEW ]
TER) in a
different [+ ROT ][ ROT ][+TILT ][TILT ]
orientation
3plane
drawing Press the GRAPH key several times SOLID GRAPHIC
(PARAMETER) screen [ "] [3PLN ] [(OPRT)] [

GRAPH
]
[][][][]
NOTE
For the smallsize MDI, read the GRAPH function key in this
CUSTOM
table as the GRAPH function key.
Help function
KEY PWE Func-
SW =1 tion key
Initial menu
screen dis- HELP HELP
play
Alarm detail
screen dis- HELP [ALARM ] Alarm No. [SELECT]
play
Operation
method
HELP [OPERAT] Operation method item No. [SELECT]
screen dis-
play
Parameter
tableofcon-
HELP [PARAM]
tents screen
display
106
Selfdiagnosis function
KEY PWE Func-
SW =1 tion key
[DGNOS ]
Selfdiagno-
sis screen SYSTEM
1. PAGE page switch keys
display PAGE
2. Diagnosis data No. [NO.SRH]
Boot
KEY PWE Func-
SW =1 tion key
System mon- Pow-

itor screen eron and a soft key at its left
display time
Reading file Place the cursor at 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING on the system monitor
from memory screen [SELECT] Place the cursor at the target file [SELECT]
card [YES]
Listing files in
flash ROM
Place the cursor at 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK on the system monitor
and display-
screen [SELECT] Place the cursor at the target item [SELECT]
ing detail
screen
Deleting file Place the cursor at 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE on the system monitor
from flash screen [SELECT] Place the cursor at the target file [SELECT]
ROM [YES]
Outputting
Place the cursor at 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE on the system monitor
file from flash
screen [SELECT] Place the cursor at the target file [SELECT]
ROM to
[YES]
memory card
Place the cursor at 5. SRAM DATA BACKUP on the system monitor

Transferring
screen [SELECT]
contents be-
Batch output to memory card
tween SRAM
Place the cursor at 1. SRAM BACK UP [SELECT] [YES]
and memory
Batch input from memory card
card in batch
Place the cursor at 2. RESTORE SRAM [SELECT] [YES]
Deleting file Place the cursor at 6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE on the system
from memory monitor screen [SELECT] Place the cursor at the target file
card [SELECT] [YES]
Memory card Place the cursor at 7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT on the system moni-
formatting tor screen [SELECT] [YES]
Exiting sys- Place the cursor at 10. END on the system monitor screen
tem monitor [SELECT] [YES]
Reference
If no soft key is available as with a touch panel, use the numeric keys on
the MDI keypad.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
107
PCODE loader
KEY PWE Func-
SW =1 tion key
Starting Pow-
PCODE eron CAN and PROG
loader time
108
1.13
WARNING SCREEN
DISPLAYED WHEN
AN OPTION IS
CHANGED
D Warning screen This CNC displays a warning screen when the configuration of the
options using the SRAM area is changed. The data for the function
indicated on the screen is cleared the next time the system is turned on.
WARNING
YOU SET THE PARAMETER NO.jjjj#j
THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE CLEARED.
* PART PROGRAM MEMORY
PLEASE PRESS <DELETE> OR <CAN> KEY.

<DELETE> : CLEAR ALL DATA
<CAN> : CANCEL
NOTE
1 Mark* varies with the parameter settings. Two or more
function names may be displayed.
2 For the 20i, <9> based operation rather than <DELETE>
based operation is effective.
109
D Allocation error screen When an option which uses the SRAM area is added, the system software
may require more SRAM than is currently installed in the system. In this
case, an allocation error screen appears the first time the system is turned
on after the addition of the option, thus restoring the state existing before
the addition.
FILE ALLOCATION ERROR
SRAM CAPACITY IS NOT SUFFICIENT.

ADDITIONAL SRAM IS NECESSARY.
PLEASE PRESS <CAN> KEY :

RETURN TO THE STATE BEFORE
OPTION PARAMETER IS CHANGED.
NOTE
When replacing SRAM, perform all memory clear.
( RESET + DELETE
)
For the 20i, all memory clear based on 7 and 9 are

also effective.
110
1.14 System software can be replaced only with compatible system software.
Otherwise, the first time the CNC is turned on after the system software
WARNING SCREEN is replaced, the following screen will be displayed and the system will not
DISPLAYED WHEN be activated:
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL
CHECK ERROR)
BOF101
SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR:

CLEAR ALL SRAM MODULE
NOT READY
In this case, perform memory all clear (by holding down the RESET and
DELETE MDI keys then turning on the power) or reinstall the original system
software.
NOTE
For the 20i, all memory clear based on 7 and 9 are
also effective.
111
1.15 The maintenance information screen is provided to record the history of

maintenance performed by a service person of FANUC or machine tool
MAINTENANCE builder.
INFORMATION The screen has the following features:
SCREEN D MDI alphabetical input is allowed.
D The recording screen can be scrolled in units of lines.
D Edited maintenance information can be read and punched.
D The screen can be saved in flash ROM.
1.15.1
Screen Display and
Operation
D Screen display
1. Press the SYSTEM function key.
2. Press the continuous menu key several times. [MINFO] soft

key appears.
3. Press the [MINFO] soft key. The maintenance information screen
appears.
When selected, the maintenance screen shows the latest information.
The recording screen has an input area of 40 characters by 11 lines.
The status (mode, number of empty character spaces, cursor line, column
number) is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
40 characters
MAINTENANCE INFORM
aaa
bbb
ccc
ddd
11 lines eee
fff
...
nnn
|OVER|EDIT|spaces:2078 33:1
112
Status display
OVER/INSERT : OVER : Overwrite mode ; INSERT: Insert
mode
EDIT/VIEW : EDIT : Editing allowed ; VIEW : Editing inhi
bited
Number of empty character spaces
Current cursor line
Current cursor column
D Screen operation The maintenance information screen has view mode and edit mode, which
are selected by pressing the [END] or [EDIT] soft key.
Initially, view mode is selected. To start editing, select edit mode by
pressing the [(OPRT)] and [EDIT] keys. When the editing is completed,
press the [END] key. Then, select [STORE] or [IGNORE]. Unless
[STORE] is selected, the edited data will be lost at next powerup.
To scroll the screen showing the recorded information, press a cursor key
or page key on the MDI panel.
The following keys are used for editing (character input) and viewing:
Operation table
Mode Key Description
View Soft keys Allows editing.
[EDIT] Displays the beginning or the end.
[JUMP]
Cursor key Scrolls the screen up or down.
Page key Scrolls the screen up or down in units of whole screens.
Edit Soft keys
[END] Ends editing. Select whether to store the edited data.
[ALLDEL] Clears all maintenance information. (This key is enabled when the MDC bit (bit 3 of parameter 3118) is
set to 1.)
[I/O] Reads or punches the maintenance information.
[JUMP] Moves the cursor to the beginning or end.

Cursor key Moves the cursor position up or down.
Page key Scrolls the screen up or down in units of whole screens.
Alphanumeric/spe- Allows alphabetical, numeric, or special character input.
cial character keys
key Selects either insert mode or overwrite mode.

INSERT
key Deletes a single character.

DELETE
key Deletes a single character before the cursor position.

CAN
key Starts a new line.

INPUT
Operation of the soft keys
113
(1) View mode
Edit Jump
(2) (5)
(2) Edit mode
END I/O ALLDEL Jump
(3) (4) (6) (5)
(3) Edit saving

MAINTE-
NANCE IGNORE CANCEL
(1) (1)
(2)
(4) I/O
READ PUNCH CANCEL
(6) (6) (2)
(5) Jump
BEGIN-
END CANCEL
ING
(1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2)
(6) Execution
EXEC CANCEL
(2) (2)
114
1.15.2 The maintenance information can be read and punched.

Maintenance When the maintenance information is input from or output to a memory
card, a file name MAINTINF.DAT is used.
Information
(1) Format
Input/Output
%%
Data
(2) Reading
When a MAINTINF.DAT file generated in the format shown above is
read, the data is added at the end of the existing maintenance
information.
NOTE
1 A TAB code is converted to one to four blanks, depending
on the input position.
2 80h to 90h and E0h to EBh are assumed as prefix codes of
doublebyte characters. Reading these codes alone is
inhibited.
3 Control codes (00H to 1FH) except TAB and LF are
discarded in reading.
4 %% cannot be input.
(3) Punching
All maintenance information is output in the format shown above.
115
1.16 When VGA screen display is selected (NVG bit (bit 7 of parameter 3119)
is set to 0), the color scheme of the VGA screen can be set on the color
COLOR SETTING setting screen.
SCREEN
1.16.1 1. Press the SYSTEM function key.

Screen Display
2. Press the continuous menu key several times. The [COLOR]
soft key appears.
3. Press the [COLOR] soft key. The color setting screen appears.
COLORING O0000N00000
[ 1 ]J A LARM 8 J SELECT WINDOW BAR

2 J TITLE SOFT KEY 1 9 J NONE
3 J INPUT KEY O/N NO. 10 J TITLE BAR INPUT BAR
STATUS
4 J CURSOR 11 J WINDOW BACKGROUND
5 J RESTART NO. 12 J LIGHT
ABSOLUTE ORDER
6 J SUB TITLE SOFT KEY 2 13 J ALTER POSSIBLE DATA
7 J DATA TIME 14 J SHADOW
15 V BACKGROUND
RED 08 GREEN 00 BLUE 00
COLOR SELECT NO. 1(PARAMETER)
[ MEM **** *** *** | *** | 12:34:56 | ]
COLOR MAINTE MAINTE (OPRT)

+
1.16.2
Color Setting
D Changing a color 1. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following operation soft keys appear.
(color palette value)
RED GREEN BLUE BRIGHT DARK +
2. Move the cursor to the color number corresponding to the color palette
value to be changed.
The current color palette values of individual color elements are
displayed.
3. Select a desired color element by pressing the [RED], [GREEN], or
[BLUE] operation soft key.
Two or more color elements can be simultaneously selected.
Each time the [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] operation soft key is
pressed, the selection is made or canceled.
(If the [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] operation soft keys are not
displayed, press the rightmost soft key.)
116
4. Press the [LIGHT] or [DARK] operation soft key to change the

luminance of the selected color element.
D Storing colors A specified color palette value can be stored.
(color palette values)
STORE CALL COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 +
1. Select a desired storage area by pressing the [COLOR1], [COLOR2],

or [COLOR3] operation soft key.
(If the [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] operation soft keys
are not displayed, press the rightmost soft key.)
COLOR1 Standard color data parameters (6561 to 6595)
COLOR2 Internal RAM
COLOR3
2. Press the [STORE] operation soft key. The following operation soft
keys appear.
CAN EXEC +
3. To store the current color palette values in the selected area, press the
[EXEC] operation soft key. To cancel the storage, press the [CAN]
operation soft key or the leftmost key.
D Calling colors
(color palette values)
STORE CALL COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 +
1. Select a color palette storage area by pressing the [COLOR1],

[COLOR2], or [COLOR3] operation soft key.
(If the [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] operation soft keys
are not displayed, press the rightmost soft key.)
2. Press the [CALL] operation soft key. The following operation soft
keys appear.
CAN EXEC +
3. To call the color palette values from the selected area, press the
[EXEC] operation soft key. If no color palette value is stored, this step
cannot be executed.
To stop calling, press the [CAN] operation soft key or the leftmost key.
117
1.16.3
Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3119 NVG
[Data type] Bit

NVG When a color display unit is used, the VGA screen display is:
0 : Selected.
1 : Not selected. (Conventional display)
6561 Standard color data of graphic color 1
6581 Standard color data of text color 1
118
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] Sixdigit number rrggbb (rr: Red component value, gg: Green component
value, bb: Blue component value)
When five digits or less are specified, the missing highorder digits are
assumed as zeros.
[Valid data range] Each color component value: 00 to 15 (Equivalent to the color level on
the color setting screen)
When 16 or a higher value is specified, 15 is assumed.
(Example) When specifying a color having red component value 1, green

component value 2, and blue component value 3, set the
parameter value as 10203.
1.16.4 (1) At powerup, the color scheme of the screen is determined by the
setting in the COLOR1 area (parameters). If no data is stored in the
Notes
COLOR1 area, the last color scheme before powerdown is applied.
(2) The standard color data specified in parameters must not be changed
by direct MDI key input. When changing the parameter data, set and
store the new data on the color setting screen.
(3) When a wrong value is specified in a standard color data parameter,
the screen may not be displayed. If this occurs, turn the power on
again, while pressing the DELETE and RESET keys. This clears the whole
stored color scheme and restores the FANUC standard color scheme
instead.
Be very careful when performing this operation, as all memory
contents such as parameters and programs are lost.
119
1.17 Depending on the eye level and the viewing angle of the operator, the LCD
may be hard to read. This problem can be solved by adjusting the contrast.
CONTRAST The contrast of a monochrome LCD can be adjusted.
ADJUSTMENT
1. Press the OFFSET
SETTING function key.
2. Press the [SETTING] chapter selection soft key.

The LCD contrast item is displayed on the setting (handy) screen.
SETTING(HANDY)
PARAMETER WRITE = 1(0:DISABLE 1: ENABLE)
TV CHECK = 0(0:OFF 1:ON)
PUNCH CODE = 0(0:EIA 1:ISO)
INPUT UNIT = 0(0:MM 1:INCH)
I/O CHANNEL = 0(03:CHANNEL NO.)
SEQUENCE NO. = 0(0:OFF 1:ON)
TAPE EORMAT = 0(0:NO CNV 1:F15)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0(PROGRAM NO.)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0(SEQUENCE NO.)
[ CONTRAST ]( + = [ ON:1 ] = [ OFF:0 ])

>_
MDI **** *** *** 00:00:00
[NO.SRH] [ ON:1 ] [OFF:0] [+INPUT] [INPUT]
3. Move the cursor to CONTRAST.

4. Adjust the contrast by pressing the operation soft key [ON:1] or
[OFF:0].
120
1.18 When the Power Motion series is used as an additional axis (slave) of the
CNC, the power motion manager allows the slave data to be displayed and
POWER MOTION set by the CNC.
MANAGER The power motion manager enables the following display and setting:
(1) Current position display (absolute/machine coordinates)
(2) Parameter display and setting
(3) Diagnosis display
(4) System configuration screen display
(5) Alarm display
The Power Motion series that can be used as the slave is a amplifier with
I/O Link.
1.18.1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
960 PMN MD2 MD1 SLV
[Data type] Bit

SLV When the power motion manager is selected, the screen shows the data of:
0 : A single slave.
1 : Up to four slaves by dividing the screen into four segments.
MD1, MD2 The slave parameters are input from and output to the following devices:
MD2 MD1 I/O device
0 0 Part program storage
0 1 Memory card
The parameters are input or output in the program format, no matter which
I/O device is selected.
PMN The power motion manager function is:
0 : Enabled.
1 : Disabled. (Communication with the slave is not performed.)
1.18.2 1. Press the SYSTEM

function key.
Screen Display
2. Press the continuous menu key several times. The [PMM] soft
key appears.
3. Press the [PMM] soft key. The system configuration screen, which is
the initial screen of the power motion manager, appears. The screen
has the following soft keys (function selection soft keys).
[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM][ MSG ]
The currently active soft key is displayed in reverse video. Pressing a soft
key enables the corresponding function, as indicated below:
121
POS: Current position display

SYSTEM: System information
MSG: Alarm list
To select another function after one of the functions listed above is

selected, press the return menu key several times until the soft keys
are displayed as shown above. Then, select the desired function.
4. To terminate the power motion manager, repeatedly press the return
menu key until the function selection keys are displayed as
shown above. Then, press the return menu key once more. The soft
keys of the CNC system appear, and the power motion manager
terminates. The system configuration screen of this function is
displayed as the termination screen.
Alternative termination method is to select another function while this
function is enabled. To do this, press an MDI function key ( POS , PROG ,
MESSAGE , etc.).
NOTE
After another screen is displayed by pressing a function key,
pressing the function key, restores the initial status
SYSTEM
of this function. That is, the soft keys shown above are
restored. The data that was being input is canceled.
D System configuration This screen displays the system software information of the slave. The
screen screen is displayed first when the power motion manager function is
selected. This screen is automatically displayed also at the termination
of the function.
1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft
keys are displayed together with the screen displayed when SYSTEM
was last selected. The currently active soft key is displayed in reverse
video.
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][ ]
2. Press the [SYSTEM] soft key again. The system configuration screen
appears. While this screen is displayed, the [SYSTEM] soft key is left
displayed in reverse video.
122
POWER MOTION MANAGER

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.GROUP0 /
SYSTEM <SERIES/VERSION> 88A1 01
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ ]
Sample screen: Series and edition of the servo unit series system list
D Parameter screen The parameters necessary for the functions of the slave must be specified
in advance.
keys appear.
2. Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears.

PARAMETER
1.GROUP0 /
0000 00001000 0010 11110000
0001 00010101 0011 01010000
0002 11111011 0012 00000000
0003 00000000 0013 00000000
0004 00000000 0014 10110001
0005 10100001 0015 00000000
0006 00000000 0016 00000000
0007 10000000 0017 10000010
0008 00000000 0018 00000000
0009 00000000 0019 00000000
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ ]
The screen displays just the bit and decimal data. For details of the
parameters, refer to the connection manual of the corresponding Power
Motion unit.
123
D Searching for a parameter
A search can be made for the parameter to be displayed.
1. Select the active slave.

2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear.
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Enter a desired number in the keyin field by using MDI numeric keys.
Then, press the [NO.SRC] soft key. The search starts.
D Setting a parameter
A parameter of a slave Power Motion unit can be directly set from the
CNC.

2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Move the cursor to the parameter to be set.

4. Enter desired data in the keyin buffer by using MDI numeric keys.
Then, press the [INPUT] soft key. Alternatively, press the MDI
INPUT key.
D Diagnosis screen This screen shows the current status of the slave.
keys appear:
2. Press the [DGNOS] soft key. The diagnosis screen appears. The
displayed data is basically the same as the data displayed on the
parameter screen.
For details of the diagnosis information, refer to the connection
manual of the corresponding Power Motion unit.
D Current position display The screen shows the current position on the workpiece coordinate
system or machine coordinate system.
1. Press the [POS] function selection soft key. The following soft keys
appear:
[ WORK ][ ][MACHIN][ ][ ]
2. To see the absolute coordinate screen, press the [WORK] soft key. To
see the machine coordinate screen, press the [MACHIN] soft key.
124

ACTUAL POSITION (MACHINE)
1.GROUP0 /
1 1267900
F 3500
[ WORK ][ ][ MACHIN ][ ][ ]
1: Coordinate F: Actual speed
D Alarm screen If an alarm is issued during operation, the group number of the slave
causing the alarm is indicated at the right end of the message field on the
screen. Check the details on the alarm screen. For example, (13) means
that the first and third power motion units are in the alarm state.
1. Press the [MSG] function selection soft key. Just the error code is
displayed on the screen.

ALARM
1.GROUP0 /
442 210 232
[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM ][ MSG ]
Up to forty codes can be displayed on the screen.
For details of the alarm, refer to the connection manual of the

corresponding Power Motion unit.
125
D Operating the active The active slave is subjected to the ZOOM function, which will be
slave described later, and parameter overwrite. The title of the active slave is
displayed in a color different from the display color of the other slave
titles.
The active slave can be selected by pressing the [NEXT] or [BACK]

soft key, which is displayed after the continuous menu key is
pressed several times.
[NEXT]: Displays the screen of the Power Motion unit connected after
the currently active slave. The equipment other than the
Power Motion unit is ignored.
[BACK]: Displays the screen of the Power Motion unit connected
before the currently active slave.
D Singleslave display/ Whether the screen displays the data of just a single unit or of four units
Fourslave display in four segments is specified in the SLV bit (bit 0 of parameter 960).
To switch the fourslave display to the singleslave display, press the

[ZOOM] soft key, which is displayed after the continuous menu key
is pressed several times. The singleslave display shows the data of the
active slave. To switch the singleslave display to the fourslave display
showing the data of four slaves including the active slave, press the
[ZOOM] key.
When five or more slaves are connected, the fourslave display has two
or more pages. To see the slave data that is not displayed on the current
page, press soft key [NEXT].
POWER MOTION MANAGER/ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION O12345678 N12345

1.GROUP0 / O12345678 N12345 2.GROUP1 /
SYSTEM ****## SYSTEM 88A101
3.GROUP2 / 4.GROUP3 /
SYSTEM 88A101 SYSTEM ****##

SERVO ****##
PARAM DGNOS SYSTEM (OPRT)
The figure above shows a sample fourslave display screen on a display

unit with twelve soft keys. A unit with seven soft keys can also display
the fourslave display screen.
126
POWER MOTION MANAGER O12345678 N12345

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.GROUP0 /
SYSTEM <SERIES/VERSION> 88A101
[ POS ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ MSG ]
The figure above shows a sample singleslave display screen on a display

unit with seven soft keys. A unit with twelve soft keys can also display
the singleslave display screen.
D Guidance message While the following soft keys are being displayed, a guidance message
is displayed in the message field.
[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM][ MSG ]
[ WORK ][ ][MACHIN ][ ][ ]
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][(OPRT) ]
When the soft keys are displayed as shown above, SELECT ACTIVE
SLAVE [>] is displayed.
[ NEXT ][ BACK ][ ZOOM ][ ][ ]
When the soft keys are displayed as shown above, SELECT ACTIVE
SLAVE [] [] is displayed.
D Keyin field When the [(OPRT)] soft key is pressed, the message line may turn into a
keyin field as required. The numeric data input by using MDI keys is
displayed after the prompt (>).
On the parameter and diagnosis screens, the keyin field appears when
just a numeric value is input. The soft key [(OPRT)] need not be pressed.
127
1.18.3
Parameter Input/Output
D Saving parameters Parameters can be saved in CNC memory or a memory card as a data file
of program format. Specify the first digit of the registration program
number in parameter 8760. Programs with predetermined numbers are
created for individual slaves. When the parameters are saved in CNC
memory, a program having the specified program number is created.
When the parameters are saved in a memory card, a file is created, to
which the file name consists of the specified program number and an
extension PMM.
Example: When parameter 8760 is set to 8000
The program number for group n is 8000 + n*10.
The group number n is indicated in the title area of each slave.
CAUTION
In case that the parameters are saved in a memory card, If
the specified program number already exists on memory
card, the corresponding program is overwritten with new
data.
Specify a desired input device in the MD1 and MD2 bits (bits 1 and 2 of
parameter 960). Connect a memory card. Alternatively, check the free
area of CNC memory. Then, follow the steps given below:

[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Press the continuous menu key . The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]
4. Press the [READ] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ ][ ][CANCEL ][ EXEC ]
5. Press the [EXEC] soft key.

During input, INPUT blinks in the message field.
128
D Writing parameters The data file of parameters saved in CNC memory or a memory card as
a program is written into the slave determined by the program number.
The program number and memory device are determined as described in
Saving parameters.

[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Press the nextmenu key. The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]
4. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ ][ ][CANCEL ][ EXEC ]
5. Press the [EXEC] soft key.
During output, INPUT blinks in the message field.
The screen cannot be changed to another screen during parameter

input/output.
When the RESET key is pressed, or when an alarm status is detected in

communication, the input/output stops.
1.18.4
Notes
D Connecting an I/O Link When the Power Motion series is used as a slave of an I/O Link, the CNC
assigns I/O addresses. The salve data is input and output in units of 16
bytes. Therefore, 128 input/output points are necessary. Up to eight
slaves can be connected.
The module name is OC021 (16byte input) or OC020 (16byte output).

BASE is always 0, and SLOT is always 1.
D Ignoring the power After the data necessary for each slave connected is set and checked, the
motion manager function communication of the power motion manager (PMM) can be stopped to
send a command from the CNC ladder to the slave.
When the PMN bit (bit 3 of parameter 960) is set to 1, all communication
between CNC and the slave via the I/O Link is open to the ladder.
While the bit is held 1, the screen shows just the title, function name, and
other items that are independent of the communication. The following
message appears to indicate that communication has stopped.
COMMUNICATION PROHIBITED BY P960#3
129
D Data input/output by I/O When the power motion manager is used, the function for data
Link input/output by I/O Link cannot be used.
D Alarm (1) CNC

When a CNC alarm status is detected, the screen is automatically
switched to the CNC alarm screen. Check the details of the alarm. If
necessary, display and select the power motion manager screen again
by pressing function key SYSTEM
.
(2) Slave
A guidance message is usually displayed in the message field. If a
slave alarm is detected, the corresponding slave group number is
displayed at the right end.
Display the alarm screen to check the details.
D Data protection key When the data protection key of the CNC is turned on, parameters cannot
be input to CNC memory.
130
1.19 Using the periodic maintenance screens makes it easy to manage

consumables (such as LCD unit backlight and backup battery) that are to
PERIODIC be replaced periodically.
MAINTENANCE
SCREENS Setting the name and service life of consumables, and the countdown
method to be used for them enables counting of the remaining service time
according to the specified countdown method and displaying of the result.
1.19.1
Overview
D Screen configuration The following periodic maintenance screens are available:

(1) Status screen: Displays item names, remaining service time,
countdown status, and lets you specify item names.
(2) Setting screen: Lets you specify service life, remaining service time,
and count type (countdown method).
(3) Machine system menu screen: Enables registering the names of
consumables used in the machine.
(4) NC system menu screen: Displays the names of registered
consumables used in the NC.
D Procedure To use this function, follow the steps below:
(1) Select a number for registration (using the cursor key on the status
screen).
(2) Specify an item name.
The following two methods are available.
Selecting a name from a menu screen (machine or NC system menu
screen).
Entering a name to the status screen directly from the MDI.
Using the machine system menu screen requires that item names be
registered previously.
(3) Specify the service life, remaining service time, and count type for a
target item.
Once they are specified, the remaining service time can be checked
on the status screen.
1.19.2 1 Press the SYSTEM

function key.
Screen Display and
Setting 2 Press the continuous menu key several times. Soft key
[MAINTE] appears.
3 Press soft key [MAINTE]. A periodic maintenance screen appears.
There are two periodic maintenance screens, status and setting screens.
Either screen can be selected using soft key [CHANGE].
131
1.19.3 Up to 10 consumable items can be registered for management. Their

Status Screen Display remaining service time and count status are displayed on the status screen.
and Setting
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345
(STATUS)
ITEM NAME REMAIN
*01 BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER 0H
@02 BATTERY FOR PULSECODER 5000H
03 FAN MOTOR 10000H
@04 LCD BACK LIGHT 720H
05
06
07
08
09
10
>_
EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:27:05
[ ][ MAINTE ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
[ CHANGE ][ ENTRY ][ CLEAR ][ +INPUT ][ INPUT ]
[ ][ ][ ][ CAN ][ EXEC ]
(1) Item name

The name of an item to be subjected to periodic maintenance is
specified under Item name.
Two methods can be used to specify item names. The first method uses
the menu screen, and the second, the MDI keypad.
(1) Method of using the menu screen
1 Place the cursor on the target item name, and press soft key
[ENTRY]. A menu screen appears. The menu screen is either
the machine or NC system menu screen.
2 Press soft key [MACHIN] or [NC]. A machine system menu
appears. It holds the names of consumables typical to the
machine system or NC system.
3 Place the cursor on a registered item name, and press soft key
[SELECT], then soft key [EXEC]. The status screen appears
again, enabling the selected item to be set up.
4 Press soft key [CAN]. The previous soft key displays appear
again.
5 Press soft key [MAINTE]. The status screen appears again.
Using the machine system menu screen requires that item names
be registered on the screen previously.
This can be done using two methods, (a) and (b).
(a) Programbased registration
Executing a program in the following format enables item
names to be registered on the machine system menu screen.
132
Format
G10 L61 Px [n]

x Registration number
n Item name
[Alphanumeric characters*twobyte
characters*alphanumeric characters]
(b) MDI keypadbased registration

An item name can be registered on the machine system menu
screen by first entering it in the following format, then pressing
soft key [INPUT] (or INPUT function key).
Pressing soft key [+INPUT] adds the item name to the list of
previously registered item names.
Format
Alphanumeric characters*twobyte characters*alphanumeric characters
The twobyte characters shall comply with the FANUC code.

(See Section 1.19.6.)
When entering a twobyte character, sandwich it with an *
pair.
The item name can consist of up to 24 alphanumeric characters
(if no twobyte character is included) or 12 twobyte characters
(if no alphanumeric character is included).
Example) To register LCD backlight, enter:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE_
NOTE
1 * cannot be used in item names, because it is used as
control code. [, ], (, or ) also cannot be used in item
names.
2 When both alphanumeric and twobyte characters are
used in an item name to be registered, the warning
message DATA IS OUT OF RANGE may appear even if
the maximum allowable number of characters has not been
exceeded.
3 If a blank item name is selected from the machine system
screen, the warning message EDIT REJECTED appears.
If a blank item name is selected from the NC system screen,
a blank is set up.
133
To erase the registered data for an item, place the cursor on the
target item name, and press soft key [CLEAR], then soft key
[EXEC].
[Machine system] menu screen

(MACHINE)
ITEM NAME
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
>_
EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:27:05
[ ][ STATUS ][ MACHIN ][ NC ][ (OPRT) ]
[ SELECT ][ ][ CLEAR ][ +INPUT ][ INPUT ]
[ ][ ][ ][ CAN ][ EXEC ]
[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]
[ ][ ][ ][ CAN ][ EXEC ]
134
[NC system] menu screen

(NC)
ITEM NAME
01 BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER
02 BATTERY FOR PULSECODER
03 FAN MOTOR
04 LCD BACK LIGHT
05
06
07
08
09
10
>_
EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:27:05
[ ][ STATUS ][ MACHIN ][ NC ][ (OPRT) ]
[ SELECT ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
[ ][ ][ ][ CAN ][ EXEC ]
NOTE
On the NC system screen, no item name can be registered,
erased, input, or output.
(2) MDI keypadbased setting

An item name can be registered on the status screen by first entering
it in the following format using keys, then pressing soft key
[INPUT] (or the INPUT key).
Pressing soft key [+INPUT] adds the item name to the list of
previously registered item names.
Format
Alphanumeric characters*twobyte characters*alphanumeric characters
The twobyte characters shall comply with the FANUC code. (See
Section 1.19.6.)
When entering a twobyte character using keys, sandwich it with
an * pair.
The item name can consist of up to 24 alphanumeric characters (if
no twobyte character is included) or 12 twobyte characters (if no
alphanumeric character is included).
Example) To register LCD backlight, enter:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE_
135
NOTE
1 * cannot be used in item names, because it is used as
control code. [, ], (, or ) also cannot be used in item
names.
2 When both alphanumeric and twobyte characters are
used in an item name to be registered, the warning
message DATA IS OUT OF RANGE may appear even if
the maximum allowable number of characters has not been
exceeded.
To erase the registered data for an item, place the cursor on the
target item name, press soft key [CLEAR], then [EXEC].
When an item name is deleted, the related service life, remaining
service time, and count type are also deleted.
(2) Remaining service time
The remaining service time of an item (the time allowed before the
item is replaced) is obtained by countdown and displayed under
Remaining service time. When the remaining service time
decreases to a specified percentage (specified in parameter No. 8911)
of the service life or lower, it is displayed in red.
Countdown continues even after the service life has expired.
NOTE
Setting is impossible on the status screen.
It should be done on the setting screen.
(3) Count status

The count status is displayed at the left of the corresponding item
number, as listed below:
Display Count status
Blank Count suspended
@ Count under way
* The service life has expired.
136
1.19.4 The setting screen lets you specify the service life, the remaining service
Setting Screen Display time, and count type for a registered item name.
It also displays the same count status information as displayed on the
and Setting status screen.

(SETTING)
LIFE REMAIN COUNT TYPE
*01 10000H 0H ALL TIME
@02 20000H 5000H LIV TIME
03 32767H 10000H
@04 1500H 720H RUN TIME
05
06
07
08
09
10
>_
EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:27:05
[ CHANGE ][ TYPE ][ CLEAR ][ +INPUT ][ INPUT ]
[ EFFECT ][ ALL ][ LIV ][ RUN ][ CUT ]
[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]
(1) Service life

The service life of a consumable item is to be specified under Service
life.
First place the cursor on the service life of a target registration number,
enter a desired service life value using numeric keys, then press soft
key [INPUT] (or the INPUT key). The specified service life is set up,
and the same value is set up also under Remaining service time.
In addition, the count type for the item changes to:
Pressing soft key [+INPUT] adds the newly specified service life value
to the previously specified life value. The added service life value is
reflected to the remaining service time.
The valid data range for the service life is: 0 to 65535 (hours)
NOTE
1 An attempt to set up the service life for a nonregistered
item results in the warning message EDIT REJECTED.
2 An attempt to enter a value that is out of the valid data range
results in the warning message DATA IS OUT OF RANGE.
3 An attempt to enter a value that would make the service life
or remaining service time 0 or lower, it is clamped at 0.
4 Pressing soft keys [CLEAR] and [TYPE] results in the
warning message EDIT REJECTED.
137
(2) Remaining service time

The remaining service time of an item (the time allowed before the
item is replaced) is determined by countdown and displayed under
Remaining service time. When the remaining service time
decreases to a specified percentage (specified in parameter No. 8911)
of the service life or lower, it is displayed in red.
Countdown continues even after the service life has expired.
First place the cursor on the remaining service time of a target
registration number, enter a desired remaining service time value
using numeric keys, then press soft key [INPUT] (or the INPUT key).
Pressing soft key [+INPUT] adds the newly specified remaining
service time to the previously specified remaining service time.
The valid data range for the remaining service time is: 0 to (service
life)
After soft key [CLEAR] is pressed, pressing soft key [EXEC] sets the
remaining service time with the same value as for the service life.
NOTE
1 An attempt to set up the remaining service time for a non
registered item or an item for which the service life has not
been set up results in the warning message EDIT
REJECTED.
2 An attempt to enter a value that is out of the valid data range
results in the warning message DATA IS OUT OF RANGE.
3 An attempt to enter a value that would make the remaining
service time 0 or lower, it is clamped at 0.
4. Pressing soft key [TYPE] results in the warning message
EDIT REJECTED.
(3) Count type

The type of a selected count method is specified under Count type.
After the cursor is placed on the count type of a target registration
number, pressing soft key [TYPE] displays the next count type as a
soft key. Select it and press soft key [EXEC].
Soft key Meaning Display
[NO CNT] Not counting (suspended).
[ ALL ] Always count. All times
[PWR ON] Count while the power is supplied. Poweron time
[ RUN ] Count while operation is under way. Operating
[ CUT ] Count while cutting is under way. Cutting
138
NOTE
1 An attempt to set up the count type for a nonregistered
item or an item for which the service life has not been set up
results in the warning message EDIT REJECTED.
2 Soft keys [INPUT] and [+INPUT] are ignored.
3 In leap years, an error of 24 hours occurs in the alltime
count.
4 Pressing soft key [CLEAR] results in the warning message
EDIT REJECTED.
1.19.5 Pressing soft key [PUNCH] enables registered data to be output to an

external unit.
Registered Data
Pressing soft key [READ] enables data to be input from an external unit.
Input/Output These operations can be done on the status, setting, and machine system
menu screens.
EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:27:05
[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]
[ ][ ][ ][ CAN ][ EXEC ]
D Data output After the EDIT mode is selected, pressing soft key [PUNCH] outputs the
registered data in the following format.
Format - Format for output from the status and setting screens
G10 L60 P01 Aa Rr [n] Qq ;

G10 L60 P02 Aa Rr [n] Qq ;
G10 L60 P03 Aa Rr [n] Qq ;
:
Format - Format for output from the machine system menu
G10 L61 P01 [n] ;

G10 L61 P02 [n] ;
G10 L61 P03 [n] ;
:
139
a : Service life
r : Remaining service time
n : Item name
[Alphanumeric characters*twobyte characters * alphanumeric
characters
q : count type
0 = not to count
1 = count at all times
2 = count during poweron time
3 = count during operation
4 = count during cutting
D Data input After the EDIT mode is selected, pressing soft key [READ] causes data
to be registered with item names according to the format in which the data
is input (G10).
Data registration can be done even by executing the format (G10) once
input to the program memory.
This requires a programmable data input option.
NOTE
If the input format (G10) differs from the output format,
registration may fail.
Parameter
8911 Percentage to the service life of each item displayed on the periodic
maintenance screen
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 1%
On the periodic maintenance screens, any remaining service time value
smaller than the specified percentage to the service life is displayed in red
for warning purposes.
140
1.19.6
FANUC TwoByte
Character Code Table
141
142
143
144
145
146
B63005EN/02 2. LCDMOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE
2 LCDMOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE
This chapter describes the printedcircuit board in the i series CNC

control unit of LCDmounted type and the functions of the card PCBs
mounted on the printedcircuit board. It also explains how to replace
consumables.
2.1 STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

2.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
CONNECTORS AND CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
2.6 REPLACING THE MOTHERBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . 264
2.7 MOUNTING AND REPLACING
THE PC CARD (MMX PENTIUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
2.8 MOUNTING AND REPLACING THE CE CARD . 271
2.9 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . 275
2.10 REPLACING BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
2.11 REPLACING FAN MOTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
2.12 REPLACING LCD BACKLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
2.13 HEAT GENERATED IN EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . 291
147
2. LCDMOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B63005EN/02
2.1
STRUCTURE
Control/LCD unit MDI unit
Optical cable Servo motor
Servo amplifier
I/O Link
I/O module, I/O unit MODELA
Machine operators panel/

Power magnetic circuit etc.
148
2.2
OVERVIEW OF
HARDWARE
2.2.1
Series 16i/160i/160is
149
Serial communication board Motherboard

Remote buffer/DNC1/DNC2
CPU for CNC control
Power supply
SubCPU board 2axis to 8axis control
Spindle control
SubCPU for 2path control LCD/MDI
2axis to 8axis control I/O link
Spindle interface PMCRB5/RB6
Analog output Analog output/highspeed DI
RS232C x 2
Memory card interface
C board
Personal computer function
C function for PMC (160i/160is)
CAPII board
Graphic conversation function
RISC board (Only M series)

Highprecision contour control function
Basic system
Data server board
Data server function
Loader control board

Loader control function
2axis/4axis control
I/O LinkII board

I/O LinkII interface Option
HSSB interface board

Highspeed serial interface
(160i basic option)
Ethernet board Without slots, or

with 2 slots, or
Ethernet interface with 3 slots, or
with 4 slots
DeviceNet interface board
DeviceNet interface
PROFIBUS board
PROFIBUS function
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted.
However, some option boards cannot fit into the center slot of a unit with 3 option slots or the slot
farthest from the LCD in a unit with 4 option slots (because of their height).
150
2.2.2
Serial communication board Motherboard

Remote buffer/DNC1/DNC2/HDLC
CPU for CNC control
Power supply
SubCPU board 2axis to 8axis control
Spindle control
SubCPU for 2path control LCD/MDI
2axis to 6axis control I/O link
Spindle interface PMCRB5/RB6
Analog output Analog output/highspeed DI
RS232C x 2
C board Memory card interface
Personal computer function
C function for PMC (180i/180is)
CAPII board
Graphic conversation function
RISC board (Only M series)

Basic system
Data server board
Data server function

2axis/4axis control
I/O LinkII board

I/O LinkII interface
Option

(180i basic option)
Ethernet board
Without slots, or
Ethernet interface with 2 slots, or
with 3 slots, or
DeviceNet interface board with 4 slots
DeviceNet interface
PROFIBUS board
PROFIBUS function
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted.
However, some option boards cannot fit into the center slot of a unit with 3 option slots or the slot
farthest from the LCD in a unit with 4 option slots (because of their height).
151
2.2.3
Motherboard
CPU for controlling CNC

Power supply
2axis to 4axis control
Spindle interface
LCD/MDI interface
I/O link
PMCSA1/SA5
Analog output/highspeed DI
RS232C 2
Serial communication board PC functions
(for Series 210i/210is)
PMC C board
C function for PMC
Symbol CAP iT board

Graphic conversation
(for 21iT only) Basic system

2axis/4axis control
I/O LinkII board


Option
(210i basic option)
Ethernet board
Ethernet interface
Unit without option
slots or unit having
DeviceNet interface board two option slots
DeviceNet interface
PROFIBUS board
PROFIBUS function
On a unit with two option slots, two option boards can be mounted.
152
2.2.4
Series 20i
Motherboard

Power supply
Spindle interface
LCD/MDI interface
I/O link
PMCSA1/SA5
Analog output
RS232C 2
Basic system
Serial communication board

Remote buffer
(for Series 20iFA only) Option
Unit without option

slots or unit having
two option slots (for
Series 20iFA only)
153
2.3
TOTAL CONNECTION
DIAGRAMS
154
Motherboard specification
Motherboard
LCD display unit

24VIN(CP1A)
24 VDC power
24VOUT(CP1B) To I/O unit, etc.
Soft key cable MDI UNIT

CK2
MDI(CA55) CK1
R232(JD36A) RS232C I/O unit
R232(JD36B) RS232C I/O unit
{
Touch panel
Analog output for tool drive
AOUT&HDI(JA40)
Highspeed skip input
Distributed I/O Manual pulse generator

board
DC24V CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B Operators
JD1A panel
DC24V CPD1 Distributed I/O

board Power
JD1B magnetics
I/O UNIT
JD1A I/O unit, etc. cabinet
Position coder for

SPDL&POS(JA41) analog spindle
Circuit breaker
AC200V
AC reactor AC200V
MCC Circuit breaker
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 JX1B
Position coder
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A

JA7B SPM JY2
TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B
To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor
TB1 CX2A JX1A

FSSB(COP10A) COP10B TB2 Axis 1 servo motor
SVM
COP10A JF1
TB1 CX2B JX1B
COP10B Axis 2 servo motor

SVM
COP10A

SVM
COP10A

SVM
COP10A
Up to four to eight axes, depending on the model (In this figure, a 1axis amplifier is used.)
Separate detector interface unit 1
DC24V CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

JF102 Linear scale, axis 2
COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4
CNF1 JA4A Battery for absolute scale

(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector interface unit 2 (cannot be used in the 20i/21i/210i)
CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1
SVCHK(CA54) Servo check board
155
The connections shown below are added to a PCequipped version of the 160i/180i/210i.
Motherboard specification: A20B8100014X
Soft key PCdedicated MDI unit with PC

cable MDI unit interface FA full keyboard
or connector unit or
CK2
MDI(CA55) CK2 CNH2
CK1
CK1
(NOTE) CNY2 (NOTE)
HDD(CNH1) Hard disk Hard disk
unit unit
To
CNH1
(NOTE)
PC PC
parallel channel
port 2 R232
(JD9) (JD36F)
PC expansion (NOTE)
(CNY1) Mouse (for development)
RS232C I/O unit
Printer, etc.
KEYBOARD(CD32A) { Full keyboard

(for development)
(NOTE) Mouse (for development)

MOUSE(CD32B) {
PC channel 1
R232(JD33) { Touch panel
RS232C I/O unit
FDDSIGNAL(CD34)
Floppy disk drive
FDDPOWER(CN2) (for development)
NOTE
1 The hard disk unit cables, PC interface connection unit
cable, and FA full keyboard cable in the above diagram are
supplied by FANUC.
2 The units to be connected to the control section or unit must
not generate hazardous voltage even if an abnormality such
as malfunction occurs.
156
The connections shown below are added to a PCequipped version of the 160i/180i/210i.
PCdedicated MDI unit with PC FA full keyboard

MDI unit interface
Soft key cable connector unit
Hard disk Hard disk Hard disk

unit unit unit
NOTE
Signal Signal Signal
HDD power supply NOTE
Power supply Power supply Power supply
(CN2B)
HDD fan (CN39) NOTE Fan
Fan Fan
PC
PC par- channel
allel port 2 R232
(JD9) (JD36F)
NOTE
PC expansion(CNY1)
Mouse
(for development)
RS232C
I/O unit
Printer, etc.
NOTE
Full keyboard
(for development)
NOTE
Mouse (for development)
PC channel 1 RS232C
R232(JD33) I/O unit
Touch panel
Floppy disk drive

(for development)
NOTE
1 The hard disk unit cables, PC interface connection unit cable, and FA full keyboard cable in the
above diagram are supplied by FANUC.
2 The units to be connected to the control section or unit must not generate hazardous voltage
even if an abnormality such as malfunction occurs.
157
The connections shown below are added to a PCequipped version of the 160is/180is/210is.
PCdedicated
MDI unit
Soft key cable
Backup(CN9) Backup unit
Ethernet(CD38) Hub, etc.
PC R232(JD40) RS232C I/O unit
158
When option boards are provided
Serial communication
Option slot
board
Remote buffer board
DNC1 board
DNC2 board
R232-3(JD28A) RS232C I/O unit

(when remote buffer board or DNC2 board is used)
R422-1(JD6A) RS422 I/O unit

(when remote buffer board or DNC1 board is used)
SubCPU board
(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
A-OUT(JA40) Analog output for tool drive
Position coder
SPDL&POS(JA41) {
PSM Position coder
Spindle motor
SPM
Servo card To 2nd spindle
FSSB(COP10A) Subaxis 1
COP10B servo motor
SVM
COP10A
Subaxis 2
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A
COP10B Subaxis 3
SVM servo motor
COP10A
COP10B Subaxis 4
servo motor
SVM
COP10A
Up to 6 or 8axes, depending on the model
SV-CHK(CA54) Servo check board
159

Circuit breaker
Option slot
Loader control board AC200V

AC reactor
AC200V
MCC Circuit breaker
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 CX2B JX1B
TB2 CX2A JX1A

COP10B Loader axis 1
FSSB(COP10A) TB2
SVM servo motor
COP10A JF1
TB1 CX2B JX1B
Loader axis 2
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A
COP10B Loader axis 3

SVM servo motor
COP10A
Loader axis 4
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A
(In this figure, a 1axis amplifier is used.)
SV-CHK(CA54) Loader control servo check board
Distributed I/O
board
DC24V CPD1 JA3
Operators
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B
panel for
JD1A loader
DC24V CPD1 Distributed I/O

Power
JD1B board magnetics
I/O unit, etc.
JD1A cabinet
Data server board

(cannot be used in
21i/210i) The hard disk unit is mounted on the rear
of the MDI unit.
HDD(CNH1) Hard disk unit The cable for the hard disk unit is pro-
vided by FANUC.
10BASE5(CD27) Ethernet
HSSB board
(When an intelligent terminal is con-

HSSB(COP7) PC or intelligent terminal nected using the HSSB interface,
the model name is 160i/180i/210i.)
160

Option slot
I/O link II board
To other equipment
DeviceNet board
To other equipment
PROFIBUS board
PROFIBUS
adapter unit
Master(JN1)
To other
equipment
PROFIBUS
adapter unit
Slave(JN2)
To other
equipment
161
2.4
CONFIGURATION OF
PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD
CONNECTORS
AND CARDS
2.4.1
FS16i/18i/21i/20i
Motherboard
D Specification
Name Specification
Series 16i motherboard A20B81000130
Series 18i motherboard A20B81000135
Series 21i motherboard (PMCSA1) A20B81000137
162
D Connector mounting
location
Inverter PCB or Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear of unit
COP10A
(COP10A is a connector installed on the servo card.)
CA55 JD36A JA40 JA41

CP1A
CP1B
CA54
JD36B JD1A
Motherboard
CN3 CN8B
JNA
MCRD1
Motherboard
CA55 JD36A JA40 JA41 CP1A
CP1B
CA54
JD36B JD1A
163
Connector number Application
COP10A Servo motor (FSSB)
CA55 MDI
CA54 Servo check
JD36A RS232C serial port
JD36B RS232C serial port
JA40 Analog output/highspeed DI
JD1A I/O link
JA41 Serial spindle/position coder
CP1B DC24VOUT
CP1A DC24VIN
JNA Fbus interface
CN8B Video signal interface
MCRD1 PCMCIA interface
164
D Card mounting location
(1) (2) (3)

Axis control card Display control card CPU card
Connector Connector Connector
DIMM DIMM
module module
socket socket
JD36A JA40 JA41

CA55 CA54
JD36B JD1A
Motherboard
No. Name Specification Function Remarks
(1) Axis control card A17B33000100 Axis control 8axes Applicable servo
A17B33000102 software: Series 9090
A17B33000101 6axes
A17B33000103
A20B33000030 4axes
A20B33000032
A20B33000031 2axes
A20B33000033
A17B33000200 8axes Applicable servo

software: Series 90A0
A17B33000201 6axes and 90A3
A20B33000120 4axes
A20B33000121 2axes
A17B33000300 6axes Applicable servo

software: Series 90A7
165
(2) Display A20B33000020 Text display/ graphic 10.4 color

control card A20B33000150 control
A20B33000021 8.4 color

A20B33000151
A20B33000023 9.5 monochrome with graphic

A20B33000153 function
A20B33000024 7.2 monochrome with graphic

A20B33000025 7.2 monochrome without graphic

A20B33000090 9.5 monochrome without graphic

function
(3) CPU card A20B33000050 CNC control 16i/18i
A20B33000170 16i/18i
A20B33000070 21i/20i
166
D DIMM module mounting

location
(1) (2)
FROM module SRAM module
DIMM module socket DIMM module socket

JD36A JA40 JA41
CA55 CA54
JD36B JD1A
Motherboard
(1) FROM module A20B39000010 CNC system Servo 16M

A20B39000070 system
A20B39000011 12M
A20B39000071
A20B39000012 8M
A20B39000072
A20B39000013 6M
A20B39000073
A20B39000014 4M
A20B39000074
A20B39000015 2M
A20B39000075
(2) SRAM module A20B39000020 SRAM for the system 3M
A20B39000060 2M
A20B39000061 1M
A20B39000052 512K
A20B39000053 256K
167

location (continued)
(3)
DRAM module
Connector
DIMM module socket
CPU card
SideB
(3) DRAM module A20B39000040 CNC system RAM 12M
A20B39000041 8M
A20B39000042 4M/2M
A20B39000030 2M
A20B39000130 12M CPU card: For

A20B33000170
A20B39000131 8M
A20B39000132 4M
168
Servo card Display control card CPU card
B63005EN/02
Axis 1/2
D Block diagram
G/A
DSP control VGA
control
Character DIMM module
generator DRAM
Axis 3/4
Axis 5/6
G/A CPU
Axis 7/8 peripherals
G/A graphic Boot
control siftware
169
Local BUS
G/A
PMC control
FBUS FBUS control
(To back panel)
DIMM module
Flash ROM G/A peripheral
control
Power
DIMM module Calendar
SRAM function
Motherboard
3V lithium battery
FSSB MDI interface Serial spindle
(to servo amplifier) Memory card Analog output
interface Highspeed DI
DIMM module or card PCB

2. LCDMOUNTED TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE
D LED indication
Unit rear view
Status (green)
Alarm (red)
170
(1) Changes in status LED (green) indication at poweron time

No. Status LED Status
1 jj Power is not supplied.

jj
2 JJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on; boot

JJ is running.
3 JJ Waiting for each processor ID in the system to be set up.

jJ
4 JJ Each processor ID in the system has been set up.

jj
5 Jj FANUC bus initialized.

JJ
6 Jj PMC initialized.
Jj
7 Jj Information about the hardware configuration of each

jJ printedcircuit board in the system has been set up.
8 jJ PMC ladder initialized.

JJ
9 jJ Waiting for digital servo to be initialized.

Jj
10 jj Initialization completed, and usual operation under way.

jJ
J: On j: Off
(2) Alarm LED (red) indication at system alarm occurrence

If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is defective.
Alarm LED Meaning
SVALM Servo alarm.
SYSEMG Lights when a system alarm occurs.

The hardware has detected a failure in the system.
SYSFAIL Lights when a system alarm occurs.

Used by the software to stop the system.
Lights while boot is under way.
PARITY SRAM parity or ECC alarm.
171
D Cautions for replacing Before starting to replace the motherboard, CPU card, or boot software,
the motherboard, CPU make a backup copy of SRAM data. After replacement, reenter the
card, and boot software SRAM data.
NOTE
For SRAM data in the i series, an ECC check has
superseded a parity check in the following editions of the
motherboard and boot software. If the motherboard, CPU
card, or boot software is replaced with one with a different
SRAM data check method, and an SRAM data mismatch
occurs, a parity alarm or ECC alarm may occur when the
power is switched on, leading to loss of the SRAM data.
This problem does not occur if the previous SRAM data
restored from a backup copy is used after replacement or
if the system is started after all memory clear.
Motherboard supporting the ECC check function

Model Specification General edition
16i/160i A20B81000130 10D and subsequent editions
18i/180i A20B81000135 10D and subsequent editions
21i/210i (PMCSA1) A20B81000137 06B and subsequent editions
21i/210i (PMCSA5) A20B81000136 08D and subsequent editions
20i (PMCSA1) A20B81000139 01A and subsequent editions
20i (PMCSA5) A20B81000138 01A and subsequent editions
Boot software supporting the ECC check function

Series Edition
60M3 07 and subsequent editions
172
2.4.2
PC FunctionEquipped
FS160i/180i/210i
Motherboards
D Specification
Name Specification Remarks
Series 160i mother- A20B81000140 PC card: 486DX4 supported

board
A20B81000142 PC card: Pentium supported
A20B81000460 PC card: MMX Pentium supported

board
A20B81000144 PC card: Pentium supported

board
(PMCSA1) A20B81000149 PC card: Pentium supported

board
(PMCSA5) A20B81000146 PC card: Pentium supported
173
location
Inverter PCB or Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear of unit
COP10A
(COP10A is a connector installed on the servo card.)

JD33
CA55 CN2 CP1A
CD32B CP1B
CD32A
CNY1 CD34
CNH1
JD36B JD1A
Motherboard
Soft key cable
CN3 CN8B
JNA
PCMCIA2
Motherboard

JD33
CA55 CN2 CP1A
CD32B CP1B
CD32A
CNY1 CD34
JD36B JD1A CNH1
174
JD33 RS232C on the PC side
CA55 MDI
CA54 Servo check
JD1A I/O link
CP1B DC24VOUT
CP1A DC24VIN
CNY1 PC expansion
CD34 FDD signal
CNH1 HDD
CN2 FDD power supply
CD32A Full keyboard
CD32B Mouse
JNA Fbus interface
PCMCIA2 PCMCIA interface
175
Printedcircuit board specification: A20B8100046x

Inverter PCB or connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Unit rear view
(Connector COP10A is on the servo card.)
Motherboard
Soft key cable
Motherboard
176
JD33 PC RS232C
CA55 MDI
CA54 Servo check
JD1A I/O link
CP1B DC24VOUT
CP1A DC24VIN
CNY1 PC expansion
CD34 FDD signal
CNH3 HDD
CN2 FDD power supply
CN2B HDD power supply
CD32A Full keyboard
CD32B Mouse
JNA FBUS interface
CN2 PCMCIA interface
CN39 HDD fan
177
(1) (2) (3)

Axis control card Personal computer card CPU card
Connector
Connector Connector
DIMM DIMM
module module
socket socket
JD33 JD36A
CA55
CA54 CD32
Motherboard
(1) Axis control card A17B33000100 Axis control 8axes Applicable servo soft-
A17B33000102 ware: Series 9090
A17B33000101 6axes
A17B33000103
A20B33000030 4axes
A20B33000032
A20B33000031 2axes
A20B33000033
A17B33000200 8axes Applicable servo soft-

ware: Series 90A0 and
A17B33000201 6axes 90A3
A20B33000120 4axes
A20B33000121 2axes

ware: Series 90A7
178
(2) PC card A15L00010052#4A PC function 486DX4
A02B0236C261 Pentium
A02B0207J560#6130 MMX Pentium NOTE

For 10.4 LCD
A02B0207J560#6131 MMX Pentium

For 12.1 LCD
A20B33000070 16i/18i
A20B33000070 21i
NOTE
The PC card (MMX Pentium) has a special structure. See
Section 2.7 for explanations about how to mount and
replace this card.
179

location
(1) (2)
FROM module SRAM module
Connector
Connector Connector
DIMM module
socket
JD33 JD36A DIMM module socket

CA55
CA54 CD32
Motherboard
(1) FROM module A20B39000010 CNC system servo 16M

A20B39000070 system
A20B39000011 12M
A20B39000071
A20B39000012 8M
A20B39000072
A20B39000013 6M
A20B39000073
A20B39000014 4M
A20B39000074
A20B39000015 2M
A20B39000075
(2) SRAM module A20B39000020 SRAM for system use 3M
A20B39000060 2M
A20B39000061 1M
A20B39000052 512K
A20B39000053 256K
180

(3)
DRAM module
Connector
DIMM module
CPU card socket
Side B
(3) DRAM module A20B39000040 CNC system 12M

RAM
A20B39000041 8M
A20B39000042 4M/2M
A20B39000030 2M

A20B33000170
A20B39000131 8M
A20B39000132 4M
181

(4)
DRAM module Heat sink
Connector
Connector
DIMM module
socket
Label
PC card (486DX4) PC card (Pentium)
Side A Side B
(4) DIMM module

Connector FP cable Heat sink DRAM module socket
Remove
heat sink.
PC card
(MMX Pentium)
Side A
(4) DRAM module A76L05000008 8 M (for 486DX4)

(for PC card)
A76L05000009 16 M (for 486DX4)
A76L05000010 16 M (for Pentium)
A76L05000011 32 M (for Pentium/MMX Pentium)
A76L05000012 64 M (for Pentium/MMX Pentium)
182
Servo card PC card CPU card
B63005EN/02
PC function
Axis 1/2
D Block diagram
G/A
DSP control
DIMM module
DRAM DIMM module
DRAM
Axis 3/4
Axis 5/6
DRAM G/A CPU

Axis 7/8 (common peripherals
RAM) Boot
siftware
G/A PC
interface
183
Local BUS
G/A
PMC control
FBUS FBUS control
(To back panel)
DIMM module
control
DIMM module Calendar Power

SRAM function
Motherboard
3V lithium battery Memory card Serial spindle

FSSB interface RS232C Analog output
PC interfaces Highspeed DI
(to servo amplifier) MDI interface

D LED indication
Unit rear view
Status (green) Alarm (red)
Note) LED1 to LED4: NC status

LED5 to LED8: PC status
184
(1) Changes in status LED (NC status, green) indication at poweron time
Status LED
No. Status
(LED1 to 4)
1 jjjj Power is not supplied.
2 JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on; boot

is running.
3 JjJJ Waiting for each processor ID in the system to be set up.
4 jjJJ Each processor ID in the system has been set up.
5 JJjJ FANUC bus initialized.
6 jJjJ PMC initialized.
7 JjjJ Information about the hardware configuration of each

printedcircuit board in the system has been set up.
8 JJJj PMC ladder initialized.
9 jJJj Waiting for digital servo to be initialized.
10 Jjjj Initialization completed, and usual operation under way.
J: On j: Off
(2) Changes in status LED (PC status, green) indication at poweron time
Status LED
No. Status
(LED5 to 8)
2 JJJJ Immediately after poweron.
3 JJJj NCtoPC interface initialization under way.
4 JJjJ Waiting for PC boot to be executed.
5 JJjj NC screen being displayed on the PC.
6 Jjjj Started normally; usual operation under way.
J: On j: Off

Alarm LED Meaning
SVALM Servo alarm.


PARITY1 SRAM parity alarm.
PARITY2 RAM parity alarm common to NC and PC.
185
(4) Status LED (PC, green) indication at error occurrence

Status LED
Meaning
(LED5 to 8)
jJJj A thermal error has been detected. The hard disk is out of a
usable temperature range. When the LEDs light with this pat-
tern, the system will not start. It waits until the hard disk gets
back to within the usable temperature range.
jJjj RAM parity alarm common to NC and PC.
J: On j: Off
(5) The HD LED (green) lights when the hard disk is being accessed.
186
D Cautions for replacing Before starting to replace the motherboard, CPU card, or boot software,
the motherboard, CPU make a backup copy of SRAM data. After replacement, reenter the
card, and boot software SRAM data.
NOTE
For SRAM data in the i series, an ECC check has
superseded a parity check in the following editions of the
motherboard and boot software. If the motherboard, CPU
card, or boot software is replaced with one with a different
SRAM data check method, and a SRAM data mismatch
occurs, a parity alarm or ECC alarm may occur when the
power is switched on, leading to loss of the SRAM data.
This problem does not occur if the previous SRAM data
restored from a backup copy is used after replacement or
if the system is started after all memory clear.
Motherboard supporting the ECC check function

Model Specification General edition
160i A20B81000140 09G and subsequent editions
A20B81000142 03C and subsequent editions
A20B81000460 02B and subsequent editions
180i A20B81000144 03C and subsequent editions
A20B81000145 06D and subsequent editions
210i (PMCSA1) A20B81000148 05C and subsequent editions
210i (PMCSA5) A20B81000146 03C and subsequent editions
A20B81000147 06D and subsequent editions
Boot software supporting the ECC check function

Series Edition
60M3 07 and subsequent editions
187
D Rotary switch setting The poweron start sequence can be modified using the rotary switch on
the motherboard. Usually the rotary switch should be set to the 1
position.
Setting Description
0 Setting for maintenance.

The start menu is displayed. It is possible to start boot and IPL
from the PC.
1 Setting for usual operation.

The start menu is not displayed.
It is impossible to start boot or IPL from the PC.
2 The NC and PC are started independently of each other.

See Appendix, Maintenance of Open CNC (BootUp and IPL) for

detailed descriptions about how to operate boot and IPL when the rotary
switch is set to the 0 position.
Rotary switch location

Rotary switch on A20B8100014x
Unit rear view
Rotary switch
188
Rotary switch on A20B8100046x
Unit rear view
Rotary switch
2.4.3
PC FunctionEquipped Name Specification
FS160is/180is/210is
Series 160is motherboard A20B81000540
Motherboard

(PMCSA1)

(PMCSA5)
189
Inverter PCB or connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Unit rear view
(Connector COP10A is on the servo card)
Motherboard
Soft key cable
Motherboard
190
JD40 PCside RS232C
CA55 MDI
CA54 Servo check
JD1A I/O link
CP1B DC24VOUT
CP1A DC24VIN
CD38 Ethernet (10BASET)
TP1 Touch panel
CN9 Backup unit
JNA FBUS interface
CN2 PCMCIA interface
191
D Card location
(1) (2) (3)

Axis control card CE card CPU card
DIMM
module
socket
DIMM module
socket
Motherboard
No. Item Code Function Remarks
A17B33000101 6axes
A17B33000103
A20B33000030 4axes
A20B33000032
A20B33000031 2axes
A20B33000033

A17B33000201 6axes 90A3
A20B33000120 4axes
A20B33000121 2axes

ware: Series 90A7
(2) CE card A20B33000220 PC function Windows CE

(NOTE)
A20B33000170 16i/18i
A20B33000070 21i
192
NOTE
The CE card holds a card engine and compact flash card.
See Section 2.8 for explanations about how to mount and
replace the CE card.
D Card engine location
Card engine
Holding metal
DIMM socket
CE card
Side A
Name Specification Function Remarks
Card engine A15L00010067#08AE Windows CE system English version
A15L00010067#16AJ Japanese language supported
NOTE
The card engine and CE card are linked also with an FP
cable.
193
D Compact flash card

location
Compact flash card
Connector
Holding metal
Compact flash
CE card
card socket
Side B
Name Specification Function Remarks
Compact flash card A87L00010173#016MB Application 16MB
A87L00010173#032MB 32MB
A87L00010173#048MB 48MB
194
D DIMM module location
(1)
FROM module
Connec-
Connector Connector
DIMM module tor
socket
DIMM module
socket
(2) Motherboard
SRAM module
(1) FROM module A20B39000010 CNC system servo system 16M

A20B39000070
A20B39000011 12M
A20B39000071
A20B39000012 8M
A20B39000072
A20B39000013 6M
A20B39000073
A20B39000014 4M
A20B39000074
A20B39000015 2M
A20B39000075
(2) SRAM module A20B39000020 SRAM for system use 3M
A20B39000060 2M
A20B39000061 1M
A20B39000052 512K
A20B39000053 256K
195
D DIMM module location

(continued)
(3)
DRAM module
Connector
CPU card DIMM module

Side B socket
A20B39000041 8M
A20B39000042 4M/2M
A20B39000030 2M

A20B33000170
A20B39000131 8M
A20B39000132 4M
196
Servo card CE card CPU card
B63005EN/02
Card engine
Axis 1/2
D Block diagram
G/A
DSP control
Compact
flash card DIMM module
DRAM
Axis 3/4
Axis 5/6
DRAM
(common G/A CPU
Axis 7/8 RAM) peripheral
Boot
software
G/A PC
interface
197
G/A
Local BUS
FBUS PMC control
(to backpanel) FBUS control
DIMM module G/A
(FLASH ROM) peripheral
control
DIMM moudle Calendar Power

SRAM function
Motherboard
3V lithium battery Backup unit Memory card Serial spindle

FSSB interface Analog output
RS232C Highspeed DI
(to servo amplifier) MDI interface
Ethernal

D LED indication
Unit rear view
Status (green)
Note) LED1 to LED4: NC status

LED5 to LED8: PC status
198
(1) Changes in status LED (NC status, green) indication at poweron time
Status LED
No. Status
(LED1 to 4)
2 JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on; boot

is running.
3 JjJJ Waiting for each processor ID in the system to be set up.
4 jjJJ Each processor ID in the system has been set up.
5 JJjJ FANUC bus initialized.
6 jJjJ PMC initialized.
7 JjjJ Information about the hardware configuration of each

printedcircuit board in the system has been set up.
8 JJJj PMC ladder initialized.
J: On j: Off
(2) Changes in status LED (PC status, green) indication at poweron time
Status LED
No. Status
(LED5 to 8)
2 JJJJ Immediately after poweron.
3 JJJj NCtoPC interface initialization under way.
5 JJjj NC screen being displayed on the PC.
6 Jjjj Started normally; usual operation under way.
J: On j: Off
199

Alarm LED Meaning
SVALM Servo alarm.


PARITY1 SRAM parity alarm.
PARITY2 RAM parity alarm common to NC and PC.
(4) Status LED (PC, green) indication at error occurrence

Status LED
Meaning
(LED5 to 8)
jJjj RAM parity alarm common to NC and PC.
J: On j: Off
(5) PC POWER (green LED) indicates that the CE card is supplied with
power.
200
D Rotary switch setting The poweron start sequence can be modified using the rotary switch on
the motherboard. Usually the rotary switch should be set to the 1
position.
Setting Description

from the PC.



Unit rear view
Rotary switch
201
2.4.4
Inverter PCBs and
Connector Units
Name Specification
Inverter 10.4 color: For noslot and 2slot types A20B20020500
8.4 color: For noslot and 2slot types A20B20020501
10.4 color: For 3slot and 4slot types A20B81000200
8.4 color: For 3slot and 4slot types A20B81000201
7.2 and 9.5 monochrome: For noslot and A20B20020480

2slot types
7.2 and 9.5 monochrome: For 3slot and A20B20020550

4slot types
For monochrome LCD (connector unit type) A20B80010910
For 10.4 color LCD (connector unit type) A20B80010920
For 8.4 color LCD (connector unit type) A20B80010921
For highintensity 8.4 color LCD (connector A20B80010922

unit type)
For 12.1 color LCD A20B20020890
Connector For unit with no option slot A15L00010060#B

unit
For unit with two option slots A15L00010060#A
For unit with three or four option slots A15L00010060#C
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with selftapping
screws.
202
D Connector mounting 1) For 3 or 4 slots

location
Inverter P.C.B
CP8
Fan motor Fan motor
CN39A CN39B CN39C CN39D
Rear of unit
2) For without slot or 2 slots
Inverter P.C.B
CP8
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
CN39A CN39B
Rear of unit
Motherboard
203
D Connector mounting (3) Connector unit type with 3 or 4 slots

Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Rear of unit
(4) Connector unit type with 2 slots
Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Rear of unit
(5) Connector unit type with no slot
Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear of unit
204
D Connector location (1) Inverter PCB for 3slot and 4slot types (except for 12.1 LCD)
(printedcircuit board)
CN39A CN39B CN39C CN39D
CP8
CP1
CN3
(2) Inverter PCB for noslot and 2slot types (except for 12.1 LCD)
CN39A CN39B
CP8
CP1
CN3
(3) Inverter PCB for connector unit type (12.1 LCD and connector PCB)
(4) Connector unit for no slot type
205
(5) Connector unit for 2slot type
(6) Connector unit for 3slot and 4slot types
CN39A Power supply for fans
CN39B
CN39C
CN39D
CP8 Battery
CP1 Power supply for LCD backlight
CN3 Power supply for inverter PCB
206
D Connector location for The following diagram applies to a 12.1 LCD type.
12.1 LCD type
Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Inverter cover
Case
Motherboard
The case and inverter cover have been removed in the following figure.
Inverter cable Connector PCB
Connector cable
Motherboard
Inverter PCB
Inverter cable
207
2.4.5
C Board, Serial
Communication Board,
CAPII Board, and
Symbol CAP iT Board
D Specification
Name Specification
PMCRE board A20B81000150
C board Old A20B81000151
New A20B81000261
Serial communication Remote buffer/DNC2 Old A20B81000152

board A
New A20B81000262
Serial communication DNC1 Old A20B81000153

board B
New A20B81000263
CAPII board Old A20B81000154
New A20B81000264
Symbol CAP iT board Old A20B81000154
New A20B81000264
NOTE
The PMCRE board or any oldspecification board
(A20B8100015x) cannot fit into any of the following slots.
Center slot of a unit with 3 option slots
Option slot farthest from the LCD in a unit with 4 option
slots
The newspecification boards (A20B8100026x) can fit
into any option slot.
208
D Connector location (1) PMCRE board
JNA
FBUS backplane connector
CP8B
JD1A2 JD38B JD38A JD6A
(2) C board
JNA
(3) Serial communication board A remote buffer/DNC2
JNA
JD28A JD6A
209
(4) Serial communication board B

DNC1
JNA
JD28A JD6A
(5) CAPII board/Symbol CAP iT board
JNA
CP8B
JD1A2 I/O link
JD6A RS422 serial port
CP8B SRAM backup battery
210
D Card and DIMM module A20B8100015x

locations
(1) (2)
CPU card DRAM module
Connector
DIMM module socket
Note) The DRAM module is mounted on the CPU card.

PMCRE/C board/serial communication board/CAPII board/Symbol CAP iT board
A20B8100026x
(2)
DRAM module
DIMM module socket
Note) The functions equivalent to the CPU card are mounted on the printedcircuit board.
PMCRE/C board/serial communication board/CAPII board/Symbol CAP iT board
(1) CPU card A20B33000070 PMC/communication/conversatio

nal function
(2) DRAM module A20B39000030 DRAM for PMC/communication/ 2M

conversational function
A20B39000042 4M/2M
NOTE
The CPU card is mounted on the A20B8100015x board.
The CPU card need not be mounted on the
A20B8100026x board, because the board contains the
functions equivalent to the CPU card.
211
For the A20B81000026x, the functions equivalent CPU card
to the CPU card and mounted on an option board.
D Block diagram
From lithium
battery
For PMCRE DIMM module

For CAP II and symbol DRAM
CAPiT
G/A
CPU
G/A G/A peripheral

I/O link control PMC control
212
G/A
BUS
conversion
FBUS Local BUS
(to backpanel)
For serial
communication
Communication board
control
Option board
DIMM module or PCB

B63005EN/02
D LED indication
Status
(green)
Alarm
(red)
Alarm LED (red) indication at system alarm occurrence

Alarm: 1 2 3 Cause
jjj Usual operation under way
Jjj Bus error (Lbus alarm)
jJj Bus error or DRAM parity (Lbus EMG)
JJj Reset under way
jjJ I/O link error
JjJ
jJJ SRAM parity
JJJ I/O SRAM parity
J: On j: Off
NOTE
The alarm LED indicates that a reset is under way
immediately after the power is switched on.
213
2.4.6
SubCPU Board
D Specification
Name Specification
SubCPU board A20B80010630
NOTE
The subCPU board cannot fit into any of the following slots.
slots
location
JNA
Fbus backplane connector
CA54 JA41 JA40
CA54 Servo check
JA40 Analog output
214
D Card and DIMM module

locations
(1) (2) (3)

Axis control card CPU card DRAM module
Connector
DIMM module socket
Connector
The DRAM module is mounted on the CPU card.

A17B33000101 6axes
A17B33000103
A20B33000030 4axes
A20B33000032
A20B33000031 2axes
A20B33000032
A17B33000201 6axes
90A3
A20B33000120 4axes
A20B33000121 2axes
ware: Series 90A7
(2) CPU card A20B33000050 CNC control
A20B33000170
A20B39000041 8M
A20B39000042 4M
A20B33000170
A20B39000131 8M
A20B39000132 4M
215
Servo card CPU card D Block diagram
Axis 1/2
G/A
DSP control
DIMM module
DRAM
Axis 3/4
Axis 5/6
G/A
CPU
Axis 7/8 peripheral
216
Local BUS
G/A G/A
FBUS BUS conversion peripheral
(To back panel) control
SubCPU board
FSSB Serial spindle

(to servo amplifier) Analog output

B63005EN/02
D LED indication

Status LED
No. Status
(LED1, 2)
1 jj Power is not supplied.
2 JJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on; the

subCPU has not started.
3 jJ RAM initialization.
4 Jj Waiting for system ID to be set up.
5 jj Waiting for software initialization to be completed No. 1
6 JJ Waiting for software initialization to be completed No. 2
7 jJ Initialization of position coder, digital servo circuit, etc.
8 Jj Initialization completed, and usual operation under way
J: On j: Off

Alarm LED Meaning
ALM1 Bus error on subCPU board.
ALM2 Servo alarm.
ALM3 Bus error on other than subCPU board (FBUS).
217
2.4.7
RISC Board
D Specification
Name Specification
RISC board Old A20B81000170
New A20B81000171
NOTE
The oldspecification RISC board (A20B81000170)
cannot fit into any of the following slots.
slots
The newspecification RISC board (A20B81000171)
can fit into any option slot.
location
JNA
D Card mounting location No card is mounted on the RISC board.
218
D LED indication
Status (green)
Alarm (red)

Status LED
No. Status
(LED4 to LED1)
2 JJJJ State immediately after power is switched on; the RISC

CPU has not started.
3 Jjjj Local DRAM being tested; if an error is detected in the

test, the LEDs keep this indication.
4 jJjj System area in shared DRAM being tested; if an error is

detected in the test, the LEDs keep this indication.
5 jjjJ Waiting for a main CPU request. (1)
6 JjjJ Waiting for a main CPU request. (2)
7 jJjJ Waiting for a main CPU request. (3)
8 jjJJ Waiting for a main CPU request. (4)
J: On j: Off
219
(2) Status LED (green) indication during operation

Status LED
Status
(LED4 to LED1)
Ljjj Waiting for RISC mode
LjLj Waiting for NC statement to be input
jLLj Command being executed in RISC mode
jjjL Reset under way
LLjL Postinterpolation acceleration/deceleration override 0 (waiting

for the override value to be changed)
j: Off L: Blinking
(3) Status LED (green) indication at error occurrence

Status LED
Status
(LED4 to LED1)
Jjjj An error has occurred in a test of local or shared DRAM on the

RISC board.
jJjj A checksum error has occurred in the system area of shared

RAM on the RISC board.
JJjj A synchronization signal from the main CPU cannot be de-

tected.
jjJj An error has occurred in access to the FBUS.
jJJJ System error.
JjJJ Stack overflow.
jJJj The CPU attempted to access an invalid area.
JJJj Cache error.
J: On j: Off
(4) Alarm LED (red) indication

Alarm LED
Status
(LED8 to LED5)
Jjjj A RISC CPU error or local DRAM parity error has occurred.
jJjj The RISC CPU has not started.
jjJj A shared DRAM parity error has occurred.
jjjJ An Lbus error has occurred.
J: On j: Off
220
2.4.8
Data Server Board
D Specification
Name Specification
Data server board A20B81000160

(old specification, hard disk version)
Addon board A20B20020590

(new specification, hard disk version)

(ATA card version)
Addon board A20B20020960
NOTE
The data server board (oldspecification, hard disk version)
cannot fit into any of the following slots.
slots
The data server board (newspecification, hard disk
version) cannot fit into the option slot nearest to the LCD.
The data server board (ATA card version) cannot fit into any
of the following slots.
Option slot nearest to the LCD
slots
221
location
JNA Addon board

CNH1
CD27
CD27 is mounted on the

addon board.
CNH1 IDE hard disk interface
CD27 AUI interface
Data server board (new specification, hard disk version)

JNA
CNH4 IDE hard disk interface
CD38 10BASET Ethernet interface
222
Data server board (ATA card version)

JNA
Addon board
CNH6 is mounted on the addon board.
CNH6 ATA card interface
223
D LED indication Data server board (old specification, hard disk version)
Status (green)
Alarm (red)

Status LED
No. Status
(LED1 to LED4)
2 JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on.
3 jJJJ Hardware check un- Main memory test.

der way.
4 JjJJ Ethernet RAM text.
5 jjJJ CommonRAM test.
6 JJjJ System area initialization.
7 jJjJ FBUS interrupt test 1.
8 JjjJ FBUS interrupt test 2.
9 jjjJ FBUS interrupt test 3.
10 JJJj FBUS interrupt test 4.
11 jJJj Interrupt controller initialization.
12 JjJj Data server soft- BIOS initialization.

ware has started.
13 jjJj Program loading.
14 Jjjj Data server board has started, and usual operation under
way.
J: On j: Off
224
(2) Status LED (green) indication at error occurrence

When an error occurs, the STATUS LEDs repeat LONG and SHORT
patterns. The LONG and SHORT patterns correspond to long and
short lighting intervals, respectively.
Status LED
Status
LONG SHORT
1234 1234
jjjJ jjJj Main memory failure
jjjJ JjJj Ethernet RAM failure
jjjJ jJJj CommonRAM failure.
JjjJ ZZZZ An interrupt made to the CPU is invalid.
jJjJ ZZZZ An interrupt made to the CPU is invalid.
JJjJ ZZZZ An interrupt made to the CPU is invalid.
jJJJ Jjjj A system error has occurred in the data server board.
jjJJ Jjjj An FBUS error has occurred.
jjJJ jJjj A main memory parity error occurred.
jjJJ JJjj An Ethernet RAM parity error has occurred.
jjJJ jjJj A commonRAM parity error has occurred.
J: On j: Off Z: Irrelevant
(3) Alarm LED (red) indication at error occurrence

Alarm LED Meaning
Parity Alarm A parity error has occurred in main memory, Ethernet RAM, or
common RAM.
CPU HALT The CPU has halted or been shut down.
225
Data server board (new specification, hard disk version)

Data server (ATA card version)
JNA
LED detail diagram
226
LED indication transition at poweron time

LED indication
No. Ethernet board status
1234
1 STATUS jjjj Power off.
2 STATUS JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on.
3 STATUS jJJJ MPU initialization completed.
4 STATUS jjJJ Firmware download completed.
5 STATUS jjjJ Control passed to the OS.
6 STATUS JJJj OS PHASE 1
7 STATUS jJJj OS PHASE 2
8 STATUS JjJj OS PHASE 3
9 STATUS jjJj OS PHASE 4
10 STATUS ljjj Start sequence completed.
When the Ethernet board is started normally, the STATUS LEDs light as
shown at No. 10. This condition is preserved unless an abnormal
condition occurs.
Communication status LED indication

No. LED indication Ethernet communication status
1 RXLED J Lights during data reception.
2 TXLED J Lights during data transmission.
3 TPPIL J Lights to indicate normal connection with the hub.
4 COLLED J Lights to indicate a data collision.
NOTE
TPPIL: If this LED is off, communication does not occur.
It is likely that the Ethernet board is not
connected with the hub normally. The LED does
not light also when the power to the hub is off. It
remains to be on when the Ethernet board is
connected to the hub normally.
COLLED: This LED lights frequently if Ethernet
communication traffic (amount of
communication) is heavy or noise in the
surrounding is high.
227
LED indication (STATUS) at error occurrence

The STATUS LEDs repeat LONG and SHORT patterns. The LONG and
SHORT patterns correspond to long and short lighting intervals,
respectively.
LED indication
(STATUS)
LONG SHORT
1234 1234
1 jjjJ Jjjj Reset exception
2 jjjJ jJjj General machine check exception
3 jjjJ JJjj Data Storage
4 jjjJ jjJj Instruction Storage
5 jjjJ jJJj Alignment
6 jjjJ JJJj Program
7 JjjJ jjjj Floating Point Unavailable
8 JjjJ Jjjj Decrementer
9 JjjJ JjJj Trace
10 JjjJ jJJj Floating Point Assist
11 jJjJ jjjj Implementation Dependent Software Emulation
12 jJjJ Jjjj Implementation Dependent Instruction TLB Miss
13 jJjJ jJjj Implementation Dependent Data TLB Miss
14 jJjJ JJjj Implementation Dependent Instruction TLB Error
15 jJjJ jjJj Implementation Dependent Data TLB Error
16 JJjJ jjJj Implementation Dependent Data Breakpoint
17 JJjJ JjJj Implementation Dependent Instruction Breakpoint
18 JJjJ jJJj Implementation Dependent Peripheral Breakpoint
19 JJjJ JJJj Implementation Dependent Non Maskable Development
20 jjJJ Jjjj DRAM Parity Alarm
21 jjJJ jJjj Other NMI
22 jJJJ Jjjj Invalid interrupt
LED indication (ALARM) at error occurrence

No. LED indication Ethernet board status
1 Parity Alarm J A parity error has occurred in main memory.

It is likely that the hardware is defective.
228
2.4.9
Loader Control Board
D Specification
Name Specification
Loader control board A20B81000190
NOTE
The loader control board cannot fit into any of the following
slots.
slots
location
JNA
CA54 JD1A
CA54 Servo check
JD1A I/O link
229
(1) (2)
Axis control card CPU card
JNA Connector
Connector
DIMM module socket

(mounted on the CPU card)
(1) Axis control card A20B33000030 Axis control 4axes

A20B33000032
A20B33000031 2axes
A20B33000033
A20B39000041 8M
A20B39000042 4M
230
Servo card CPU card
B63005EN/02
Axis 1/2
G/A
D Block diagram
DSP control
DIMM module
DRAM
Axis 3/4
G/A
CPU
peripheral
231
Local BUS
G/A
PMC control
FBUS FBUS
(To back panel) conversion
G/A
peripheral
control
From lithium battery

FSSB
(to servo amplifier) I/O Link

D LED indication
Alarm (red) Status (green)

Status LED
No. Status
(LED1 to 4)
2 JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on; the

loader CPU has not started.
3 JJJj RAM initialization
4 JJjJ Waiting for system ID to be set up.
5 JJjj Waiting for software initialization to be completed No. 1
6 JjJJ Waiting for software initialization to be completed No. 2
9 jjjJ Initialization completed, and usual operation under way.
J: On j: Off
232

When any of these alarm LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is
defective.
Alarm LED Meaning
ALM1 SRAM parity alarm.
ALM2 Servo alarm.
ALM3 Lights when a system alarm occurs.

ALM4 Lights when a system alarm occurs.

2.4.10
HSSB Interface Board
D Specification
Name Specification
HSSB interface board Old type A20B80010640
New type A20B80010641
location
JNA
COP7
COP7 Highspeed serial bus interface
D Card mounting location No card is mounted on the HSSB interface board.
233
D LED indication

Status LED
No. Status
(ST4 to 1)
2 JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on.
3 JJJj HSSB board being initialized.
5 JJjj CNC screen being displayed on the PC.
J: On j: Off
(2) Status LED (PC status, green) indication at error occurrence

Status LED
Status
(ST4 to 1)
jJJj A thermal error has occurred at the intelligent terminal.
jJjJ HSSB communication was discontinued.
jJjj Parity alarm in NC/PC common RAM.
jjJJ An HSSB communication error has occurred.
jjJj A battery alarm has occurred at the intelligent terminal.
J: On j: Off
234
(3) Alarm LED (red) indication at error occurrence

Alarm LED Meaning
AL1 HSSB communication was discontinued.
AL2 Parity alarm in NC/PC common RAM.
D Rotary switch (SW1)

setting
Setting Description

from the PC.



235
2.4.11
I/O LinkII Board Name Specification
FANUC I/O LinkII board A20B81000250
D Connector location
JNA
TB1 Terminal board for FANUC I/O LinkII interface
D Card location No card is mounted on the FANUC I/O LinkII board.
D LED indication
LED6 (red) LED1 (green)
LED5 (green) LED2 (green)
236
(1) Hardware control LEDs

LED No. Meaning
LED5 Lights when the CPU on the FANUC I/O LinkII board is run-
ning. When the LED is off, it means that the CPU has been
reset.
LED6 Lights when a DRAM parity error is detected.

(2) Soft control LEDs

Status LED
Meaning
(ST4 to 1)
JJJJ Immediately after power is switched on.
JJjj Communication board being initialized.
ljjj DI/DO data is being transferred normally.
jjjJ A RAM parity error has occurred.

jjJJ An FBUS error has occurred.
jjJj An FBUS system emergency condition has occurred. Alterna-

tively, a communication error (FCS error, command error, frame
length error, response timeout, etc.) has occurred.
ljJj A communication error has occurred, resulting in error log being

stored. Communication with a slave station has restarted.
LED2 goes off when a log command (monitor function) is used.
It goes off also when the communication error log is erased
ljjj using a clear command.
J: On j: Off l: Blinking
237
2.4.12
PROFIBUS Board Name Specification
PROFIBUS board (master function) A20B81000430
Addon board (slave function) A20B21000430
NOTE
The PROFIBUS board cannot fit into any of the following
slots.
slots
JNA
Addon board
JN1 Adapter unit interface for master station
JN1 Adapter unit interface for slave station
D Card location No card is mounted on the PROFIBUS board.
238
D LED indication
JNA
ADDON board
LEDs for slave

function LEDs for master
function
LED1 (green) LEDB (red) LEDB (red)
LED2 (green)
LED1 (green)
(1) LEDs for master function

LED No.
Meaning
(abbreviation)
LED1 (CPU) Lights to indicate the CPU for the master function is running.
LED2 (TOKEN) Lights when the communication LSI (ASPC2) has a token
(right to transmit).
LEDB (PALM) Lights when a memory parity alarm occurs in the master
function circuit.
(2) LEDs for slave function (mounted on the addon board)

LED No.
Meaning
(abbreviation)
LED1 (CPU) Lights to indicate the CPU for the slave function is running.
LED2 (COMM) Lights when PROFIBUS communication starts. It remains to

be on after the PROFIBUS communication is suspended,
however.
LED3 (RUN) Lights to indicate that PROFIBUS communication is being

performed normally.
LEDB (PALM) Lights when a memory parity alarm occurs in the slave function
circuit.
239
2.4.13
Ethernet Board Name Specification
Ethernet board A20B81000270
A20B81000271
NOTE
The Ethernet board cannot fit into the option slot nearest to
the LCD.
JNA
D Card location No card is mounted on the Ethernet board.
240
D LED indication
JNA
Detailed LED diagram
241
LED indication transition at poweron time

LED indication
1234
1 STATUS jjjj Power off
2 STATUS JJJJ Initial status immediately after power is switched on.
3 STATUS jJJJ MPU initialization completed.
4 STATUS jjJJ Firmware download completed.
5 STATUS jjjJ Control passed to the OS.
6 STATUS JJJj OS PHASE 1
7 STATUS jJJj OS PHASE 2
8 STATUS JjJj OS PHASE 3
9 STATUS jjJj OS PHASE 4
10 STATUS ljjj Start sequence completed.
When the Ethernet board is started normally, the STATUS LEDs light as
shown at No. 10. This condition is preserved unless an abnormal
condition occurs.
Communication status LED indication

No. LED indication Ethernet communication status
1 RXLED J Lights during data reception.
2 TXLED J Lights during data transmission.
3 TPPIL J Lights to indicate a normal connection with the hub.
4 COLLED J Lights to indicate a data collision.
NOTE
TPPIL: If this LED is off, communication does not occur.
It is likely that the Ethernet board is not
connected with the hub normally. The LED does
not light also when the power to the hub is off. It
remains to be on when the Ethernet board is
connected to the hub normally.
COLLED: This LED lights frequently if Ethernet
communication traffic (amount of
communication) is heavy. It also lights frequently
if noise in the surrounding is high.
242
LED indication (STATUS) at error occurrence

The STATUS LEDs repeat LONG and SHORT patterns. The LONG and
SHORT patterns correspond to long and short lighting intervals,
respectively.
LED indication
(STATUS)
LONG SHORT
1234 1234
1 jjjJ Jjjj Reset exception
2 jjjJ jJjj General machine check exception
3 jjjJ JJjj Data Storage
4 jjjJ jjJj Instruction Storage
5 jjjJ jJJj Alignment
6 jjjJ JJJj Program
8 JjjJ Jjjj Decrementer
9 JjjJ JjJj Trace
11 jJjJ jjjj Implementation Dependent Software Emulation
12 jJjJ Jjjj Implementation Dependent Instruction TLB Miss
13 jJjJ jJjj Implementation Dependent Data TLB Miss
14 jJjJ JJjj Implementation Dependent Instruction TLB Error
15 jJjJ jjJj Implementation Dependent Data TLB Error
16 JJjJ jjJj Implementation Dependent Data Breakpoint
17 JJjJ JjJj Implementation Dependent Instruction Breakpoint
18 JJjJ jJJj Implementation Dependent Peripheral Breakpoint
19 JJjJ JJJj Implementation Dependent Non Maskable Development
20 jjJJ Jjjj DRAM Parity Alarm
21 jjJJ jJjj Other NMI
22 jJJJ Jjjj Invalid interrupt
LED indication (ALARM) at error occurrence

No. LED indication Ethernet board status
1 Parity Alarm J A parity error has occurred in main memory.

243
2.4.14
DeviceNet Interface
Board
Name Specification
DeviceNet interface board A20B81000880
NOTE
The DeviceNet board cannot fit into the center option slot of
a unit with 3 option slots
location
JNA
TB1 DeviceNet interface
244
2.5
LIST OF UNITS AND
PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARDS
2.5.1
Basic Unit
Model Name Drawing number Remarks
16i/160i 8.4 color basic unit No slot A02B0236B501

with soft keys (5 + 2)
2 slots A02B0236B502
10.4 highintensity No slot A02B0236B611

color basic unit with
soft keys (10 + 2) 2 slots A02B0236B612

touch panel 2 slots A02B0236B622
7.2 monochrome No slot A02B0236B531

basic unit with soft
keys (5 + 2) 2 slots A02B0236B532

keys (10 + 2) 2 slots A02B0236B542
10.4 color basic unit No slot A02B0236B511

(old type) with soft
keys (10 + 2) 2 slots A02B0236B512

(old type) with touch
panel 2 slots A02B0236B522
245
160i with PC 10.4 highintensity No slot A02B0236B801

functions color basic unit with
PC CPU: MMX Pen-
tium 3 slots A02B0236B803

PC CPU: MMX Pen-

no soft key 2 slots A02B0236B822
PC CPU: MMX Pen-

with soft keys (10 +
2) 2 slots A02B0236B832
PC CPU: MMX Pen-

with touch panel
PC CPU: MMX Pen- 2 slots A02B0236B842
tium

with no soft key
tium

keys (10 + 2) 2 slots A02B0236B552
PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4
246
160i with PC 10.4 color basic unit No slot A02B0236B571

functions (old type) with no soft
key 2 slots A02B0236B572
PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: Pentium

PC CPU: Pentium

PC CPU: Pentium
160is with PC 10.4 highintensity No slot A02B0269B501

247

18i/180i 8.4 color basic unit No slot A02B0238B501




keys (5 + 2) 2 slots A02B0238B532

keys (10 + 2) 2 slots A02B0238B542

keys (10 + 2) 2 slots A02B0238B512

248
180i with PC 10.4 highintensity No slot A02B0238B801

PC CPU: MMX Pen-

PC CPU: MMX Pen-

PC CPU: MMX Pen-

2) 2 slots A02B0238B832
PC CPU: MMX Pen-

with touch panel
tium

with no soft key
tium

keys (10 + 2) 2 slots A02B0238B552
PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4
249
180i with PC 10.4 color basic unit No slot A02B0238B571

key 2 slots A02B0238B572
PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: Pentium

PC CPU: Pentium

PC CPU: Pentium

250

21i/210i 8.4 color basic unit No slot A02B0247B501 PMCSA1

2 slots A02B0247B502 PMCSA1
10.4 highintensity No slot A02B0247B611 PMCSA1

soft keys (10 + 2) 2 slots A02B0247B612 PMCSA1

touch panel 2 slots A02B0247B622 PMCSA1
7.2 monochrome No slot A02B0247B531 PMCSA1

keys (5 + 2) 2 slots A02B0247B532 PMCSA1
9.5 monochrome No slot A02B0247B541 PMCSA1

10.4 color basic unit No slot A02B0247B511 PMCSA1

251
210i with PC 10.4 highintensity No slot A02B0247B801 PMCSA1

PC CPU: MMX Pen-
tium 3 slots A02B0247B805 PMCSA5

PC CPU: MMX Pen-

no soft key 2 slots A02B0247B822 PMCSA1
PC CPU: MMX Pen-

2) 2 slots A02B0247B832 PMCSA1
PC CPU: MMX Pen-

with touch panel
PC CPU: MMX Pen- 2 slots A02B0247B842 PMCSA1
tium

with no soft key
PC CPU: MMX Pen- 2 slots A02B0247B852 PMCSA1
tium

PC CPU: 486DX4

panel 2 slots A02B0247B562 PMCSA1
PC CPU: 486DX4
252
210i with PC 10.4 color basic unit No slot A02B0247B571 PMCSA1

key 2 slots A02B0247B572 PMCSA1
PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: 486DX4

PC CPU: Pentium

PC CPU: Pentium

PC CPU: Pentium
210is with PC 10.4 highintensity No slot A02B0271B501 PMCSA1

253
210is with PC 10.4 highintensity No slot A02B0271B511 PMCSA1

No slot A02B0271B515 PMCSA5
20i 8.4 highintensity No slot A02B0277B501 PMCSA1

No slot A02B0277B505 PMCSA5
16i/160i/18i/ Case with connec- No slot A02B0236D100#0C

180i/21i/210i/ tor unit
20i 2 slots A02B0236D100#2C
3 slots A02B0236D100#3C
4 slots A02B0236D100#4C
160i/180i/ Case with connec- No slot A02B0236D100#0D

210i with PC tor unit
functions 2 slots A02B0236D100#2D
3 slots A02B0236D100#3D
4 slots A02B0236D100#4D
254
2.5.2
MDI Unit Model Name Drawing number Remarks
FS16i/18i/ Standalone type T A02B0236C120#TBR English keys

21i MDI, small keys
160i/180i/ For 8.4/7.2 LCD A02B0236C120#TBS Symbolic keys
210i (horizontal type)
M A02B0236C120#MBR English keys
A02B0236C120#MBS Symbolic keys
Standalone type T A02B0236C121#TBR English keys

MDI, standard
keys A02B0236C121#TBS Symbolic keys
LCD
For 8.4/7.2
(horizontal/vertical M A02B0236C121#MBR English keys
type)

MDI, standard

For 10.4/9.5 LCD
(horizontal type) M A02B0236C125#MBR English keys

MDI, standard

For 10.4/9.5 LCD
(vertical type) M A02B0236C126#MBR English keys
Standalone type T A02B0236C125#TFBR English keys

MDI for CAPII
For 10.4/9.5 LCD A02B0236C125#TFBS Symbolic keys
(horizontal type)
Standalone type T A02B0236C126#TFBR English keys

MDI for CAP II,
standard keys
For 10.4/9.5 LCD A02B0236C126#TFBS Symbolic keys
(vertical type)
20i Standalone type T A02B0236C120#TBR English keys

MDI, smallsize
For 8.4 LCD (hori-
zontal type) F A02B0236C120#MBR English keys
160i/180i/ Standalone type T A02B0236C127#TBR English keys

210i with MDI, standard
PC func- keys A02B0236C127#TBS Symbolic keys
tions For 10.4 LCD
(NOTE 1)
T A02B0236C327#TBR English keys
A02B0236C327#TBS Symbolic keys
255
160i/180i/ M A02B0236C327#MBR English keys

210i

MDI, standard
For 12.1 LCD
Standalone type FA A02B0236C130#EC English keys

full keyboard
For 10.4 LCD (vertical A02B0236C130#JC Japanese
type) (NOTE 2) language keys
A02B0236C131#EC English keys
A02B0236C131#JC Japanese
language keys
Standalone type FA A02B0236C132#EC English keys

full keyboard
For 12.1 LCD (vertical A02B0236C132#JC Japanese
type) language keys
NOTE
1 MDI unit for 10.4 LCD (vertical type): A02B0236
C127#xxx and A02B0236C327#xxx are not compatible
with each other; they differ in the way the hard disk is
mounted. A02B0236C327#xxx must be used in a
combination of the 160i/180i/210i with PC functions and the
MMX Pentium as the PC CPU.
2 FA full keyboard for 10.4 LCD (vertical type): A02B0236
C130#xx and A02B0236C131#xx are not compatible
with each other; they differ in the way the hard disk is
mounted. A02B0236C131#xx must be used in a
combination of the 160i/180i/210i with PC functions and the
MMX Pentium as the PC CPU.
256
2.5.3
Printed Circuit Boards
of the Control Unit
Model Name Drawing number ID Remarks
Master PCB Motherboard Without PC func- A20B81000130 D5 16i

tion
A20B81000135 C5 18i
A20B81000136 D7 21i (PMCSA5)
A20B81000137 D7 21i (PMCSA1)
A20B81000138 D7 21i (PMCSA5)
A20B81000139 D7 21i (PMCSA1)
With PC functions A20B81000140 CC 160i

PC CPU: 486DX4
A20B81000142 CC 160i
PC CPU: Pentium
A20B81000460 CC 160i
PC CPU: MMX Pentium
A20B81000540 54 160is
A20B81000145 EC 180i
PC CPU: 486DX4
A20B81000144 EC 180i
PC CPU: Pentium
A20B81000461 EC 180i
PC CPU: MMX Pentium
A20B81000541 55 180is
A20B81000147 DC 210i (PMCSA5)

PC CPU: 486DX4
A20B81000148 DC 210i (PMCSA1)

PC CPU: 486DX4
A20B81000146 DC 210i (PMCSA5)

PC CPU: Pentium
A20B81000149 DC 210i (PMCSA1)

PC CPU: Pentium
A20B81000462 DC 210i (PMCSA5)

PC CPU: MMX Pentium
A20B81000463 DC 210i (PMCSA1)

PC CPU: MMX Pentium
A20B81000542 56 210is (PMCSA5)
A20B81000543 56 210is (PMCSA1)
257
Card PCB CPU card A20B33000050 01
A20B33000070 09
A20B33000170 11
Display control 10.4 color A20B33000150 0E Graphic (60V2 series)

card
A20B33000020 Graphic (600W series)
8.4 color A20B33000151 0A Graphic (60V2 series)
9.5 monochrome A20B33000153 06 Graphic (60V2 series)
7.2 monochrome A20B33000154 02 Graphic (60V2 series)
7.2 monochrome A20B33000091 03 Characters only
A20B33000025 Characters only
9.5 monochrome A20B33000090 07 Characters only
Axis control Applicable servo A17B33000100 03 8axes

card software: Series
9090 A17B33000102
A17B33000101 02 6axes
A17B33000103
A20B33000030 01 4axes
A20B33000032
A20B33000031 00 2axes
A20B33000033
Applicable servo A17B33000200 07 8axes

software: Series
90A0 and 90A3 A17B33000201 06 6axes
A20B33000120 05 4axes
A20B33000121 04 4axes
Applicable servo A17B33000300 06 6axes

software: Series
90A7
PC card A15L00010052#4A C9 486DX4
A02B0236C261 C9 Pentium
A02B0207J560#6130 C9 MMX Pentium 10.4 LCD
A02B0207J560#6131 C9 MMX Pentium 12.1 LCD
258
DIMM module DRAM module A20B-3900-0040 87 12M
A20B-3900-0041 86 8M
A20B-3900-0042 85 4M/2M
A20B-3900-0030 82 2M
A20B-3900-0130 A7 12M CPU card: For

A20B33000170
A20B-3900-0131 A6 8M
A20B-3900-0132 A5 4M
SRAM module A20B-3900-0020 25 3M
A20B-3900-0060 04 2M
A20B-3900-0061 03 1M
A20B-3900-0052 02 512K
A20B-3900-0053 01 256K
FROM module A20B-3900-0010 47 16M
A20B-3900-0070 57
A20B-3900-0011 45 12M
A20B-3900-0071 55
A20B-3900-0012 43 8M
A20B-3900-0072 53
A20B-3900-0013 42 6M
A20B-3900-0073 52
A20B-3900-0014 41 4M
A20B-3900-0074 51
A20B-3900-0015 40 2M
A20B-3900-0075 50
DRAM module (for PC card) A76L-0500-0008 8M for 486DX
A76L-0500-0009 16M for 486DX
A76L-0500-0010 16M for Pentium
A76L-0500-0011 32M for Pentium/MMX Pen-

tium
A76L-0500-0012 64M for Pentium/MMX

Pentium
259
Option PCB PMCRE board A20B-8100-0150 1xCD
C board Old A20B-8100-0151 0xCD
New A20B-8100-0261
Serial communication Old A20B-8100-0152 2xCD

board A (remote buffer/
DNC2) New A20B-8100-0262
Serial communication Old A20B-8100-0153 3xCD

board B (DNC1)
New A20B-8100-0263
CAPII board/Symbol Old A20B-8100-0154 4xCD

CAP iT board
New A20B-8100-0264
SubCPU board A20B-8001-0630 0xCE
RISC board Old A20B-8100-0170 0xCF
New A20B-8100-0171
Data server Main board A20B-8100-0160 1xA3 Old specification

board (hard
disk version) Addon board A20B-2002-0590
Data server board (hard disk ver- A20B-8100-0271 3xDB New specification
sion)
Data server Main board A20B-8100-0271 3xDB

board (ATA
card version) Addon board A20B-2002-0960
Loader control board A20B-8100-0190 0xD3
HSSB interface board Old A20B-8001-0640 AxAA
New A20B-8100-0641 ExAA
I/O LinkII board A20B-8100-0250 0x95
PROFIBUS Main board A20B-8100-0430 0xBB

board
Addon board A20B-2100-0430
Ethernet board Old A20B-8100-0270 1xDB
New A20B-8100-0271 3xDB
DeviceNet interface board A20B-8001-0880 1xF3
Backpanel Backpanel A20B-2100-0220 2 slots
A20B-2100-0290 3 slots
A20B-2100-0230 4 slots
260
Distributed I/O Operators panel I/O module A20B-2002-0470 Matrix DI supported

With MPG interface
A20B-2002-0520 Generalpurpose DI input

With MPG interface
A20B-2002-0521 Generalpurpose DI input

Without MPG interface
Connector Basic A20B-2100-0150

panel I/O mod-
ule Expansion A20B-2100-0410 With MPG intersection
A20B-2002-0400 With MPG intersection

Old PCB
A20B-2100-0411 Without MPG interface
A20B-2002-0401 Without MPG interface

Old PCB
A20B-2100-0320 2 A output
A20B-2100-0190 Analog input
Others Inverter For no or 2slot A20B-2002-0500 10.4 color

type
A20B-2002-0501 8.4 color
A20B-2002-0480 Monochrome
3 or 4slot type A20B-8100-0200 10.4 color
A20B-8100-0201 8.4 color
A20B-2002-0550 Monochrome
Inverter (con- For monochrome A20B-8001-0910

nector unit
type) For color A20B-8001-0920 10.4 color
A20B-8001-0921 8.4 color
A20B-8001-0922 8.4 highintensity color
A20B-2002-0890 12.1 color
Operators (64/32) A16B-2200-0661 Sinktype output

panel connec-
tion unit (96/64) A16B-2200-0660 Sinktype output
(64/32) A16B-2202-0731 Sourcetype output
(96/64) A16B-2202-0730 Sourcetype output
Machine operators panel interface A16B-2201-0110

unit
PCB for FS0 type standard machine A20B-8001-0721

operators panel
A20B-8001-0720 Old PCB
A16B-2300-0210 Old PCB
261
Others Loader I/O card Old A20B-2002-0620
New A20B-2100-0280
A20B-2100-0281 Matrix supported
Touch panel control board A20B-8001-0620
PCB for separate detector interface A20B-2100-0270 4 basic axes

unit
A20B-2002-0570 4 additional axes
PCside HSSB board A20B-8001-0583 For channel 1
A20B-8001-0581 For channel 1 (old)
A20B-8001-0582 For channel 2
A20B-8001-0580 For channel 2 (old)
A20B-8100-0100 Old PCB
262
2.5.4
Others Name Drawing number Remarks
Separate detector Four basic axes A02B-0236-C203

interface unit
A02B-0236-C201 Old unit
Four additional A02B-0236-C204

axes
A02B-0236-C202 Old unit
Connector panel Basic module A03B-0815-C001

I/O module
Expansion module A03B-0815-C002 With MPG interface
A03B-0815-C003 Without MPG inter-

face
A03B-0815-C004 DO only
A03B-0815-C005 Analog input
Distributed I/O ma- Small type A02B-0236-C141#xx DI = 24, with MPG

chine operators interface
panel
Standard type A02B-0236-C140#xx DI = 24, with MPG
interface
290 mm wide A02B-0236-C150#xx DI = 24, with MPG

interface
Loader I/O board A02B-0236-C160
A02B-0236-C161 Matrix supported
PROFIBUS adapter unit A02B-0236-C221
Spindle connector adapter A13B-0180-B001
PC interface connector unit A20B-8001-0610
A20B-8001-0970 PC card: MMX

Pentium supported
ISA expansion unit A20B-9002-0210
263
2.6
REPLACING THE
WARNING
MOTHERBOARD Only those personnel who have received approved safety
and maintenance training may perform this replacement
work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the board, be
careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncovered
highvoltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
electric shock hazard.
CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the contents
(such as parameters and programs) of the SRAM memory
of the CNC. Otherwise, the contents of the SRAM memory
may be lost during replacement work.
CAUTION
If the SRAM data check method (parity or ECC check) to be
used after the motherboard is replaced differs from the one
used before replacement, a parity alarm or ECC alarm will
occur when the power is switched on, possibly leading to
loss of the SRAM memory contents. To avoid this problem,
make a backup copy of the SRAM memory before replacing
the motherboard, and restore the SRAM memory contents
using the backup copy after motherboard replacement.
264
D Replacement procedure 1) Unplug the connectors for the fans and memory backup battery from
the top of the CNC unit, then remove the yellow cover.
For the connector unit type basic unit, no connector need be removed.
CAUTION
With a CNC unit that has an indicator for the touch pad, the
connectors CN1 and CD37 connected to the left side of the
unit, as viewed from the rear of the unit, must be unplugged
before removing the yellow cover.
265
2) Unplug the connectors MCRD1 (or PCMCIA2), CN3, and CN8 from
the printed circuit board, then replace the motherboard.
If the an MMX Pentium PC card is mounted on the motherboard, first
remove the card and the mounting studs for the card, then replace the
motherboard.
PCB
CP1 CN3
CN3
CN8
Motherboard
MCRD1
or
PCMCIA2
Flat cable for soft keys
Note) The screws enclosed in dotted boxes are

provided only on the 10.4 LCD unit.
266
2.7
MOUNTING AND
WARNING
REPLACING This replacement task shall be performed by those who
THE PC CARD have been sufficiently trained in maintenance and safety.
(MMX PENTIUM) When opening the cabinet and replacing the card PCB, be
careful not to touch the highvoltage section (marked with
and provided with an electric shock prevention cover).
If you touch the highvoltage section directly (with the
electric shock prevention cover removed), you will get an
electric shock.
CAUTION
Before replacing the PC card, make a backup copy of the
CNC SRAM memory contents (such as parameters and
programs), as the contents may be lost during replacement.
The structure of the PC card (MMX Pentium) differs from that of other
card printedcircuit boards.
The PC card is factoryfastened to the studs on the motherboard using
bolts supplied together with the PC card.
Bolts (4 places)
PC card
Mother-
board
267
Removing procedure 1. Remove the retaining bolts (4 places) from the PC card, and dismount
the PC card from the studs on the motherboard.
2. Hold the PC card at the FP cable connector portions, and pull it out
from the motherboard.
Hold at this potion.
Hold at this potion.
268
3. Remove the retaining bolts from the heat sink, and dismount it.
4. Pull out the PC card from the FP cable.
FP cable
PC card
Note) Do not touch this portion.
269
5. Remove the DRAM module from the PC card. See Section 4.2 for
explanations about how to remove.
DRAM module
PC card
Mounting procedure Reverse steps 1 to 5 of the removing procedure.
FP cable specification FANUC inhouse specification: A66L20500017
270
2.8
MOUNTING AND
WARNING
REPLACING THE CE This replacement task shall be performed by those who
CARD have been sufficiently trained in maintenance and safety.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the card PCB, be
careful not to touch the highvoltage section (marked with
and provided with an electric shock prevention cover).
If you touch the highvoltage section directly (with the
electric shock prevention cover removed), you will get an
electric shock.
CAUTION
Before replacing the CE card, make a backup copy of the
CNC SRAM memory contents (such as parameters and
programs), as the contents may be lost during replacement.
The structure of the CE card differs from that of other card printedcircuit
boards. The CE card holds a card engine and compact flash card. The CE
card is connected to the card engine with not only a connector but also an
FP cable.
Removing procedure 1. Remove the CE card from the motherboard by referencing Section
4.1.
2. The compact flash card is on side B (the side where the connector for
connection with the motherboard is mounted). Remove the holding
metal from the compact flash card to allow the compact flash card to
be removed.
FP cable
CE card
(side B)
Holding metal; it can be

removed by sliding it in
the direction indicated
with .
Compact flash
card
271
3. The card engine is on side A. First remove the holding metal from the
card engine by unlatching (2 places).
CE card
(side A)
Holding Card
metal engine
Holding metal
latch (2 places)
4. Remove the FP cable from connector CN4 on the card engine by

sliding up the brown part on the FP cable connector.
FP cable
Connector CN4
Card engine
272
5. Remove the FP cable from connectors CN12 and CN34 on side A of

the CE card.
Connector CN34
Connector
CN12
CE card
(side A)
6. Remove the FP cable from CN1, CN2, and CN3 on the card engine.
FP cable
Card engine
Connector CN3
Connector CN2
Connector CN1
273
7. Remove the card engine. See Section 4.2 for explanations about how
to remove.
Card engine
CE card
Mounting procedure Reverse steps 1 to 7 of the removing procedure.
FP cable specification FANUC inhouse specification: A66L20500020
274
2.9
REPLACING FUSE
WARNING
ON CONTROL UNIT Before replacing a blown fuse, locate and remove the cause
of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received
approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fuse, be careful
not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked and fitted
with an insulating cover). Touching the uncovered
D Fuse mounting location

of the FS16i/18i/21i/20i
Rear of unit
CP1A
CP1B
FUSE
Fuse
275

of the FS160i/180i/210i/
160is/180is/210is with
the PC function
Rear of unit
CP1A
CP1B
FUSE
Fuse
D Ordering codes of fuses

Basic unit Ordering code Rating Parts specification
FS16i/18i/21i A02B0236K100 5A A60L00010290#LM50
FS160i/180i/210i A02B0236K101 7.5A A60L00010046#7.5

FS160is/180is/210is
276
2.10
REPLACING
BATTERY
D Replacement procedure When a lithium battery is used
Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B0200K102
(FANUC specification: A98L00310012)).
1) Turn on the power to the CNC. After about 30 seconds, turn off the
power.
2) Remove the old battery from the top of the CNC control unit.
First, unplug the battery connector, then take the battery out of its
case.
The battery case of a control unit without option slots is located at the
top end of the unit as shown in the figure of the previous page. The
battery case of a control unit with 2 slots or 4 slots is located in the
central area of the top of the unit (between fans).
3) Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector.
Battery case
Connector
Lithium battery
A02B0200K102
WARNING
Using other than the recommended battery may result in the
battery exploding. Replace the battery only with the
specified battery (A02B0200K102).
277
CAUTION
Steps 1) to 3) should be completed within 30 minutes (or
within 5 minutes for the 160i/180i with the PC function). Do
not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer
than the specified period. Otherwise, the contents of
memory may be lost.
If steps 1) to 3) may not be completed within 30 minutes,
save all contents of the CMOS memory to the memory card
beforehand. Thus, if the contents of the CMOS memory are
lost, the contents can be restored easily.
For the method of operation, refer to 4.8 or C.2.2.
When discarding a battery, observe the applicable ordinances or other

rules of your local government. Also, cover the terminals of the battery
with vinyl tape or the like to prevent a shortcircuit.
278
When using commercial

alkaline dry cells (size D)
D Method of connection Power from the external batteries is supplied through the connector to
which the lithium battery is connected.
The lithium battery, provided as standard, can be replaced with external

batteries in the battery case (A02B0236C281) according to the battery
replacement procedure described above.
CAUTION
1 Install the battery case (A02B0236C281) in a location
where the batteries can be replaced even when the power
to the control unit is on.
2 The battery cable connector is attached to the control unit
by means of a simple lock system. To prevent the connector
from being disconnected due to the weight of the cable or
tension within the cable, fix the cable section within 50 cm
of the connector.
279
Replacing 1) Prepare two alkaline dry cells (size D) commercially available.

commercial alkaline dry 2) Turn on the power to the Series 16i/18i/160i/180i.
cells (size D) 3) Remove the battery case cover.
4) Replace the cells, paying careful attention to their orientation.
5) Reinstall the cover onto the battery case.
CAUTION
When replacing the alkaline dry cells while the power is off,
use the same procedure as that for lithium battery
replacement described above.
Alkaline dry cell x 2
Cover
Connection terminal on the rear
Mounting hole x 4
Battery case
280
2.11
REPLACING FAN
WARNING
MOTORS When opening the cabinet and replacing a fan motor, be
Touching the uncovered highvoltage circuits presents an
extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
D Fan ordering information

Ordering information Required quantity
Unit with no option slot A02B-0236-K120 2
Unit with 2 option slots A02B-0236-K121 2
A02B-0236-K122 2
Replacement procedure
D For units with no 1. Before replacing a fan motor, turn off the power to the CNC.
expansion slots and
units with 2 expansion 2. Unplug the connector of a fan motor to be replaced ( (1) of Fig. a).
slots The connector is latched. So, when unplugging the connector, hold
down the latch placed at the lower part of the connector with a
flatblade screwdriver.
3. Detach the latch securing the fan motor, then demount the fan motor
( (2) of Fig. a).
4. Insert a new fan motor into the fan case ( (3) of Fig. a), then reconnect
the connector.
281
Fig. a
(1) Connector
(2) Fan (3) Fan case
Note) Install a fan so that it flows air in the upward

direction. (Face the label upward.)
D For units with 4 1. Before replacing a fan motor, turn off the power to the CNC.
expansion slots
2. Unplug the connector of a fan motor to be replaced ( (1) of Fig. b).
The connector is latched. So, when unplugging the connector, hold
down the latch placed at the lower part of the connector with a
flatblade screwdriver.
3. Detach the latch securing the fan cover ( (3) of Fig. b), then demount
the fan cover from the unit.
4. The fan is secured to the fan cover. Detach the latch, then demount
the fan motor ( (2) of Fig. b).
5. Install a new fan motor onto the fan cover. Then, reinstall the fan
cover onto the unit, and reconnect the connector.
282
Fig. b
(3) Fan cover
(2) Fan
(1) Connector
Note) Install a fan so that it flows air in the up-

ward direction. (Face the label upward.)
283
2.12
REPLACING LCD
WARNING
BACKLIGHT Only those personnel who have received approved safety
and maintenance training may perform this replacement
work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a unit, be careful
not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked and fitted
with an insulating cover).
CAUTION
D Backlight ordering
information
Ordering Individual ordering
Backlight
information information
For 7.2 LCD Made by Hitachi A61L-0001-0142#BL

A02B-0236-K112
For 7.2 LCD Made by Sharp A61L-0001-0142#BLS
For 8.4 LCD A02B-0236-K113 A61L-0001-0162#BL
For highintensity 8.4 LCD (for FS20i) A02B-0236-K119 A61L-0001-0176#BL
For 9.5 LCD A02B-0236-K114 A61L-0001-0154#BL
For 10.4 LCD (old type) A02B-0236-K115 A61L-0001-0163#BL
For highintensity 10.4 LCD A02B-0236-K116 A61L-0001-0168#BL
For 12.1 LCD A02B-0236-K117 A61L-0001-0174#BL
284
D Replacement procedure 1) Detach the escutcheon from the CNC.
Escutcheon
Flat cable for soft keys
2) As shown below, unplug the connectors CP1 and CN8 to detach the
LCD unit from the CNC unit. (For the 12.1 LCD, remove also
CP31.)
LCD unit
CP1
CN8
CN8
285
3)1 For the 8.4 LCD unit (color)

Remove the three screws from the left part on the rear of the LCD unit,
and remove the cover. Then, the backlight is exposed. Replace the
backlight with a new one.
Rear of LCD unit
CN8
Backlight
3)2 For the 10.4 LCD unit (color) (old type)

As shown below, remove the screw, and pull out the case containing
the backlight. Replace the backlight with a new one.
Connector
Rear of LCD unit
PCB CN8
Backlight
286
3)3 For the 7.2 and 9.5 LCD units (monochrome) manufactured by
Hitachi
Remove the three brackets from the left part on the front of the LCD
unit, and remove the cover. Then, the backlight is exposed. Replace
the backlight with a new one.
Connector
Bracket
Display surface of LCD unit
Backlight
3)4 For the 7.2 LCD unit (monochrome) manufactured by Sharp

Remove the three screws from the left part on the front of the LCD
unit, and remove the cover. Then, the backlight is exposed. Replace
the backlight with a new one.
Connector
Display surface of LCD unit
Backlight
287
3)5 For the highintensity 10.4 LCD (color)

As shown below, press the projection to unlatch the backlight case,
and pull out the backlight case, then replace the backlight.
Connector
Projection hole
Projection
LCD unit rear view
Backlight
288
3)6 For the 12.1 LCD (color)

Two backlights are provided on the rear of the LCD unit, the first at
the top and the second at the bottom. To dismount the backlights,
remove two bolts from each backlight and slide it to the left.
Connector
LCD unit rear view
Connector
Backlight (top)
Backlight (bottom)
289
3)7 For the highintensity 8.4 LCD (color)

As shown below, remove two bolts, remove the backlight case by
pulling it down and sliding it slightly to the left, then replace the
backlight.
LCD unit rear view
Bolt
Backlight
4) Upon completion of replacement, reassemble the unit by reversing

the steps 1 through 3 above.
290
2.13
HEAT GENERATED IN Amount of
Unit generated Remarks
EACH UNIT heat
Control unit No option slot 33W (NOTE 1)
2 option slots 37W
3 option slots 39W
4 option slots 40W

with PC func-
tions 2 option slots 52W
PC CPU:
486DX4 3 option slots 53W
4 option slots 54W
Control unit No option slot 54W

with PC func-
PC CPU: Pen-
tium 3 option slots 62W
4 option slots 63W
Control unit No option slot 54W

with PC func-
PC CPU:
MMX Pentium 3 option slots 62W
4 option slots 63W

with PC func-
tions (is) 2 option slots 52W
3 option slots 53W
4 option slots 54W
291
Amount of
Unit generated Remarks
heat
Option boards HSSB board 3W
SubCPU board 13W
Loader control board 10W
PMC C board 5W
Serial communication 6W
board
CAPII board 10W
Symbol CAP iT board 10W
RISC board 9W
Data server board (hard 9W Old board

disk version) Hard disk included
Data server board (ATA 6.3 0.3 W generated in ATA

card version) card included (NOTE 4)
Data server board (hard 19W New board

disk version) Hard disk included
I/O link II board 9W
Ethernet board 6W
DeviceNet interface 4W
board
PROFIBUS board 9W
ISA expansion board (NOTE 3)
PC interface connector unit 0W
292
NOTE
1 The amount of heat generated in the LCD and MDI units is
included, but that in each option board is not.
2 The amount of heat generated in the LCD, MDI units, hard
disk, and floppy disk drives is included, but that in each
board is not.
3 The amount of heat generated in the ISA expansion board
varies from one model to another. Add the amount of heat
generated in the ISA board to be used.
4 The amount of heat generated in the ATA flash card may
vary depending on its memory capacity, changes made to
the card specification, and other factors.
5 When using option boards, keep the total amount of heat
generated in the selected option boards to within the
corresponding value listed in the following table.
Total amount of
Option slot
generated heat
2 slots 26W
3 slots 38W
4 slots 38W
Amount of Remarks
Unit generated
heat
MDI unit 0W
Operators panel I/O module 12W (NOTE 1)
Connector panel I/O module (basic) 8W (NOTE 1)
Connector panel I/O module (expansion) 5W (NOTE 1)
9W Only for unit with four ba-

Separate detector interface unit
sic axes
14W Four basic axes and four

Separate detector interface unit
additional axes (NOTE 2)
NOTE
1 This value applies when 50% of the module inputs are on.
2 The amount of heat generated in the separate detector is
not included.
293
3. STANDALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE B63005EN/02
3 STANDALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE
This chapter describes the printed circuit boards of the CNC control unit
of the standalone type i series and card PCB functions on the printed
circuit boards. The chapter also describes procedures for replacing
consumable items.
3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

3.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
3.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . 300
3.4 CONNECTOR AND CARD
CONFIGURATIONS OF PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
3.5 UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS . . . . . 335
3.6 MOUNTING AND REMOVING
AN OPTION BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
3.7 MOUNTING AND REMOVING
THE BACK PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
3.8 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE
CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
3.9 REPLACING THE BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
3.10 REPLACING A FAN UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
3.11 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE LCD UNIT . . . . 354
3.12 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . 355
3.13 HEAT GENERATION OF THE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . 358
294
B63005EN/02 3. STANDALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE
3.1
HARDWARE
CONFIGURATION
LCD unit MDI unit
Control unit
Servo amplifier module/
Servo motor/
spindle amplifier module
spindle motor
Distributed I/O module, I/O unit MODELA, etc.
I/O Link
Machine operators panel, power

magnetic circuit, etc.
295
3.2
HARDWARE
OVERVIEW
3.2.1
Series 16i/160i
296
SubCPU board(*2) Main CPU board

SubCPU for twopath control
2axis to 8axis control CPU for controlling CNC
Spindle interface Power
Analog output 2axis to 8axis control
Spindle interface
I/O Link
RISC board (M series only)(*1) PMCSB5/SB6
RS232C x 2
Data server board(*1) Display interface
Data server function (ATA card)
RISC + data server board (M series only)(*1) Mounted in slot 1
Highprecision contour control function Basic system

Option
Serial communication board(*3)

PMC C board(*3)
C function for PMC
CAPII board (T series only)(*3)

HSSB interface board(*3)

Minislot
Highspeed serial bus interface options
(160i basic option)
I/O LinkII board(*3)

Ethernet board(*3)
Ethernet interface
DeviceNet interface board(*3)

DeviceNet interface 1slot cabinet or
3slot cabinet
PROFIBUS board(*3)
PROFIBUS function
FLnet board(*3)
FLnet function
The mounting position of an option board depends on the board type, as shown below:
The option board marked with *1 fits into option slot 2.
The option board marked with *3 fits into a mini slot (of any slot).
297
3.2.2
Series 18i/180i
SubCPU board(*2) Main CPU board

SubCPU for twopath control
2axis to 6axis control CPU for controlling CNC
Spindle interface Power
Analog output 2axis to 6axis control
Spindle interface
I/O Link
RISC board (M series only)(*1) PMCSB5/SB6
RS232C x 2
Data server board(*1) Display interface
RISC + data server board (M series only)(*1) Mounted in slot 1
Highprecision contour control function Basic system

Option
Serial communication board(*3)

PMC C board(*3)
C function for PMC
CAPII board (T series only)(*3)

HSSB interface board(*3)

Minislot
Highspeed serial bus interface options
(180i basic option)
I/O LinkII board(*3)

Ethernet board(*3)
Ethernet interface
DeviceNet interface board(*3)

DeviceNet interface 1slot cabinet or
3slot cabinet
PROFIBUS board(*3)
PROFIBUS function
FLnet board(*3)
FLnet function
The mounting position of an option board depends on the board type, as shown below:
The option board marked with *3 fits into a mini slot (of any slot).
298
3.2.3
Series 21i/210i
Main CPU board

Power
Spindle interface
I/O Link
PMCSA5
RS232C x 2
Display interface
Mounted in slot 1
Basic system
Serial communication board

PMC C board
C function for PMC

Highspeed serial bus interface
Minislot
(210i basic option)
options
I/O LinkII board
DeviceNet interface board

DeviceNet interface
PROFIBUS board
PROFIBUS function
FLnet board 1slot cabinet

FLnet function
These option boards are mounted in mini slots (of any slot).
299
3.3
TOTAL CONNECTION
DIAGRAMS
300
Standalone type control unit

Main board
Slot 1 24VIN(CP1) To I/O unit, etc.
24VOUT(CP2) 24VDC power

Optical fiber cable LCD UNIT MDUNIT
LCD(COP20A) COP20B CK2
DC24V CP1A CA55 CK1
CP1B
Memory card
(Touch panel)
R2321(JD5A) RS232C I/O unit
R2322(JD5B)
RS232C I/O unit
Analog output for tool drive
AOUT&HDI(JA40)
Highspeed skip input
Distributed Manual pulse generator
I/O board
DC24V CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B Operators
JD1A panel
DC24V CPD1
Distributed I/O Power
JD1B board, I/O unit, magnetics
JD1A etc. cabinet
JD1B Servo motor

amplifier with
JD1A I/O Link
Detachable LCD/MDI
LINK(JD45)
MDI unit
Position coder
SPDL&POS(JA41)
Circuit breaker
AC200V

AC reactor AC200V

MCC Circuit breaker
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM

CX4
CX1B TB1 JX1B
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A

JY2

JA7B SPM TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B

Servo card To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor

Optical fiber cable
TB1 CX2A JX1A
FSSB(COP10A)

COP10B TB2 Axis1 servo motor
SVM
COP10A JF1

TB1 CX2B JX1B
Axis2 servo motor

COP10B
SVM
COP10A

COP10B Axis3 servo motor

SVM
COP10A

COP10B Axis4 servo motor
SVM
COP10A
Up to 4 to 8 axes, depending on the model (In this figure, a oneaxis amplifier is used.)
Separate detector interface unit 1

DC24V CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3

COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4
CNF1 JA4A Absolute scale battery

(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector
interface unit 2 (Cannot be used in 21i/210i)
301
Standalone type control unit

Slot 2
Data server board

(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
ATA card
(CD38M) Ethernet
Slot 3
SubCPU board
(cannot be used in
21i/210i)
AOUT(JA40) Analog output for tool drive
Position coder
SPDL&POS(JA41) {
PSM Position coder
Spindle motor
SPM
Servo card
To 2nd spindle
FSSB(COP10A) COP10B
Sub axis1
SVM servo motor
Optical fiber cable(*)
COP10A
COP10B Sub axis2

SVM servo motor
COP10A
COP10B Sub axis3

SVM servo motor
COP10A
COP10B Sub axis4

SVM servo motor
COP10A
(Up to 6 to 8 axes, depending on the model)

Mini slot
Serial communication
board
Remote buffer board
DNC1 board
DNC2 board R2323
RS232C I/O unit (when remote buffer board or DNC2 board is used)
R4221 RS422 I/O unit (when remote buffer board or DNC1 board is used)
Mini slot
Ethernet (cannot be
used in 21i/210i)
(CD38L) Ethernet
Mini slot
HSSB board
HSSB(COP70) Personal Computer

Optical fiber cable
302
When an option board is used
I/O Link II board

Mini slot
To another unit
DeviceNet board
Mini slot
To another unit
PROFIBUS board
Mini slot
(master)
To another unit
PROFIBUS board
Mini slot
(slave)
To another unit
FLnet board
Mini slot
To another unit
303
3.4
CONNECTOR AND
CARD
CONFIGURATIONS
OF PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARDS
3.4.1
Main CPU Board of
Series 16i/18i/21i
D Specifications
Item Code
Main CPU board of Series 16i/160i A16B32000320
Main CPU board of Series 18i/180i A16B32000325
Main CPU board of Series 21i/210i (PMCSA5) A16B32000326
304
D Mounting positions of
connectors, LEDs, etc.
Battery case BAT1: Battery

LEDs
JD5A: RS232C serial port
JD5B: RS232C serial port
CNM1B: Memory card
JD1A: I/O Link
JA40: Analog output/highspeed DI
JA41: Serial spindle/position coder
JD45: CRT LINK/MDI
CP1 (right): 24VDC IN
CP2 (left): 24VDC OUT
STATUS: 7segment LED
MTSW: Rotary switch
COP20A: LCD unit connection

COP10A: FSSB
FUSE: Fuse burnout detection LED

PSW: Push switch
CA54: Servo check
SG connection terminal
STATUS 7segment LED: Used for setting and maintenance operations, in combination with the
MTSW rotary switch and PSW push switch described below.
MTSW rotary switch: This rotary switch is used for setting and maintenance operations, in
combination with the STATUS 7segment LED and the PSW push
switch.
PSW push switch: This push switch is used for setting and maintenance operations, in
combination with the STATUS 7segment LED and the MTSW rotary
switch.
(For the setting and maintenance operations using these switches, see Appendix E, LED Display and
Maintenance of Standalone Type Unit.)
305
cards and DIMM modules
(4) DRAM module
(1) CPU card
(5) FROM module
(2) Display control card
(3) Axis control card
(6) SRAM module
The DRAM module is mounted

on the CPU card.
306
A20B33000170 16i/18i
A20B33000070 21i
(2) Display control card A20B33000161 Display interface LCD/MDI
A20B33000162 Display link
A20B33000190 MDI only
(3) Axis control card A17B33000200 Axis control 8axes Servo software: 90A0
series supported
A17B33000201 6axes
A20B33000120 4axes
A20B33000121 2axes
A20B39000041 8M
A20B39000042 4M/2M
A20B39000030 2M

A20B33000170
A20B39000131 8M
A20B39000132 4M
(5) FROM module A20B39000070 CNC system servo sys- 16M

A20B39000010 tem
A20B39000071 12M
A20B39000011
A20B39000072 8M
A20B39000012
A20B39000073 6M
A20B39000013
A20B39000074 4M
A20B39000014
(6) SRAM module A20B39000020 System SRAM 3M
A20B39000060 2M
A20B39000061 1M
A20B39000052 512K
A20B39000053 256K
307
D LED display D Fuse burnout detection LED

FUSE (Red) Lit if the fuse is blown.
D LED status transition at powerup j: Off J: On
7segment
STATUS Status
LED
Not lit jjjj Power off
8 JJJJ CPU not activated after powerup
F NC system loading started by boot system
9 jJJJ NC system startedup and RAM initialization completed
8 JjJJ Waiting for system processor ID setting
7 jjJJ System processor ID setting completed

Display circuit initialization completed
6 JJjJ FANUC bus initialization completed
5 jJjJ Loading from flash memory completed

PMC initialization completed
Series and edition screen displayed
4 JjjJ Hardware configuration information setting completed

for each printed circuit board of the system
3 jjjJ PMC ladder initialization completed
2 jJJj Waiting for digital servo and spindle initialization
1 JJJj Digital servo and spindle initialization completed
0 Jjjj Initialization completed, normal operation state
D LED display during automatic operation startup

While automatic operation startup in progress signal STL (F0.5) is
held to 1, the 7segment LED cyclically displays the following
patterns:
D LED display when a battery alarm occurs

ALARM Jjj SRAM backup battery is weak.
308
D LED display when a system alarm occurs j: Off J: On l: Blink

(if CPU card A20B33000170 is used)
ALARM jJj System failure. The software detected an error and
stopped the system.
ALARM JJj An error occurred on the local bus in the main CPU
board.
ALARM jjJ System emergency. The hardware detected an error.
ALARM JlJ A disconnection was found in the optical

fiber cable between the CNC and LCD.
Alternatively, a printed circuit board on the
LCD side is defective.
If a disconnection occurs, the dot of the
7segment LED is also lit.
If a disconnection occurs, the display of the
LCD unit blinks.
ALARM jJJ An SRAM parity error or SRAM ECC error was de-
tected.
ALARM JJJ A DRAM parity was detected.
ALARM lll A bus error occurred in the main CPU.
(If CPU card A20B33000050 or 0070 is used)

ALARM jJj System failure. The software detected an error and
stopped the system.
ALARM JJj An error occurred on the local bus in the main CPU
board.
Alternatively, a bus error occurred in the main CPU.
Alternatively, a DRAM parity error was detected.
ALARM jjJ System emergency. The hardware detected an error.

Alternatively, a bus error occurred in the main CPU.
Alternatively, a DRAM parity error was detected.
ALARM JjJ A disconnection was found in the optical

fiber cable between the CNC and LCD.
Alternatively, a printed circuit board on the
LCD side is defective.
If a disconnection occurs, the dot of the
7segment LED is also lit.
If a disconnection occurs, the display of the
LCD unit blinks.
ALARM jJJ An SRAM parity error or SRAM ECC error was de-
tected.
NOTE
1 If any of the system alarms occurs, the hardware may be
defective.
2 If a disconnection is detected in the optical fiber cable
between CNC and LCD at powerup, the ALARM LEDs
alternately display these patterns: JjJ jJj
309
D 7segment LED display when a system alarm occurs

If a system alarm occurs, a number blinks as shown below, depending
on the system alarm number.
System
7segment
alarm num- System alarm type
LED
ber
0 900 to 909 ROM parity alarm.

System ROM parity stored in FROM
1 910 to 919 SRAM or DRAM parity alarm
2 920 to 929 Servo alarm
3 930 to 399 CPU interrupt or SRAM ECC error
5 950 to 959 PMC system alarm
7 970 to 979 Bus error or nonmaskable interrupt
8 Others Other system alarms
NOTE
If any of the system alarms occurs, the hardware may be
defective.
310
Servo card Display control card CPU card
B63005EN/02
Axis 1/2
D Block diagram
G/A
DSP control G/A
LCD link
control
DIMM module
DRAM
Axis 3/4 G/A
Display link
control
Axis 5/6
G/A CPU
Boot
siftware
311
Local BUS
G/A
PMC control
FBUS FBUS control
(To back panel)
DIMM module
control
Power
DIMM module Calendar
SRAM function
Main CPU board
3V lithium battery
FSSB HSSB Serial spindle Display
(to servo amplifier) (to LCD unit) Analog output link
Highspeed DI
Memory card
interface
3. STANDALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE
3.4.2
SubCPU Board
D Specifications
Item Code
SubCPU board A16B22030431
LED display
JA402: Analog output

JA412: Serial spindle/position coder
CA54B: Servo check
312
cards and DIMM module
(3) DRAM module

(1) CPU card
(2)
Axis control card
A20B33000170
(2) Axis control card A17B33000200 Axis control 8axes Servo software: 90A0 series
supported
A17B33000201 6axes
A20B33000120 4axes
A20B33000121 2axes
A20B39000041 8M
A20B39000042 4M/2M
A20B39000030 2M

A20B33000170
A20B39000131 8M
A20B39000132 4M
313
D LED display D LED display at powerup j: Off J: On
STATUS jjjj Power off
STATUS JJJj CPU not activated after powerup
STATUS Jjjj Initialization completed, normal operation in progress
D LED display when a system alarm occurs j: Off J: On l: Blink
ALARM jJj Servo alarm
ALARM Jjj A DRAM parity error was detected.

Note) Only when CPU card A20B33000170 is used
ALARM ljj A bus error occurred in a subCPU.

Note) Only when CPU card A20B33000170 is used
NOTE
If any of the system alarms occurs, the hardware may be
defective.
314
B63005EN/02
Servo card CPU card D Block diagram
Axis 1/2
G/A
DSP control
DIMM module
DRAM
Axis 3/4
Axis 5/6
G/A
CPU
315
Local BUS
G/A G/A
FBUS Bus Peripheral
(to back panel) conversion control
SubCPU board
FSSB Serial spindle

(to servo amplifier) Analog output

3. STANDALONE TYPE i SERIES HARDWARE
3.4.3 The RISC function and data server function are provided on a single
RISC Board, Data option board. If the RISC function alone is needed, a RISC board is used.
If just the data server function is needed, a data server board is used. If
Server Board, RISC + the two functions are needed, a RISC + data server board is used.
Data Server Board If the data server function is used, an ATA card adapter is mounted on the
board. This board and ATA card adapter are connected by a flat cable.
D Specifications
Item Code
RISC + Data server board A16B32000350
RISC board A16B32000351
ATA card adapter A20B21000500
A RISC board has

just these LEDs.
ATA card adapter
316
D LED display of the RISC The RISC function uses the green STATUS LEDs and red ALARM LEDs
function in the upper part of the face plate. The red ALARM LEDs are used also
by the data server function.
D Status transition at powerup, displayed by the green STATUS LEDs
j: Off J: On
STATUS jjjj Power off
STATUS JJJJ Just after powerup, RISC CPU not activated
STATUS jjjJ Local DRAM testing in progress (If the test detects an
error, this pattern is held.)
STATUS jjJj Testing of system area in shared DRAM in progress (If

the test detects an error, this pattern is held.)
STATUS Jjjj Waiting for a request from main CPU (1)
STATUS JjjJ Waiting for a request from main CPU (2)
STATUS JjJj Waiting for a request from main CPU (3)
STATUS JJjj Waiting for a request from main CPU (4)
D Status transition during operation, displayed by the green STATUS

LEDs j: Off J: On
STATUS jjjJ RISC mode wait state
STATUS jJjJ NC statement input wait state
STATUS jJJj Command execution in progress in the RISC mode
STATUS Jjjj Resetting
STATUS JjJJ Override 0 in acceleration/deceleration before interpola-

tion (override change wait state)
D Status transition when an error occurs, displayed by the green

STATUS LEDs j: Off J: On
STATUS jjjJ An error occurred in the testing of the local DRAM or
shared DRAM on the RISC board.
STATUS jjJj A check sum error occurred in system area of the

shared DRAM on the RISC board.
STATUS jjJJ No sync signal can be detected from the main CPU.
STATUS jJjj An error occurred during access to the Fbus.
STATUS JJJj System error
STATUS JJjJ Stack overflow
STATUS jJJj The CPU accessed an illegal area.
STATUS jJJJ Cache error
317
D ALARM LED display (red) j: Off J: On

ALARM Jjj The RISC CPU is not active.
ALARM jJj A bus error occurred in the Lbus.
ALARM JJj A parity error occurred in the shared DRAM.
ALARM jjJ An error occurred in the RISC CPU. Alternatively, a

parity error occurred in the local DRAM (slave).
ALARM JjJ An error occurred in the RISC CPU. Alternatively, a

parity error occurred in the local DRAM (master).
NOTE
The LEDs display any other pattern if an error occurs in the
data server option.
D LED display of the data The data server board function uses four green STATUS LEDs for status
server function display and red LEDs for alarm display (used also by the RISC function).
The function uses other green LEDs and a single red LED for
communication status display.
For RISC status

For RISC and data server
For data server status
For communication status
318
LED status transition at powerup

LED statuses f: Off F: On l: Blink Z: Dont care
LED display
No. Board status
(L1 to L4)
1 ff Power off
ff
2 FF Initial state immediately after powerup

FF
3 fF MRU initialization completed

FF
4 fF Firmware downloading completed

fF
5 fF Control transferred to OS
ff
6 Ff OS PHASE 1
FF
7 ff OS PHASE 2
FF
8 Ff OS PHASE 3
fF
9 ff OS PHASE 4
fF
10 lf Activation completed
ff
If the board is normally activated, the LEDs display the pattern of No.10
and keep this state until an error is detected.
LED display when an error occurs (STATUS L1 to L4)
The STATUS LEDs alternately display the LONG and SHORT patterns.
The LONG pattern is held longer than the SHORT pattern.

LED display
(STATUS)
No. Board status
LONG SHORT
1 fF Ff Reset exception
ff ff
2 fF ff General machine check exception

ff Ff
3 fF Ff Data Storage
ff Ff
4 fF ff Instruction Storage
ff fF
5 fF ff Alignment
ff FF
319
No. Board status

LONG SHORT
6 fF Ff Program
ff FF
7 FF ff Floating Point Unavailable

ff ff
8 FF Ff Decrementer
ff ff
9 FF Ff Trace
ff fF
10 FF ff Floating Point Assist

ff FF
11 fF ff Implementation Dependent Software Emulation

Ff ff
12 fF Ff Implementation Dependent Instruction TLB Miss

Ff ff
13 fF ff Implementation Dependent Data TLB Miss

Ff Ff
14 fF Ff Implementation Dependent Instruction TLB Error

Ff Ff
15 fF ff Implementation Dependent Data TLB Error

Ff fF
16 FF ff Implementation Dependent Data Breakpoint

Ff fF
17 FF Ff Implementation Dependent Instruction Breakpoint

Ff fF
18 FF ff Implementation Dependent Peripheral Breakpoint

Ff FF
19 FF Ff Implementation Dependent Non Maskable Development

Ff FF
20 fF Ff DRAM Parity Alarm

fF ff
21 fF ff Other NMI
fF Ff
22 fF Ff Invalid interrupt
FF ff
NOTE
If any of the errors occurs, contact FANUC.
320
LED display when an error occurs (ALARM)

LED statuses j: Off J: On
LED display
No. Board status
123
1 jJJ An MPU transfer error occurred.
2 JJJ A parity error occurred in the main memory.
NOTE
Any other pattern is displayed if an error occurs in the RISC
option.
LED display for communication status

Communication status (L5 to L8)

No. LED display Communication status
1 ZZ Data transmission in progress

ZF
2 ZZ Data reception in progress

FZ
3 ZF Hub normally connected

ZZ
Communication status (COL)

No. LED display Communication status
1 F Lit when a data collision occurs.
COL: This LED is frequently lit if the traffic of Ethernet communication is large
or if the peripheral noise is large.
321
3.4.4
C Board, Serial
Communication Board
D Specifications
Item Code
C board A20B81000330
Serial communication board R.B./DNC2: RS232C I/F A20B81000334
R.B./DNC2: RS422 I/F A20B81000335
DNC1: RS485 I/F A20B81000336
JNA
FBUS backplane
connector
The connector is mounted on a serial communication board.

JD5L: RS232C interface
JD6L: RS422/485 interface
D LED display D LED display when an error occurs j: Off J: On

CBA Status
jjJ The CPU is not yet started (reset state).(*1)
JJj A DRAM parity error occurred.
jJj A bus error occurred in the CPU on this board.
Jjj An error occurred in the local bus on this board.
NOTE
1 The LEDs display this pattern because the CPU is in the
reset state immediately after powerup.
2 If the LEDs display any of the patterns, the hardware may
be defective (except in the reset state at powerup).
322
card and DIMM module
(1) DRAM module
(1) DRAM module A20B39000042 System RAM 4MB
3.4.5
HSSB Interface Board
D Specifications
Item Code
HSSB interface board A20B80010730
JNA
FBUS backplane
SW1 connector
Highspeed serial
bus setting switch
COP7: Highspeed serial bus (HSSB) interface
323
D LED display
LEDB Red HSSB communication has been interrupted.
LEDA Red A RAM parity alarm occurred in the common RAM on the
board.
The common RAM is mounted on this board. The RAM
is used to exchange information between the CNC and
personal computer and is not batterybacked.
Status display of the green LEDs j: Off J: On

4321 Status
JJJJ Immediately after powerup
JJJj HSSB board initialization in progress
JJjJ Waiting for the booting of the PC side
JJjj CNC screen displayed on the PC
Jjjj Activation normally terminated, normal operation in progress
jJJj Thermal error detected by the intelligent terminal
jJjJ HSSB communication interrupted
jJjj Parity alarm in the common RAM
jjJJ Communication error
jjJj Battery alarm in the intelligent terminal
D Highspeed serial bus

setting switch
Setting Description

The activation menu is displayed, and the PC can perform boot
up and IPL.
1 Normal setting
The activation menu is not displayed.
The PC cannot perform bootup or IPL.
2 The NC and PC start up independently of each other.

The activation menu is not displayed.
The PC cannot perform bootup or IPL.
For details of the bootup and IPL when the rotary switch is set to 0, see
Appendix, Maintenance of Open CNC (BootUp and IPL).
324
3.4.6
CAPII Board
D Specifications
Item Code
CAPII board A20B81000560
JNA
FBUS backplane
connector
Setting pin TM1
Connector CP8B
D LED display Status display of the red LEDs j: Off J: On

CAB Status
jjJ An error occurred in the local bus on this board.
jJj An error occurred in the local bus on this board. Alter-

natively, an error occurred on the main CPU board or
another option board.
jJJ The CPU is not yet started (reset state).(*1)
Jjj A parity alarm occurred in the SRAM.
JjJ A bus error occurred in the CPU on this board.
JJj A parity alarm occurred in the DRAM.
NOTE
1 The LEDs display this pattern because the CPU is in the
reset state immediately after powerup.
2 If the LEDs display any of the patterns, the hardware may
be defective (except in the reset state at powerup).
325
D Setting pin TM1 and Setting pin TM1 and connector CP8B are provided for testing at FANUC.
connector CP8B The setting of the pin must not be changed.
card and DIMM module
(1) DRAM module
(1) DRAM module A20B39000042 System RAM 4MB
3.4.7
I/O LinkII Board
D Specifications
Item Code
I/O LinkII board A20B81000380
JNA
Setting pin SH1 FBUS backplane
connector
TBA: I/O LinkII interface
326
D LED display D Status LED display (green)

Status
LED1 Lit when the board is released from the reset state and starts
operating.
LED2 Lit when communication starts. This LED is left on until a reset
occurs.
LED3 Lit each time transmission is performed. (Actually, this LED

appears to be lit continuously.)
LED4 Reserved
D Alarm LED display (red)

Status
LED1 Lit when the board is released from the reset state and starts
operating.
LEDA Lit if any of the following errors is detected when data is re-
ceived. This LED goes off when normal data is received next.
Reception buffer overflow
Fractional bit data detection
Overrun error detection
CRC error detection
Abort error detection
LEDB Lit when a parity alarm occurs in the DRAM on this board.
D Setting pin SH1 This pin is used to set the I/O LinkII board as the master or slave.
3.4.8
Ethernet Board
D Specifications
Item Code
Ethernet board A20B81000450
327
JNA
FBUS backplane
connector
CD38L: Ethernet interface
D LED display D Status transition at powerup, displayed by the green LEDs

No. 4321 Ethernet board status
1 jjjj Power off
2 JJJJ Initial state immediately after powerup
3 JJJj MPU initialization completed
4 JJjj Firmware downloading completed
5 Jjjj Control transferred to OS
6 jJJJ OS PHASE 1
7 jJJj OS PHASE 2
8 jJjJ OS PHASE 3
9 jJjj OS PHASE 4
10 jjjl Startup completed
If the board has normally started up, the LEDs display the pattern of
No.10. The LEDs keep this pattern until an error occurs.
328
D Status LED display when an error occurs (green)

The status LEDs alternately display the LONG and SHORT patterns.
The LONG pattern is held longer than the SHORT pattern.
Status LED display
(STATUS)
No. Ethernet board state
LONG SHORT
4321 4321
1 Jjjj jjjJ Reset exception
2 Jjjj jjJj General machine check exception
3 Jjjj jjJJ Data Storage
4 Jjjj jJjj Instruction Storage
5 Jjjj jJJj Alignment
6 Jjjj jJJJ Program
8 JjjJ jjjJ Decrementer
9 JjjJ jJjJ Trace
11 JjJj jjjj Implementation Dependent Software Emulation
12 JjJj jjjJ Implementation Dependent Instruction TLB Miss
13 JjJj jjJj Implementation Dependent Data TLB Miss
14 JjJj jjJJ Implementation Dependent Instruction TLB Error
15 JjJj jJjj Implementation Dependent Data TLB Error
16 JjJJ jJjj Implementation Dependent Data Breakpoint
17 JjJJ jJjJ Implementation Dependent Instruction Breakpoint
18 JjJJ jJJj Implementation Dependent Peripheral Breakpoint
19 JjJJ jJJJ Implementation Dependent Non Maskable Develop-

ment
20 JJjj jjjJ DRAM Parity Alarm
21 JJjj jjJj Other NMI
22 JJJj jjjJ Invalid interrupt
NOTE
If any of the errors occurs, contact FANUC.
329
D Alarm LED display (red) when an alarm occurs

State
LEDB Lit when a parity alarm occurs in the main memory on this board.
D Communication status LED display (red)

LED6 (RX) Lit when data is received.
LEDA (COL) Lit when a data collision occurs.
NOTE
LEDA (COL) is frequently lit if the traffic of Ethernet
communication is large or if the peripheral noise is large.
3.4.9
DeviceNet Board
D Specifications
Item Code
DeviceNet board A20B81000490
JNA
FBUS backplane
connector
Daughter board
(other manufacturer)
TM1
TBL: DeviceNet interface Master/slave setting pin
330
D LED display D Meaning of red LED

LEDA Lit when an error occurs on the daughter board.
If this LED is lit, replace the DeviceNet board.
D Meanings of green LEDs

321 Status
jjJ This board is set as the master.
jJJ This board is set as the slave.
D LEDs on the daughter board

MNS DeviceNet module/network status LED
This LED indicates whether the DeviceNet board is turned on
and whether the DeviceNet communication is normally per-
formed.
For the meanings of statuses indicated by this LED, refer to the
specifications supplied by ODVA.
HEALTH Daughter board status LED

After the board is turned on, the LED is lit in red. If the firmware
is loaded into the internal daughter board, the LED is lit in green.
This green state continues.
If the LED is not lit in green, replace the DeviceNet board.
D Master/slave setting pin This setting pin is used to switch around the master function and slave
function of DeviceNet.
D Precautions This DeviceNet board can be removed after the main CPU board is
removed. For the procedure, see Mounting and Removing an Option
Board.
A daughter board of a different manufacturer is mounted on the
DeviceNet board. The daughter board alone cannot be replaced.
331
3.4.10
PROFIBUS Master
Board
D Specifications
Item Code
PROFIBUS master board A20B81000470
JNA
FBUS backplane
connector
CN1: PROFIBUS interface

State
LED1 Lit when this board is released from the reset state and starts
operating.
This LED is not lit at powerup.
LED2 Lit when the communication is normally performed.

332
3.4.11
PROFIBUS Slave
Board
D Specifications
Item Code
PROFIBUS slave board A20B81000440
JNA
FBUS backplane
connector
CN2: PROFIBUS interface

State
LED1 Lit when this board is released from the reset state and starts
operating.
LED2 Lit when the communication starts.

The LED is not lit at powerup. The LED is not lit also in the
following cases:
When no parameter configuration data is received
When illegal parameter configuration data is received
LED3 Lit when the communication is normally performed.

LEDB Lit when a RAM parity alarm occurs on this board.
333
3.4.12
FLnet Board
D Specifications
Item Code
FLnet board A20B81000530
JNA
FBUS backplane
connector
Setting pin TM1

(fixed to B)
CD38N: FLnet interface
D LED display D Meanings of red LEDs

HER Lit when a parity alarm occurs in the DRAM on the FLnet
board.
The board may be defective.
COL Lit if a data collision occurs on the line.
D Meanings of green LEDs

COM Lit during data transmission or reception.
POK Lit when the parameters are normally set.
LNK This LED indicates the link state and is lit if the board partici-
pates in the FA link.
RES Reserved. This LED is normally lit.
ROS Lit while the OS is running on the FLnet board.
LIL Lit when a hub is normally connected.
D Setting pin TM1 This setting pin is always set to position B. The setting should not be
changed.
334
3.5
UNITS AND PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
3.5.1
Basic Units
Type Item Drawing No. Remarks
16i/160i Basic unit with 1 slot A02B0265B501
Basic unit with 3 slots A02B0265B503
Basic unit with 3 slots A02B0266B503
3.5.2
Printed Circuit Boards
of Control Unit
Type Item Drawing No. ID Remarks
Master PCB Main CPU board A16B32000320 E8 16i
A16B32000325 E9 18i
A16B32000326 EA 21i
Card PCB CPU card A20B33000050 01
A20B33000070 09
A20B33000170 11
Display control card LCD/MDI A20B33000161
For CRT link A20B33000162
MDI only A20B33000190
Axis control card Servo software A17B33000200 07 8axes

90A0 series supported
90A3 series supported A17B33000201 06 6axes
A20B33000120 05 4axes
A20B33000121 04 2axes
Servo software A17B33000300 06 6axes

90A7 series supported
Display control card 10.4 color A20B33000150 0E Graphic

(LCD unit side)
9.5 monochrome A20B33000153 06 Graphic
9.5 monochrome A20B33000090 07 Character only
335
DIMM module DRAM module A20B39000040 87 12M
A20B39000041 86 8M
A20B39000042 85 4M/2M
A20B39000030 82 2M
A20B390000130 A7 12M CPU card:

For
A20B390000131 A6 8M A20B3300
0170
A20B390000132 A5 4M
SRAM module A20B39000020 25 3M
A20B39000060 04 2M
A20B39000061 03 1M
A20B39000052 02 512K
A20B39000053 01 256K
FROM module A20B39000010 47 16M
A20B39000070 57
A20B39000011 45 12M
A20B39000071 55
A20B39000012 43 8M
A20B39000072 53
A20B39000013 42 6M
A20B39000073 52
A20B39000014 41 4M
A20B39000074 51
A20B39000015 40 2M
A20B39000075 50
336
Option PCB SubCPU board A16B22030431 0xF1
RISC + data server board A16B32000350 0xF4

0xF5
RISC board A16B32000351 0xF4
Data server board A16B32000352 0xF5
ATA card adapter A20B21000500 For data server
Serial communication board A20B81000334 1xE1

(RB/DNC2, RS232C I/F)
Serial communication board A20B81000335 2xE1

(RB/DNC2, RS422 I/F)
Serial communication boar (DNC1) A20B81000336 3xE2
C board A20B81000330 xxE0
HSSB interface board A20B80010730 xxAA
CAPII board A20B81000560 xx1F
I/O LinkII board A20B81000380 xxF9
Ethernet board A20B81000450 xxE6
DeviceNet board A20B81000490 xxEF
PROFIBUS master board A20B81000470 xxFC
PROFIBUS slave board A20B81000440 xxE3
FLnet board A20B81000530 xx59
Back panel Back panel A20B20020850 1 slot
A20B20020800 3 slots
Distributed I/O Operators panel I/O module A20B20020470 Matrix DI supported

With MPG interface
A20B20020520 Generalpurpose
DI input
With MPG interface
A20B20020521 Generalpurpose
DI input
Without MPG inter-
face
Connector panel I/O Basic A20B21000150

module
Expansion A20B21000410 With MPG interface
A20B21000411 Without MPG inter-

face
A20B21000320 DO only
A20B21000190 Analog input
337
Others LCD control printed circuit board A20B81000410
Inverter A20B20020500 Color
A20B80010920
A20B20020480 Monochrome
A20B80010910
Operators panel con- (64/32) A16B22000661 Sink output

nection unit
(96/64) A16B22000660 Sink output
(64/32) A16B22020731 Source output
(96/64) A16B22020730 Source output
Machine operators panel interface unit A16B22010110
Touch panel control board A20B80010620
PCB for separate detector interface unit A20B21000270
HSSB board on the personal computer side A20B80010583 For 1 channel
A20B80010581 For 1 channel (old)
A20B80010582 For 2 channels
A20B80010580 For 2 channels

(old)
A20B81000100 Old PCB
338
3.5.3
LCD/MDI Unit
Item Drawing No. Remarks
9.5 monochrome LCD unit A20B0265C061
9.5 monochrome LCD unit A20B0265C066 Character only
10.4 color LCD unit A20B0265C071
10.4 color LCD unit A20B0265C081 With touch panel
For display link 7.2 monochrome LCD unit A02B0166C251
7.2 monochrome T series A02B0166C261#TR Alphabetic keys

LCD/MDI unit
A02B0166C261#TS Symbolic keys
M series A02B0166C261#R Alphabetic keys
A02B0166C261#S Symbolic keys
Detachable T series A02B0166C271#TR Alphabetic keys

7.2 monochrome
LCD/MDI unit A02B0166C271#TS Symbolic keys
Standalone type T series A02B0166C210#TR Alphabetic keys

MDI
A02B0166C210#TS Symbolic keys
Standalone type MDI standard key T series A02B0236C125#TBR Alphabetic keys

(landscape type)
M series A02B0236C125#MBR Alphabetic keys
Standalone type MDI standard key T series A02B0236C126#TBR Alphabetic keys

(portrait type)
M series A02B0236C126#MBR Alphabetic keys
339
3.5.4
Other Units
Item Drawing No. Remarks
Separate detector interface 4 basic axes A02B0236C203

unit
4 additional axes A02B0236C204
Connector panel I/O module Basic module A03B0815C001
Expansion module A03B0815C002 With MPG interface
A03B0815C003 Without MPG interface
A03B0815C004 2A DO
A03B0815C005 Analog input
Distributed I/O machine op- Compact type A02B0236C141#xx DI = 24, with MGP interface
erators panel
Standard type A02B0236C140#xx DI = 24, with MGP interface
290mm wide A02B0236C150#xx DI = 24, with MGP interface
Spindle connection adapter A13B0180B001
Fan unit For 1 slot A02B0265C101
For 2 slots A02BC260C021
340
3.6
MOUNTING AND
REMOVING AN
OPTION BOARD
WARNING
The replacement described here should be performed by a
person fully trained in maintenance and safety. If the
cabinet is opened to replace the option board, take extreme
care not to touch any highvoltage area (marked with
and covered by a shock prevention cover). If the area is
uncovered, direct contact with this area will result in an
electric shock.
NOTE
Before starting the replacement, take a backup copy of the
contents (parameters, programs, etc.) of the SRAM
memory of the CNC. The backup copy can be used in case
the contents of the SRAM memory are lost during the
replacement.
3.6.1
Mounting and
Removing the Main
CPU Board and a
FullSize Option Board
3.6.1.1 (1) Remove cables other than the battery cable. (The battery cable is
Removing the board connected only to the main CPU board.)
(2) Hold handles A and B.
(3) Pushing down the hook of handle A and pushing up the hook of handle
B, pull out the printed circuit board.
NOTE
1 The battery is mounted on the face place of the main CPU
board. The battery is pulled out together with the main CPU
board.
2 The main CPU board or a fullsize option board can be
removed without removing minislot option boards. (If a
cable connected to a minislot option board obstructs the
removal, the cable must be removed.)
341
3.6.1.2 (1) Holding handles A and B, insert the board into the cabinet until the
Mounting the board connector on the back panel is connected.
(2) Connect the removed cables to correct positions.
Handle A
With a hook on
the top side
Handle B
With a hook on
the bottom side
342
3.6.2
Mounting and
Removing a MiniSlot
Option Board (Except
DeviceNet Board)
3.6.2.1 (1)Remove cables connected to the target minislot option board.

Removing the board Remove other cables that would obstruct the removal of the minislot
option board.
(2) Hold handles C and D.
(3) Pushing the latch of handle C to the right, pull out the printed circuit
board.
NOTE
The minislot option board can be removed without
removing the main CPU option board or fullsize option
board.
3.6.2.2 (1) Holding handles C and D, insert the board into the cabinet until the
Mounting the board connector on the back panel is connected.
(2) Connect the removed cables to correct positions.
Handle C
With a hook on
the left side
Handle D
343
3.6.3
Mounting and
Removing the
DeviceNet Board
3.6.3.1 (1) Remove the terminal block from the connector on the DeviceNet
Removing the board board. The terminal block can be pulled out after the screws on both
sides are loosened. The terminal block can be removed with cables
connected.
Screw
(2) Remove the main CPU board. The main CPU board can be removed
after the terminal block of the DeviceNet connector is removed.
(3) Hold handles C and D of the DeviceNet board. Pushing the latch of
handle C to the right, pull out the board.
NOTE
The DeviceNet board can be removed after the main CPU
board is removed. If an attempt is made to pull out the
DeviceNet board without removing the main CPU board, the
printed board may be damaged.
3.6.3.2 (1) Before mounting the DeviceNet board, remove the main CPU board.
Mounting the board
NOTE
The DeviceNet board can be mounted after the main CPU
board is removed. If an attempt is made to mount the
DeviceNet board without removing the main CPU board, the
printed circuit may be damaged.
(2) Remove the terminal block from the connector on the DeviceNet
board. (See the removal procedure described above.)
(3) Mount the DeviceNet board in the cabinet without the main CPU
board. Holding handles C and D, insert the board into the cabinet until
the connector on the back panel is connected.
(4) After mounting the DeviceNet board, mount the main CPU board.
(5) Mount the terminal block removed in (2) to the connector. Securely
tighten the screws.
344
Handle C
With a hook on the
left side
Handle D
345
3.7
MOUNTING AND
REMOVING THE
BACK PANEL
WARNING
cabinet is opened to replace the back panel, take extreme
electric shock.
NOTE
Before starting the replacement, take a backup copy of the
contents (parameters, programs, etc.) of the SRAM
memory of the CNC. The backup copy can be used in case
the contents of the SRAM memory are lost during the
replacement.
3.7.1 (1) Remove the main CPU board and all option boards, following the
Removing the Panel steps described in Section 3.6.
(2) Remove the connector of the fan connected to the back panel.
(3) Push down the latch securing the back panel until the latch is
disengaged.
(4) Pull down and detach the back panel to the rear.
3.7.2 (1) Aligning the positioning hole of the back panel with the positioning
Mounting the Back pin, fit the back panel on from the rear.
Panel (2) Pull up the back panel until the latch is engaged.
(3) Connect the fan connector to the back panel.
(4) Mount the main CPU board and option boards, following the steps
described in Section 3.6.
346
Fan
connector
Latch
Back panel
Back panel
347
3.8
REPLACING THE
FUSE OF THE
CONTROL UNIT
WARNING
Before starting the replacement of a fuse, remove the cause
of the fuse burnout.
Accordingly, the replacement should be performed by a
cabinet is opened to replace the fuse, take extreme care not
to touch any highvoltage area (marked with and
covered by a shock prevention cover). If the area is
electric shock.
D Mounting position of the The fuse of the control unit is mounted on the main CPU board.
fuse of the control unit
CPU card
Display control card
Fuse
Main CPU board
348
D Ordering information of
the fuse
Ordering information Rating Individual information
A02B0265K100 7.5A A60L00010046#7.5
349
3.9
REPLACING THE
BATTERY
D Replacing the battery If a lithium battery is used, have A02B0200K102 (FANUC internal
code: A98L00310012) handy.
(1) Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off.
(2) Remove the battery from the top area of the CNC unit.
Disconnect the connector first. Then, remove the battery from the
battery case.
The battery case is provided in the top area of the face plate of the main
CPU board.
(3) Replace the battery, then connect the connector.
Battery case
Lithium battery
A02B0200K102
Connector
WARNING
The incorrect mounting of the battery may cause an
explosion. Avoid using any battery other than the one
specified here (A02B0200K102).
350
NOTE
Complete steps (1) to (3) within 30 minutes.
If the battery is left removed for a long time, the memory
would lose the contents.
If there is a danger that the replacement cannot be
completed within 30 minutes, save the whole contents of the
CMOS memory to a memory card. The contents of the
memory can be easily restored with the memory card in
case the memory loses the contents.
Discard the dead battery, observing appropriate municipal rules and

regulations. When discarding the battery, insulate the terminal with a tape
so that no shortcircuit would occur.
When using commercial

Dsize alkaline dry cells
D General method Use the connector connected to the lithium battery for an external battery.
Following the battery replacement procedure described above, replace the
standard lithium battery with an external battery in a battery case
(A02B0236C281).
351
NOTE
1 Place the battery case in such a position that the battery can
be replaced even while the control unit is active.
2 The connector of the battery cable uses a simple lock
system. Fix the cable within an area of 50 cm from the
connector, removing tension on the cable. This is required
to prevent the connector from coming off because of the
weight of the cable or tension on the cable.
D Replacing the battery (1) Have commercial Dsize alkaline dry cells handy.
(2) Turn the CNC on.
(3) Remove the lid from the battery case.
(4) Replace the old dry cells with new ones. Mount the dry cells in a
correct orientation.
(5) Replace the lid on the battery case.
NOTE
In the poweroff state, the battery should be replaced as in
the case of the lithium battery, which is descried above.
2 dry cells
Lid
Connection terminal
on the back
4 mounting holes
Case
352
3.10
REPLACING A FAN
UNIT
WARNING
If the cabinet is opened to replace a fan unit, take extreme
electric shock.
fan units
Ordering information Quantity
For 1slot cabinet A02B0265C101 1
For 2slot cabinet A02B0260C021 1
D Replacing a fan unit (1) Before starting the replacement of a fan unit, turn the CNC off.
(2) Pull the fan unit to be replaced.
(3) Lift the pulled fan unit until the fan unit is detached from the cabinet.
(4) Place a new fan unit on the cabinet.
(5) Push the new unit as far as it goes. When a click is heard, the unit is
connected to the fan connector.
Fan unit
(3), (4)
Cabinet
(2), (5)
353
3.11
REPLACING THE
WARNING
FUSE OF THE LCD Before starting the replacement of the fuse, remove the
UNIT cause of the fuse burnout.
Accordingly, the replacement should be performed by a
cabinet is opened to replace the fuse, take extreme care not
electric shock.
D Mounting position of the

fuse
LCD unit (rear face)
Fuse
D Information of the fuse

Ordering information: A02B0265K101
Rating: 2.0 A
Individual information: A60L00010290#LM20C
354
3.12
REPLACING THE
LCD BACKLIGHT WARNING
cabinet is opened to replace the unit, take extreme care not
electric shock.
the backlight
Backlight Ordering information Individual information
For 9.5 LCD A02B0236K114 A61L00010154#BL
For highintensity 10.4 LCD A02B0236K116 A61L00010168#BL
D Replacing the backlight (1) Remove soft key cable connector CK2, then remove the escutcheon
from the LCD unit.
If the unit has a touch panel, remove touch panel signal cable connector
CN1 as well.
Escutcheon
Soft key cable

CK2
(2) Disconnect inverter cable connector CP1 and video signal cable
connector CN8, then remove the LCD panel from the unit.
355
LCD panel
(3)1 For highintensity 10.4 color LCD

Press the small button to disengage the latch, pull out the case
containing the backlight, then replace the backlight, as illustrated
below.
Connector
Button opening
Button
Back of the LCD panel
Backlight
356
(3)2 For 9.5 monochrome LCD
Connector
Metal catch
Back of the
LCD panel
Backlight
(4) After replacing the backlight, assemble the unit, reversing the
disassembly procedure of steps (1) to (3).
During the assembly, take care to keep dust out.
357
3.13
HEAT GENERATION
OF THE UNITS
Heat
Unit Remarks
generation
Control unit 1slot cabinet 35W (*1)
3slot cabinet 46W
Option board HSSB board 4W
SubCPU board 14W
PMC C board 7W
Serial communication 7W
board
CAPII board 10W
RISC board 9W
Data server board 6.3W Including 0.3 W of the

ATA card(*2)
RISC + data server 15.3W Including 0.3 W of the

board ATA card(*2)
I/O Link II board 9W
Ethernet board 6W
DeviceNet interface 4W
board
PROFIBUS board 9W
FLnet board 7W
NOTE
1 The values of the main CPU board and MDI unit are
included. The values of option boards are not included.
2 The heat generation of the ATA flash card may be different
if a largecapacity card is used or if the card specifications
are changed.
358
Heat
Unit Remarks
generation
MDI unit 0W
Operators panel I/O module 12W (*1)
Connector panel I/O module (ba- 8W (*1)

sic)
Connector panel I/O module (ex- 5W (*1)

pansion)
Separate detector interface unit 9W Unit with 4 basic axes only
Separate detector interface unit 14W 4 basic axes + 4 additional

axes(*2)
NOTE
1 The values are taken when 50% of the module inputs are
turned on.
2 The heat generated in the separate detector is not included.
359
4. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCDMOUNTED TYPE
AND STANDALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE) B63005EN/02
4 MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCDMOUNTED TYPE

AND STANDALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE)
This chapter describes the hardware common to the LCDmounted type

i series and standalone type i series.
4.1 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS . 361

4.2 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING
DIMM MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.3 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT EXCHANGER OF
HEAT PIPE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
4.4 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . 370
4.5 DISTRIBUTED I/O SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
4.6 REPLACING FUSES ON VARIOUS UNITS . . . . . . 376
4.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
OUTSIDE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.8 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . 382
4.9 NOTES ON USING THE MDI UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
360
B63005EN/02 AND STANDALONE TYPE i SERIES (HARDWARE)
4.1
MOUNTING AND
WARNING
DEMOUNTING CARD Only those personnel who have received approved safety
PCBS and maintenance training may perform this replacement
work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a card PCB, be
CAUTION
361
4.1.1 1) Pull outward the claw of each of the four spacers used to secure the card
Demounting a Card PCB, then release each latch. (See Fig. a.)
PCB 2) Extract the card PCB upward. (See Fig. b.)
Card PCB Card PCB
Card PCB
Fig. a Spacer
Connector
Card PCB
Fig. b Spacer
Connector
362
4.1.2 1) Check that the claw of each of the four spacers is latched outward, then
Mounting a Card PCB insert the card PCB into the connector. (See Fig. c.)
2) Push the claw of each spacer downward to secure the card PCB. (See
Fig. d.)
Card PCB
Fig. c Spacer
Connector
Card PCB Card PCB
Card PCB
Fig. d Spacer
Connector
363
4.2
MOUNTING AND
WARNING
DEMOUNTING DIMM Only those personnel who have received approved safety
MODULES and maintenance training may perform this replacement
work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a module, be
CAUTION
Before replacing an SRAM module, be sure to back up the
contents of the SRAM module.
364
4.2.1 1) Open the claw of the socket outward. (See Fig. a.)
Demounting a DIMM 2) Extract the module slantly upward. (See Fig. b.)
Module
4.2.2 1) Insert the module slantly into the module socket, with side B facing
Mounting a DIMM upward. (See Fig. b.)
Module 2) Push the module downward until it is locked. (See Fig. c.)
Fig. a
Fig. b
Fig. c
365
4.3 The performance of the heat exchanger degrades due to a buildup of dirt.
Clean the heat exchanger periodically. The cleaning interval depends on
MAINTENANCE OF the installation environment. So, clean the heat exchanger at appropriate
HEAT EXCHANGER intervals according to the level of dirt built up.
OF HEAT PIPE TYPE
WARNING
High voltage is applied to the heat exchanger of heat pipe
type. Before maintaining the heat exchanger of heat pipe
type, always turn off the power to the CNC.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a heat exchanger
of heat pipe type, be careful not to touch the highvoltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
366
Cleaning and replacing

the air filter
Procedure for cleaning and replacing the air filter
1 Before cleaning and replacing the air filter, turn off the fan power
supply.
2 Remove the filter cover, then demount the filter.
When removing the cover, press the claw placed in

the groove on both sides inward with a screwdriver.
3 Blow air against both sides of the filter to remove dust.
4 When the filter is dirty extremely, wash it with a solution of water and
neutral detergent, and rinse it with fresh water, then allow it dry
naturally.
Alternatively, replace it with a new filter (use only the specified filter).
5 Set the cleaned or new filter. Next, align the claws with the grooves,
then press them to reinstall the cover. Check that the cover is not
removed when it is pulled toward you.
367
Cleaning the heat

exchanger
Procedure for cleaning the heat exchanger
1 Before cleaning the heat exchanger, turn off the fan power supply.
2 Demount the external fan unit from the main body of the heat
exchanger.
Main body of the

heat exchanger
Fan power cable

(Unplug the connector.)
External fan unit
Mounting screw B (1 piece) Mounting screw A (2 pieces)

Ground wire (The ground wire can be disconnected by
removing the fan mounting screws.)
Remove the two mounting screws (A) used for mounting the external fan unit, then
demount the unit by sliding it downward. Next, disconnect the fan power cable and
ground wire. Remove mounting screw (B).
D Cleaning the fan unit
Procedure for cleaning the fan unit
1 Remove any buildup of dust, dirt, and mist from the fan motor and fan
mounting case with a dry waste cloth. If dirt such as mist cannot be
removed easily, use a waste cloth moistened with a solution of water
and neutral detergent after squeezing it softly. In this case, be careful
not to allow a solution of water and neutral detergent to enter the
electric circuitry such as the rotor of the fan motor.
368
D Cleaning the fan of the

heat exchanger
Procedure for cleaning the fan of the heat exchanger
1 Demount the heat exchanger from the unit, then remove dust and mist
from the fan by blowing air or by using a dry waste cloth or brush.
When the fan is dirty extremely
1 Detach the internal fan unit, terminal block, and cables from the main
body.
Main body
Terminal block, cables
2 Clean the fan by using a brush and a solution of water and neutral
detergent. At this time, be careful not to bend a vane.
3 After cleaning, dry the heat exchanger and fan unit sufficiently.
D Reassembly
Procedure for reassembly after cleaning
After cleaning the fan unit and heat exchanger, follow the steps below.
1 Reinstall the terminal block and cables at the original locations.
2 Reinstall the fan unit at the original location. At this time, reconnect
the fan power cable and ground wire correctly.
369
4.4
LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY (LCD)
Brightness of the When the ambient temperature is low, the brightness of the LCD
monochrome LCD decreases. (The LCD screen is dark particularly immediately after the
power is turned on.) This phenomenon is not a failure but is a property
specific to the LCD. When the ambient temperature increases, the LCD
screen becomes brighter. The monochrome LCD has a brightness control
function. For the method of adjustment, see Section 1.17.
LCD with a touch panel The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen. For this
operation, be sure to use a FANUCsupplied pen (A02B0236K111)
dedicated to the touch panel. If a sharppointed pen is used, for example,
to touch the LCD screen, the LCD surface may be flawed or damaged.
Moreover, do not touch the LCD screen directly with a finger. Otherwise,
the operability of the LCD may deteriorate, and the LCD screen may get
dirty.
Protection sheet of the The LCD with a touch panel has a protection sheet attached on the front
touch panel to protect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. On the protection
sheet, a protection film is attached to protect against flaws that may be
caused by friction during transportation. After integrating the CNC with
the machine, peel off the protection film as shown below. The protection
film is not transparent, so that the display screen is less visible if the
protection film is not removed.
Protection film
When replacing the protection sheet with a new one, use the procedure
below.
D Remove the old protection sheet from the front of the LCD screen.
Wipe off any moisture and oil on the front of the LCD screen.
D Peel off the white protection sheet attached to the back side (which is
adhered to the LCD screen) of a new protection sheet.
370
D When the white protection sheet is removed, the new protection sheet
is adhesive on its periphery. Attach the new protection sheet to the
front of the LCD screen. At this time, be careful not to allow dust and
dirt between the protection sheet and the LCD screen.
D Peel off the protection film attached to the front of the protection sheet.
The ordering information of a protection sheet for replacement is as
follows:
For the 10.4 LCD: A02B0236K110
For the 12.1 LCD: A02B0236K118
Old protection sheet
White protection sheet on the back side of a new protection sheet
Touch panel
compensation
D Condition that requires Touch panel compensation is required:
compensation 1 When the LCD unit is replaced
2 When the touch panel is replaced
3 When the touch panel control printed circuit board is replaced
4 Memory is all cleared.
371
D Parameter setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 DTPCL
[Data type] Bit

#5 (DTPCL) The compensation function for the touch panel on the display is:
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
D Method of compensation 1 Set bit 5 (DTPCL) of parameter No. 3113 to 1.
2 Press function key <SYSTEM>.
3 Pressing the continuous menu key several times displays soft key [TP
CAL].
4 Pressing soft key [TP CAL] displays the touch panel compensation
screen.
CALIBRATION OF TOUCH PANEL

PLEASE PUSH CALIBRATED POINTS.
IF CALIBRATION IS ENDED, PLEASE PUSH <INPUT> KEY.
IF CALIBRATION IS CANCELED, PLEASE PUSH <CAN> KEY.
IF OPERATION IS ENDED, PLEASE PUSH FUNCTION KEY.
5 Press the nine compensation points (marked with +) with touch panel
pen. You may press the nine points in any order. When you press a
+ mark correctly, the + mark blinks. When you press a + point
incorrectly, the message CALIBRATED POINT DOES NOT
MATCH, PLEASE PUSH AGAIN. appears.
6 After pressing all of the nine compensation points, press the
<INPUT> key to terminate compensation. To cancel compensation
or start all over again, press the <CAN> key.
7 Upon normal termination, the message CALIBRATION WAS
ENDED. appears.
8 Pressing the function key exits from the touch panel compensation
screen, and terminates or stops compensation operation.
9 Upon termination of compensation operation, set bit 5 (DTPCL) of
parameter No. 3113 to 0.
372
4.5 By changing the setting (rotary switch) on an expansion module, a

connection can be made to skip an expansion module or expansion
DISTRIBUTED I/O modules as shown below.
SETTING
Basic module 1
Basic module 1
Basic module 1
Basic module 2
Basic module 3
Basic module 2
Basic module 3
Basic module 2
Basic module 3
Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
When expansion module 1 is When expansion module 2 is When expansion modules 1 and
skipped skipped 2 are skipped
Method of setting (control and setting method)

A control (rotary switch) is provided on the location shown below of each
expansion module. When changing the setting, turn the rotary switch
with a flatblade screwdriver with a tip diameter of about 2.5 mm.
Each setting position of the rotary switch has the meaning as indicated
below.
Setting Indication Meaning of setting
position
0 0 Standard setting. The rotary switch is set to this

position at the time of shipment from FANUC.
1 Set the rotary switch of an expansion module to this

position when the one preceding expansion module
is skipped.
373
Setting Indication Meaning of setting

position
2 2 Set the rotary switch of an expansion module to this

position when the two preceding expansion mod-
ules are skipped.
3 Setting prohibited
4~F 4, , 6, , 4, 8, or C has the effect of 0.

8, , A, , 5, 9, or D has the effect of 1.
C, , E, , 6, A, or E has the effect of 2.
7, B, or F has the effect of 3.
Examples of setting
(When expansion module 1 is skipped)

Set the rotary switch of expansion module 2
to setting position = 1. Do not change the
Basic module 1
Basic module 2
Basic module 3
setting (setting position = 0) of expansion
Basic module
module 3.
(When expansion module 1 and expansion

module 2 are skipped)
Basic module 1
to setting position = 2.
Basic module 2
Basic module 3
Basic module
(When expansion module 2 is skipped)

to setting position = 1. Do not change the
setting (setting position = 0) of expansion
Basic module 1
Basic module 2
Basic module 3
Basic module
module 1.
This function was not available initially, but was recently added. This
function became available, depending on the type of module, as indicated
below.
Expansion module B (DI/DO = A03B0815C003 Available starting with shipment
24/16, without a manual pulse in June 1998 and later
generator interface)
Expansion module C (DO = 16, A03B0815C004 Available starting with shipment

24A output) in August 1998 and later
Expansion module D (analog A03B0815C005 Available starting with shipment

input) in August 1998 and later
374
NOTE
To expansion module A (DI/DO = 24/16, with a manual pulse
generator interface) (A03B0815C002), a rotary switch is
added as the other modules are modified. However,
expansion module A is always installed at the location of
expansion module 1, so that the setting of expansion
module A need not be changed.
375
4.6
REPLACING FUSES
WARNING
ON VARIOUS UNITS Before replacement of a blown fuse, the cause of the blown
fuse must be corrected. So, fuse replacement work must be
done only by a person who is trained in the related
maintenance and safety requirements. When opening the
cabinet and replacing a fuse inside, be careful not to touch
the highvoltage circuits (marked with and fitted with an
insulating cover). Touching the uncovered highvoltage
circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
For the specification of the fuse of each unit, see the list of consumables
in Appendix B.
376

on the connector panel
I/O modules
Fuse
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 1
Basic module
Cable for the I/O Link (A03B0815C001)
Cable for a manual pulse generator
NOTE
No fuse is provided on the expansion modules. A fuse is
provided on the basic module only.
377

on the operators panel
I/O modules
I/O connector
JD1A
JD1B
JA3
Fuse
Power supply connector
This drawing is for A20B20020470, A20B20020520, and

A20B20020521.

on the operators panel
connection units
15mm
4f5MM CP1
336mm 50mm 10
MM
12 12
3.2A FUSE
CP1
JD1B
43
JD1A
CP61
5A FUSE 35
154mm
120mm
155
17.78mm
CM4
CMB4 CM3 CM2 CM1
MR20RM
CMB3 CM52 CM51
MR50RM MR50RM MR50RM
11.72
20 50 50 50
mm
31.05mm 46.99mm 88.9mm 88.9mm 66.16mm

7MM 322mm Approx.
100mm
This drawing is for A20B22000660, A202200661, A16B22020730, and A16B22020731.
378
D Fuse mounting locations

on the machine
operators panel
interface unit
CM26
FU1
CPD1
FU3
FU2
CM17
JD1A
JD1B
CM16 CM15
FU1: Fuse for +24V (for protection of generalpurpose DO and the power supply of this printed circuit board)
FU2: Fuse for +5V (for protection of the IC power supply and manual pulse generator)
FU3: Fuse for +5E (for protection of generalpurpose DI)
This drawing is for A16B22010110.
NOTE
FU2 is not mounted with Edition 05A and later.

on the distributed I/O
machine operators
Power
panels Fuse connector
JA3
JD1A
JD1B
This drawing is for A02B0236C140 and A02B0236C141.
379

on the separate detector
interface unit
Power
connector
Optical
Fuse connector
This drawing is for A02B0236C203
380
4.7 The control units and various peripheral units supplied from FANUC are
designed assuming that those units are accommodated in enclosed
ENVIRONMENTAL cabinets. The cabinets mentioned here include:
CONDITIONS D Cabinet that is manufactured by a machine tool builder to house
OUTSIDE CABINET control units and peripheral units
D Operation pendant that is manufactured by a machine tool builder to
house control units and an operators panel
D Similar products
The table below indicates the environment conditions for installing
control units in these cabinets.
Condition Display Display Display LCD
LCD stand mounted type
mounted alone type control unit
type control control unit with the per-
unit and dis- sonal computer
play unit (ex- function and
cluding units data server
with a data function
server)
Ambient Operating 0C to 58C 0C to 55C 5C to 53C

temperature
of units Storage and 20C to 60C
transportation
Change in 1.1 degrees C/minute max. 0.3 degrees C/

temperature minute max.
Humidity Normal Relative humidity: 75% or less Relative humidity:

No condensation 10% to 75%
No condensation
Short term Relative humidity: 95% or less Relative humidity:

(not exceeding No condensation 10% to 90%
1 month) No condensation
Vibration Operating 0.5 G or less
Nonoperating 1.0 G or less
Height above Operating ~1000m ~1000m

sea level
Nonoperating ~12000m ~12000m
Atmosphere Normal machine plant environment

(When a control unit is used in an environment where
the control unit is exposed to a high level of dust and a
high concentration of coolants an organic solutions, a
separate study is required.)
381
4.8 The CNC is becoming increasingly smaller as the surface mount

technology and custom LSI technology advance.
COUNTERMEA-
SURES AGAINST In many cases, as the CNC becomes more compact, the mounting
NOISE locations of its constituent units become closer to a noise source in the
power magnetics cabinet.
In general, noise is generated by electrostatic coupling, electromagnetic

induction, or a grounding loop, and is induced into the CNC.
The CNC incorporates sufficient countermeasures against external noise.

However, it is difficult to measure the level and frequency of noise
quantitatively, and many unknown factors are involved. So, to improve
the operation stability of a CNC machine tool system, noise generation
must be minimized, and the induction of generated noise into the CNC
must be suppressed.
For design of equipment including a power magnetics cabinet, take these

countermeasures on the machine side against noise into consideration.
4.8.1 The cables used with a CNC machine tool are classified as indicated
Separation of Signal below. Handle the cables of each group according to the descriptions in
the Action column.
Lines
Group Signal Action
Primary side AC power line Bind the cables of this group sep-
arately from the cables of groups
Secondary side AC power line B and C(*1), or electromagneti-
cally shield the cables of this
AC/DC power lines (including servo motor group from the cables of groups
A and spindle motor power lines) B and C(*2). According to the de-
scriptions of noise suppressors
AC/DC solenoid in Section 3.6.4, attach a spark
killer or diode to the solenoid and
AC/DC relay relay.
DC solenoid (24 VDC) Attach a diode to the DC solenoid

and relay.
Bind the cables of this group sep-
DC relay (24 VDC) arately from the cables of group
A, or electromagnetically shield
B DIDO cable between I/O unit power mag- the cables of this group from the
netics cabinets cables of group A.
Separate the cables of this group
from the cables of group C as far
DIDO cable between I/O unit machines as possible. Shielding is recom-
mended.
CNCI/O unit cable Bind the cables of this group sep-
arately from the cables of group
Cables for position loopback and velocity
A, or electromagnetically shield
loopback
the cables of this group from the
CNCspindle amplifier cable cables of group A.
Separate the cables of this group
Position coder cable from the cables of group B as far
C as possible.
Manual pulse generator cable
Shielding according to Section
CNCMDI cable(*3) 3.6.5 is required.
RS232C and RS422 cables
Battery cable
Other cables whose shielding is specified
382
NOTE
1 Separate binding is to separate the bound cables of one
group at least 10 cm from the bound cables of another
group.
2 Electromagnetic shielding is to shield the bound cables of
one group from the bound cables of another group with a
grounded metal (iron) plate.
3 If the CNCMDI cable is not longer than 30 cm, shielding is
not required.
Power magnetics cabinet

Operators panel cabinet
24 VDC Spindle Servo I/O CNC

power amplifier amplifier unit control
supply unit
To motor, Duct
etc.
Cables of group A Cables of groups B and C
Crosssectional view of the duct
Group A Groups B and C
Shield
383
4.8.2 With a CNC machine tool, three ground systems are used.
Grounding (1) Signal ground system (SG)
Signal ground (SG) provides a reference voltage (0 V) for the electric
signal system.
(2) Frame ground system (FG)

The purposes of frame ground (FG) are to ensure safety and to provide
shielding from external and internal noises. Specifically, the frames
of equipment, unit cases, panels, interunit interface cables, and so
forth are shielded.
(3) Protective earth (PE)

The protective earth (PE) is designed so that the protective grounds
provided between the units are connected to ground at one point from
a system point of view.
384
Display LCDmounted type i series CNC
Pendant box
Distributed amplifier
I/O
CNC
AC power Frame
supply
24 V power Operators
supply panel
AC input
Frame
PE (Cabinet earth plate) Machine cabinet
Display standalone type i series CNC Pendant box
Distributed amplifier CNC

I/O
Display unit
AC power AC power Frame

supply supply
24 V power Operators
supply panel
AC input
Frame
PE (Cabinet earth plate) Machine cabinet
Connection line for grounding
Connection line for protective earth (PE)
Notes on ground system D The grounding resistance of the protective earth (PE) must be 100
wiring ohms or less (classD grounding).
D The connection cable for the protective earth (PE) needs to have a
crosssectional area sufficient for flowing an accidental current that
flows to the protective earth (PE) when an accident such as a short
circuit occurs. (In general, a crosssectional area equal to or greater
than that of the AC power line is required.)
D As a connection cable for the protective earth (PE), use a cable
integrated with an AC power line so that power is not fed when the
ground wire is disconnected.
385
4.8.3
Signal Ground (SG)
Connection of Control
Unit
M4 stud
Ground cable
Wire of 2 mm2 or more
Connect the 0 V line inside the control unit to the ground plate of the
cabinet through the signal ground terminal (shown above).
For the ground terminal locations of other units, see the external unit
views in the appendix.
386
Display standalone type control unit
For a oneslot rack For a threeslot rack
Ground terminal
for signals
Ground terminal for signals M4 (Screw hole)

(Faston terminal)
M3 (Screw hole)
Ground wire
2 mm2 or more
Ground plate
of the cabinet
PE
Connect the 0V line of the electronic circuitry in the control unit to the
ground plate of the cabinet via the ground terminal for signals.
Note that the method of ground connection varies, depending on whether

optional slots are provided.
Use a Faston terminal of the FANUC specification A02B0166K330.

See Appendix A.
387
4.8.4 With a power magnetics cabinet, components such as an AC/DC solenoid

Noise Suppressor and AC/DC relay are used. When turned on and off, these components
generate a highenergy pulse voltage due to coil inductance.
Such a pulse voltage is induced into cables, for example, and can interfere
with electric circuitry.
Notes on spark killer D Select a CRtype spark killer (for use with AC circuitry) (A varistor
selection has a function for clamping the peak voltage of a pulse voltage, but
cannot suppress a spikelike voltage. For this reason, the use of a
CRtype spark killer is recommended.)
D As the CR values of a spark killer, use the following with the
steadystate coil current (I (A)) and DC resistance used as references:
1) Resistance (R): Coil DC resistance
I2 I2
2) Electrostatic capacitance (C): to (mF)
10 20
I: Coil steadystate current (A)
R C
Equivalent circuit of spark killer
Spark killer
AC relay
Motor
Spark killer
Install a spark killer near a motor, relay, and coil.
NOTE
Use a CRtype noise suppressor. A varistor has a function
for clamping the peak voltage of a pulse voltage, but cannot
suppress a spikelike voltage.
Diode (used for DC circuitry)
Diode As a guideline, select a diode which has

a breakdown voltage about two times
greater than an applied voltage, and al-
DC relay lows the flow of a current about two
times higher.
388
4.8.5 According to the figure below, clamp all cables that require shielding and
Cable Clamping and are run to the CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, and so forth. This
clamping method not only secures cables, but also shields cables. Cable
Shielding clamping and shielding are a key to stable system operation. Always
perform cable clamping and shielding according to the method described
here.
As shown below, peel off a part of the outer sheath of each cable so that
the shield cover is exposed, then press and retain the exposed part of the
shield against the ground plate with a clamp.
Install a ground plate manufactured by the machine tool builder, as shown

below.
Ground plate
Cable
Clamp
40mm80mm
Fig. 4.8.5(a) Cable clamp (1)
389

Mounting plate of the machine

Control unit

Ground plate

Clamp
Shield cover

Fig. 4.8.5(b) Cable clamp (2)
Prepare a ground plate as shown below.
Ground terminal
(to be connected
to ground)
Clamp mounting hole
Mounting hole
Fig. 4.8.5(c) Ground plate
For a ground plate, use an iron plate that is as thick as 2 mm or more and
is plated with nickel.
390
Ground plate
8mm
12mm
20mm
Fig. 4.8.5(d) Ground plate hole diagram
Reference: Outline drawing of the clamp
55 mm maximum
28mm
6mm
17mm
Fig. 4.8.5(e) Outline drawing of clamp
Ordering code of the clamp: A02B0124K001 (set of 8 clamps)
391
4.9 An MDI unit usable with a 12.1 LCD has a connector panel that allows
various interface connectors to be placed on the front. The connector
NOTES ON USING panel has a cover. The cover is opened and closed when the connector
THE MDI UNIT panel is used. Be careful not to have your fingers caught when
opening/closing (particularly opening) the cover.
Connector panel cover MDI unit: A02B-0236-C321#xxx
CAUTION
Be careful not to have your fingers caught when
opening/closing the connector panel on the MDI unit.
Be careful not to have

your fingers caught.
392
B63005EN/02 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
5 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
After you change a SRAM module, you must set various data again.
This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the parameters,
the part programs and the tool offset values.
5.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR

INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
5.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
5.3 INPUT/OUTPUT SUPER CAP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . 405
5.4 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING CAPII DATA
(16iT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
5.5 DUMP / RESTORE OF CAPII DATA (16iT) . . . . 419
5.6 CLEARING CAPII DATA (16iT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
5.7 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE
ALL IO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
5.8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT USING
A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
393
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B63005EN/02
5.1
SETTING
PARAMETERS
FOR INPUT/OUTPUT
D Setting procedure of 1. Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.
parameters
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key several times or press soft key [SETING] to display
SETTING (HANDY) screen.
3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press 1 and INPUT
keys in this order. Here alarm 100 will be displayed.

4. Press SYSTEM key several times to display the following screen.
PARAMETER (SETTING) O1234N12345

0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001 FCV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 RMV MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL
S 0 T0000
REF **** *** *** 10:15:30

[ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ ]
To make the cursor display in bit unit,

press the cursor key or .
5. Press soft key[(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is

displayed.
1) Soft key [NO. SRH] : Searched by number.
Examination) Parameter number [NO. SRH].
2) Soft key [ON : 1] : Item with cursor position is set to 1
(bit parameter)
3) Soft key [OFF : 0] : Item with cursor position is set to 0
(bit parameter)
4) Soft key [+INPUT] : Input value is added to the value at cursor
(word type)
5) Soft key [INPUT] : Input value is replaced with the value at
cursor (word type)
6) Soft key [READ] : Parameters are input from reader/puncher
interface.
7) Soft key [PUNCH] : Parameters are output to reader/puncher
interface.
6. After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE on
the SETTING screen to 0. Press RESET to release alram 100.
394
7. Convenient method
1) To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor key or ,
then the cursor becomes bit length and you can set parameters bit
by bit (Bit parameter only).
2) To set data consecutively, use EOB key.
(Ex.1) 1 2 3 4 EOB 4 5 6 7 EOB 9
9 9 9 INPUT
This key sequence sets data as follows:

0 1234
0 4567
0 9999
0 0
(Ex.2) 1 2 3 4 EOB EOB 9 9 9 9 INPUT

0 1234
0 0
0 9999
0 0
3) To set the same data sequentially, press = .
(Ex.) 1 2 3 4 EOB a EOB a INPUT

0 1234
0 1234
0 1234
0 0
4) Bit parameters can be set as follows:
(Ex.) 1 1 EOB a EOB a INPUT

0000 0000 00011000
00000000 00011000
00000000 00011000
00000000 00000000
8. After the required parameters are set, set PARAMETER WRITE to
0.
395
5.2 The main CPU memorized the following data.

Outputting the data 1/O device while the CNC is rurnning normally
INPUTTING/
(1) CNC paramter
OUTPUTTING
(2) PMC parameter
DATA
(3) Pitch error compensation amount
(4) Custom macro variable values
(5) Tool compensation amount
(6) Part program (machining program, custom macro program)
5.2.1 Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status.

Confirming the Parameters required for output are as follows :
Parameters Required for
Data Output
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO
#1 (ISO) 0 : Output with EIA code

1 : Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)
0020 Selection of I/O channel
0 : Channel 1 (JD36A of mother board)

2 : Channel 2 (JD36B of mother board)
3 : Channel 3 (JD38A of serial communication board)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
#7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when data is output.

1 : Feed is not output when data is output.
#3 (ASI)l 0 : EIA or ISO code is used for input/output data.
1 : ASCII code is used.
#0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.
l 1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
396
0102 pecification number of input/output device
0 RS232C (control codes DC1 to DC4 used)

1 FANUC bubble cassette B1/B2
2 FANUC Floppy cassette adapter F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate. FANUC FA card adapter ,FANUC
Floppy cassette adapter, FSPH
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR, FSPG, FSPH
0103 Baud Rate
1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400
2: 100 6: 300 l10: 4800
3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600
4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
5.2.2 In case of PPR, steps 2 and 3 are not required.

Outputting CNC 1. Select EDIT mode.
Parameters 2. PROG Press PROG key and soft key PRGRM to select a program text.
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key .

And then, put out the head of file by pressing [FSRH] 0 [EXEC].
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PARAM] to display parameter screen.
5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] ,and soft key .

6. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC],and the parameters are started
to be output.
397
5.2.3 1. Select MDI mode.

Outputting PMC 2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key then soft key [SETTING] to select a setting screen.
Parameters
3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and input 1 and INPUT .
At this time, alarm 100 will be generated.
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL]
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set the first bit to 1.
X X X X X X 1 X INPUT
Where, mark x is a former value

Thus, data input/output screen has been selected.
7. Select EDIT mode.
8. Press soft key then key .
9. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters on I/O.
Item selection cursor moves to the following item after data of an item
is set.
10.In CHANNEL NO item, input 1 INPUT to select I/O channel 1.
11.In DEVICE item, press soft key [FDCAS] to select the floppy cassette.
12.In KIND DATA item, press soft key [PARAM].
13.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [WRITE].
14.In FILE No item, specify a file name. In this example input as follows:
@ P M C INPUT
15.Press soft key [EXEC]. Then PMC parameters are started to be output.
16.After the PMC parameters have been output, set PARAMETER
WRITE to 0.
17.Press RESET to release alarm 100.
5.2.4 1. Select EDIT mode.

Outputting Pitch Error 2. Press SYSTEM key several times, press soft key [PARAM], and
Compensation Amount
[PITCH] to select the SETTING screen for pitch error amount.
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and .
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then pitch error compensation
amount is started to be output.
398
5.2.5 When custom macro function is equipped, values of variable no. 500 and
Outputting Custom later are output.
Macro Variable Values 1. Press OFFSET
SETTING key.
2. Press key and soft key [MACRO] to select custom macro

variable screen.
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then key .
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then custom macro variable
values are output.
5.2.6 1. Select EDIT mode.

Outputting Tool 2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
Compensation Amount
compensation amount screen.
3. Press [(OPRT)] key and soft key .
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] an [EXEC] key, and the tool compensation
amount is started to be output.
5.2.7 1. Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set to the MDI mode and
Outputting Part Program set it to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
#4 (NE9) l 0 : Programs of 9000s are edited.

1 : Programs of 9000s can be protected.
#0 (NE8) l 0 : Programs of 8000s are edited.
1 : Programs of 8000s can be protected.

3. Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to display program
text.
4. Press [(OPRT)] key and press soft key .
5. Input a program number to be output. To output all programs input as:
O 9 9 9 9
6. Press [PUNCH] and [EXEC] key, then program output is started.
399
5.2.8 1. Set to the emergency stop state.

Inputting CNC 2. Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct.
Parameters 1) Press OFFSET/SETTING key several times, and press [SETING]
to display SETTING screen.
2) Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
3) Press SYSTEM key to select the parameter screen.
4)
0020 Selectionof I/O channel
l 0 : Channel 1 (JD36A of mother board)

2 : Channel 2 (JD36B of mother board)
3 : Channel 3 (JD38A of serial communication board)
5)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
#7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when punching out.

1 : Feed is not output when punching out.
#3 (ASI) 0 : EIA or ISO code is used.
1 : ASCII code is used.
#0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.
l 1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
6)
0102 Specification number of I/O device
0 RS232C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.)

1 FANUC Bubble cassette B1/B2
2 FANUCFloppy cassette F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card adapter, FANUC
Floppy casette adapter, FSPH, FANUC Handy File
4 Not used
6 FANUC PPR, FSPG, FSPH
400
7)
0103 Baud rate
1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400
2: 100 6: 300 l10: 4800
3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600
4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key
4. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters are
started.
5. Because alarm 300 will generate for the system with absolute pulse
coder, set parameter 1815#5 to 0.
6. Alarm 300 is issued if the system employs an absolute pulse coder.
In such a case, perform reference position return again.
5.2.9 Set the emergency stop state.

Inputting PMC Operation of 12 is not required when PPR is used.
Parameters 1. Turn off (KEY4=1) the program protect key.
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [SETTING] to select the SETTING
screen.
3. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL].
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set bit 1 to 1.
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 INPUT .
7. Press key and key.

8. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters required for I/O.
Item selection cursor displays the next item after an item is set.
9. In CHANNEL item , press 1 INPUT to select channel 1.
10.In DEVICE item, press [FDCAS] key to select the floppy cassette.
11.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [READ] to input data
12.In FILE NO item, press 2 INPUT to select file no. 2.
13.Press soft key [EXECT] and the PMC parameters are started to be
input.
14.After data has been read, turn off power and turn it on.
401
5.2.10 1. Release the emergency stop and select EDIT mode.

Inputting Pitch Error 2. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1 on the setting screen.
Compensation Amount 3. Press PROG key and soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents.
4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], , [F SRH], and 3 [EXEC] to select

the pitch error compensation file.
5. Press SYSTEM key several times, soft key [PARAM], and
[PITCH] to select the screen for pitch error compensation amount.
6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
7. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then the pitch error
compensation amount is started to be input.
8. After data has been input, press OFFSET
SETTING key twice to display the
SETTING screen and return the PARAMETER WRITE to 0.
5.2.11 If the system is equipped with the custom macro fucntion, input the
Inputting Custom Macro variable values.
For PPR, item 4 is not required.
Variable Values
1. Confirm that EDIT mode is selected.
2. Turn off the program protect key (KEY2=1).
3. Press PROG key then soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents.

a file.
5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key .
6. Press address O , a program number (0001 for example), soft key

[READ] and [EXEC] key, then custom macro variable values are
started to be input.
Input a program number that is not used.
7. Select MEMORY mode on the machine operators panel and press
cycle start button.
When the program is executed, macro variables are set.
8. Press OFFSET
SETTING key, key and soft key [MACRO] to select the custom
macro variable screen.
9. Press 500 and soft key [NO SRH] to display variable number 500 and
confirm the custom macro variables are set correctly.
Of the data displayed, 0 and vacant differ in meaning.
Vacant is an undefined variable. To set vacant, press soft key
[INPUT].
10.Select EDIT mode again.
11.Press PROG key to select the program display screen.
402
12.Press address O and a program number (0001 for example) ,then press
DELETE to delete the program.
5.2.12 Item 4 is not required for PPR.

Inputting Tool 1. Select the EDIT mode.
Compensation Amount 2. Turn off the program protect (KEY=1).
3. Press PROG key, and press soft key[PRGRM] to display the program
contents screen.
the tool compensation amount file.
5. Press OFFSET
SETTING key, and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
compensation amount screen.
6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
7. Press [READ] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.
5.2.13 Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set it to 0.

Inputting Part Programs (Change it in MDI mode).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE RAL
#6 (NPE) When programs are registered in part program storage area, M02,M30
and M99 are:
0 : regarded as the end of program.
l 1 : not regarded as the end of porgram.
#1 (RAL) When programs are registered:
l 0 : All programs are registered.
1 : Only one program is registered.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
#4 (NE9)
l 0 : Programs of 9000s can be edited.
1 : Programs of 9000s are protected.
#0 (NE8)
l 0 : Programs of 8000s can be edited.
1 : Programs of 8000s are protected.
For PPR, item 4 is not required.
403
1. Confirm that mode is EDIT mode.

2. Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1).
3. Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to select a part program
file.
4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [F SRH], and 6 [EXEC] to select
a part program file.
5. Press soft key ,[(OPRT)] and key.
6. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then data input is started.
404
5.3
INPUT/OUTPUT
SUPER CAP DATA
5.3.1 The following operation allows all the data used for Super CAP M to be
Input/Output of input and output in a lump.
Conversational Data in a
1. Confirm the parameters shown below:
Lump(Super CAP M)
P0020: I/O CHANNEL (select I/O device) : 0
P0102: I/O device number : 3
P0103: Baud rate for 4800 bauds : 10
for 9600 bauds : 11
3. Press function key PROG and press soft key [CAP].
4. Press soft key [8] (C.A.P DATA) on the basic menu screen.Serial 16i
Conversational Data Screen
C.A.P. DATA
DATA PRE SET DATA OF PRE

INPUT OR OUTPUT OF DATA TOOLS BEFORE C.A.P.
I/O TOOL
PROGRAMMING
TOOL DISPLAY AND SET

FILE VARIOUS DATA OF
TOOLS REGISTERED
TOOL DISPLAY THE DIREC-

DRCTRY TORY OF TOOLS IN
TOOL FILE
DEF. DIVIDE DISPLAY THE DIREC-

DISPLAY DEFAULT DATA TOLDIR
FILE TORY OF DIVIDE
TOOLS IN TOOL FILE
DISPLAY A LIST OF TOOL

TOOL USED F.S. DISPLAY AND SET
USED SET TORDER FOR TOR- FILE DATA OF CUTTING
DER CHANGE CONDITION
SELECT FROM SOFT KEY
< DATA DEF. TOOL PRE TOOL TOOL DIVIDE F.S.

I/O FILE USED TOOL FILE DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE
5. Press soft key [DATA I/O].
405
Series16i Conversational Data Screen
DATA I/O
@ READ DATA I/O PARA GUIDE

READ I/O CHANNEL =0
@ PUNCH EXEC I/O DEVICE NO. =3
OR
@ ALL CAP DATA PUNCH

@ DEFAULT DATA EXEC
@ PRETOOL LIST
@ TOOL FILE
@ CUT COND FILE
SELECT FROM SOFT-KEY
< FLOPPY READ PUNCH ALL DEF. PRE TOOL F.S.

DIR DATA FILE TOOL FILE FILE
6. Press soft key [READ] or [PUNCH].

7. Press soft key [ALL DATA].
8. For read, input a file no. and press soft key [READ EXEC].(Specify
a file no. for all data).
READ FILE NO. = >
< FLOPPY PUNCH READ ALL DEF. PRE TOOL F.S.

DIR DATA FILE TOOL FILE FILE
EXEC
For punch, press soft key [PUNCH EXEC].
SELECT FROM SOFT KEYS
< FLOPPY READ PUNCH ALL DEF. PRE TOOL F.S.

DIR EXEC DATA FILE TOOL FILE FILE
The above operation reads and punches default data, pretool list, tool file
and F.S. file in a lump.
406
5.3.2 You can input and output files individually.

Input and Output of Each Execute the same operations from step 1 to 6 in the previous section 3.3.1.
File (Super CAP M) (1) Reading or Punching default files
7 Press [DEF. FILE].
8 @ For reading, input a file no. for default data and press soft key
[READ EXEC]. (Specify a file number of default file).
@ For punching, press [PUNCH EXEC].
(2) Reading or punching pretool list
7 Press PRETOOL.
8 @ For reading, press a file number and soft key [READ EXEC].
(Specify a file number of pretool list).
@ For punching, press soft key [PUNCH EXEC].
(3) Reading or Punching tool file
7 Press TOOL FILE.
8 @ For reading, press a file number and pres soft key
[READ EXEC]. (Specify file number of tool file).
(4) Reading or Punching F, S file
7 Press F.S. FILE.
8 @ For reading, press a file no. and press soft key
[READ EXEC].(Specify a file no. of F.S. FILE).
5.3.3 This feature allows NC parameters, offsets, NC programs, PMC

Input and output of parameters and so on to be input/output from/to a general I/O device such
as FANUC cassette adapter or the like.
CAP Data
(Super CAP T) 1. Data that can be input/output
(1) NC parameters: All parameters except for optional parameters
and a parameter that specifies the no. of
axes.(No. 1010)
(2) Offset values: All data of wear/geometry data
(3) NC programs: All the NC programs
(4) PMC parameters: All data of counter, keep relay, timer and other
data
(5) Tool File: All data of tool data file, F.S. data, roughness
data, pretool list and chuck/tailstock figure
data.
(6) CAP program: All the CAP program (Cannot input/output
individual program)
CAUTION
You should input/output NC parameters separately. You
can input/output other data in a lump.
407
Output of conversutional Operation for outputting data in a lump

data in a lump (1) Connect external I/O device and set necessary parameters.
@ Channel at NC side=0
@ Stop bit=2
@ Parity=No
@ Length of character=8
@ Baud rate=Depends on NC parameter no. 0103.
@ XON/OFF control=Yes
(2) Select EDIT mode. For path 2, select screen of tool post 1.
(3) Display basic menu screen, press [+] key to display the 2 nd page
soft keys.
(4) Press [17] to display the following data I/O menu screen.
[Data I/O menu Screen]
DATA I/O SCREEN [CAP:HEAD-L]
SINGLE SINGLE
1. NC PARAMETER (HD1) 7. NC PARAMETER (HD2)
2. NC OFFSET (HD1) 5. NC OFFSET (HD2) 8. CAP TOOL FILE

3. NC PROGRAM (HD1) 6. NC PROGRAM (HD2) 9. CAP PROGRAM
4. PMC PARAMETER
< READ PUNCH I/O

SET UP
CAUTION
For onepath control CNC, data select menu on tool post 2
is not displayed.
408
(5) Press [PUNCH] and the following screen is displayed.

PUNCH
SINGLE SINGLE
2. NC OFFSET(HD1) 5. NC OFFSET(HD2) 8. CAP TOOL FILE

3. NC PROGRAM(HD1) 6. NC PROGRAM(HD2) 9. CAP PROGRAM
4. PMC PARAMETER
SELECT THE DATA WHICH YOU WANT TO PUNCH OUT
< +
NC NC NC PMC CAP CAP- NC HD2 NC HD2 NC HD2 SELECT
PARAM OFFSET PROG PARAM TOOL PROG PARAM OFFSET PROG END
NOTE
For onepath control CNC, the following soft keys are
displayed.
< +
NC NC NC PMC CAP CAP- I/O
PREPG SELECT
PARAM OFFSET PROG PARAM TOOL PROG SET UP END
(6) Press a soft key corresponding to data to be output. Selected data

is displayed by green character in reverse video.
Select all the data to be output and press [SELECT END].
CAUTION
NC parameters can be output only separately. If NC
parameters are selected to be output with other data, other
data is canceled.
409
[NC PROG] or [NC HD2 PROG]

(For path 2, when [NC PROG] is pressed, the following screen is
displayed.)

PUNCH
SINGLE SINGLE REGISTEREPROGRAMS
1. NC PARAMETER (HD1) 7. NC PARAMETER (HD2) ***HEAD 1***

00012
00110
00120
2. NC OFFSET (HD1) 5. NC OFFSET (HD2) 8. CAP TOOL FILE 00150
00160
4. PMC PARAMETER
SELECT THE DATA WHICH YOU WANT TO PUNCH OUT
< ALL ALL SELECT CANCEL SELECT

SELECT CANCEL END
[ALL SELECT] Press this key to output all the programs.When you
press this key, the following menu is displayed.
EXEC REALLY? YES: [EXEC], NO: [CANCEL]]
<
EXEC CANCEL
To execute punching all the programs, press [EXEC] and when it is not
needed, press [CANCEL].
[ALL CANCEL] Press this key to cancel outputting all the data.
When this key is pressed, the same soft key as
when [ALL SELECT] is pressed is displayed.
To execute cancelling, press [EXEC]; to cancel
cancelling, press [CANCEL].
[SELECT] When you specify a NC program to be punched,
move the cursor to the program number and
press this key.
[CANCEL] To cancel outputting NC programs, press this
key.
[SELECT END] When you finsh specification of punching, press
this key.
410
(7) The following screen is displayed when you press [SELECT

END]. To start punching, press [EXEC] and to cancel punching,
press [CANCEL].
PUNCH
SINGLE SINGLE
2. NC OFFSET (HD1) 5. NCOFFSET (HD2) 8. CAP TOOL FILE

3. NC PROGRAM (HD1) 6. NCPROGRAM (HD2) 9. CAP PROGRAM
4. PMC PARAMETER
EXEC REALLY? YES: [EXEC] NO [CANCEL]
< I/O EXEC CANCEL

SET UP
When data punching starts, OUTPUTTING blinks on the lower

right corner of the screen. The data being output is indicated by
blinks of yellow characters in reverse video. When data outputting
finishes, the data is shown in blue color. If outputting finishes with
an error generated, the data is shown in red.
NOTE
1 The data format output by the above funciton is different
from the data format input/output in an individual operation.
Therefore, output data by this function cannot be used for
inputting.
2 Data format is different between 1path and 2path for
twopath control.
3 The data that can be input by the input/output in a lump
function is limited to data output by the same function.
4 The range of PMC parameters to be output can be specified
by the following NC parameter.
NC parameter
9090 PMCIOS
PMCIOS
: The start address number of D area of the PMC parameters to be output.
9091 PMCIOE
PMCIOE
: The end address number of D area of PMC parameters to be output.
No.9090(PMCIOS)=0, No.9091(PMCIOE)=0
: All the PMC parameters including keep relays, counters, timers and data
are output.
No.9090(PMCIOS)=No.9091(PMCIOE) : 0
: D area data (one data) of the specified address number is output.
No.9090(PMCIOS) < No.9091(PMCIOE)
: D area data of PMC parameters from the specified starting address
number to the ending address number are output.
No.9090(PMCIOS) > No.9091(PMCIOE)
: All the data in D area are output.
411
Input of conversational Data output by using the function for inputting/outputting data in a lump
data in a lump can also be input by using that function.
1. Set optional parameters and the parameter for specifying the number
of axes (parameter No. 1010) manually before reading NC parameters.
2. In the same way as output operation, connect an external I/O device
and set necessary parameters, such as device selection.
3. Select EDIT mode. For a twopath system, select the screen for tool
post 1.
4. Release protection for each data item to be input.
1) NC parameter: Set PARAMETER WRITE in the setting data
to 1.
2) Offset: Turn off offset data protection (KEY1 = 1).
3) NC program: Turn off program protection (KEY3 = 1).
4) PMC parameter: Set PARAMETER WRITE in the setting
data to 1.
5) Tool file: Turn off offset data protection (KEY1 = 1).
6) Conversational program: Turn off program protection (KEY3 = 1).
5. Display the data input/output menu screen.
6. Press [READ] to display the following screen.
READ
SINGLE SINGLE
1. NC PARAMETER(HD1) 7. NC PARAMETER(HD2)
2. NC OFFSET (HD1) 5. NC OFFSET (HD2) 8. CAP TOOL FILE

4. PMC PARAMETER
SELECT THE FILE WHICH YOU WANT TO READ
< NC OTH-
NC HD2 I/O PRE EXE
PARAM PARAM
ERS PARAM PG C
CAUTION
1 For a singlepath system, the data selection menu for tool
post 2 is not displayed.
2 When the I/O device is other than the FANUC cassette
adapter, soft keys [NC PARAM], [OTHERS], and [NC HD2
PARAM] are not displayed.
7. Make preparations for the data to be read (including a search for the
beginning of the data) when an I/O device other than the FANUC
cassette adapter is used.
When the FANUC cassette adapter is used, the data can be retrieved
automatically, such that no preparation is required.
412
8. To input NC parameters for tool post 1, press [NC PARAM]. To input

NC parameters for tool post 2, press [NC HD2 PARAM].
To input data other than NC parameters, press [OTHERS]. The
selected data is indicated by green characters in reverse video. When
input of data other than parameters is specified, however, all the data
is indicated by green characters in reverse video because the data to be
actually read is not determined beforehand.
9. Press [EXEC] to display the following soft keys.
EXEC REALLY YES: [EXEC]
NO; [CANCEL]
< I/O EXE CAN-
SET C CEL
UP
10.Press [EXEC] to start data input or press [CAN] to cancel data input.
For data other than NC parameters, if multiple data items have been
output at a time, they can also be input at a time.
During data input, INPUTTING blinks on the lowerright corner
of the screen. The data being input is displayed by blinks of yellow
characters in reverse video. When data input terminates normally, it
is indicated by blue characters; if data input terminates with an error,
the data is indicated by red characters.
413
5.3.4 Files can be read and punched individually.

Input and Output of
Each File
(Super CAP T)
Output of conversational Conversational machining programs can be output and saved to an
machining programs external memory unit via a reader/punch interface.
After switching to EDIT mode, display the registered program list screen
for editing. Enter the number of the machining program to be output using
numeric keys, or position the cursor to the program number then press
[PUNCH]. The following soft keys used to confirm operation are
displayed.
PROGRAM NO. = 1234 SFTKY
INITAL SET FC25 BAR

PROC(01) BAR OUTER END HEADL ROUGH T0505
PROC(02) BAR OUTER END HEADL FIN T0505
PROC(03) TRANS
PROC(04) BAR OUTER END HEADR ROUGH T0505
PROC(05) BAR OUTER END HEADR FIN T0505
< CAN- EXE

CEL C
When [EXEC] is pressed, punchout of the specified program starts.

When [CAN] is pressed, punchout operation is canceled and the
previous state is restored.
To output all the machining programs, specify 9999 for the program
number.
When the output device is the FANUC cassette adapter, a new file is
created immediately after the existing files.
Upon the start of outputting machining programs, OUTPUTTING
blinks at the bottom of the screen, until the output operation ends.
NOTE
Only a machining program created with the conversational
input function can be output by applying the above
procedure.
A machining program created using the NC program screen
cannot be output by applying the above procedure.
414
Input of conversational The machining program punched out by applying the procedure described
machining programs on the previous page can be read into the NC via a reader/punch interface.
Before attempting to read a program, release the memory protect switch
on the machine operators panel.
After switching to EDIT mode, display the registered program list screen
for editing, then press [READ]. The following message prompting the
user to input the file number is displayed, as well as the soft keys used to
confirm operation.
PROGRAM NO. = SFTKY
INITAL SET FC25 BAR

PROC(01) BAR OUTER END HEADL ROUGH T0505
PROC(02) BAR OUTER END HEADL FIN T0505
PROC(03) TRANS
PROC(04) BAR OUTER END HEADR ROUGH T0505
PROC(05) BAR OUTER END HEADR FIN T0505
< CAN- EXE

CEL C
Enter the number of the file containing the machining program to be input,
using numeric keys, then press [EXEC]. Reading of the machining
program starts. When the input device is FANUC PPR, press [EXEC]
without inputting a file number.
When [CAN] is pressed, read operation is canceled and the previous state
is restored.
Upon the start of inputting machining programs, INPUTTING blinks
at the bottom of the screen, until the input operation ends.
NOTE
Only a machining program created with the conversational
input function can be input by applying the above
procedure.
A machining program created using the NC program screen
cannot be input by applying the above procedure.
415
Output of conversational The tool data file, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pretool
tool setting data list, and chuck/tailstock figure data can be punched out to an external I/O
device.
(1) Connect an external I/O device and set necessary parameters, such as
device selection.
(2) Select EDIT mode.
(3) Display the tool data menu screen, then press [+]. The following soft
keys appear. Press [PUNCH].
< 10 11 READ PUN CLEA \
CH R
Input of conversational The setting data punched out in the previous section can be read.
tool setting data (1) Connect an external I/O device and set necessary parameters, such as
device selection.
(2) Set PARAMETER WRITE in the setting data to 1.
(3) When the FANUC cassette adapter is used, set the file number for
parameter No. 9887 (TLFLNO).
(4) Display the tool data menu screen and place the system in the
emergency stop state.
(5) Press [READ].
Clearing of The tool data file, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pretool
conversational tool list, and chuck/tailstock figure data can be cleared.
setting data (1) Set PARAMETER WRITE in the setting data to 1.
(2) Display the tool data menu screen. After switching to EDIT mode,
place the system in the emergency stop state.
(3) Press [CLEAR].
416
5.4 INITIAL SCREEN
INPUTTING/ Symbolic
OUTPUTTING CAPII FAPT TURN
DATA (16iT)
PRESS [FAMILY PRESS [DATA

PROGRAM] SET] KEY
**FAMILY PROGRAM** **PARAMETER & DATA SET**
1. FAMILY PROGRAM OUTPUT 1. SYSTEM DATA SETTING

2. FAMILY PROGRAM INPUT 2. SETTING DATA CORRECTION
: 3. MATERIAL DATA CORRECTION
: :
: :
:
4 or 5 INPUT 1 INPUT
(REFER TO TABLE 1) (REFER TO TABLE 2)
**SYSTEM DATA SETTING &

OUTPUT/INPUT**
1. SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING

2. SYSTEM PARAMETER OUTPUT
3. SYSTEM PARAMETER INPUT
:
:
:
(REFER TO TABLE 3)
417
[TABLE 1] Input/Output of Family Program
I/O Item Operation on I/O Remarks

device
Input Family program 2, n [INPUT] n=PFANUC PPR

n=BFANUC Cassette
Sub cycle 5, n [INPUT]
n=CSub Memory
Output Family program 1, n [INPUT] *When n is omitted, parameter
Sub cycle 4, n [INPUT] no. 15 becomes valid.
[TABLE 2] Input/Output of Material Data
I/O Item Operation on I/O Remarks

device
Input Material data 5, n [INPUT] n=PFANUC PPR

n=BFANUC Cassette
Tooling information 8, n [INPUT]
n=CSub Memory
Output Material data 4, n [INPUT] *When n is omitted, parameter
no. 15 becomes valid.
Tooling information 7, n [INPUT]
[Table 3] Input/Output of system parameters and other data.
Item Operation on I/O Remarks

I/O
device
System parameter 3, n [INPUT] 1[INPUT][SAVE END]

MTF 7, n [INPUT] 5[INPUT][SAVE END]
Input/
Tool data 11, n [INPUT] 9[INPUT][SAVE END]
Read
Setting 14, n [INPUT]
Graphic data 16, n [INPUT]
n=PFANUC PPR
System parameter 2, n [INPUT] n=BFANUC Cassette
Out- MTF 6, n [INPUT]
put/
Regis- Tool data 10, n [INPUT]
tera-
Setting 13, n [INPUT]
tion
Graphic data 15, n [INPUT]
System parameter 4, n [INPUT]
Colla-
MTF 8, n [INPUT]
tion
Tool data 12, n [INPUT]
418
5.5 The sub memory is stored in RAM module on the Option 3 board (board
for CAPII). The procedure below describes a method to input and output
DUMP/RESTORE OF the data in sub memory, which is used when Option 3 board or RAM
CAPII DATA (16iT) module is replaced.
5.5.1 1. System parameter (FAPTSYS. PARAM.)

Kind of Data in Sub 2. MTF (FAPTMTF)
Memory 3. Setting data (FAPTSETTING)
4. Tool data Turning tool (FAPTTOOL)
Caxis tool
5. Graphic data (FAPTGRAPHIC)
6. Files Family program (FAPTFAMILY)
Material file (FAPTMATERIAL)
Sub cycle file (FAPTSUB. CYCLE)
7. Initial screen registration command data
5.5.2
Operation
D Outputting data (Dump) 1. Display the screen of Symbolic FAPT TURN.
2. To output data on FANUC Cassette, press keys as follows:
[AUXILIARY] D U M P , B INPUT
Be careful that data is memorized from top of the file.

To output data on FANUC PPR, press keys as follows:
[AUXILIARY] D U M P , P INPUT
D Inputting data (Restore)

1. Hold SP key and turn on power.
2. To input data from FANUC Cassette, press keys as follows :

[AUXILIARY] R S T R , B INPUT
To input data from FANUC PPR, press keys as follows :

[AUXILIARY] R S T R , P INPUT
3. Turn off the power once.
419
5.6
CLEARING CAPII
DATA (16iT)
5.6.1
Deleting File Name and
Symbolic FAPT TURN
Files (Initial screen)
Press [Family program] Press [DATA SET] key

key
Family program menu PARAMETER & DATASET

screen menu key
Press [FILE NAME] key
Not only file names of family

programs, but also file names
File name list stored in
and sub cycle files are dis-
submemory played.
No
Delete a file ?
Yes
Meet the cursor to a no. to be Press [END]

deleted using [CURSOR] or
[CURSOR] key
DEL
INPUT
EOB ,
YES(Delete) NO(Not delete)

Delete really ?
1 , INPUT 0 , INPUT
420
5.6.2 Press SP while turning on power.

Clearing CAP-II
Memory
421
5.7 To input/output a particular type of data, the corresponding screen is

usually selected. For example, the parameter screen is used for parameter
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT input from or output to an external input/output unit, while the program
ON THE ALL IO screen is used for program input or output. However, programs,
SCREEN parameters, offset data, and macro variables can all be input and output
using a single common screen, that is, the ALL IO screen.
READ/PUNCH (PROGRAM) O1234 N12345
I/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF

DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE ISO
BAUDRATE 4800 INPUT CODE ASCII
STOP BIT 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL INPUT (EIA) NO EOB OUTPUT (ISO) CR
TV CHECK (NOTES) ON BAUDRATE CLK. INNER
CD CHECK (232C) OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY BIT OFF SAT COMMAND HOST
INTERFACE RS422 COM PROTCOL A
END CODE EXT COM CODE ASCII
(0:EIA 1:ISO)>1_
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
PRGRM PARAM OFFSET MACRO (OPRT)
Fig. 5.7 ALL IO screen (when channel 3 is being

used for input/output)
422
5.7.1 Input/outputrelated parameters can be set on the ALL IO screen.

Setting Parameters can be set, regardless of the mode.
Input/OutputRelated
Parameters
Setting input/outputrelated parameters
Procedure 1 Press function key SYSTEM

.
2 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) several

times.
3 Press soft key [ALL IO] to display the ALL IO screen.
NOTE
1 If program or floppy is selected in EDIT mode, the program
directory or floppy screen is displayed.
2 When the power is first turned on, program is selected by
default.
I/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF

DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE ISO
BAUDRATE 4800 INPUT CODE ASCII
STOP BIT 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL INPUT (EIA) NO EOB OUTPUT (ISO) CR
TV CHECK (NOTES) ON BAUDRATE CLK. INNER
CD CHECK (232C) OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY BIT OFF SAT COMMAND HOST
INTERFACE RS422 COM PROTCOL A
END CODE EXT COM CODE ASCII
(0:EIA 1:ISO)>1_
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
PRGRM PARAM OFFSET MACRO (OPRT)
NOTE
Baud rate clock, CD check (232C), reset/alarm report, and
the parity bit for parameter No. 134, as well as the
communication code, end code, communication protocol,
interface, and SAT command for parameter No. 135 are
displayed only when channel 3 is being used for
input/output.
4 Select the soft key corresponding to the desired type of data (program,
parameter, and so forth).
423
5 Set the parameters corresponding to the type of input/output unit to be

used. (Parameter setting is possible regardless of the mode.)
Tip
First, set an I/O channel. The parameters on this screen change to those
corresponding to a specified I/O channel.
D I/O channel (0 to 3)
Setting Corresponding parameter
0 No. 101 to 103
1 No. 111 to 113
2 No. 121 to 123
3 No. 131 to 135
D Device number
Setting Input/output device
0 RS232C (The control codes DC1 through DC4 are used.)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE MATE, FANUC FA Card Adaptor

FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL H
4 RS232C (The control codes DC1 through DC4 are not used.)
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL H
D Baud rate (bps)

Set a desired baud rate value indicated below.
Baud rate (bps)
50
100
110
150
200
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
424
5.7.2 A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and When entering a program using a cassette or card, the user must specify
the input file containing the program (file search).
Outputting Programs
File search
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
5.7.1.
2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
O0001 N00010
PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)

USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999

O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
>_
EDIT * * * * *** *** *** 14:46:09
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE (OPRT)
4 Enter address N.
5 Enter the number of the file to be found.
N0
The first floppy file is found.
One of N1 to N9999
Among the files numbered from 1 to 9999, a specified file is found.
N9999
The file immediately after that used most recently is found.
N9998
When 9998 is specified, the next file is found. Then, each time
a file input/output operation is performed, N9999 is automatically
inserted. This means that subsequent files can be sequentially
found automatically.
This state is canceled by specifying N0, N1 to N9999, or N9999,
or upon a reset.
6 Press soft keys [F SRH] and [EXEC].
CAN EXEC
The specified file is found.
425
Inputting a program
5.7.1.
below.
O0001 N00010

USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999

O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
>_
EDIT * * * * *** *** *** 14:46:09
4 To specify a program number to be assigned to an input program,

enter address O, followed by the desired program number.
If no program number is specified, the program number in the file or
on the NC tape is assigned as is.
5 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC].
STOP CAN EXEC The program is input with the program number specified in step 4
assigned.
To cancel input, press soft key [CAN].
To stop input prior to its completion, press soft key [STOP].
426
Outputting programs
5.7.1.
below.
O0001 N00010

USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999

O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
>_
EDIT * * * * *** *** *** 14:46:09
4 Enter address O.
5 Enter a desired program number.
If 9999 is entered, all programs in memory are output.
To output a range of programs, enter O, OVVVV.. The
programs numbered from to VVVV are output.
When bit 4 (SOR) of parameter No. 3107 for sorted display is set to 1
on the program library screen, programs are output in order, starting
from those having the smallest program numbers.
6 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].
STOP CAN EXEC
The specified program or programs are output. If steps 4 and 5 are
omitted, the currently selected program is output.
To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].
To stop output prior to its completion, press soft key [STOP].
427
Deleting files
5.7.1.
below.
O0001 N00010

USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999

O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
>_
EDIT * * * * *** *** *** 14:46:09
4 Press soft key [DELETE] .

5 Enter a file number, from 1 to 9999, to indicate the file to be deleted.
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
CAN EXEC
The kth file, specified in step 5, is deleted.
428
5.7.3 Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and
Outputting Parameters
Inputting parameters
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
5.7.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . Soft keys change as shown below.
READ PUNCH

CAN EXEC The parameters are read, and the INPUT indicator blinks at the
lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of input, the
INPUT indicator is cleared from the screen.
Outputting parameters
Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
5.7.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
READ PUNCH

CAN EXEC
The parameters are output, and the OUTPUT indicator blinks at the
lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the
OUTPUT indicator is cleared from the screen.
429
5.7.4 Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and
Outputting Offset Data
Inputting offset data
Procedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
5.7.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
READ PUNCH

CAN EXEC
The offset data is read, and the INPUT indicator blinks at the
lowerright corner of the screen.
Upon the completion of input, the INPUT indicator is cleared from
the screen.
Outputting offset data
Procedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
5.7.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
READ PUNCH

CAN EXEC
The offset data is output, and the OUTPUT indicator blinks at the
lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the
OUTPUT indicator is cleared from the screen.
430
5.7.5 Custom macro common variables can be output using the ALL IO screen.
Outputting Custom
Macro Common
Variables
Outputting custom macro common variables
Procedure 1 Press soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section
5.7.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
READ PUNCH

CAN EXEC The custom macro common variables are output, and the OUTPUT
indicator blinks at the lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the
completion of output, the OUTPUT indicator is cleared from the
screen.
NOTE
To input a macro variable, read the desired custom macro
statement as a program, then execute the program.
431
5.7.6 The ALL IO screen supports the display of a directory of floppy files, as
Inputting and well as the input and output of floppy files.
Outputting Floppy
Files
Displaying a file directory
Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL
IO screen, described in Section 5.7.1.
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY ].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.
below.
The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE
5 Press soft key [F SRH].

6 Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET].
F SET CAN EXEC
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. A directory is displayed, with the specified
file uppermost. Subsequent files in the directory can be displayed by
pressing the page key.
432

No. FILE NAME (Meter) VOL
0001 PARAMETER 46.1
0002 ALL.PROGRAM 12.3
0003 O0001 11.9
0004 O0002 11.9
0005 O0003 11.9
0006 O0004
0007 O0005 11.9
0008 O0010 11.9
0009 O0020 11.9
11.9
F SRH
File No.=2
>2_
EDIT * * * * * * * * * * *** 12:34:56
F SRH CAN EXEC
A directory in which the first file is uppermost can be displayed

simply by pressing the page key. (Soft key [F SRH] need not be
pressed.)
433
Inputting a file
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] .
below.
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
5 Press soft key [READ].

6 Enter the number of a file or program to be input.
F SET O SET STOP CAN EXEC
Setting a file number: Enter the number of the desired file, then
press soft key [F SET].
Setting a program number: Enter the number of the desired
program, then press soft key [O SET].
The specified file or program is read, and the INPUT indicator
blinks at the lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of
input, the INPUT indicator is cleared from the screen.
434
Outputting a file
below.
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
5 Press soft key [PUNCH].

6 Enter the number of the program to be output, together with a desired
F SET O SET STOP CAN EXEC
output file number.
Setting a file number: Enter the number of the desired file, then
press soft key [F SET].
Setting a program number: Enter the number of the desired
program, then press soft key [O SET].
The specified program is output, and the OUTPUT indicator blinks
at the lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of
output, the OUTPUT indicator is cleared from the screen.
If no file number is specified, the program is written at the end of the
currently registered files.
435
Deleting a file
below.
>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
5 Press soft key [DELETE] .

6 Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET].
F SET CAN EXEC
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. The specified file is deleted. After the file has
been deleted, the subsequent files are shifted up.
436
5.8 By setting the I/O channel (parameter No. 20) to 4, files on a memory card
can be referenced, and different types of data such as part programs,
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT parameters, and offset data on a memory card can be input and output in
USING A MEMORY text file format.
CARD The major functions are listed below.
Displaying a directory of stored files
The files stored on a memory card can be displayed on the directory
screen.
Searching for a file
A search is made for a file on a memory card and, if found, it is
displayed on the directory screen.
Reading a file
Textformat files can be read from a memory card.
Writing a file
Data such as part programs can be stored to a memory card in text file
format.
Deleting a file
A file can be selected and deleted from a memory card.
CNC
Writing a file
Reading a file
Displaying a directory Memory card
Deleting a file
437
Displaying a directory of stored files
Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operators panel.
2 Press function key PROG .
3 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key).
4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. Using
page keys and , the screen can be scrolled.
DIRECTORY (MCARD) O0034 N00045

No. FILE NAME SIZE DATE
0001 O1000 123456 96/07/10
0002 O1001 118458 96/07/30
0003 O0002 113250 96/07/30
0004 O2000 173456 96/07/31
0005 O2001 113444 96/07/31
0006 O3001 118483 96/08/02
0007 O3300 111406 96/08/05
0008 O3400 112420 96/07/31
0009 O3500 117460 96/07/31
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)
5 Comments relating to each file can be displayed by pressing soft key

[DIR+].

No. FILE NAME COMMENT
0001 O1000 (COMMENT )
0002 O1001 (SUB PROGRAM )
0003 O0002 (12345678 )
0004 O2000 ( )
0005 O2001 ( )
0006 O3001 (SKIPK )
0007 O3300 (HISPEED )
0008 O3400 ( )
0009 O3500 (TEST PROGRAM)
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)
6 Repeatedly pressing soft key [DIR+] toggles the screen between the
display of comments and the display of sizes and dates.
Any comment described after the O number in the file is displayed.
Up to 18 characters can be displayed on the screen.
438
4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed.

0001 O1000 123456 96/07/10
0002 O1001 118458 96/07/30
0003 O0002 113250 96/07/30
0004 O2000 173456 96/07/31
0005 O2001 113444 96/07/31
0006 O3001 118483 96/08/02
0007 O3300 111406 96/08/05
0008 O3400 112420 96/07/31
0009 O3500 117460 96/07/31
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)] .

6 Set the number of the desired file number with soft key [F SRH].
F SRH F READ N READ PUNCH DELETE
Then, start the search by pressing soft key [EXEC]. If found, the file is
displayed at the top of the directory screen.
When a search is made for file number 19

0019 O1000 (MAIN PROGRAM)
0020 O1010 (SUBPROGRAM1)
0021 O1020 (COMMENT )
0022 O1030 (COMMENT )
~ ~
439
Reading a file

2 Press function key PROG.
4 Press soft key [CARD]. Then, the screen shown below is displayed.

0001 O1000 123456 96/07/10
0002 O1001 118458 96/07/30
0003 O0002 113250 96/07/30
0004 O2000 173456 96/07/31
0005 O2001 113444 96/07/31
0006 O3001 118483 96/08/02
0007 O3300 111406 96/08/05
0008 O3400 112420 96/07/31
0009 O3500 117460 96/07/31
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)

6 To specify a file number, press soft key [F READ]. The screen shown
below is displayed.

0021 O1030 (COMMENT )
~ ~
READ
FILE NAME=20 PROGRAM No.=120
>
EDIT * * * **** *** **** 15:40:21
F NAME O SET STOP CAN EXEC
7 Enter file number 20 from the MDI panel, then set the file number by
pressing soft key [F SET]. Next, enter program number 120, then set
the program number by pressing soft key [O SET]. Then, press soft
key [EXEC].
File number 20 is registered as O0120 in the CNC.
Set a program number to register a read file with a separate O
number. If no program number is set, the O number in the file name
column is registered.
440
8 To specify a file with its file name, press soft key [N READ] in step 6
above. The screen shown below is displayed.

0013 TESTPRO (SUB PROGRAM1)
0014 O0060 (MACRO PROGRAM)
~ ~
READ FILE NAME =TESTPRO
PROGRAM No. =1230
>
EDIT * * * **** *** **** 15:40:21
9 To register file name TESTPRO as O1230, enter file name TESTPRO

from the MDI panel, then set the file name with soft key [F NAME].
Next, enter program number 1230, then set the program number with
soft key [O SET]. Then, press soft key [EXEC].
441
Writing a file


0001 O1000 123456 96/07/10
0002 O1001 118458 96/07/30
0003 O0002 113250 96/07/30
0004 O2000 173456 96/07/31
0005 O2001 113444 96/07/31
0006 O3001 118483 96/08/02
0007 O3300 111406 96/08/05
0008 O3400 112420 96/07/31
0009 O3500 117460 96/07/31
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)

6 Press soft key [PUNCH].
7 Enter a desired O number from the MDI panel, then set the program
number with soft key [O SET].
When soft key [EXEC] is pressed after the setting shown below has
been made, for example, the file is written under program number
O1230.
~ ~
PUNCH FILE NAME =
PROGRAM No. =1230
>
EDIT * * * **** *** **** 15:40:21
8 In the same way as for O number setting, enter a desired file name
from the MDI panel, then set the file name with soft key [F SET].
When soft key [EXEC] is pressed after the setting shown below has
been made, for example, the file is written under program number
O1230 and file name ABCD12.
~ ~
PUNCH FILE NAME =ABCD12
PROGRAM No. =1230
>
EDIT * * * **** *** **** 15:40:21
442
Deleting a file

0001 O1000 123456 96/07/10
0002 O1001 118458 96/07/30
0003 O0002 113250 96/07/30
0004 O2000 173456 96/07/31
0005 O2001 113444 96/07/31
0006 O3001 118483 96/08/02
0007 O3300 111406 96/08/05
0008 O3400 112420 96/07/31
0009 O3500 117460 96/07/31
~ ~
PROG DIR + (OPRT)

6 Set the number of the desired file with soft key [DELETE] , then press
soft key [EXEC]. The file is deleted, and the directory screen is
displayed again.
When file number 21 is deleted

0021 O1020 (COMMENT )
0022 O1030 (COMMENT )
~ ~
File name O1020 is deleted.

0021 O1020 (COMMENT )
0022 O1030 (COMMENT )
~ ~
File number 21 is assigned to the next file name.
443
Batch input/output with a memory card
On the ALL IO screen, different types of data including part programs,

parameters, offset data, pitch error data, custom macros, and workpiece
coordinate system data can be input and output using a memory card; the
screen for each type of data need not be displayed for input/output.
Data item name

Part program
Parameter
Offset data
Memory card ALL IO screen
Pitch error data
Custom macro
Workpiece coordinate system
data
(additional coordinate systems)
2 Press function key SYSTEM

.
3 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) several

times.
4 Press soft key [ALL IO]. The screen shown below is displayed.

* 0001 O0222 332010 960406
0002 O1003 334450 960504
0003 MACROVAR.DAT 653400 960512
0004 O0002 341205 960513
[PROGRAM]
O0001 O0002 O0003 O0005 O0100 O0020
O0006 O0004 O0110 O0200 O2200 O0441
O0330
>
EDIT * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 10:07:37
PROG PARAM OFFSET (OPRT)
Upper part : Directory of files on the memory card

Lower part : Directory of registered programs
5 With cursor keys and , the user can choose between upper
part scrolling and lower part scrolling. (An asterisk (*) displayed at
the left edge indicates the part for which scrolling is possible.)
: Used for memory card file directory scrolling.
: Used for program directory scrolling.
444
6 With page keys and , scroll through the file directory or

program directory.
7 When this screen is displayed, the program data item is selected. The
soft keys for other screens are displayed by pressing the rightmost soft
key (continuous menu key). Soft key [MCARD] represents a
separate memory card function for saving and restoring system RAM
data. (See Sections ** ** and Section ** **.)
MACRO PITCH WORK (OPRT)
MCARD (OPRT)
When a data item other than program is selected, the screen displays only
a file directory.
A data item is indicated, in parentheses, on the title line.
READ/PUNCH (PARAMETER) O0001 N00001

0001 O0222 332010 96/04/06
0002 O1003 334450 96/05/04
0003 MACROVAR.DAT 653400 96/05/12
0004 O0003 334610 96/05/04
0005 O0001 334254 96/06/04
0006 O0002 333750 96/06/04
0007 CNCPARAM.DAT 334453 96/06/04
~ ~
8 Display the following soft keys with soft key [(OPRT)] .
The operation of each function is the same as on the directory (memory

card) screen. Soft key [O SET], used for program number setting, and the
PROGRAM NUMBER = indication are not displayed for data items
other than program.
[F SRH] : Finds a specified file number.
[F READ] : Reads a specified file number.
[PUNCH] : Writes a file.
[N READ] : Reads a file under a specified file name.
[DELETE] : Deletes a specified file number.
NOTE
With a memory card, RMT mode operation and the
subprogram call function (based on the M198 command)
cannot be used.
445
Error codes
Memory card error codes

Code Meaning
007 The memory card is protected.
030 The memory card is not inserted into its slot.
032 The memory cards battery is exhausted.
102 The memory card does not have sufficient free space.
105 No memory card is mounted.
106 A memory card is already mounted.
110 The specified directory cannot be found.
111 There are too many files under the root directory to allow a
directory to be added.
114 The specified file cannot be found.
115 The specified file is protected.
117 The file has not yet been opened.
118 The file is already open.
119 The file is locked.
122 The specified file name is invalid.
124 The extension of the specified file is invalid.
129 A noncorresponding function was specified.
130 The specification of a device is invalid.
131 The specification of a pathname is invalid.
133 Multiple files are open at the same time.
135 The device is not formatted.
140 The file has the read/write disabled attribute.
446
B63005EN/02 6.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
6 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
This chapter describes the signals between the machine operators panel,
magnetics cabinet and the PMC, connection of the signals between PMC
and CNC, and confirmation method of on/off state of these signals.
It also describes system configuration of PMC, parameters of PMC,
ladder and how to display time chart of the signals on the screen.
It also describes a method of inputting/outputting PMC parameters to an
external device.
6.1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

6.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
6.3 PMC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
6.4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . 475
6.5 LIST OF INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . 477
6.6 LIST OF ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
447
PMCDGN Input Contacts
6.1
Highspeed processing signal
[0] . . 0V Open
INTERFACE
*DEC a *ESP, SKIP, ESKIP, XAE, YAE, ZAE (M series)
*DEC a *ESP, SKIP, ESKIP, XAE, ZAE, +MIT a (T series) [1] . . 24V Close
GENERAL OF
NC PMCDGN PMCDGN * DI/DO

PMCSB/SC MT (Machine Tool builder)
G 0000 ~ 0191 X 0000 ~0127
ST1 DOOR ST ST1

G X RV
X0.1 X0.0 G007.2 ST2
ST2
0V
+24E
6. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
X5.7
Power
STL STL supply
F0.5 Y0.1 Load +
448
F Y

PMCDGN PMCDGN *
0V 0V
F 0000 ~ 0141 Y 0000 ~ 0127
PMCDGN Tr Output Load

[0] . . . . . . Off 24V Off
FANUC decides PMC address MTB decides
addresses addresses [1] . . . . . . On 0V On
and signals Internal relay and signals
correspondence Variable timer
Counter
Data table *1) If I/O unit is added:
Message display 1st sheet
Keep relay X1000.0 to X1019.7
Y1000.0 to Y1014.7
System reserve 2nd sheet
area X1020.0 to X1039.7
Y1020.0 to Y1034.7
B63005EN/02
6.2
SPECIFICATION OF
PMC
6.2.1
Specification
Series 16iMODEL A/Series 18iMODEL A
Model
PMCSB5 PMCSB6
Programmingmethod language Ladder Ladder
Clanguage Step sequence
(Option) Clanguage
(Option)
Number of ladder level 2 2
Level1 Cycle Time 8 ms 8 ms
Basic Instruction Execution Time 0.085 0.085
(us/step) (us/step)
Program capacity
D Ladder (step) Approx. 3,000 Approx. 3,000
Approx. 5,000 Approx. 5,000
D Symbol/Comment* Approx. 32,000
D Message 1 to 128KB 1 to 128KB
D Language only 0.1 to 64KB 0.1 to 64KB

* *
Instuction (Basic) 14 kinds 14 kinds
(Functional) 67 kinds 67 kinds
Intemal relay (R) 1618 byte 3200 byte
Message request (A) 25 byte 125 byte
Nonvolatile
D Var. Timer (T) 80 byte 300 byte
D Counter (C) 80 byte 200 byte
D Keep relay (K) 20 byte 50 byte
D Data table (D) 3000 byte 8000 byte
Subprogram (P) 512 programs 2000 programs
Label (L) 9999 labels 9999 labels
Fixed timer Timer No. 100 Timer No. 100
devices specified devices specified
Input/output
D I/O link (I) Max. 1024 points max. 1024 points max.
(O) Max. 1024 points max. 1024 points max.
Sequence program storage media Flash ROM Flash ROM
Ladder 128KB 128KB
256KB 256KB
C language 256KB 256KB
512KB 512KB
1MB 1MB
2MB 2MB
449
6. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B63005EN/02
Series 20iMODEL A/Series 21iMODEL A

Model
PMCSA1 PMCSA5
Programming system Ladder Ladder
C language C language
(option)(Note) (option)(Note)
Number of ladder levels 2 2
Firstlevel execution period 8 ms 8 ms
Basic instruction processing time 5.0 sec/step 0.085 sec/step
Program size
D Ladder (step) Approx. 3,000 Approx. 3,000
Approx. 8,000
Approx. 12,000
Approx. 16,000
D Symbol 1 to 128KB 1 to 128KB

Comment
D Message 0.1 to 64KB 0.1 to 64KB
* *
Instruction (Basic instruction) 12 14
(Function instruction) 49 66
Internal relay (R) 1100 byte 1118 byte
Message request (A) 25 bytes (200 points) 25 bytes (200 points)
Nonvolatile memory
D Variable timer (T) 80 bytes (40 each) 80 bytes (40 each)
D Counter (C) 80 bytes (20 each) 80 bytes (20 each)
D Keep relay (K) 20 byte 20 byte
D Data table (D) 1860 byte 1860 byte
Subprogram (P) 512 each
Label (L) 9999 each
Fixed timer 100 each (Timer num- 100 each (Timer num-
ber specification) ber specification)
I/O
D I/O Link (Input) 1024 points max. 1024 points max.
(Output) 1024 points max. 1024 points max.
Sequence program Flash ROM Flash ROM
Storage media (Ladder) 128KB 128KB
(C language) 256KB 256KB
(Note) 512KB 512KB
1MB 1MB
2MB 2MB
NOTE
Applicable to the Series 21i
450
6.2.2
Address Model
Series 16iMODEL
Character Signal description
A/Series 18iMODEL A
PMCSB5 PMCSB6
Input signal from the machine to

X X0 to X127 (Note)
the PMC (MT to PMC)
Output signal from the PMC to the

Y Y0 to Y127 (Note)
machine (PMC to MT)
F Input signal from the NC to the F0 to F255 F0 to F511

PMC F1000 to F1255 F1000 to F1511
(NC to PMC) F2000 to F2511
G Output signal from the PMC to the G0 to G255 G0 to G511

NC G1000 to G1255 G1000 to G1511
(PMC to NC) G2000 to G2511
R Internal relay R0 to R1499 R0 to R2999

R9000 to R9117 R9000 to R9199
A Message request signal A0 to A24 A0 to A124
C Counter C0 to C79 C0 to C199
K Keep relay K0 to K19 K0 to K39

K900 to K909
T Data table T0 to T79 T0 to T299
D Variable timer D0 to D2999 D0 to D7999
L Label number L1 to L9999 L1 to L9999
P Subprogram number P1 to P512 P1 to P2000
NOTE
The addresses (X1000 and up, Y1000 and up) for builtin
I/O cards are also reserved. I/O allocation in these areas is
not allowed. Do not use X1000 and up and Y1000 and up.
451
Model
Series 20iMODEL
Character Signal description
A/Series 21iMODEL
PMCSA1 PMCSA5
Input signal from the machine to

X X0 to X127 (Note)
PMC (MT to PMC)
Output signal from the PMC to ma-

Y Y0 to Y127 (Note)
chine (PMC to MT)
F Input signal from the NC to PMC F0 to F255 F0 to F511

(NC to PMC) F1000 to F1255
G Output signal from the PMC to NC G0 to G255 G0 to G255

(PMC to NC) G1000 to G1255 G1000 to G1255
R Internal relay R0 to R999 R0 to R999

R9000 to R9099 R9000 to R9117
A Message request signal A0 to A24 A0 to A24
C Counter C0 to C79 C0 to C79
K Keep relay K0 to K19 K0 to K19
T Variable timer T0 to T79 T0 to T79
D Data table D0 to D1859 D0 to D1859
L Label number L1 to L9999
P Subprogram number P1 to P512
NOTE
The addresses (X1000 and up, Y1000 and up) for builtin
I/O cards are also reserved. I/O allocation in these areas is
not allowed. Do not use X1000 and up and Y1000 and up.
452
6.2.3
Builtin Debug Function Contents
Function
Display of sequence program Dynamic display of ladder diagram
Diagnostic function S Title data display

S signal status (symbol can be displayed)
S PMC alarm display
S Signal trace
S Memory contents display
S Signal waveform display
S Task status display (PMCRC3/RC4 only)
S I/O connection status display
Setting and displaying data S Timer

S Counter
S Keep relay
S Data table
Sequence program edit function Ladder diagram editing

(A ladder edit module is required It is not required
when PMC language board is used.)
6.2.4 (1) R9000 (Operation output register for the ADD, SUB, MULB, DIVB,
System Reserve Area and COMPB functional instructions)
of Internal Relay #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9000 V N Z Operation result

register
Zero
Sign is minus
Overflow
(2) R9000 (Error output for the EXIN, WINDR, WINDW, MMCWR,
MMCWW, MMC3R, and MMC3W functional instructions)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9000
The instruc-
tion ended in
error.
453
(3) R9002 to R9005 (Operation output registers for the DIVB functional
instruction)
The data remaining after the DIVB functional instruction is executed
in output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9002
R9003
Register for
remainder
R9004 (used by DIVB
instruction)
R9005
(4) R9091 (System timer)

4 signals can be used as system timer.
The specifications of every signal are as following.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9091
always OFF
always ON
Cyclic signal of 200
ms (104 ms ON, 96
ms OFF)
Cyclic signal of 1 se-

cond. (504 ms ON,
496 ms OFF)
CAUTION
Each signal is initially off. R9091.0 and R9091.1 are set
cyclically at the beginning of the first ladder level.
Each signal (ONOFF signal) has an accuracy of "8 ms.
454
R9091.5
104ms 96ms
200ms
R9091.6
504ms 496ms
1s
6.2.5
Execution Period of
PMC
Sequence program
1st level
From NC (Highspeed se-
(1) quence)
END1
2nd level
(Normal sequence)
(2)1
Synchronized
buffer
(2)2
Head of 2nd level

(2)n
END2
3rd level
From MT (Display sequence)
(PMCRC/RC3/
RC4 only)
8msec END3
Period
(1) (1) (1) (1)
1st level
(2)1 (2)2 (2)n (2)1
2nd level
3rd level
455
6.3
PMC SCREEN
6.3.1 1. Press SYSTEM .

Display Method
2. Press soft key [PMC], then PMC screen is displayed and the following
soft keys are displayed:
PMC CONTROL SYSTEM MENU MONIT RUN
SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS
PMCLAD : DYNAMIC LADDER DISPLAY

PMCDGN : DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
PMCPRM : PARAMETER (T/C/K/D)
RUN/STOP : RUN/STOP SEQUENCE PROGRAM When
EDIT : EDIT SEQUENCE PROGRAM builtin
program-
I/O : I/O SEQUENCE PROGRAM
mer is run-
SYSPRM : SYSTEM PARAMETER ning.
MONIT : PMC MONITOR
PMCLAD PMCDGN PMCPRM
System parameter screen

Status display of PMC I/O signal
Dynamic display of sequence program
STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT
System parameter screen

Input/output of sequence pro-
gram
Editing sequence program
RUN/STOP of sequence
The no. of menus to be displayed changes depending on presence/

absence of builtin programmer.
PMCSB5/SB6 PMCSB5/SB6 PMCSB5/SB6
(Without memory (With memory (With C language
card for editing) card for editing) board)
RUN/STOP f f f
EDIT f f
I/O f f f
SYSPRM f f
: Cannot be displayed nor used.
456
6.3.2 Press soft key [PMCLAD], and a sequence program is displayed

PMCLAD Screen dynamically and operation monitoring can be confirmed :
Number of net displayed

Ladder display RUN/STOP status
LADDER NET 00010004 MONIT RUN

Comment
LOG1 LOG1
ALWAYS1
LOG1
X008.4 *ESP
EMERGENCY
STOP
END1
PORD POR
POWER ON
RESET
TOP BOTTOM SRCH WSRCH NSRCH
Other soft keys

FSCRH ADRESS
Switched each
time pressed
SYMBOL
D Contents displayed 1. 1Green (Low brightness) display Contacts :open Relay :off
2. White (High brightness) display Contacts : closed Relay : on
D Search method PAGE
1. Use the cursor keys or the page keys PAGE

to change
display positions.
2. [TOP]:Searches top of ladder.
3. [BOTTOM]:Search bottom of ladder.
4. Address.bit,[SRCH] or Signal name, [SRCH]
5. Address.bit,[WSRCH] or Signal name ,[WSRCH]
6. Net no.[NSRCH]:Ladder is displayed from the specified net.
7. Functional instruction no. [FSRCH] or Functional instruction
name[FSRCH]
8. [ADRESS]:Signal is displayed by address and bit no.
9. [SYMBOL]:Signal is displayed by signal name (symbol).
(If symbol is not registered at program preparation time, the address
of the signal is displayed).
457
[Remarks]
The search function searches a signal in the forward direction and
displays the ladder with the searched signal at its head. Because there
may exist plural contacts, repeat the search operation to find plural
locations, repeat the search operation to find plural locations with the
specified signal.
If a specified signal is not found up to the end of the program (ladder),
execution returns to the head of a program and search continues.
D Dump display on ladder Ladder diagram and signal status dump can displayed together.
diagram The dump is displayed over 2 lines at the last line of ladder diagram by
pressing the [DUMP] soft key.
PAGE
PAGE
keys or [SEARCH] soft key is used for changing of PMC
address.
The [DUMP] soft key has the follwing functions.

(1) [BYTE]: Byte type display (1 BYTE)
G0000 00 14 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
G0016 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
(2) [WORD] : Word type display (2 BYTE)
G0000 1400 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
G0016 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
(3) [D.WORD]: Long word type display (4 BYTE)
G0000 00001400 00000001 00000000 00000000
G0016 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
D Parameter display on The value of parameter of a functional instruction is displayed in the
ladder diagram functional instruction of a ladder diagram.
The function of the soft key is as follows:

(1) [DPARA] : The value of parameter is displayed in functional
instruction.
(2) [NDPARA] : The value of parameter is not displayed in functional
instruction.
D Stop of ladder diagram The ladder display can be stopped by manual operation or trigger of
display by trigger of signal.
signal The former ladder diagram display renews signal status every moment.
But by using this function, all the ladder diagram at the specified moment
can be checked.
The stop conditions as a trigger are specified by rising or falling edge
detection of the designated signal.
458
D Display of setting trigger The setting address, condition and counter are displayed at the title line.
MODE:ON : X0000. 0 : 0 : 0001
COUNT: Trigger checking number (default 1)

POINT: Trigger checking number (default 0)
0 : the top of the 1st level
1 : after END1 execution
ADR: Trigger setting address
ON: Rising edge detection (TRGON)

OFF: Falling edge detection (TRGOFF)
* Setting form adr ;p1 ;p2+[TRGON/TRGOFF]soft key
NOTE
;=EOB adr (trigger address) ;p1 (trigger point) ;p2 (trigger
checking number (1~65535))
* Because parameters are stored in the nonvolatile memory, they are not
lost even if the power is turned off.
When bit 2 of keep relay K18 (K901 for SB6) is set to 1 after
parameters for sampling are specified, the trigger function
automatically starts when the power is turned on.
For this operation, depress [TRIGER] soft key to bring the following
menu.
SEARCH ADRESS TRIGER WINDOW
RET
TRGON TRGOFF START
NEXT
DUMP DPARA TRGSRC INIT
The function of the [TRIGER] soft key is explained below:

(1) [TRGON] : The trigger function is stopped when a specified address
signal goes high (is turned ON).
(2) [TRGOFF] : The trigger function is stopped when a specified address
signal goes low (is turned OFF).
(3) [START] : Pressing this key switches between trigger function
execution and trigger function termination. While the
trigger function is being executed, the TRG indication
blinks.
(4) [TRGSRC]: An instruction at which the trigger function has been
stopped by a specified address signal is searched for and
indicated by blinking.
(5) [INIT] : The trigger setting is initialized.
459
D Divided display of ladder This function is used for displaying the divided screen. It can display
diagram max. six division.
For this operation, depress [WINDOW] soft key to bring the following
menu.
SEARCH ADRESS TRIGER WINDOW
RET
DIVIDE CANCEL DELETE SELECT WIDTH
The function of the soft key [WINDOW] is as follows:

(1) [DIVIDE] : The screen will be divided.
The dividing display of ladder diagram can be
displayed for the designated NET number.
(NET number+[DIVIDE])
(2) [CANCEL] : The dividing display of ladder diagram display ends.
(The screen returns to normal display.)
(3) [DELETE] : The screen division subject to operation is ended.
(4) [SELECT] : Change the screen subject to division operation.
The screen in operation is displayed by purple title
line, another screen is displayed by blue title line.
In monochrome, the screen is displayed by changing
brightness.
(5) [WIDTH] : Change the width of division by using [EXPAND] or
[SHRINK] soft key.
(6) [EXPAND] : The divided screen is expanded.
(7) [SHRINK] : The divided screen is shrank.
D ONLINE EDIT When bit 1 in the keep relay K17 (K900 for SB6) is 1, this function is
available and [ONLEDT] soft key is displayed.
When the ladder program is executing, a part of the ladder program can
be changed.
S Change the type of contact (A contact, B contact)
S Change address of contact and coil.
S Change address parameter of functional instruction.
This function dont change the size.
(Cannot be Addition, deletion and chanegable data size)
When bit 3 in the keep relay K18 (K901 for SB6) is 1, this program is
automatically transferred to backup RAM after online edit.
When bit 3 in the keep relay K18 (K901 for SB6) is 0, transfer to backup
RAM with COPY function of I/O screen. If power is off without this
operation, edited data is lost.
460
6.3.3 Press soft key [PMCDGN] then PMCs diagnostic screen is displayed.
PMCDGN Screen
D TITLE screen The title data registered when a ladder program is prepared is displayed.
Page number
PMC TITLE DATA #1 MONIT RUN

PMC PROGRAM NO. :
EDITION NO. :
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : 406A EDITION :08
(SERIES : 406C EDITION :08)
PMC TYPE CONTROL : SB3 PROGRAM : SB3
MEMORY USED : KB
LADDER : KB
SYMBOL : KB
MESSAGE : KB
SCAN TIME : MSEC
SCAN MAX : 016 MS MIN : 008 MS
TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE
Other soft keys
M.SRCH ANALYS

1st page PMC PROGRAM NO. : Set when PMC

EDITION NO. : is
prepared

PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : EDITION : Series and edition of PMC

control software
MEMORY USED : KB
LADDER

: KB Memory used and

SYMBOL : KB execution time is
MESSAGE : KB displayed.
SCAN TIME : MSEC
2nd page MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :

MACHINE TOOL NAME :
CNC & PMC TYPE NAME :
PROGRAM DRAWING NO. : Set when PMC
is prepared.
3rd page DATE OF DRAWING :
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :
ROM WRITTEN BY :
REMARKS :
461
D STATUS screen On/Off state of input/output signals and internal relay is displayed.
PMC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN

ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 Signal
G0000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 name
ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 Signal state
G0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0:Off
1:On
ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
G0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Signal state
G0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 reverses for
FIN signals with *.
G0004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0: On
1: Off
SEARCH
[Search Method]
PAGE
PAGE
key :Forward and Backward by screen
key :Forward and Backward by diagnostic number

To search a specified address or signal name, input an address number
or signal name and press [SEARCH].
D Alarm screen Displays an alarm generated in PMC.
PMC ALARM MESSAGE MONIT RUN

Alarm dis-
play
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
For details
of alarms,
refer to
Appendix
2 List of
Alarms.
ALM Blinked
TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE
462
D TRACE screen Every time a specified signal changes, the signal status is memorized in
the trace memory. This function is useful for identifying intermittent
troubles.
1 Trace parameter screen
PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN

TRACE MODE :
(0:1BYTE/1:2BYTE/2:WORD)
1STTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :
2NDTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :
T.DISP EXEC
Changes to a trace memory display screen (Screen on

the next page)
Select each item by cursor key
a. TRACE MODE: Select the trace mode

0=Records changes of 1byte signals
1=Records changes of independent 2byte signals
2=Records changes of consecutive 2byte signals
b. ADDRESS TYPE:
0=PMC address is used for tracing address.
1=Physical address is used for tracing address.
(Mainly used for Clanguage program)
c. ADDRESS:Set a tracing address.
d. MASK DATA: The bits to be traced are specified by a hexadecimal
number (2 digits).
For example, to trace the signals at bit 7,6,5 and 0, set E1
(hexadecimal) to MASK DATA.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
E1% 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
However, even if bit 4,3,2 and 1 changes, tracing (memory
registration) cannot be done but signal status is memorized when a
tracing is executed.
[Correspondence of binary and hexadecimal number]
00002 : 016 00012 : 116 00102 : 216 00112 : 316
01002 : 416 01012 : 516 01102 : 616 01112 : 716
10002 : 816 10012 : 916 10102 : A16 10112 : B16
11002 : C16 11012 : D16 11102 : E16 11112 : F16
463
2 Trace memory contents display screen
PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN

1ST ADDRESS=X008(E1) 2ND ADDRESS=G000(FF) Trace
address
NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 and mask
0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data(in pa-
rentheses)
I * * * * * * *

0001 * * * * * * * *
0002 I I * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
0003 * I * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Latest status
0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I mark : 1
0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * mark : 0
0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRCPRM STOP
10LCD/14CRT is dis-
played by 1 and 0.
a. Soft key [TRCPRM]: Return to the trace parameter setting screen

(screen of previous page)
b. Soft key [EXEC]: Starts tracing.
Trace memory is cleared and each time a
specified signal changes, its status is recorded.
Trace memory is 256 bytes and if tracing is
executed 128 times by 2byte tracing, tracing
is executed again from the head of memory.
c. Soft key [STOP]: Ends the tracing.
*The tracing parameters are held even if the power is turned off.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

K017
(K900 for SB6)
#5 0 : Tracing starts by [EXEC].

1 : Tracing starts automatically after power on
464
6.3.4
Memory Display
(M.SRCH)
D Display of Screen and

Operation 1) Pressing the [M.SRCH] soft key changes the screen to that shown in
Fig. 3.5. The displayed soft keys also change.
2) Enter a physical address in hexadecimal from which the contents of the
memory are to be displayed. Then pressing the [SEARCH] key
displays 256 byte of stored data starting from the specified address.
Example) Enter 100000, then pressing the [SEARCH] keydisplays
the contents of the memory starting from 100000H.
PAGE
3) An address can be changed using the or PAGE

key.
4) Pressing either the [BYTE], [WORD], or [D.WORD] soft key
displays data of the corresponding type.
If an address at which the memory is not used is specified, a system
error occurs.
D Function of store To store data in memory, set bit 4 of keep relay K17 to 1, move the cursor
memory to a position at which the address of the data to be changed in RAM is
displayed, and enter data in units of data type in hexadecimal.
Example) Entering 0F41, then pressing the INPUT key stores
0F41 at the address specified by the cursor
PMC CONTENTS OF MEMORY MONIT RUN
100000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100010 4142 4344 4546 4748 494A 4B4C 4D4E 4F50 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
100020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020
100030 5152 5354 5556 5758 595A 2020 2020 2020 QRSTUVWXYZ
100040 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100060 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100070 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100080 4641 4E55 4320 434F 2E2C 5444 0000 0000 FANUC CO.LTD....
100090 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000A0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000B0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000C0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000D0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000E0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000F0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
SEARCH INPUT
465
D ANALYS screen Change of signals is displayed as the same display as that on the
(Ladder editing card is oscilloscope.
required not usable with 1 Parameter setting screen (1st page)
SA1.)
PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(PARAM) MONIT RUN
SAMPLING TIME : 10 (110 SEC) (a)
TRIGGER ADDRESS : G 0007.2 (b)
CONDITION : 0 (c)
(0: START 1: TRIGGERON 2: TRIGGEROFF)
TRIGGER MODE : 0 (d)

(0: AFTER 1: ABOUT 2: BEFORE 3: ONLY)
SCOPE DELETE INIT ADDRESS
Select each item by

cursor key
(a) Set a sampling time.

(b) Specifies an address from which recording of signals is started.
(c) Set a condition under which recording is initiated.
0 : Started by soft key [START]
1 : Started by rise of a trigger signal after you press the soft key
[START]
2 : Started by fall of a trigger signal after you press the soft key
[START]
(d) Set a trigger mode
0 : Record signal status after the trigger condition is satisfied
1 : Record signal status before and after the trigger condition is
satisfied.
2 : Record signal status before the trigger condition is satisfied.
3 : Record signal status when the trigger condition is satisfied.
(Display is same as trace memory).
466
2 Parameter setting screen (2nd page)
SIGNAL ADDRESS
1 : X0000.0 9: Y0000.0
2 : X0000.1 10 : R0000.1
3 : X0002.0 11 :
Up to 16
4 : X0005.0 12 : signals
5 : 13 :
6 : 14 :
7 : 15 :
8 : 16 :
SCOPE DELETE INIT ADDRESS
a. Soft key [SCOPE]:Select signal waveform display screen

b. Soft key [DELETE] :Delete data on the cursor position
c. Soft key [INIT] :Initialize parameters of signal waveform display
d. Soft key [ADDRESS] or [SYMBOL] :Switch addresses and
symbols for display
467
3 SCOPE screen

SAMPLING TIME : 10 CONDITION : 1
TRIGGER ADDRESS : G0007.2 TRIGGER MODE : 0
++++
X0000.0
X0000.1
X0002.0
X0005.0
++++
0 256(MSEC)
SGNPRM START T.SRCH ADDRESS
The above screen is for a system with graphic display.

J and are used for display if graphic function is not equipped.
a. Soft key [SGNPRM] : Returns to parameter screen.
b. Soft key [START] or [STOP] :Start or stop the record.
(If TRIGGER MODE=3, signal is displayed when you press STOP
key.)
c. Soft key [T.SRCH] :Displayed for a specified time.
d. Soft key [ADDRESS] or [SYMBOL] :Switch addresses and
symbols for display
e. Soft key [EXCHG] : Change order of signals displayed.
Press soft key [EXCHG]
Move the cursor to a signal to be changed.
Press soft key [SELECT].
Move the cursor to the destination.
Press [TO] and [EXEC], then the signal changes its order.
f. Soft key [SCALE]: Changes time scale for graphic display. Scale
changes from 256 to 512, and to 1024 msec every time you press the
key.
g. Cursor key : Scrolls time axis forward and backward
468
6.3.5
PMCPRM Screen
D Inputting PMC
parameters from the MDI 1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.
2 Set PARAMETER WRITE (on setting screen) to 1 or set the program
protect signal (KEY4) to 1.
PWE KEY4
Timer f
Counter f f Either one
Keep relay f
Data table f f Either one
3 Press a soft key and select a required screen.

[TIMER] :Timer screen
[COUNTR] :Counter screen
[KEEPRL] :Keep relay screen
[DATA] :Data table screen
4 Press cursor key and move the cursor to a desired number.
5 Input a numeric key and press INPUT key and data is input.
6 After the data is input, set PARAMETER WRITE or KEY4 on setting
screen to 0.
D TIMER screen This screen is used for setting timer time of the functional instruction
(SUB 3).
Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key)
Timer no. specified by functional instruction
Address specified by ladder
PMC PARAMETER (TIMER) #001 MONIT RUN
NO.ADDRESS DATA NO.ADDRESS DATA

01 T00 480 11 T20 0 Timer
delay
02 T02 960 12 T22 0
time
03 T04 0 13 T24 0 (msec)
04 T06 0 14 T26 0
05 T08 0 15 T28 0
06 T10 0 16 T30 0
07 T12 0 17 T32 0
08 T14 0 18 T34 0
09 T16 0 19 T36 0
10 T18 0 20 T38 0
TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA
Timer set time : Timer no. 18 is max. 1572.8 sec and its accuracy is
48ms.
Timer no. 9 is max. 262.1 sec and its accuracy is 8ms.
469
D COUNTER screen This screen sets and displays max. value of counter and current value of
the counter instruction (SUB 4).
Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key)

Max. value of counter (Minimum
value is specified by counter ins.)
Current value of counter
PMC PARAMETER (COUNTER)#001 MONIT RUN
NO. ADDRESS PRESET CURRENT

01 C00 100 1 PRESET
02 C04 50 2 and CUR-
03 C08 0 0 RENT
can be set
04 C12 0 0 up to
05 C16 0 0 9999, re-
06 C20 0 0 spectively.
07 C24 0 0
08 C28 0 0
09 C32 0 0
10 C36 0 0
TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA

Counter number specified by func-
tional instruction
D KEEP RELAY screen

PMC PARAMETER (KEEP REALAY) #001 MONIT RUN
NO.ADDRESS DATA NO.ADDRESS DATA

01 K00 00000000 11 K10 00000000
02 K01 00000000 12 K11 00000000
03 K02 00000000 13 K12 00000000
04 K03 00000000 14 K13 00000000
05 K04 00000000 15 K14 00000000
06 K05 00000000 16 K15

00000000

07 K06 00000000 17 K16 00000000

08 K07 00000000 18 K17 00000000
09 K08 00000000 19 K18 00000000
10 K09
TIMER COUNTR
00000000
KEEPRL
20 K19
DATA

00000000

Address specified by ladder Used by PMC system
470
1 Nonvolatile memory control
K016

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7(MWRTF2) : For checking the writing status in nonvolatile memory

#6(MWRTF1) : Writing status in nonvolatile memory
2 PMC system parameter
The following keep relays are used by the system, therefore they
cannot be used in the sequence program.

#7

#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K017

(K900 for SB6)
#7(DTBLDSP) 0 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is displayed.

1 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is not displayed.
#6(ANASTAT) 0 : Pressing [EXEC] key initiates sampling by signal waveform display
function.
1 : Turning power to on initiates sampling by signal waveform display
function.
#5(TRCSTAT) 0 : Signal tracing starts by soft key [EXEC] in signal trace function.
1 : Signal tracing starts automatically by power on in signal trace
function.
#4(MEMINP) 0 : Data input cannot be done in memory contents display function.
1 : Data input can be done in memory contents display function.
#2(AUTORUN) 0 : A sequence program is executed automatically after the power is
turned on.
1 : A sequence program is executed by sequence program soft key.
#1(PRGRAM) 0 : Builtin programmer is not used.
1 : Builtin programmer is used.
#0(LADMASK) 0 : Dynamic display of ladder is executed.
1 : Dynamic display of ladder is not executed.
471
K018

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
(K901 for SB6)
#7(IGNDINT) 0 : When the screen is switched to the PCMMDI screen, the screen is
initialized.
1 : When the screen is switched to the PCMMDI screen, the screen is not
initialized.
*It is effective for PMCSC3/SC4
#5(CHKPRTY) 0 : The parity check is performed for the system ROM and program
ROM/RAM.
1 : The parity check is not performed for the system ROM and program
ROM/RAM.
#4(CALCPRTY) 0 : The builtin programmer function performs RAM parity calculation.
1 : The builtin programmer function does not perform RAM parity
calculation.
#3(TRNSRAM) 0 : A ladder program is not automatically sent to the backup RAM after
online editing is completed.
1 : A ladder program is automatically sent to the backup RAM after online
editing is completed.
#2(TRGSTAT) 0 : The trigger stop function does not automatically start when the power is
turned on.
1 : The trigger stop function automatically starts when the power is turned on.
#1(DBGSTAT) 0: In the C language debug function, the automatic break processing
does not start when the power is turned on.
1 : In the C language debug function, the automatic break processing
starts when the power is turned on.
*This flag is effective for the PMCSC3/SC4.
#0(IGNKEY) 0 : Function keys are enabled when a user program displays the user
screen.
1 : Function keys are disabled when a user program displays the user
screen.
*This flag is effective for the PMCSC3/SC4.
When this bit is set to 1 of the user screen, the screen cannot be switch to
the NC screen using function keys. A program which always sets this bit
to 0 or which changes the screen to the NC screen is required.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2
#1 #0
K019
(K902 for SB6)

#1(CREJECT) 0 : A Clanguage program is activated.
1 : A Clanguage program is forcibly activated.
*The flag is effective for the PMCSC3/SC4.
These bits are status of not used for PMC management software are used
by system. Do not change the values.
Usually all the bits are 0.
472
D DATA TABLE screen 1 Data table setting screen
No. of screen
PMC DATA TBL CONTROL #001 MONIT RUN
GROUP TABLE COUNT = 2 No. of

data table
NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE NO.OF DATA groups
001 D0000 00000000 0 10
002 D0020 00000011 1 20
003
004 No. of
005 data table
Data length
006
Table
007 parameter
008 Data table
head ad-
dress
G.DATA G.CONT NO.SRH INIT
Group no. of
data table
a. Soft key [G.DATA] : Select data display screen of data table.

(Next screen)
b. NO. OF GROUPS [G.CONT]: Set the no. of groups of data table.
c. Group No. [NO.SRH]: Move the cursor to a specified group.
d. Soft key [INIT]: Initializes the setting of data table.
No. of groups is 1, ADDRESS is D0000, PARAMETER is 0000000,
TYPE is 0, NO. OF DATA is 1860.
This operation is done usually when a sequence program is prepared.
When PMC parameters are set, internal parameters are not affected.

PARAMETER

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0 : Binary format
1 : BCD format
0 : Without protection for input
1 : With protection for input
0 : Binary format or BCD format (Bit 0 is valid)

1 : Hex format (Bit 0 is not valid)
TYPE
0 : 1byte length 1 : 2byte length 2 : 4byte length
PAGE
e. Using the page key / PAGE

, next screen/previous screen can be
selected.
473
2 Data display screen
Group number
Page number
PMC PRM (DATA) 001/001 MONIT RUN

NO. ADDRESS DATA
000 D0000 0
001 D0001 0
002 D0002 0
003 D0003 0
004 D0004 0
005 D0005 0
006 D0006 0
007 D0007 0
008 D0008 0
009 D0009 0
C.DATA GSRCH SEARCH
a. Soft key [C.DATA] :Returns to the data table setting screen.

(Previous screen)
b. Group No. [GSRCH] : Head of the specified group is selected.
c. Address [SEARCH]: Searches an address in a group currently

selected.
474
6.4
LIST OF SIGNALS BY
EACH MODE
D Automatic operation
MODE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL FEED RATE,
ETC
EDIT [PMC CNC]

KEY3(Program protect key)
[PMC CNC) [PMC CNC]

ST (Cycle start) *FV07
*SP (Feed hold) (Feed rate over-
SBK (Single block) ride)
DRN (Dry run) *AFV07
BDT19 (Block delete) (2nd feed rate
MI (Mirror image) override)
STLK (Start lock:16T/18T) OVC
A CDZ (Chamfering:16T/18T) (Override can-
U SMZ (Inposition check:16T/18T) cel)
T PN18 (External program no. search)
O MINP (External program input) ROV1,ROV2,
M DNCI (DNC input mode) HROV,
A HS1AD(Handle interrupt axis select) *HROV06
T AFL (Auxiliary function neglect) (Rapid traverse
I FIN, MFIN2, MFIN3 override)
C (Auxiliary function complete) SOV07
MEM MFIN, SFIN, TFIN, TFIN (Spindle speed
O (High speed M/S/T function com- override)
P MDI plete)
E RMT GR1, 2 (Gear input 16T/ 18T)
R *SSTP (Spindle stop)
A SAR (Spindle speed arrival)
T SOR (Spindle orientation)
I
O [CNC PMC]
N STL (Cycle start LED)
SPL (Feed hold LED)
MF, M00M31
MF2, M200M215 (Miscellaneous
function)
MF3, M300M315
SF, S00S31 (Spindle speed function)
TF, T00T31 (Tool function)
BF, B00B31 (2nd miscellaneous func.)
DEN (Distribution end)
OP (automatic operating)
GR1OGR3O(Gearselection:16M/18M)
475
D Manual operation
MODE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL FEED RATE,
ETC
Handle/ [PMC CNC] [PMC CNC]

M incremental HSnAD (Axis selection) n:13(No. of MPGs) MP1, MP2
A +, (Jog feed) (Multiplier)
N
U JOG [PMC CNC] [PMC CNC]
A RT (Rapid traverse) *JV015
L (Manual fee-
[PMC CNC] drate override)
O ZRN(Reference position return mode) +, (Man
P
[MT CNC] ual feed move
E
Z *DEC (Reference position deceleration) command)
R
A R ROV1, ROV2
T N [CNC PMC] HROV
I ZP *HROV06
O ZP2, ZP3, ZP4 (Rapid traverse
N (Reference position return completion) override)
D Others
[PMC CNC]
MD14 (Mode selection)
*ESP (Emergency stop)
KEY14 (Memory protection key)
MLK,MLK (All axes/ each axis machine lock)
*IT,*IT (All axes/ each axis machine lock)
*"MIT (interlock per axis and direction:M series)
STLK (Start lock:T series)
*ABSM (Manual absolute)
SVF (Servo off)
*FLWP (Follow up)
ERS (External reset)
RRW (Reset & Rewind)
Others EXLM (Stored stroke limit external switching)
"LM, RLSOT (Software limit external setting M series)
*"L (Overtravel limit)
*"ED (External deceleration of each axis)
[CMC PMC]
MA (NC ready)
SA (Servo ready)
AL (NC alarm)
RST (Resetting)
BAL (Battery alarm)
INP (Inposition)
MV (Axis moving)
TAP (Tapping)
476
6.5 (1) For 1path control

LIST OF INPUT/ The relationship of the addresses of the interface signals transferred
between the CNC and PMC are shown below.
OUTPUT SIGNALS
CNC G000X PMC X000X MT
F000X Y000X
(2) For 2path control

The relationship of the addresses of the interface signals transferred
between the CNC and PMC are shown below. Some signals common
to both paths are included in the signals of path 1.
CNC PMC MT
G000X X000X
Path 1 F000X
G1000X Y000X
Path 2 F1000X
477
D List of input/output
signals
f : Usable
F : Usable only with 2path control
: Not usable
Symbol Signal name Address T series M series
*+ED1 to *+ED8 External deceleration signal G118 f f
*+L1 to *+L8 Overtravel signal G114 f f
*ED1 to *ED8 External deceleration signal G120 f f
*L1 to *L8 Overtravel signal G116 f f
*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2 f f
*AFV0 to *AFV7 Second feedrate override signal G013 f f
*BECLP Baxis clamp completion signal G038#7 f
*BEUCP Baxis unclamp completion signal G038#6 f
*CHLD Chopping hold signal G051#7 f
*CHP8 to *CHP0 Chopping feedrate override signal G051#0 to #3 f
*CRTOF Automatic screen erasure disable signal G062#1 f f
*DEC1 to *DEC8 Deceleration signal for reference position return X009 f f
Controlled axis selection state signal

*EAXSL F129#7 f f
(PMC axis control)
*ESP X008#4 f f
Emergency stop signal
*ESP G008#4 f f
*ESPA G071#1 f f
*ESPB Emergency stop signal (serial spindle) G075#1 f f
*ESPC G205#1 f f
*FLWU Followup signal G007#5 f f
*FV0 to *FV7 Feedrate override signal G012 f f
*FV0E to *FV7E Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control) G151 f f
*FV0O to *FV7O Software operators panel signal (*FV0 to *FV7) F078 f f
*HROV0 to *HROV6 1% rapid traverse override signal G096#0 to #6 f f
*IT Allaxis interlock signal G008#0 f f
*IT1 to *IT8 Specifiedaxis interlock signal G130 f f
*JV0 to *JV15 Manual feedrate override signal G010, G011 f f
*JV0O to *JV15O Software operators panel signal (*JV0 to *JV15) F079, F080 f f
478
*PLSST Polygon spindle stop signal G038#0 f
*SCPF Spindle clamp completion signal G028#5 f
*SP Automatic operation hold signal G008#5 f f
*SSTP Spindle stop signal G029#6 f f
*SSTP1 G027#3 f
*SSTP2 Specifiedaxis stop signal G027#4 f
*SSTP3 G027#5 f
*SUCPF Spindle unclamp completion signal G028#4 f
G049#0 to
*TLV0 to *TLV9 Tool life count override signal f
G050#1
*TSB Tailstock barrier select signal G060#7 f
+J1 to +J8 Feed axis direction select signal G100 f f
F081#0, #2,
+J1O to +J4O Software operators panel signal (+J1 to +J4) f f
#4, #6
+Jg, Jg, +Ja, Ja Feed axis direction select signal G086#0 to #3 f f
+LM1 to +LM8 Stroke limit external setting signal G110 f
+MIT1, +MIT2 Manual feed interlock signal in each axis direction X004#2, #4 f
+MIT1, +MIT2 Tool compensation amount write signal X004#2, #4 f
+MIT1 to +MIT4 Interlock signal in each axis direction G132#0 to #3 f
J1 to J8 Feed axis direction select signal G102 f f
F081#1, #3,
J1O to J4O Software operators panel signal (J1 to J4) f f
#5, #7
LM1 to LM8 Stroke limit external setting signal G112 f
MIT1, MIT2 Manual feed interlock signal in each axis direction X004#3, #5 f
MIT1, MIT2 Tool compensation amount write signal X004#3, #5 f
MIT1 to MIT4 Interlock signal in each axis direction G134#0 to #3 f
ABTQSV Servo axis abnormal load detection signal F090#0 f f
ABTSP1 First spindle abnormal load detection signal F090#1 f f
ABTSP2 Second spindle abnormal load detection signal F090#2 f f
ABTSP3 Third spindle abnormal load detection signal F090#3 f f
AFL Auxiliary function lock signal G005#6 f f
AL Alarm inprogress signal F001#0 f f
479
ALMA F045#0 f f
ALMB Alarm signal (serial spindle) F049#0 f f
ALMC F168#0 f f
ALNGH Tool axis direction handle feed mode signal G023#7 f
AR0 to AR15 Actual spindle speed signal F040, F041 f
ARSTA G071#0 f f
ARSTB Alarm reset signal (serial spindle) G075#0 f f
ARSTC G205#0 f f
B00 to B31 Second auxiliary function code signal F030 to F033 f f
BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2 f f
BCLP Baxis clamp signal F061#1 f
BDT1, BDT2 to BDT9 Optional block skip signal G044#0, G045 f f
BDTO Software operators panel signal (BDT) F075#2 f f
BF F007#4 f
Second auxiliary function strobe signal
BF F007#7 f
BFIN G005#4 f
Second auxiliary function completion signal
BFIN G005#7 f
BGEACT Background inuse signal F053#4 f f
BGEN Power Mate background inuse signal G092#4 f f
BGIALM Power Mate read/write alarm signal G092#3 f f
BGION Power Mate read/write inprogress signal G092#2 f f
BUCLP Baxis unclamp signal F061#0 f
CDZ Chamfering signal G053#7 f
CFINA F046#1 f f
CFINB Spindle switching completion signal (serial spindle) F050#1 f f
CFINC F169#1 f f
CHPA F046#0 f f
CHPB Power line switch signal (serial spindle) F050#0 f f
CHPC F169#0 f f
CHPCYL Chopping inoperation signal F039#3 f
CHPMD Chopping inprogress signal F039#2 f
CHPST Chopping activation signal G051#6 f
480
Torque limit reached signal for butttype reference

CLRCH1 to CLRCH8 F180 f f
position setting
CON Cs contour control switch signal G027#7 f f
COSP Spindle command signal F064#5 F
CSS Constant surface speed signal F002#2 f f
CTH1A, CTH2A G070#3, #2 f f
CTH1B, CTH2B Clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) G074#3, #2 f f
CTH1C, CTH2C G204#3, #2 f f
CUT Cutting feed inprogress signal F002#6 f f
DEFMDA G072#3 f f
Differential speed mode command signal
DEFMDB G076#3 f f
(serial spindle)
DEFMDC G206#3 f f
DEN Distribution completion signal F001#3 f f
DM00 F009#7 f f
DM01 F009#6 f f
M decode signal
DM02 F009#5 f f
DM30 F009#4 f f
DMMC Direct operation select signal G042#7 f f
DNCI DNC operation select signal G043#5 f f
DRN Dry run signal G046#7 f f
DRNE Dry run signal (PMC axis control) G150#7 f f
DRNO Software operators panel signal (DRN) F075#5 f f
DSP1, DSP2, DSP3 Spindle motor speed detection signal Y(n+1)#0 to #2 f f
DSV1 to DSV8 Servo motor speed detection signal Y(n+0) f f
DTCH1 to DTCH8 Controlled axis detach signal G124 f f
EA0 to EA6 Address signal for external data input G002#0 to #6 f f
EABUFA F131#1 f f
EABUFB F134#1 f f
Buffer full signal (PMC axis control)
EABUFC F137#1 f f
EABUFD F140#1 f f
EACNT1 to EACNT8 Control inprogress signal (PMC axis control) F182 f f
EADEN1 to EADEN8 Distribution completion signal (PMC axis control) F112 f f
EAX1 to EAX8 Controlled axis select signal (PMC axis control) G136 f f
481
EBSYA F130#7 f f
EBSYB F133#7 f f
Axis control command read completion signal
EBSTC (PMC axis control) F136#7 f f
EBSYD F139#7 f f
EBUFA G142#7 f f
EBUFB G154#7 f f
Axis control command read signal
EBUFC (PMC axis control) G166#7 f f
EBUFD G178#7 f f
EC0A to EC6A G143#0 to #6 f f
EC0B to EC6B G155#0 to #6 f f

Axis control command signal (PMC axis control)
EC0C to EC6C G167#0 to #6 f f
EC0D to EC6D G179#0 to #6 f f
ECKZA F130#1 f f
ECKZB F133#1 f f
Accumulated pulse zero check inprogress signal
ECKZC (PMC axis control) F136#1 f f
ECKZD F139#1 f f
ECLRA G142#6 f f
ECLRB G154#6 f f
Reset signal (PMC axis control)
ECLRC G166#6 f f
ECLRD G178#6 f f
ED0 to ED15 Data signal for external data input G000, G001 f f
EDENA F130#3 f f
EDENB F133#3 f f
Auxiliary function execution inprogress signal
EDENC (PMC axis control) F136#3 f f
EDEND F139#3 f f
EDGN Slave diagnose select signal F177#7 f f
EF External operation signal F008#0 f
EFD External operation signal for highspeed interface F007#1 f
EFIN External operation function completion signal G005#1 f
482
EFINA G142#0 f f
EFINB G154#0 f f
Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC axis control)
EFINC G166#0 f f
EFIND G178#0 f f
EGENA F130#4 f f
EGENB F133#4 f f
Axis movement inprogress signal (PMC axis control)
EGENC F136#4 f f
EGEND F139#4 f f
EIALA F130#2 f f
EIALB F133#2 f f
Alarm inprogress signal (PMC axis control)
EIALC F136#2 f f
EIALD F139#2 f f
EID0A to EID31A G146 to G149 f f
EID0B to EID31B G158 to G161 f f

Axis control data signal (PMC axis control)
EID0C to EID31C G170 to G173 f f
EID0D to EID31D G182 to G185 f f
EIF0A to EIF15A G144, G145 f f
EIF0B to EIF15B G156, G157 f f

Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control)
EIF0C to EIF15C G168, G169 f f
EIF0D to EIF15D G180, G181 f f
EINPA F130#0 f f
EINPB F133#0 f f
Inposition signal (PMC axis control)
EINPC F136#0 f f
EINPD F139#0 f f
EKC0 to EKC7 Key code signal G098 f f
EKENB Key code read completion signal F053#7 f f
EKSET Key code read signal G066#7 f f
EM11A to EM48A F132, F142 f f
EM11B to EM48B F135, F145 f f

Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control)
EM11C to EM48C F138, F148 f f
EM11D to EM48D F141, F151 f f
483
EMBUFA G142#2 f f
EMBUFB G154#2 f f
Buffering prohibition signal (PMC axis control)
EMBUFC G166#2 f f
EMBUFD G178#2 f f
EMFA F131#0 f f
EMFB F134#0 f f
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control)
EMFC F137#0 f f
EMFD F140#0 f f
EMSBKA G143#7 f f
EMSBKB G155#7 f f
Block stop prohibition signal (PMC axis control)
EMSBKC G167#7 f f
EMSBKD G179#7 f f
ENB F001#4 f f
ENB2 Spindle enable signal F038#2 f
ENB3 F038#3 f
ENBKY External key input mode select signal G066#1 f f
EOTNA F130#6 f f
EOTNB F133#6 f f
Overtravel negative direction signal (PMC axis control)
EOTNC F136#6 f f
EOTND F139#6 f f
EOTPA F130#5 f f
EOTPB F133#5 f f
Overtravel positive direction signal (PMC axis control)
EOTPC F136#5 f f
EOTPD F139#5 f f
EOV0 Override 0% signal (PMC axis control) F129#5 f f
EPARM Slave parameter select signal F177#6 f f
EPRG Slave program select signal F177#4 f f
ERDIO Slave external read start signal F177#1 f f
EREND Read completion signal for external data input F060#0 f f
ERS External reset signal G008#7 f f
484
ESBKA G142#3 f f
ESBKB G154#3 f f
Block stop signal (PMC axis control)
ESBKC G166#3 f f
ESBKD G178#3 f f
ESEND Search completion signal for external data input F060#1 f f
ESKIP Skip sheet (PMC axis control) X004#6 f f
ESOFA G142#4 f f
ESOFB G154#4 f f
Servooff signal (PMC axis control)
ESOFC G166#4 f f
ESOFD G178#4 f f
ESRSYC Spindle simple synchronization control G064#6 f f
ESTB Read signal for external data input G002#7 f f
ESTPA G142#5 f f
ESTPB G154#5 f f
Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC axis control)
ESTPC G166#5 f f
ESTPD G178#5 f f
ESTPIO Slave read/write stop signal F177#2 f f
EVAR Slave macro variable select signal F177#5 f f
EWTIO Slave external write start signal F177#3 f f
EXHPCC HPCC inoperation signal F066#7 f
EXLM Stored stroke limit switch signal G007#6 f f
EXRD External read start signal G058#1 f f
EXSTP External read/punch stop signal G058#2 f f
EXWT External punch start signal G058#3 f f
F1D F1 digit feed select signal G016#7 f
FIN Completion signal G004#3 f f
FRP1 to FRP8 Floating reference position return completion signal F116 f f
FSCSL Cs contour control switching completion signal F044#1 f f
Spindle phase synchronization control completion

FSPPH F044#3 f f
signal
Spindle synchronization speed control completion

FSPSY F044#2 f f
signal
G08MD Advanced preview mode signal F066#0 f
485
GOQSM Tool compensation amount write mode select signal G039#7 f
GR1, GR2 Gear select signal (input) G028#1, #2 f f
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O Gear select signal (output) F034#0 to #2 f
GR21 G029#0 f
Gear select signal (input)
GR31 G029#2 f
HDO0 to HDO7 Highspeed skip state signal F122 f f
HEAD Path select signal (tool post select signal) G063#0 F F
HROV 1% rapid traverse override select signal G096#7 f f
HS1A to HS1D Manual handle feed axis select signal G018#0 to #3 f f
HS1AO Software operators panel signal (HS1A) F077#0 f f
HS1BO Software operators panel signal (HS1B) F077#1 f f
HS1CO Software operators panel signal (HS1C) F077#2 f f
HS1DO Software operators panel signal (HS1D) F077#3 f f
HS1IA to HS1ID Manual handle interrupt axis select signal G041#0 to #3 f f
HS2A to HS2D Manual handle feed axis select signal G018#4 to #7 f f
HS2IA to HS2ID Manual handle interrupt axis select signal G041#4 to #7 f f
HS3A to HS3D Manual handle feed axis select signal G019#0 to #3 f
HS3IA to HS3ID Manual handle interrupt axis select signal G042#0 to #3 f
IGNVRY Allaxis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal G066#0 f f
IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 Specifiedaxis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal G192 f f
INCH Inch input signal F002#0 f f
INCMDA G072#5 f f
Orientation signal of incremental command external
INCMDB G076#5 f f
setting type (serial spindle)
INCMDC G206#5 f f
INCSTA F047#1 f f
INCSTB Incremental orientation mode signal (serial spindle) F051#1 f f
INCSTC F170#1 f f
INDXA G072#0 f f
Orientation stop position change command signal
INDXB G076#0 f f
(serial spindle)
INDXC G206#0 f f
INFD Infeed cutting start signal G063#6 f
INHKY Key input disable signal F053#0 f f
486
INP1 to INP8 Inposition signal F104 f f
INTGA G071#5 f f
INTGB Speed integration control signal (serial spindle) G075#5 f f
INTGC G205#5 f f
IOLACK I/O Link confirmation signal G092#0 f f
IOLNK Slave I/O Link select signal F177#0 f f
IOLS I/O Link specification signal G092#1 f f
KEY1 to KEY4 Memory protection signal G046#3 to #6 f f
KEYO Software operators panel signal (KEY1 to KEY4) F075#6 f f
LDT1A F045#4 f f
LDT1B Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle) F049#4 f f
LDT1C F168#4 f f
LDT2A F045#5 f f
LDT2B Load detection signal 2 (serial spindle) F049#5 f f
LDT2C F168#5 f f
M00 to M31 Auxiliary function code signal F010 to F013 f f
M200 to M215 Second miscellaneous function code signal F014 to F015 f f
M300 to M315 Third miscellaneous function code signal F016 to F017 f f
MA Read signal F001#7 f f
MABSM Manual absolute confirmation signal F004#2 f f
MAFL Auxiliary function lock confirmation signal F004#4 f f
MBDT1, MBDT2 to
Optional block skip confirmation signal F004#0, F005 f f
MBDT9
MCFNA G071#3 f f
MCFNB Power line switching completion signal (serial spindle) G075#3 f f
MCFNC G205#3 f f
MD1, MD2, MD4 Mode select signal G043#0 to #2 f f
MD1O Software operators panel signal (MD1) F073#0 f f
MDRN Dry run confirmation signal F002#7 f f
MDTCH1 to MDTCH8 Controlled axis detach inprogress signal F110 f f
MEDT Memory editing selection confirmation signal F003#6 f f
487
MF Auxiliary function strobe signal F007#0 f f
MF2 Second miscellaneous function strobe signal F008#4 f f
MF3 Third miscellaneous function strobe signal F008#5 f f
MFIN Auxiliary function completion signal G005#0 f f
MFIN2 Second miscellaneous function completion signal G004#4 f f
MFIN3 Third miscellaneous function completion signal G004#5 f f
MFNHGA G072#6 f f
Spindle switching main side MCC contact state
MFNHGB G076#6 f f
signal (serial spindle)
MFNHGC G206#6 f f
MH Manual handle feed selection confirmation signal F003#1 f f
MHPCC HPCC mode signal F066#6 f
MI1 to MI8 Mirror image signal G106 f f
MINC Incremental feed selection confirmation signal F003#0 f f
MINP Program input external activation signal G058#0 f f
MIX1 to MIX7 Composite control axis select signal G128#0 to #6 F
MJ Jog feed selection confirmation signal F003#2 f f
MLK Allaxis machine lock signal G044#1 f f
MLK1 to MLK8 Specifiedaxis machine lock signal G108 f f
MLKO Software operators panel signal (MLX) F075#4 f f
MMDI Manual data input selection confirmation signal F003#3 f f
MMEM Automatic operation selection confirmation signal F003#5 f f
MMI1 to MMI8 Mirror image confirmation signal F108 f f
MMLK Allaxis machine lock confirmation signal F004#1 f f
MORA1A F046#6 f f
Magnetic sensor based orientation completion
MORA1B F050#6 f f
MORA1C F169#6 f f
MORA2A F046#7 f f
Magnetic sensor based orientation vicinity signal
MORA2B F050#7 f f
(serial spindle)
MORA2C F169#7 f f
MORCMA G073#0 f f
Magnetic sensor based orientation command signal
MORCMB G077#0 f f
(serial spindle)
MORCMC G207#0 f f
488
Manual handle feed travel distance select signal

MP1, MP2 G019#4, #5 f f
(incremental feed signal)
MP1O Software operators panel signal (MP1) F076#0 f f
MP2O Software operators panel signal (MP2) F076#1 f f
MPOFA G073#2 f f
MPOFB Motor power removal command signal (serial spindle) G077#2 f f
MPOFC G207#2 f f
MRDYA G070#7 f f
MRDYB Machine ready signal (serial spindle) G074#7 f f
MRDYC G204#7 f f
Manual reference position return selection confirmation

MREF F004#5 f f
signal
MRMT DNC operation selection confirmation signal F003#4 f f
MSBK Single block confirmation signal F004#3 f f
MSDFON Motor speed detection function enable signal G016#0 f f
MTCHIN Teachin selection confirmation signal F003#7 f f
MV1 to MV8 Axis movement inprogress signal F102 f f
MVD1 to MVD8 Axis movement direction signal F106 f f
NOWT Wait ignore signal G063#1 F F
NOZAGC Orthogonal axis/slant axis control disable signal G063#5 f f
NPOS1 to NPOS8 Position indication ignore signal G198 f f
NRROA G072#2 f f
Shortcut command signal for orientation stop position
NRROB G076#2 f f
change (serial spindle)
NRROC G206#2 f f
G039#0 to #5,
OFN0 to OFN5, OFN6 Tool compensation number select signal f
G040#0
OP Automatic operation inprogress signal F000#7 f f
ORARA F045#7 f f
ORARB Orientation completion signal (serial spindle) F049#7 f f
ORARC F168#7 f f
ORCMA G070#6 f f
ORCMB Orientation command signal (serial spindle) G074#6 f f
ORCMC G204#6 f f
489
Software operators panel generalpurpose switch

OUT0 to OUT7 F072 f f
signal
OVC Override cancel signal G006#4 f f
OVCE Override cancel signal (PMC axis control) G150#5 f f
OVLS1 to OVLS7 Superposition control axis select signal G190#0 to #6 F
OVRIDA G072#4 f f
OVRIDB Analog override signal (serial spindle) G076#4 f f
OVRIDC G206#4 f f
PC1DEA F047#0 f f
Position coder onerotation signal detection state
PC1DEB F051#0 f f
PC1DEC F170#0 f f
PC2SLC Second position coder select signal G028#7 f
Smalldiameter peck drilling cycle execution

PECK2 F066#5 f
inprogress signal
PDT1 Conversational mode select signal G062#4 f
PDT2 Restart operation notification signal G062#5 f
PK1 to PK8 G122 f

Parking signal
PK1 to PK7 G122#0 to #6 F
G122#6
PKESS1 First spindle parking signal f f
(G031#6)
G122#7
PKESS2 Second spindle parking signal f f
(G031#7)
PN1, PN2, PN4, PN8,

Workpiece number search signal G009#0 to 4 f f
PN16
PORA2A F046#5 f f
Position coder based orientation vicinity signal
PORA2B F050#5 f f
(serial spindle)
PORA2C F169#5 f f
PRC Position record signal G040#6 f
PRGDPL Program screen display inprogress signal F053#1 f f
PRTSF Required part count reached signal F062#7 f f
PSAR Spindle polygon speed reached signal F063#2 f
PSE1 Polygon master axis unreached signal F063#0 f
PSE2 Polygon synchronization axis unreached signal F063#1 f
F070#0 to
PSW01 to PSW10 Position switch signal f f
F071#1
490
PSYN Polygon synchronization inprogress signal F063#7 f
G032#0 to
R01I to R12I f f
G033#3
G034#0 to
R01I2 to R12I2 Spindle motor speed command signal f f
G035#3
G036#0 to
R01I3 to R12I3 f f
G037#3
F036#0 to
R01O to R12O S12 bit code signal f f
F037#3
RCFNA F046#3 f f
RCFNB Output switching completion signal (serial spindle) F050#3 f f
RCFNC F169#3 f f
RCHA G071#7 f f
RCHB Power line state confirmation signal (serial spindle) G075#7 f f
RCHC G205#7 f f
RCHHGA G072#7 f f
Spindle switching high side MCC contact state signal
RCHHGB G076#7 f f
(serial spindle)
RCHHGC G206#7 f f
RCHPA F046#2 f f
RCHPB Output switch signal (serial spindle) F050#2 f f
RCHPC F169#2 f f
RCYO Machining restart completion signal F063#5 f
Tool axis rightangle direction handle feed mode

RGHTH G023#6 f
signal
RGSPM F065#1 f
Spindle rotation direction signal
RGSPP F065#0 f
RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061#0 f f
RGTSP1, RGTSP2 Rigid tapping spindle select signal G061#4, #5 f
RLSOT Stroke limit release signal G007#7 f
RLSOT3 Stroke limit 3 release signal G007#4 f f
RMTDI0 to RMTDI7 Input signal for remote buffer G052 f f
RMTDO0 to RMTDO7 Output signal for remote buffer F069 f f
ROTAA G072#1 f f
Rotation direction command signal for orientation stop
ROTAB G076#1 f f
position change (serial spindle)
ROTAC G206#1 f f
491
ROV1, ROV2 Rapid traverse override signal G014#0, #1 f f
ROV1E, ROV2E Rapid traverse override signal (PMC axis control) G150#0, #1 f f
ROV1O Software operators panel signal (ROV1) F076#4 f f
ROV2O Software operators panel signal (ROV2) F076#5 f f
RPALM Read/punch alarm signal F053#3 f f
RPBSY Read/punch inprogress signal F053#2 f f
RPDO Rapid traverse inprogress signal F002#1 f f
RRW Reset and rewind signal G008#6 f f
RSLA G071#6 f f
RSLB Output switching request signal (serial spindle) G075#6 f f
RSLC G205#6 f f
RST Reset inprogress signal F001#1 f f
RT Manual rapid traverse select signal G019#7 f f
RTAP Rigid tapping mode signal F076#3 f f
RTE Manual rapid traverse select signal (PMC axis control) G150#6 f f
RTO Software operators panel signal (RT) F077#6 f f
RTNCY Machining restart activation signal G064#0 f
RTNMVS Machining start point signal F066#3 f
RTRCT Retract signal G066#4 f
RTRCTF Retract completion signal F065#4 f
RVS Reverse movement signal G007#0 f
RVSL Reverse movement inprogress signal F082#2 f
RWD Rewind inprogress signal F000#0 f f
S00 to S31 Spindle function code signal F022 to F025 f f
SA Servo ready signal F000#6 f f
SAR Speed reached signal G029#4 f f
SARA F045#3 f f
SARB Speed reached signal (serial spindle) F049#3 f f
SARC F168#3 f f
SBK Single block signal G046#1 f f
SBKO Software operators panel signal (SBK) F075#3 f f
SCLP Spindle clamp signal F038#0 f
492
SDTA F045#2 f f
SDTB Speed detection signal (serial spindle) F049#2 f f
SDTC F168#2 f f
SF Spindle function strobe signal F007#2 f f
SFIN Spindle function completion signal G005#2 f f
SFRA G070#5 f f
SFRB Forward rotation command signal (serial spindle) G074#5 f f
SFRC G204#5 f f
SGN G033#5 f f
SGN2 Spindle motor command polarity specification signal G035#5 f f
SGN3 G037#5 f f
G078#0 to
SHA00 to SHA11 f f
G079#3
Spindle orientation external stop position command G080#0 to

SHB00 to SHB11 f f
signal G081#3
G208#0 to
SHC00 to SHC11 f f
G209#3
SIND G033#7 f f
SIND2 Spindle motor speed command select signal G035#7 f f
SIND3 G037#7 f f
Skip signal X004#7 f f

SKIP
Overload torque signal X004#7 f
SKIP2 to SKIP6, X004#2 to #6,

f f
SKIP7, SKIP8 #0, #1
Skip signal
SKIPP G006#6 f
SLCSRQ Machining restart point select signal G064#1 f
SLPCA, SLPCB G064#2, #3 F

Spindle feedback select signal
SLSPA, SLSPB Spindle command select signal G063#2, #3 F
SLVA G073#1 f f
SLVB Slave operation mode command signal (serial spindle) G077#1 f f
SLVC G207#1 f f
SLVSA F046#4 f f
SLVSB Slave operation state signal (serial spindle) F050#4 f f
SLVSC F169#4 f f
493
SMZ Error detect signal G053#6 f
SOCNA G071#4 f f
SOCNB Soft start/stop cancel signal (serial spindle) G075#4 f f
SOCNC G205#4 f f
SOR Spindle orientation signal G029#5 f f
SOV0 to SOV7 Spindle speed override signal G030 f f
SPAL Spindle change detection alarm signal F035#0 f f
SPL Automatic operation hold signal F000#4 f f
SPO Software operators panel signal (*SP) F075#7 f f
SPPHS Spindle phase synchronization control signal G038#3 f f
SPSLA G071#2 f f
SPSLB Spindle select signal (serial spindle) G075#2 f f
SPSLC G205#2 f f
SPSTP Spindle stop completion signal G028#6 f
SPSYC Spindle synchronization control signal G038#2 f f
SRLNI0 to SRLNI3 Ground number specification signal G091#0 to #3 f f
SRLNO0 to SRLNO3 Ground number output signal F178#0 to #3 f f
SRN Program restart signal G006#0 f f
SRNMV Program restart inprogress signal F002#4 f f
SRVA G070#4 f f
SRVB Reverse rotation command signal (serial spindle) G074#4 f f
SRVC G204#4 f f
SSIN G033#6 f f
SSIN2 Spindle motor command polarity select signal G035#6 f f
SSIN3 G037#6 f f
SSTA F045#1 f f
SSTB Speed zero signal (serial spindle) F049#1 f f
SSTC F168#1 f f
ST Automatic operation activation signal G007#2 f f
STL Automatic operation activation inprogress signal F000#5 f f
STLK Start lock signal G007#1 f
STRD Input simultaneous operation mode select signal G058#5 f
494
STWD Output simultaneous operation mode select signal G058#6 f
SUCLP Spindle unclamp signal F038#1 f
SVF1 to SVF8 Servooff signal G126 f f
SWS1 G027#0 f
SWS2 Spindle select signal G027#1 f
SWS3 G027#2 f
Spindle synchronization control alarm signal/phase

SYCAL F044#4 f f
error monitoring signal
SYN10 to SYN80 Synchronization control inprogress signal F118 f
Synchronization/composite/superposition control in
SYN10 to SYN70 F118#0 to #6 F
progress signal
SYNC1 to SYNC8 Simple synchronization axis select signal G138 f f
SYNC1 to SYNC8 G138 f

Synchronization control axis select signal
SYNC1 to SYNC7 G138#0 to #6 F
SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8 Simple synchronization manual feed axis select signal G140 f
SYNMOD EGB mode signal F065#6 f
T00 to T31 Tool function code signal F026 to F029 f f
TAP Tapping inprogress signal F001#5 f f
TF Tool function strobe signal F007#3 f f
TFIN Tool function completion signal G005#3 f f
THRD Threading inprogress signal F002#3 f f
TIALM Tool post interference alarm signal F064#7 F
TICHK Tool post interference check inprogress signal F064#6 F
TL01 to TL64 G047#0 to #6 f

Tool ground number select signal G047#0 to
TL01 to TL256 f
G048#0
TLCH Tool change signal F064#0 f f
TLCHI Toolbytool change signal F064#2 f
TLMA F045#6 f f
TLMB Torque limit inprogress signal (serial spindle) F049#6 f f
TLMC F168#6 f f
TLMHA G070#1 f f
TLMHB Torque limit command high signal (serial spindle) G074#1 f f
TLMHC G204#1 f f
495
TLMLA G070#0 f f
TLMLB Torque limit command low signal (serial spindle) G074#0 f f
TLMLC G204#0 f f
TLNW New tool select signal F064#1 f f
TLRST Tool change reset signal G048#7 f f
TLRSTI Toolbytool change reset signal G048#6 f
TLSKP Tool skip signal G048#5 f f
TMRON Generalpurpose integrating meter activation signal G053#0 f f
TRACT Tool retract mode signal F092#3 f f
TRESC Tool retract signal G059#0 f f
TRQL1 to TRQL8 Torque limit reached signal F114 f
TRRTN Tool return signal G059#1 f f
TRSPS Tool return completion signal F092#5 f f
UI000 to UI015 Input signal for custom macros G054, G055 f f
UINT Interrupt signal for custom macros G053#3 f f
UO000 to UO015 F054, F055 f f

Output signal for custom macros
UO100 to UO131 F056 to F059 f f
WATO Wait inprogress signal F063#6 F F
Workpiece coordinate system shift amount write mode

WOQSM G039#6 f
select signal
WOSET Workpiece coordinate system shift amount write signal G040#7 f
XAE X004#0 f f
YAE X004#1 f
Measurement position reached signal
ZAE X004#1 f
ZAE X004#2 f
ZP1 to ZP8 Reference position return completion signal F094 f f
ZP21 to ZP28 Second reference position return completion signal F096 f f
ZP31 to ZP38 Third reference position return completion signal F098 f f
ZP41 to ZP48 Fourth reference position return completion signal F100 f f
ZRF1 to ZRF8 Reference position establishment signal F120 f f
ZRN Manual reference position return select signal G043#7 f f
ZRNO Software operators panel signal (ZRN) F073#4 f f
496
6.6
LIST OF ADDRESSES
D Address list (1path For a signal that is common to the M series and T series, and is usable for
control) only one of the two series, hatching is provided on the upper part (the T
series) or lower part (M series) for which the signal is not usable, as shown
below.
[Example 1] EXLM and ST are signals common to the T series and M series. STLK
is a signal usable only for the T series. RLSOT and RVS are signals usable
only for the M series.
#7 #6 #2 #1 #0
G007 RLSOT EXLM ST STLK RVS T series
M series
MT!PMC
Address Bit No.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 SKIP ESKIP MIT2 +MIT2 MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE T series
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
SKIP ESKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 ZAE YAE XAE M series
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X008 *ESP
X009 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
PMC!CNC
Address Bit No.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0
G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8
G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN
G005 BFIN AFL BFIN TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN
G006 SKIPP OVC *ABSM SRN
G007 RLSOT EXLM *FLWU RLSOT3 ST STLK RVS
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT
G009 PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
497
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0
G014 ROV2 ROV1
G016 F1D MSDFON
G018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A
G019 RT MP2 MP1 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
G023 ALNGH RGHTH
G027 CON *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1
G028 PC2SLC SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1
G029 *SSTP SOR SAR GR31 GR21
G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0
G031 PKESS2 PKESS1
G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I
G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I
G034 R08I2 R07I2 R06I2 R05I2 R04I2 R03I2 R02I2 R01I2
G035 SIND2 SSIN2 SGN2 R12I2 R11I2 R10I2 R09I2
G036 R08I3 R07I3 R06I3 R05I3 R04I3 R03I3 R02I3 R01I3
G037 SIND3 SSIN3 SGN3 R12I3 R11I3 R10I3 R09I3
G038 *BECLP *BEUCP SPPHS SPSYC *PLSST
G039 GOQSM WOQSM OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0
G040 WOSET PRC OFN6
G041 HS2ID HS2IC HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID HS1IC HS1IB HS1IA
G042 DMMC HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA
G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1
G044 MLK BDT1
G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK
G047 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01
G048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP TL256
G049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0
G050 *TLV9 *TLV8
G051 *CHLD CHPST *CHP8 *CHP4 *CHP2 *CHP0
498
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G052 RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0
G053 CDZ SMZ UINT TMRON
G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000
G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008
G058 STWD STRD EXWT EXSTP EXRD MINP
G059 TRRTN TRESC
G060 *TSB
G061 RGTSP2 RGTSP1 RGTAP
G062 PDT2 PDT1 *CRTOF
G063 INFD NOZAGC
G064 ESRSYC SLCSEQ RTNCY
G065
G066 EKSET RTRCT ENBKY IGNVRY
G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
G071 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
G072 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRIDA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA
G073 MPOFA SLVA MORCMA
G074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB NCMDB OVRIDB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB
G077 MPOFB SLVB MORCMB
G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08
G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
G081 SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08
G082 Reserved for ordermade macros
G086 Ja +Ja Jg +Jg
G091 SRLNI3 SRLNI2 SRLNI1 SRLNI0
G092 BGEN BGIALM BGION IOLS IOLACK
G096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
499
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G098 KEC7 KEC6 KEC5 KEC4 KEC3 KEC2 KEC1 KEC0
G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G102 J8 J7 J6 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1
G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1
G116 *L8 *L7 *L6 *L5 *L4 *L3 *L2 *L1
G122 PK8 PK7 PK6 PK5 PK4 PK3 PK2 PK1 T series
PKESS2 PKESS1
PKESS2 PKESS1 M series
G124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1
G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
G134 MIT4 MIT3 MIT2 MIT1
G136 EAX8 EAX7 EAX6 EAX5 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1
G138 SYNC8 SYNC7 SYNC6 SYNC5 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1
G140 SYNCJ8 SYNCJ7 SYNCJ6 SYNCJ5 SYNCJ4 SYNCJ3 SYNCJ2 SYNCJ1
G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA EFINA
G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A
G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A
G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A
G146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E
G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E
500
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB EFINB
G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B
G156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B
G157 EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EIF9B EIF8B
G158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B
G166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC EFINC
G167 EMSBKC EC6C EC5C EC4C EC3C EC2C EC1C EC0C
G168 EIF7C EIF6C EIF5C EIF4C EIF3C EIF2C EIF1C EIF0C
G169 EIF15C EIF14C EIF13C EIF12C EIF11C EIF10C EIF9C EIF8C
G170 EID7C EID6C EID5C EID4C EID3C EID2C EID1C EID0C
G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD EFIND
G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D
G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D
G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D
G182 EID7D EID6D EID5D EID4D EID3D EID2D EID1D EID0D
G192 GVRY8 IGVRY7 IGVRY6 IGVRY5 IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1
G198 NPOS8 NPOS7 NPOS6 NPOS5 NPOS4 NPOS3 NPOS2 NPOS1
G204 MRDYC ORCML SFRC SRVC CTH1C CTH2C TLMHC TLMLC
G205 RCHC RSLC INTGC SOCNC MCFNC SPSLC *ESPC ARSTC
G206 RCHHGC MFNHGC INCMDC OVRIDC DEFMDC NRROC ROTAC INDXC
G207 MPOFC SLVC MORCMC
G208 SHC07 SHC06 SHC05 SHC04 SHC03 SHC02 SHC01 SHC00
501
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G209 SHC11 SHC10 SHC09 SHC08
CNC!PMC
Address Bit No.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL PWD
F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL
F002 MDRN CUT SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH
F003 MTCHIN MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH MINC
F004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1
F005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 MBDT6 MBDT5 MBDT4 MBDT3 MBDT2
F007 BF BF TF SF EFD MF
F008 MF3 MF2 EF
F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30
F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
F014 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200
F015 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208
F016 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
F017 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08
F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00
F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08
F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16
F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24
F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
502
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F031 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08
F032 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
F033 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24
F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O
F035 SPAL
F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O
F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O
F038 ENB3 ENB2 SUCLP SCLP
F039 CHPCYL CHPMD
F040 AR7 AR6 AR5 AR4 AR3 AR2 AR1 AR0
D041 AR15 AR14 AR13 AR12 AR11 AR10 AR09 AR08
F044 SYCAL FSPPH FSPSY FSCSL
F045 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
F046 MORA2A MORA1A PORA2A SLVSA RCFNA RCHPA CFINA CHPA
F047 INCSTA PC1DEA
F049 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
F050 MORA2B MORA1B PORA2B SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB
F051 INCSTB PC1DEB
F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY
F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000
F060 ESEND EREND
F061 BCLP BUCLP
F062 PRTSF
F063 PSYN RCYO PSAR PSE2 PSE1
F064 TLCHI TLNW TLCH
F065 SYNMOD RTRCTF RGSPM RGSPP
503
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F066 EXHPCC MMPCC PECK2 RTNMVS G08MD
F069 RMTDO7 RMTDO6 RMTDO5 RMTDO4 RMTDO3 RMTDO2 RMTDO1 RMTDO0
F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01
F071 PSW10 PSW09
F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO
F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP MP2O MP1O
F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO
F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O
F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O
F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12O *JV11O *JV10O *JV9O *JV8O
F081 J4O +J4O J3O +J3O J2O +J2O J1O +J1O
F082 RVSL
F090 ABTSP3 ABTSP2 ABTSP1 ABTQSV
F092 TRSPS TRACT
F094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1
F102 MV8 MV7 MV6 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1
F104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1
F106 MVD8 MVD7 MVD6 MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1
F108 MMI8 MMI7 MMI6 MMI5 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2 MMI1
F110 MDTCH8 MDTCH7 MDTCH6 MDTCH5 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1
F112 EADEN8 EADEN7 EADEN6 EADEN5 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1
F114 TRQL8 TRQL7 TRQL6 TRQL5 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1
F116 FRP8 FRP7 FRP6 FRP5 FRP4 FRP3 FRP2 FRP1
F118 SYN8O SYN7O SYN6O SYN5O SYN4O SYN3O SYN2O SYN1O
F120 ZRF8 ZRF7 ZRF6 ZRF5 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1
F122 HDO7 HDO6 HDO5 HDO4 HDO3 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0
504
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F129 *EAXSL EOV0
F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
F131 EABUFA EMFA
F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A
F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB
F134 EABUFB EMFB
F135 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B
F136 EBSYC EOTNC EOTPC EGENC EDENC EIALC ECKZC EINPC
F137 EABUFC EMFC
F138 EM28C EM24C EM22C EM21C EM18C EM14C EM12C EM11C
F139 EBSYD EOTND EOTPD EGEND EDEND EIALD ECKZD EINPD
F140 EABUFD EMFD
F141 EM28D EM24D EM22D EM21D EM18D EM14D EM12D EM11D
F142 EM48A EM44A EM42A EM41A EM38A EM34A EM32A EM31A
F145 EM48B EM44B EM42B EM41B EM38B EM34B EM32B EM31B
F148 EM48C EM44C EM42C EM41C EM38C EM34C EM32C EM31C
F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D
F168 ORARC TLMC LDT2C LDT1C SARC SDTC SSTC ALMC
F169 MORA2C MORA1C PORA2C SLVSC RCFNC RCHPC CFINC CHPC
F170 INCSTC PC1DEC
F177 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK
F178 SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0
F180 CLRCH8 CLRCH7 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1
F182 EACNT8 EACNT7 EACNT6 EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1
505
D Address list (2path In general, signal addresses are assigned to each path as indicated below.
control) However, some signals common to both paths are allocated to path 1. The
table below indicates the addresses of the interface signals between the
CNC and PMC. A signal marked with #1 is dedicated to path 1, and a
signal marked with #2 is dedicated to path 2.
Signal address Description
G000 to G255 Signals for path 1 (PMCCNC)
F000 to F255 Signals for path 1 (CNCPMC)
G1000 to G1255 Signals for path 2 (PMCCNC)
F1000 to F1255 Signals for path 2 (CNCPMC)
MT!PMC
Address Bit No.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 SKIP#1 ESKIP MIT2#1 +MIT2#1 MIT1#1 +MIT1#1 ZAE#1 XAE #1 T series
SKIP6 #1 SKIP5 #1 SKIP4 #1 SKIP3 #1 SKIP2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1
SKIP#1 ESKIP SKIP5#1 SKIP4#1 SKIP3#1 ZAE#1 YAE#1 XAE #1 M series
SKIP6 #1 SKIP2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1
X007 *DEC7#2 *DEC6#2 *DEC5#2 *DEC4#2 *DEC3#2 *DEC2#2 *DEC1#2
X008 *ESP
X009 *DEC7#1 *DEC6#1 *DEC5#1 *DEC4#2 *DEC3#1 *DEC2#1 *DEC1#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X013 SKIP#2 SKIP6#2 MIT2#2 +MIT2#2 MIT1#2 +MIT1#2 ZAE#2 XAE #2 T series
SKIP5 #2 SKIP4 #2 SKIP3 #2 SKIP2 #2 SKIP8 #2 SKIP7 #2
SKIP#2 ZAE#2 YAE#2 XAE #2
SKIP6#2 SKIP5#2 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2 SKIP2 #2 SKIP8 #2 SKIP7 #2
M series
PMC!CNC
Address Bit No.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 ED7#1 ED6#1 ED5#1 ED4#1 ED3#1 ED2#1 ED1#1 ED0#1
G002 ESTB#1 EA6#1 EA5#1 EA4#1 EA3#1 EA2#1 EA1#1 EA0#1
G004 MFIN3#1 MFIN2#1 FIN#1
G005 BFIN#1 AFL#1 BFIN#1 TFIN#1 SFIN#1 EFIN#1 MFIN#1
G006 SKIPP#1 OVC#1 *ABSM#1 SRN#1
G007 RLSOT#1 EXLM#1 *FLWP#1 RLSOT3#1 ST#1 STLK#1 RVS#1
G008 ERS#1 RRW#1 *SP#1 *ESP#1 *IT#1
G009 PN16#1 PN8#1 PN4#1 PN2#1 PN1#1
G010 *JV7#1 *JV6#1 *JV5#1 *JV4#1 *JV3#1 *JV2#1 *JV1#1 *JV0#1
506
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G012 *FV7#1 *FV6#1 *FV5#1 *FV4#1 *FV3#1 *FV2#1 *FV1#1 *FV0#1
G013 *AFV7#1 *AFV6#1 *AFV5#1 *AFV4#1 *AFV3#1 *AFV2#1 *AFV1#1 *AFV0#1
G014 ROV2#1 ROV1#1
G016 F1D#1 MSDFON #1
G018 HS2D#1 HS2C#1 HS2B#1 HS2A#1 HS1D#1 HS1C#1 HS1B#1 HS1A#1
G019 RT#1 MP2#1 MP1#1 HS3D#1 HS3C#1 HS3B#1 HS3A#1
G023 ALNGH#1 RGHTH#1
G027 CON#1 *SSTP3#1 *SSTP2#1 *SSTP1#1 SWS3#1 SWS2#1 SWS1#1
G028 PC2SLC#1 SPSTP#1 *SCPF#1 *SUCPF#1 GR2#1 GR1#1
G029 *SSTP#1 SOR#1 SAR#1 GR31#1 GR21#1
G030 SOV7#1 SOV6#1 SOV5#1 SOV4#1 SOV3#1 SOV2#1 SOV1#1 SOV0#1
G031 PKESS2#1 PKESS1#1
G032 R08I#1 R07I#1 R06I#1 R05I#1 R04I#1 R03I#1 R02I#1 R01I#1
G033 SIND#1 SSND#1 SGN#1 R12I#1 R11I#1 R10I#1 R09I#1
G034 R08I2#1 R07I2#1 R06I2#1 R05I2#1 R04I2#1 R03I2#1 R02I2#1 R01I2#1
G035 SIND2#1 SSIN2#1 SGN2#1 R12I2#1 R11I2#1 R10I2#1 R09I2#1
G038 *BECLP#1 *BEUCP#1 SPPHS SPSYC *PLSST#1

SPPHS #1 SPSYC #1
G039 GOQSM#1 WOQSM#1 OFN5#1 OFN4#1 OFN3#1 OFN2#1 OFN1#1 OFN0#1
G040 WOSET#1 PRC#1 OFN6#1
G041 HS2ID#1 HS2IC#1 HS2IB#1 HS2IA#1 HS1ID#1 HS1IC#1 HS1IB#1 HS1IA#1
G042 HS3ID#1 HS3IC#1 HS3IB#1 HS3IA#1
G043 ZRN#1 DNCI#1 MD4#1 MD2#1 MD1#1
G044 MLK#1 BDT1#1
G045 BDT9#1 BDT8#1 BDT7#1 BDT6#1 BDT5#1 BDT4#1 BDT3#1 BDT2#1
G046 DRN#1 KEY4#1 KEY3#1 KEY2#1 KEY1#1 SBK#1
G047 TL128#1 TL64#1 TL32#1 TL16#1 TL08#1 TL04#1 TL02#1 TL01#1
G048 TLRST#1 TLRSTI#1 TLSKP#1 TL256#1
G049 *TLV7#1 *TLV6#1 *TLV5#1 *TLV4#1 *TLV3#1 *TLV2#1 *TLV1#1 *TLV0#1
507
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G050 *TLV9#1 *TLV8#1
G051 *CHLD#1 CHPST#1 *CHP8#1 *CHP4#1 *CHP2#1 *CHP0#1
G053 CDZ#1 SMZ#1 UINT#1 TMRON#1
G054 UI007#1 UI006#1 UI005#1 UI004#1 UI003#1 UI002#1 UI001#1 UI000#1
G058 EXWT#1 EXSTP#1 EXRD#1 MINP#1
G059 TRRTN#1 TRESC#1
G060 *TSB#1
G061 RGTSP2#1 RGTSP1#1 RGTAP#1
G062 PDT2#1 PDT1#1 *CRTOF#1
G063 INFD#1 NOZAGC #1 SLSPB SLSPA NOWT HEAD
G064 ESRSYC #1 SLPCB SLPCA SLCSEQ#1 RTNCY#1
G066 EKSET RTRCT ENBKY IGNVRY#1
G070 MRDYA#1 ORCMA#1 SFRA#1 SRVA#1 CTH1A#1 CTH2A#1 TLMHA#1 TLMLA#1
G071 RCHA#1 RSLA#1 NTGA#1 SOCNA#1 MCFNA#1 SPSLA#1 *ESPA#1 ARSTA#1
G072 RCHHGA #1 MFNHGA #1 INCMDA#1 OVRIDA#1 DEFMDA#1 NRROA#1 ROTAA#1 INDXA#1
G073 MPOFA#1 SLVA#1 MORCMA#1
G074 MRDYB#1 ORCMB#1 SFRB#1 SRVB#1 CTH1B#1 CTH2B#1 TLMHB#1 TLMLB#1
G075 RCHB#1 RSLB#1 INTGB#1 SOCNB#1 MCFNB#1 SPSLB#1 *ESPB#1 ARSTB#1
G076 RCHHGB #1 MFNHGB #1 INCMDB#1 OVRIDB#1 DEFMDB#1 NRROB#1 ROTAB#1 INDXB#1
G077 MPOFB#1 SLVB#1 MORCMB#1
G078 SHA07#1 SHA06#1 SHA05#1 SHA04#1 SHA03#1 SHA02#1 SHA01#1 SHA00#1
G079 SHA11#1 SHA10#1 SHA09#1 SHA08#1
G080 SHB07#1 SHB06#1 SHB05#1 SHB04#1 SHB03#1 SHB02#1 SHB01#1 SHB00#1
G081 SHB11#1 SHB10#1 SHB09#1 SHB08#1
G091 SRLNI3#1 SRLNI2#1 SRLNI1#1 SRLNI0#1
G092 BGEN#1 BGIALM#1 BGION#1 IOLS#1 IOLACK#1
G096 HROV#1 *HROV6#1 *HROV5#1 *HROV4#1 *HROV3#1 *HROV2#1 *HROV1#1 *HROV0#1
508
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G098 KEC7 KEC6 KEC5 KEC4 KEC3 KEC2 KEC1 KEC0
G100 +J7#1 +J6#1 +J5#1 +J4#1 +J3#1 +J2#1 +J1#1
G102 J7#1 J6#1 J5#1 J4#1 J3#1 J2#1 J1#1
G106 MI7#1 MI6#1 MI5#1 MI4#1 MI3#1 MI2#1 MI1#1
G108 MLK7#1 MLK6#1 MLK5#1 MLK4#1 MLK3#1 MLK2#1 MLK1#1
G110 +LM7#1 +LM6#1 +LM5#1 +LM4#1 +LM3#1 +LM2#1 +LM1#1
G112 LM7#1 LM6#1 LM5#1 LM4#1 LM3#1 LM2#1 LM1#1
G114 *+L7#1 *+L6#1 *+L5#1 *+L4#1 *+L3#1 *+L2#1 *+L1#1
G116 *L7#1 *L6#1 *L5#1 *L4#1 *L3#1 *L2#1 *L1#1
G118 *+ED7#1 *+ED6#1 *+ED5#1 *+ED4#1 *+ED3#1 *+ED2#1 *+ED1#1
G120 *ED7#1 *ED6#1 *ED5#1 *ED4#1 *ED3#1 *ED2#1 *ED1#1
G122 PKESS2 #1 PK7#1 PK6#1 PK5#1 PK4#1 PK3#1 PK2#1 PK1#1 T series
PKESS1 #1
PKESS2 #1 PKESS1#1 M series
G124 DTCH7#1 DTCH6#1 DTCH5#1 DTCH4#1 DTCH3#1 DTCH2#1 DTCH1#1
G126 SVF7#1 SVF6#1 SVF5#1 SVF4#1 SVF3#1 SVF2#1 SVF1#1
G128 MIX7 MIX6 MIX5 MIX4 MIX3 MIX2 MIX1
G130 *IT7#1 *IT6#1 *IT5#1 *IT4#1 *IT3#1 *IT2#1 *IT1#1
G132 +MIT4#1 +MIT3#1 +MIT2#1 +MIT1#1
G134 MIT4#1 MIT3#1 MIT2#1 MIT1#1
G136 EAX7#1 EAX6#1 EAX5#1 EAX4#1 EAX3#1 EAX2#1 EAX1#1
G138 SYNC7#1 SYNC6#1 SYNC5#1 SYNC4#1 SYNC3#1 SYNC2#1 SYNC1#1
G140 SYNCJ7#1 SYNCJ6#1 SYNCJ5#1 SYNCJ4#1 SYNCJ3#1 SYNCJ2#1 SYNCJ1#1
G142 EBUFA#1 ECLRA#1 ESTPA#1 ESOFA#1 ESBKA#1 EMBUFA#1 EFINA#1
G143 EMSBKA#1 EC6A#1 EC5A#1 EC4A#1 EC3A#1 EC2A#1 EC1A#1 EC0A#1
G144 EIF7A#1 EIF6A#1 EIF5A#1 EIF4A#1 EIF3A#1 EIF2A#1 EIF1A#1 EIF0A#1
G146 EID7A#1 EID6A#1 EID5A#1 EID4A#1 EID3A#1 EID2A#1 EID1A#1 EID0A#1
G150 DRNE#1 RTE#1 OVCE#1 ROV2E#1 ROV1E#1
509
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G151 *FV7E#1 *FV6E#1 *FV5E#1 *FV4E#1 *FV3E#1 *FV2E#1 *FV1E#1 *FV0E#1
G154 EBUFB#1 ECLRB#1 ESTPB#1 ESOFB#1 ESBKB#1 EMBUFB#1 EFINB#1
G155 EMSBKB#1 EC6B#1 EC5B#1 EC4B#1 EC3B#1 EC2B#1 EC1B#1 EC0B#1
G156 EIF7B#1 EIF6B#1 EIF5B#1 EIF4B#1 EIF3B#1 EIF2B#1 EIF1B#1 EIF0B#1
G158 EID7B#1 EID6B#1 EID5B#1 EID4B#1 EID3B#1 EID2B#1 EID1B#1 EID0B#1
G166 EBUFC#1 ECLRC#1 ESTPC#1 ESOFC#1 ESBKC#1 EMBUFC#1 EFINC#1
G167 EMSBKC#1 EC6C#1 EC5C#1 EC4C#1 EC3C#1 EC2C#1 EC1C#1 EC0C#1
G168 EIF7C#1 EIF6C#1 EIF5C#1 EIF4C#1 EIF3C#1 EIF2C#1 EIF1C#1 EIF0C#1
G170 EID7C#1 EID6C#1 EID5C#1 EID4C#1 EID3C#1 EID2C#1 EID1C#1 EID0C#1
G172 EID23C#1 EID22C#1 EID21C#1 EID20C#1 EID19C#1 EID18C#1 EID16C#1
G178 EBUFD#1 ECLRD#1 ESTPD#1 ESOFD#1 ESBKD#1 EMBUFD#1 EFIND#1
G179 EMSBKD#1 EC6D#1 EC5D#1 EC4D#1 EC3D#1 EC2D#1 EC1D#1 EC0D#1
G180 EIF7D#1 EIF6D#1 EIF5D#1 EIF4D#1 EIF3D#1 EIF2D#1 EIF1D#1 EIF0D#1
G182 EID7D#1 EID6D#1 EID5D#1 EID4D#1 EID3D#1 EID2D#1 EID1D#1 EID0D#1
G190 OVLS7#1 OVLS6#1 OVLS5#1 OVLS4#1 OVLS3#1 OVLS2#1 OVLS1#1
G192 IGVRY7#1 IGVRY6#1 IGVRY5#1 IGVRY4#1 IGVRY3#1 IGVRY2#1 IGVRY1#1
G198 NPOS7#1 NPOS6#1 NPOS5#1 NPOS4#1 NPOS3#1 NPOS2#1 NPOS1#1
510
PMC!CNC
Address Bit No.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1002 ESTB#2 EA6#2 EA5#2 EA4#2 EA3#2 EA2#2 EA1#2 EA0#2
G1004 MFIN3#2 MFIN2#2 FIN#2
G1005 BFIN#2 AFL#2 BFIN#2 TFIN#2 SFIN#2 EFIN#2 MFIN#2
G1006 SKIPP#2 OVC#2 *ABSM#2 SRN#2
G1007 RLSOT#2 EXLM#2 *FLWU#2 RLSOT3#2 ST#2 STLK#2 RVS#2
G1008 ERS#2 RRW#2 *SP#2 *ESP#2 *IT#2
G1009 PN16#2 PN8#2 PN4#2 PN2#2 PN1#2
G1012 *FV7#2 *FV6#2 *FV5#2 *FV4#2 *FV3#2 *FV2#2 *FV1#2 *FV0#2
G1013 *AFV7#2 *AFV6#2 *AFV5#2 *AFV4#2 *AFV3#2 *AFV2#2 *AFV1#2 *AFV0#2
G1014 ROV2#2 ROV1#2
G1016 F1D#2 MSDFON #2
G1018 HS2D#2 HS2C#2 HS2B#2 HS2A#2 HS1D#2 HS1C#2 HS1B#2 HS1A#2
G1019 RT#2 MP2#2 MP1#2 HS3D#2 HS3C#2 HS3B#2 HS3A#2
G1023 ALNGH#2 RGHTH#2
G1027 CON#2 *SSTP3#2 *SSTP2#2 *SSTP1#2 SWS3#2 SWS2#2 SWS1#2
G1028 PC2SLC#2 SPSTP#2 *SCPF#2 *SUCPF#2 GR2#2 GR1#2
G1029 *SSTP#2 SOR#2 SAR#2 GR31#2 GR21#2
G1030 SOV7#2 SOV6#2 SOV5#2 SOV4#2 SOV3#2 SOV2#2 SOV1#2 SOV0#2
G1031 PKESS2#2 PKESS1#2
G1032 R08I#2 R07I#2 R06I#2 R05I#2 R04I#2 R03I#2 R02I#2 R01I#2
G1033 SIND#2 SSIN#2 SGN#2 R12I#2 R11I#2 R10I#2 R09I#2
G1035 SIND2#2 SSIN2 SGN2#2 R12I2#2 R11I2#2 R10I2#2 R09I2#2
511
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1038 *BECLP#2 *BEUCP#2 SPPHS#2 SPSYC#2 *PLSST#2
G1039 GOQSM#2 WOQSM#2 OFN5#2 OFN4#2 OFN3#2 OFN2#2 OFN1#2 OFN0#1
G1040 WOSET#2 PRC#2 OFN6#2
G1041 HS2ID#2 HS2IC#2 HS2IB#2 HS2IA#2 HS1ID#2 HS1IC#2 HS1IB#2 HS1IA#2
G1042 HS3ID#2 HS3IC#2 HS3IB#2 HS3IA#2
G1043 ZRN#2 DNCI#2 MD4#2 MD2#2 MD1#2
G1044 MLK#2 BDT1#2
G1045 BDT9#2 BDT8#2 BDT7#2 BDT6#2 BDT5#2 BDT4#2 BDT3#2 BDT2#2
G1046 DRN#2 KEY4#2 KEY3#2 KEY2#2 KEY1#2 SBK#2
G1047 TL128#2 TL64#2 TL32#2 TL16#2 TL08#2 TL04#2 TL02#2 TL01#2
G1048 TLRST#2 TLRSTI#2 TLSKP#2 TL256#2
G1049 *TLV7#2 *TLV6#2 *TLV5#2 *TLV4#2 *TLV3#2 *TLV2#2 *TLV1#2 *TLV0#2
G1050 *TLV9#2 *TLV8#2
G1051 *CHLD#2 CHPST#2 *CHP8#2 *CHP4#2 *CHP2#2 *CHP0#2
G1052
G1053 CDZ#2 SMZ#2 UINT#2 TMRON#2
G1058 EXWT#2 EXSTP#2 EXRD#2 MINP#2
G1059 TRRTN#2 TRESC#2
G1060 *TSB#2
G1061 RGTSP2#2 RGTSP1#2 RGTAP#2
G1062 PDT2#2 PDT1#2 *CRTOF#2
G1063 INFD#2 NOZAGC #2
G1064 ESRSYC #2 SLCSEQ#2 RTNCY#2
G1066 RTRCT#2 IGNVRY#2
G1070 MRDYA#2 ORCMA#2 SFRA#2 SRVA#2 CTH1A#2 CTH2A#2 TLMHA#2 TLMLA#2
G1071 RCHA#2 RSLA#2 INTGA#2 SOCNA#2 MCFNA#2 SPSLA#2 *ESPA#2 ARSTA#2
G1072 RCHHGA #2 MFNHGA #2 INCMDA#2 OVRIDA#2 DEFMDA#2 NRROA#2 ROTAA#2 INDXA#2
G1073 MPOFA#2 SLVA#2 MORCMA#2
G1074 MRDYB#2 ORCMB#2 SFRB#2 SRVB#2 CTH1B#2 CTH2B#2 TLMHB#2 TLMLB#2
512
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1075 RCHB#2 RSLB#2 INTGB#2 SOCNB#2 MCFNB#2 SPSLB#2 *ESPB#2 ARSTB#2
G1076 RCHHGB #2 MFNHGB #2 INCMDB#2 OVRIDB#2 DEFMDB#2 NRROB#2 INDXB#2 ROTAB#2
G1077 MPOFB#2 SLVB#2 MORCMB#2
G1078 SHA07#2 SHA06#2 SHA05#2 SHA04#2 SHA03#2 SHA02#2 SHA01#2 SHA00#2
G1079 SHA11#2 SHA10#2 SHA09#2 SHA08#2
G1080 SHB07#2 SHB06#2 SHB05#2 SHB04#2 SHB03#2 SHB02#2 SHB01#2 SHB00#2
G1081 SHB11#2 SHB10#2 SHB09#2 SHB08#2
G1091 SRLNI3#2 SRLNI2#2 SRLNI1#2 SRLNI0#2
G1092 BGEN#2 BGIALM#2 BGION#2 IOLS#2 IOLACK#2
G1096 HROV#2 *HROV6#2 *HROV5#2 *HROV4#2 *HROV3#2 *HROV2#2 *HROV1#2 *HROV0#2
G1100 +J7#2 +J6#2 +J5#2 +J4#2 +J3#2 +J2#2 +J1#2
G1102 J7#2 J6#2 J5#2 J4#2 J3#2 J2#2 J1#2
G1106 MI7#2 MI6#2 MI5#2 MI4#2 MI3#2 MI2#2 MI1#2
G1108 MLK7#2 MLK6#2 MLK5#2 MLK4#2 MLK3#2 MLK2#2 MLK1#2
G1110 +LM7#2 +LM6#2 +LM5#2 +LM4#2 +LM3#2 +LM2#2 +LM1#2
G1112 LM7#2 LM6#2 LM5#2 LM4#2 LM3#2 LM2#2 LM1#2
G1114 *+L7#2 *+L6#2 *+L5#2 *+L4#2 *+L3#2 *+L2#2 *+L1#2
G1116 *L7#2 *L6#2 *L5#2 *L4#2 *L3#2 *L2#2 *L1#2
G1118 *+ED7#2 *+ED6#2 *+ED5#2 *+ED4#2 *+ED3#2 *+ED2#2 *+ED1#2
G1120 *ED7#2 *ED6#2 *ED5#2 *ED4#2 *ED3#2 *ED2#2 *ED1#2
G1122 PKESS2#2 PK7#2 PK6#2 PK5#2 PK4#2 PK3#2 PK2#2 PK1#2 T series
PKESS1 #2
PKESS2#2 PKESS1#2 M series
G1124 DTCH7#2 DTCH6#2 DTCH5#2 DTCH4#2 DTCH3#2 DTCH2#2 DTCH1#2
G1126 SVF7#2 SVF6#2 SVF5#2 SVF4#2 SVF3#2 SVF2#2 SVF1#2
G1130 *IT7#2 *IT6#2 *IT5#2 *IT4#2 *IT3#2 *IT2#2 *IT1#2
G1132 +MIT4#2 +MIT3#2 +MIT2#2 +MIT1#2
G1134 MIT4#2 MIT3#2 MIT2#2 MIT1#2
G1136 EAX7#2 EAX6#2 EAX5#2 EAX4#2 EAX3#2 EAX2#2 EAX1#2
513
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1138 SYNC7#2 SYNC6#2 SYNC5#2 SYNC4#2 SYNC3#2 SYNC2#2 SYNC1#2
G1140 SYNCJ7#2 SYNCJ6#2 SYNCJ5#2 SYNCJ4#2 SYNCJ3#2 SYNCJ2#2 SYNCJ1#2
G1142 EBUFA#2 ECLRA#2 ESTPA#2 ESOFA#2 ESBKA#2 EMBUFA#2 EFINA#2
G1143 EMSBKA#2 EC6A#2 EC5A#2 EC4A#2 EC3A#2 EC2A#2 EC1A#2 EC0A#2
G1150 DRNE#2 RTE#2 OVCE#2 ROV2E#2 ROV1E#2
G1151 *FV7E#2 *FV6E#2 *FV5E#2 *FV4E#2 *FV3E#2 *FV2E#2 *FV1E#2 *FV0E#2
G1154 EBUFB#2 ECLRB#2 ESTPB#2 ESOFB#2 ESBKB#2 EMBUFB#2 EFINB#2
G1155 EMSBKB#2 EC6B#2 EC5B#2 EC4B#2 EC3B#2 EC2B#2 EC1B#2 EC0B#2
G1166 EBUFC#2 ECLRC#2 ESTPC#2 ESOFC#2 ESBKC#2 EMBUFC#2 EFINC#2
G1167 EMSBKC#2 EC6C#2 EC5C#2 EC4C#2 EC3C#2 EC2C#2 EC1C#2 EC0C#2
G1178 EBUFD#2 ECLRD#2 ESTPD#2 ESOFD#2 ESBKD#2 EMBUFD#2 EFIND#2
G1179 EMSBKD#2 EC6D#2 EC5D#2 EC4D#2 EC3D#2 EC2D#2 EC1D#2 EC0D#2
514
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1190 OVLS7#2 OVLS6#2 OVLS5#2 OVLS4#2 OVLS3#2 OVLS2#2 OVLS1#2
G1192 IGVRY7#2 IGVRY6#2 IGVRY5#2 IGVRY4#2 IGVRY3#2 IGVRY2#2 IGVRY1#2
G1198 NPOS7#2 NPOS6#2 NPOS5#2 NPOS4#2 NPOS3#2 NPOS2#2 NPOS1#2
CNC!PMC
Address Bit No.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP#1 SA#1 STL#1 SPL#1 PWD#1
F001 MA#1 TAP#1 ENB#1 DEN#1 BAL#1 RST#1 AL#1
F002 MDRN#1 CUT#1 SRNMV#1 THRD#1 CSS#1 RPDO#1 INCH#1
F003 MTCHIN#1 MEDT#1 MMEM#1 MRMT#1 MMDI#1 MJ#1 MH#1 MINC#1
F004 MREF#1 MAFL#1 MSBK#1 MABSM#1 MMLK#1 MBDT1#1
F005 MBDT9#1 MBDT8#1 MBDT7#1 MBDT6#1 MBDT5#1 MBDT4#1 MBDT3#1 MBDT2#1
F007 BF#1 BF#1 TF#1 SF#1 EFD#1 MF#1
F008 MF3#1 MF2#1 EF#1
F009 DM00#1 DM01#1 DM02#1 DM30#1
F010 M07#1 M06#1 M05#1 M04#1 M03#1 M02#1 M01#1 M00#1
F011 M15#1 M14#1 M13#1 M12#1 M11#1 M10#1 M09#1 M08#1
F012 M23#1 M22#1 M21#1 M20#1 M19#1 M18#1 M17#1 M16#1
F013 M31#1 M30#1 M29#1 M28#1 M27#1 M26#1 M25#1 M24#1
F014 M207#1 M206#1 M205#1 M204#1 M203#1 M202#1 M201#1 M200#1
F015 M215#1 M214#1 M213#1 M212#1 M211#1 M210#1 M209#1 M208#1
F016 M307#1 M306#1 M305#1 M304#1 M303#1 M302#1 M301#1 M300#1
F017 M315#1 M314#1 M313#1 M312#1 M311#1 M310#1 M309#1 M308#1
F022 S07#1 S06#1 S05#1 S04#1 S03#1 S02#1 S01#1 S00#1
F023 S15#1 S14#1 S13#1 S12#1 S11#1 S10#1 S09#1 S08#1
515
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F024 S23#1 S22#1 S21#1 S20#1 S19#1 S18#1 S17#1 S16#1
F025 S31#1 S30#1 S29#1 S28#1 S27#1 S26#1 S25#1 S24#1
F026 T07#1 T06#1 T05#1 T04#1 T03#1 T02#1 T01#1 T00#1
F027 T15#1 T14#1 T13#1 T12#1 T11#1 T10#1 T09#1 T08#1
F028 T23#1 T22#1 T21#1 T20#1 T19#1 T18#1 T17#1 T16#1
F029 T31#1 T30#1 T29#1 T28#1 T27#1 T26#1 T25#1 T24#1
F030 B07#1 B06#1 B05#1 B04#1 B03#1 B02#1 B01#1 B00#1
F031 B15#1 B14#1 B13#1 B12#1 B11#1 B10#1 B09#1 B08#1
F032 B23#1 B22#1 B21#1 B20#1 B19#1 B18#1 B17#1 B16#1
F033 B31#1 B30#1 B29#1 B28#1 B27#1 B26#1 B25#1 B24#1
F034 GR3O#1 GR2O#1 GR1O#1
F035 SPAL#1
F036 R08O#1 R07O#1 R06O#1 R05O#1 R04O#1 R03O#1 R02O#1 R01O#1
F037 R12O#1 R11O#1 R10O#1 R09O#1
F038 ENB3#1 ENB2#1 SUCLP#1 SCLP#1
F039 CHPCYL#1 CHPMD#1
F040 AR7#1 AR6#1 AR5#1 AR4#1 AR3#1 AR2#1 AR1#1 AR0#1
F044 SYCAL FSPPH FSPSY FSCSL#1

SYCAL #1 FSPPH#1 FSPSY #1
F045 ORARA#1 TLMA#1 LDT2A#1 LDT1A#1 SARA#1 SDTA#1 SSTA#1 ALMA#1
F046 MORA2A#1 MORA1A#1 PORA2A#1 SLVSA#1 RCFNA#1 RCHPA#1 CFINA#1 CHPA#1
F047 INCSTA#1 PC1DEA #1
F049 ORARB#1 TLMB#1 LDT2B#1 LDT1B#1 SARB#1 SDTB#1 SSTB#1 ALMB#1
F050 MORA2B#1 MORA1B#1 PORA2B#1 SLVSB#1 RCFNB#1 RCHPB#1 CFINB#1 CHPB#1
F051 INCSTB#1 PC1DEB #1
F053 EKENB BGEACT#1 RPALM#1 RPBSY#1 PRGDPL INHKY
F054 UO007#1 UO006#1 UO005#1 UO004#1 UO003#1 UO002#1 UO001#1 UO000#1
516
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F060 ESEND#1 EREND#1
F061 BCLP#1 BUCLP#1
F062 PRTSF#1
F063 PSYN#1 WATO#1 RCYO#1 PSAR#1 PSE2#1 PSE1#1
F064 TIALM TICHK COSP TLCHI#1 TLNW#1 TLCH#1
F065 SYNMOD#1 RTRCTF#1 RGSPM#1 RGSPP#1
F066 PECK2#1 RTNMVS#1 G08MD#1
F070 PSW08#1 PSW07#1 PSW06#1 PSW05#1 PSW04#1 PSW03#1 PSW02#1 PSW01#1
F071 PSW10#1 PSW09#1
F072 OUT7#1 OUT6#1 OUT5#1 OUT4#1 OUT3#1 OUT2#1 OUT1#1 OUT0#1
F073 ZRNO#1 MD4O#1 MD2O#1 MD1O#1
F075 SPO#1 KEYO#1 DRNO#1 MLKO#1 SBKO#1 BDTO#1
F076 ROV2O#1 ROV1O#1 RTAP#1 MP2O#1 MP1O#1
F077 RTO#1 HS1DO#1 HS1CO#1 HS1BO#1 HS1AO#1
F078 *FV7O#1 *FV6O#1 *FV5O#1 *FV4O#1 *FV3O#1 *FV2O#1 *FV1O#1 *FV0O#1
F079 *JV7O#1 *JV6O#1 *JV5O#1 *JV4O#1 *JV3O#1 *JV2O#1 *JV1O#1 *JV0O#1
F081 J4O#1 +J4O#1 J3O#1 +J3O#1 J2O#1 +J2O#1 J1O#1 +J1O#1
F082 RVSL#1
F090 ABTSP2#1 ABTSP1#1 ABTQSV#1
F092 TRSPS#1 TRACT#1
F094 ZP7#1 ZP6#1 ZP5#1 ZP4#1 ZP3#1 ZP2#1 ZP1#1
F102 MV7#1 MV6#1 MV5#1 MV4#1 MV3#1 MV2#1 MV1#1
F104 INP7#1 INP6#1 INP5#1 INP4#1 INP3#1 INP2#1 INP1#1
F106 MVD7#1 MVD6#1 MVD5#1 MVD4#1 MVD3#1 MVD2#1 MVD1#1
F108 MMI7#1 MMI6#1 MMI5#1 MMI4#1 MMI3#1 MMI2#1 MMI1#1
F110 MDTCH7#1 MDTCH6#1 MDTCH5#1 MDTCH4#1 MDTCH3#1 MDTCH2#1 MDTCH1#1
517
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F112 EADEN7 #1 EADEN6 #1 EADEN5 #1 EADEN4 #1 EADEN3 #1 EADEN2 #1 EADEN1 #1
F114 TRQL7#1 TRQL6#1 TRQL5#1 TRQL4#1 TRQL3#1 TRQL2#1 TRQL1#1
F116 FRP7#1 FRP6#1 FRP5#1 FRP4#1 FRP3#1 FRP2#1 FRP1#1
F118 SYN7O#1 SYN6O#1 SYN5O#1 SYN4O#1 SYN3O#1 SYN2O#1 SYN1O#1
F120 ZRF7#1 ZRF6#1 ZRF5#1 ZRF4#1 ZRF3#1 ZRF2#1 ZRF1#1
F122 HDO7#1 HDO6#1 HDO5#1 HDO4#1 HDO3#1 HDO2#1 HDO1#1 HDO0#1
F129 *EAXSL#1 EOV0#1
F130 EBSYA#1 EOTNA#1 EOTPA#1 EGENA#1 EDENA#1 EIALA#1 ECKZA#1 EINPA#1
F131 EABUFA#1 EMFA#1
F132 EM28A#1 EM24A#1 EM22A#1 EM21A#1 EM18A#1 EM14A#1 EM12A#1 EM11A#1
F133 EBSYB#1 EOTNB#1 EOTPB#1 EGENB#1 EDENB#1 EIALB#1 ECKZB#1 EINPB#1
F134 EABUFB #1 EMFB#1
F135 EM28B#1 EM24B#1 EM22B#1 EM21B#1 EM18B#1 EM14B#1 EM12B#1 EM11B#1
F136 EBSYC#1 EOTNC#1 EOTPC#1 EGENC#1 EDENC#1 EIALC#1 ECKZC#1 EINPC#1
F137 EABUFC#1 EMFC#1
F138 EM28C#1 EM24C#1 EM22C#1 EM21C#1 EM18C#1 EM14C#1 EM12C#1 EM11C#1
F139 EBSYD#1 EOTND#1 EOTPD#1 EGEND#1 EDEND#1 EIALD#1 ECKZD#1 EINPD#1
F140 EABUFD#1 EMFD#1
F141 EM28D#1 EM24D#1 EM22D#1 EM21D#1 EM18D#1 EM14D#1 EM12D#1 EM11D#1
F177 EDGN#1 EPARM#1 EVAR#1 EPRG#1 EWTIO#1 ESTPIO#1 ERDIO#1 IOLNK#1
F178 SRLNO3#1 SRLNO2#1 SRLNO1#1 SRLNO0#1
F180 CLRCH8#1 CLRCH7#1 CLRCH6#1 CLRCH5#1 CLRCH4#1 CLRCH3#1 CLRCH2#1 CLRCH1#1
F182 EACNT7#1 EACNT6#1 EACNT5#1 EACNT4#1 EACNT3#1 EACNT2#1 EACNT1#1
518
CNC!PMC
Address Bit No.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1000 OP#2 SA#2 STL#2 SPL#2 PWD#2
F1001 MA#2 TAP#2 ENB#2 DEN#2 BAL#2 RST#2 AL#2
F1002 MDRN#2 CUT#2 SRNMV#2 THRD#2 CSS#2 RPDO#2 INCH#2
F1003 MTCHIN#2 MEDT#2 MMEM#2 MRMT#2 MMDI#2 MJ#2 MH#2 MINC#2
F1004 MREF#2 MAFL#2 MSBK#2 MABSM#2 MMLK#2 MBDT1#2
F1005 MBDT9#2 MBDT8#2 MBDT7#2 MBDT6#2 MBDT5#2 MBDT4#2 MBDT3#2 MBDT2#2
F1007 BF#2 BF#2 TF#2 SF#2 EFD#2 MF#2
F1008 MF3#2 MF2#2 EF#2
F1009 DM00#2 DM01#2 DM02#2 DM30#2
F1010 M07#2 M06#2 M05#2 M04#2 M03#2 M02#2 M01#2 M00#2
F1011 M15#2 M14#2 M13#2 M12#2 M11#2 M10#2 M09#2 M08#2
F1012 M23#2 M22#2 M21#2 M20#2 M19#2 M18#2 M17#2 M16#2
F1013 M31#2 M30#2 M29#2 M28#2 M27#2 M26#2 M25#2 M24#2
F1014 M207#2 M206#2 M205#2 M204#2 M203#2 M202#2 M201#2 M200#2
F1015 M215#2 M214#2 M213#2 M212#2 M211#2 M210#2 M209#2 M208#2
F1016 M307#2 M306#2 M305#2 M304#2 M303#2 M302#2 M301#2 M300#2
F1017 M315#2 M314#2 M313#2 M312#2 M311#2 M310#2 M309#2 M308#2
F1022 S07#2 S06#2 S05#2 S04#2 S03#2 S02#2 S01#2 S00#2
F1023 S15#2 S14#2 S13#2 S12#2 S11#2 S10#2 S09#2 S08#2
F1024 S23#2 S22#2 S21#2 S20#2 S19#2 S18#2 S17#2 S16#2
F1025 S31#2 S30#2 S29#2 S28#2 S27#2 S26#2 S25#2 S24#2
F1026 T07#2 T06#2 T05#2 T04#2 T03#2 T02#2 T01#2 T00#2
F1027 T15#2 T14#2 T13#2 T12#2 T11#2 T10#2 T09#2 T08#2
F1028 T23#2 T22#2 T21#2 T20#2 T19#2 T18#2 T17#2 T16#2
F1029 T31#2 T30#2 T29#2 T28#2 T27#2 T26#2 T25#2 T24#2
F1030 B07#2 B06#2 B05#2 B04#2 B03#2 B02#2 B01#2 B00#2
F1031 B15#2 B14#2 B13#2 B12#2 B11#2 B10#2 B09#2 B08#2
F1032 B23#2 B22#2 B21#2 B20#2 B19#2 B18#2 B17#2 B16#2
F1033 B31#2 B30#2 B29#2 B28#2 B27#2 B26#2 B25#2 B24#2
519
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1034 GR3O#2 GR2O#2 GR1O#2
F1035 SPAL#2
F1036 R08O#2 R07O#2 R06O#2 R05O#2 R04O#2 R03O#2 R02O#2 R01O#2
F1037 R12O#2 R11O#2 R10O#2 R09O#2
F1038 ENB3#2 ENB2#2 SUCLP#2 SCLP#2
F1039 CHPCYL#2 CHPMD#2
F1044 SYCAL#2 FSPPH#2 FSPSY#2 FSCSL#2
F1045 ORARA#2 TLMA#2 LDT2A#2 LDT1A#2 SARA#2 SDTA#2 SSTA#2 ALMA#2
F1046 MORA2A#2 MORA1A#2 PORA2A#2 SLVSA#2 RCFNA#2 RCHPA#2 CFINA#2 CHPA#2
F1047 INCSTA#2 PC1DEA #2
F1049 ORARB#2 TLMB#2 LDT2B#2 LDT1B#2 SARB#2 SDTB#2 SSTB#2 ALMB#2
F1050 MORA2B#2 MORA1B#2 PORA2B#2 SLVSB#2 RCFNB#2 RCHPB#2 CFINB#2 CHPB#2
F1051 INCSTB#2 PC1DEB #2
F1053 BGEACT#2 RPALM#2 RPBSY#2
F1060 ESEND#2 EREND#2
F1061 BCLP#2 BUCLP#2
F1062 PRTSF#2
F1063 PSYN#2 WATO#2 RCYO#2 PSAR#2 PSE2#2 PSE1#2
F1064 TLCHI#2 TLNW#2 TLCH#2
F1065 SYNMOD#2 RTRCTF#2 RGSPM#2 RGSPP#2
F1066 PECK2#2 RTNMVS#2 G08MD#2
F1070 PSW08#2 PSW07#2 PSW06#2 PSW05#2 PSW04#2 PSW03#2 PSW02#2 PSW01#2
F1071 PSW10#2 PSW09#2
520
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1072 OUT7#2 OUT6#2 OUT5#2 OUT4#2 OUT3#2 OUT2#2 OUT1#2 OUT0#2
F1073 ZRNO#2 MD4O#2 MD2O#2 MD1O#2
F1075 SPO#2 KEYO#2 DRNO#2 MLKO#2 SBKO#2 BDTO#2
F1076 ROV2O#2 ROV1O#2 RTAP#2 MP2O#2 MP1O#2
F1077 RTO#2 HS1DO#2 HS1CO#2 HS1BO#2 HS1AO#2
F1079 *JV7O#2 *JV6O#2 *JV5O#2 *JV4O#2 *JV3O#2 *JV2O#2 *JV1O#2 *JV0O#2
F1081 J4O#2 +J4O#2 J3O#2 +J3O#2 J2O#2 +J2O#2 J1O#2 +J1O#2
F1082 RVSL#2
F1090 ABTSP2#2 ABTSP1#2 ABTQSV#2
F1092 TRSPS#2 TRACT#2
F1102 MV7#2 MV6#2 MV5#2 MV4#2 MV3#2 MV2#2 MV1#2
F1104 INP7#2 INP6#2 INP5#2 INP4#2 INP3#2 INP2#2 INP1#2
F1106 MVD7#2 MVD6#2 MVD5#2 MVD4#2 MVD3#2 MVD2#2 MVD1#2
F1108 MMI7#2 MMI6#2 MMI5#2 MMI4#2 MMI3#2 MMI2#2 MMI1#2
F1110 MDTCH7#2 MDTCH6#2 MDTCH5#2 MDTCH4#2 MDTCH3#2 MDTCH2#2 MDTCH1#2
F1112 EADEN7 #2 EADEN6 #2 EADEN5 #2 EADEN4 #2 EADEN3 #2 EADEN2 #2 EADEN1 #2
F1114 TRQL7#2 TRQL6#2 TRQL5#2 TRQL4#2 TRQL3#2 TRQL2#2 TRQL1#2
F1116 FRP7#2 FRP6#2 FRP5#2 FRP4#2 FRP3#2 FRP2#2 FRP1#2
F1118 SYN7O#2 SYN6O#2 SYN5O#2 SYN4O#2 SYN3O#2 SYN2O#2 SYN1O#2
F1120 ZRF7#2 ZRF6#2 ZRF5#2 ZRF4#2 ZRF3#2 ZRF2#2 ZRF1#2
F1122 HDO7#2 HDO6#2 HDO5#2 HDO4#2 HDO3#2 HDO2#2 HDO1#2 HDO0#2
F1129 *EAXSL#2 EOV0#2
F1130 EBSYA#2 EOTNA#2 EOTP#2 EGENA#2 EDENA#2 EIALA#2 ECKZA#2 EINPA#2
F1131 EABUFA#2 EMFA#2
521
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1133 EBSYB#2 EOTNB#2 EOTB#2 EGENB#2 EDENB#2 EIALB#2 ECKZB#2 EINPB#2
F1134 EABUFB #2 EMFB#2
F1136 EBSYC#2 EOTNC#2 EOTC#2 EGENC#2 EDENC#2 EIALC#2 ECKZC#2 EINPC#2
F1137 EABUFC#2 EMFC#2
F1139 EBSYD#2 EOTND#2 EOTD#2 EGEND#2 EDEND#2 EIALD#2 ECKZD#2 EINPD#2
F1140 EABUFD#2 EMFD#2
F1177 EDGN#2 EPARM#2 EVAR#2 EPRG#2 EWTIO#2 ESTPIO#2 ERDIO#2 IOLNK#2
F1178 SRLNO3#2 SRLNO2#2 SRLNO1#2 SRLNO0#2
F1180 CLRCH8#2 CLRCH7#2 CLRCH6#2 CLRCH5#2 CLRCH4#2 CLRCH3#2 CLRCH2#2 CLRCH1#2
F1182 EACNT7#2 EACNT6#2 EACNT5#2 EACNT4#2 EACNT3#2 EACNT2#2 EACNT1#2
522
B63005EN/02 7. DIGITAL SERVO
7 DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance of

digital servo and adjustment of reference position.
7.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . 524

7.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
7.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION
(DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
7.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . 540
523
7. DIGITAL SERVO B63005EN/02
7.1 This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is used
for field adjustment of machine tool.
INITIAL SETTING
1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition.
SERVO PARAMETERS
2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.

1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.
3. Turn off the power once then turn it on again.

4. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following
operation: SYSTEM key [SV.PARA].
5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.
SERVO SETTING
XAXIS YAXIS
(1)INITIAL SET BIT 00000000 00000000 PRM 2000
(2)MOTOR ID NO. 47 47 PRM 2020
(3)amr 00000000 00000000 PRM 2001
(4)cmr 2 2 PRM 1820
(5)FEED GEAR N 1 1 PRM 2084
(6) (N/M) M 125 125 PRM 2085
(7)DIRECTION SET 111 111 PRM 2022
(8)VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8192 8192 PRM 2023
(9)POSITION PULSE NO. 12500 12500 PRM 2024
(10)REF.COUNTER 8000 8000 PRM 1821
(1) Initial set bit

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2000 PRMCAL DGPRM PLC01
#3 (PRMCAL) 1 : Turns to 1 when the initial setting is done.

The following parameters are set automatically in
accordance with the no. of pulses of pulse coder:
PRM 2043(PK1V), PRM 2044(PK2V), PRM 2047(POA1),
PRM 2053(PPMAX),PRM 2054(PDDP),
PRM 2056(EMFCMP),
PRM 2057(PVPA), PRM 2059(EMFBAS),
PRM 2074(AALPH),PRM 2076(WKAC)
#1 (DGPRM)l 0 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done.
1 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not done.
#0 (PLC01) 0 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are used as they are:
1 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are multiplied by 10.
524
(2) Motor number

For a series servo motor
Model name a 0.5 a 1/3000 a 2/2000 a 2.5/3000 a 3/3000
Drawing number 0113 0371 0372 0374 0123
Format number 13 61 46 84 15
Model name a 6/2000 a 6/3000 a 12/2000 a 12/3000 a 22/1500

Drawing number 0127 0128 0142 0143 0146
Model name a 22/2000 a 22/3000 a 30/1200 a 30/2000 a 30/3000

Drawing number 0147 0148 0151 0152 0153
Model name a 40/FAN a 40/2000 a 65 a 100 a 150

Drawing number 0158 0157 0331 0332 0333
For a L series servo motor

Model name a L3/3000 a L6/2000 a L9/3000 a L25/3000 a L50/2000
Drawing number 0561 0562 0564 0571 0572
Format number 56 or 68 57 or 69 58 or 70 59 60
For a C series servo motor

Model name a C3/2000 a C6/2000 a C12/2000 a C22/1500
Drawing number 0121 0126 0141 0145
Format number 7 8 9 10
For a HV series servo motor

Model name a 12HV a 22HV a 30HV
Drawing number 0176 0177 0178
Format number 3 4 5
For a E and b series servo motor

Model name a 0.5 b 1/3000 b 2/3000 b 3/3000 b 6/2000
a E1/3000 a E2/3000 a E3/3000 a E6/2000
Drawing number 0113 0101 0102 0105 0106
525
For a M series servo motor

Model name a M2/3000 a M2.5/3000 a M3/3000 a M6/3000 a M9/3000
Drawing number 0376 0377 0161 0162 0163
Model name a M22/3000 a M30/3000 a M50/3000

Drawing number 0165 0166 0169
Format number 100 101 108
Model name a M6HV a M9HV a M22HV a M30HV

Drawing number 0182 0183 0185 0186
For linear motor

Model name 1500A 3000B 6000B 9000B
Drawing number 0410 0411 0412 0413
(3) Arbitrary AMR function (for 50S to 30S)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 2001 AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 For each axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Motor model
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 50S
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 40S, 30S
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 other than above
NOTE
Set 00000000 for serial pulse coder C.
(4) CMR
PRM 1820 Command multiply ratio
1) When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27 Set value= 1 +100

CMR
2) When CMR is 0.5 to 48 Set value=2CMR
(5) Turn off the power then back on.

(6) Feed gear N/M
PRM 2084 n for flexible feed gear
PRM 2085 m for flexible feed gear
1) For serial pulse coder A or B, and serial a pulse coder.
n Number of feedback pulses per revolution of motor

=
m 1000000
NOTE
For serial pulse coder B, use a value not exceeding 250,000
as the number of feedback pulses per revolution.
526
<<Examples of calculation>>
1/1000 mm 1/10000 mm
One revolution 8mm n=1/m=125 n=2/m=25
of motor 10mm n=1/m=100 n=1/m=10
12mm n=3/m=250 n=3/m=25
(7) Direction of travel

PRM 2022 Rotational direction of motor
111 : Normal (clockwise) 111 : Reverse (counterclockwise)

(8) Number of velocity pulses and position pulses
1) For serial pulse coder A or B, or serial a pulse coder
Increment system : 1/1000mm Increment system : 1/10000mm
Paramter No.
Closed loop Semiclosed loop Closed loop Semiclosed loop
High resolution setting 2000 xxxx xxx 0 xxxx xxx 1
Separate detector 1815 0010 0010 0010 0000 0010 0010 0010 0000
No. of velocity feedback pulses 2023 8192 819
No. of position feedback pulses 2024 NS 12500 NS/10 1250
NOTE
1 NS is the number of position feedback pulses per one
revolution of the motor (multiplied by four)
2 The 50S to 30S motors have different numbers of poles.
Set parameter 2001.
3 Even if the system employs a closed loop, bit 3 of parameter
2002 is 1 and bit 4 is 0.
(9) Reference counter

PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity for each axis (0 99999999)
6. Turn off the power then back on.

(10) FSSB display and setting screen
Connecting the CNC control unit to servo amplifiers via a
highspeed serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which
uses only one fiber optics cable, can significantly reduce the amount
of cabling in machine tool electrical sections.
Axis settings are calculated automatically according to the
interrelationships between axes and amplifiers entered on the FSSB
setting screen. Parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919, 1936, and
1937 are specified automatically according to the results of the
calculation.
D Display The FSSB setting screen displays FSSBbased amplifier and axis
information. This information can also be specified by the operator.
1. Press function key SYSTEM
.
2. To display [FSSB], press continuous menu key several times.

3. Pressing soft key [FSSB] causes the AMP SET screen (or the
previously selected FSSB setting screen) to appear, with the following
soft keys displayed.
527
AMP AXIS MAINTE (OPRT)
The FSSB setting screens include: AMP SET, AXIS SET, and AMP
MAINTENANCE.
Pressing soft key [AMP] causes the AMP SET screen to appear.
Pressing soft key [AXIS] causes the AXIS SET screen to appear.
Pressing soft key [MAINTE] causes the AMP MAINTENANCE
screen to appear.
1) Amplifier setting screen
The amplifier setting screen consists of two sections: the first section
displays information about the slave, while the second section
displays information about the pulse modules.
AMPLIFIER SETTING O1000 N00001

NO. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. AXIS NAME
1 A1L SVMHV 40AL 1 X
2 A1M SVM 12A 2 Y
3 A2L SVM 40A 3 Z
4 A3L SVM 20A 4 A
5 A3M SVM 40A 5 B
7 A4L SVU 240A 6 C
NO. EXTRA TYPE PCB ID

6 M1 A 0000 DETECTOR(8AXES)
8 M2 B 12AB
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][(OPRT)]
The amplifier setting screen consists of the following items:

D NO. (slave number)
The numbers of up to ten slaves (up to eight amplifiers and up to two
pulse modules) connected via the FSSB are displayed sequentially,
with the one nearest to the CNC being number 1.
D AMP (amplifier type)
The amplifier type display consists of the letter A, which stands for
amplifier, a number that indicates the placing of the amplifier, as
counted from that nearest to the CNC, and a letter such as L (first axis)
or M (second axis) indicating the placing of the axis in the amplifier.
D AXIS NO. (controlled axis number)
The axis number of each controlled axis specified in parameters (Nos.
1920 to 1929) is displayed. If a number specified in these parameters
falls outside the range of between 1 and the maximum number of
controlled axes, 0 is displayed.
D NAME (controlled axis name)
The axis name assigned to a parameter (No. 1020) corresponding to
a particular controlled axis number is displayed. If the controlled axis
number is 0, is displayed.
528
D The following items are displayed as amplifier information:

UNIT (servo amplifier unit type)
SERIES (servo amplifier series)
CURRENT (maximum rating)
D The following items are displayed as pulse module information:
SEPARATE
This display consists of the letter M, which stands for pulse
module and a number indicating the placing of the pulse module,
as counted from that nearest to the CNC.
TYPE
This display is a letter indicating the type of the pulse module.
PCB ID
This display consists of four digits indicating the pulse module ID
(hexadecimal). The pulse module ID is followed by DETECTOR
(8AXES) for the eightaxis separate detector module or
DETECTOR (4AXES) for the fouraxis separate detector module.
2) Axis setting screen
The axis setting screen displays the information shown below:
AXIS SETTING O1000 N00001

AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1DSF Cs TNDM
1 X A1L 0 0 0 0 1
2 Y A1M 1 0 1 0 0
3 Z A2L 0 0 0 1 0
4 A A3L 0 0 0 0 2
5 B A3M 0 0 0 0 0
6 C A4L 0 0 0 0 0
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][(OPRT)]
This axis setting screen displays the following items:

This item is the placing of the NC controlled axis.
D AMP (type of the amplifier connected to each axis)
D M1 (connector number for pulse module 1)
This item is the number of the connector for pulse module 1, specified
in parameter No. 1931.
This item is the number of the connector for pulse module 2, specified
in parameter No. 1932.
529
D TWOAXES
This item is the value specified in bit 0 (parameter 1 DSP) of parameter
No. 1904. It is 1 for an axis (such as a learning control axis, highspeed
current loop axis, or highspeed interface axis) that exclusively uses
a DSP, which is usually shared by twoaxes.
D Cs: Cs contour controlled axis
This item is the value specified in parameter No. 1933. It is 1 for the
Cs contour controlled axis.
D TANDEM (M series only)
This item is the number specified in parameter No. 1934. Consecutive
odd and even numbers are displayed for the master and slave axes for
tandem control.
3) Amplifier maintenance screen
The amplifier maintenance screen displays maintenance information
for servo amplifiers. This screen consists of the following two pages,
either of which can be selected by pressing the or key.
AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE O1000 N00001

AXIS NAME AMP SERIES UNIT AXES CUR.
1 X A1L SVMHV 2 40AL
2 Y A1M SVM 2 12A
3 Z A2L SVM 1 40A
4 A A3L SVM 2 20A
5 B A3M SVM 2 40A
6 C A4L SVU 1 240A
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56

[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][ ]
AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE O1000 N00001

AXIS NAME EDITION TEST MAINTENO.
1 X 01A 970123 01
2 Y 01A 970123 01
3 Z 01A 970123 01
4 A 02B 970123 01
5 B 02B 970123 01
6 C 02B 970123 01
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56

[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][ ]
530
The amplifier maintenance screen displays the following items:

D AMP (type of amplifier connected to each axis)
D SERIES (servo amplifier series of an amplifier connected to each axis)
D UNIT (unit type of a servo amplifier connected to each axis)
D NO. OF AXES (maximum number of axes controlled by an amplifier
connected to each axis)
D CURRENT (maximum rating for amplifiers connected to each axis)
D VERSION (unit version number of an amplifier connected to each
axis)
D TEST DATE (date of test performed on an amplifier connected to each
axis)
Example) 970123 = January 23, 1997
D MAINTENANCE NO. (engineering change number for an amplifier
connected to each axis)
D Setting On an FSSB setting screen (other than the amplifier maintenance screen),
pressing soft key [(OPRT)] displays the following soft keys:
SET READ INPUT
To enter data, place the machine in MDI mode or the emergency stop state,
position the cursor to the point where a desired item is to be input, then
enter the desired data and press soft key [INPUT] (or the INPUT key on the
MDI panel).
When soft key [SET] is pressed after data has been entered, a warning
message is displayed if the entered data contains an error. When the data
is satisfactory, the corresponding parameter is set up.
To restore the previous value of a parameter if, for example, an entered
value is incorrect, press soft key [READ].
When the power is turned on, values are read from the parameters and
displayed on the screen.
CAUTION
1 For the parameters to be specified on the FSSB setting
screen, do not attempt to enter values on the parameter
screen using the MDI or a G10 command. Use only the
FSSB screen to enter values for these parameters.
2 If pressing soft key [SET] results in a warning message
being displayed, retry data entry, or press soft key [READ]
to clear the warning message. Note that pressing the reset
key does not clear the warning message.
531
1) Amplifier setting screen
AMPLIFIER SETTING O1000 N00001

NO. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. AXIS NAME
2 A1M SVM 12A 2 Y
3 A2L SVM 40A 3 Z
4 A3L SVM 20A 4 A
5 A3M SVM 40A 5 B
7 A4L SVU 240A 6 C

8 M2 B 12AB
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
[SETTING][ ][ READ ][ ][ INPUT ]
The amplifier setting screen displays the following items:

For this item, enter a value of between 1 and the maximum number of
controlled axes. If a number that falls outside this range is entered, the
warning message INVALID FORMAT appears. If the entered
controlled axis number is duplicate or 0, the warning message
SPECIFIED DATA IS OUT OF RANGE appears when soft key
[SET] is pressed to assert the entered value. In this case, no value can
be entered for the parameter.
2) Axis setting screen
AXIS SETTING O1000 N00001

AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1DSF Cs TNDM
1 X A1L 0 0 0 0 1
2 Y A1M 1 0 1 0 0
3 Z A2L 0 0 0 1 0
4 A A3L 0 0 0 0 2
5 B A3M 0 0 0 0 0
6 C A4L 0 0 0 0 0
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
[SETTING][ ][ READ ][ ][ INPUT ]
On the axis setting screen, the following items can be specified:

For an axis that uses pulse module 1, enter a connector number using
a number in the range of between 1 and the maximum number of axes
for pulse module 1. When pulse module 1 need not be used, enter 0.
If a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the warning
message INVALID FORMAT is displayed.
532

For an axis that uses pulse module 2, enter a connector number using
a number in the range of between 1 and the maximum number of axes
for pulse module 2. When pulse module 2 need not be used, enter 0.
If a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the warning
message INVALID FORMAT is displayed.
D TWOAXES
Enter 1 for the following axes, each of which exclusively uses a DSP,
which is usually shared by twoaxes. If a number other than 0 or 1 is
entered, the warning message INVALID FORMAT is displayed.
Learning control axis
Highspeed current loop axis
Highspeed interface axis
D Cs (Cs contour controlled axis)
Enter 1 for the Cs contour controlled axis. If a number other than 0
or 1 is entered, the warning message INVALID FORMAT is
displayed.
D TANDEM
Enter odd and even numbers for the master and slave axes for tandem
control. These numbers must be consecutive and in the range of
between 1 and 8. If a number that falls outside the valid range is
entered, the warning message INVALID FORMAT is displayed.
When soft key [SET] is pressed on the axis setting screen after data entry,
the warning message SPECIFIED DATA IS OUT OF RANGE is
displayed if any of the following conditions is satisfied.
D Both M1 and M2 are nonzero for an axis.
D Any two of TWOAXES, Cs, and TANDEM are nonzero for an axis.
D A duplicate value is specified for M1.
D A duplicate value is specified for M2.
D A duplicate value is specified for Cs.
D A duplicate value is specified for TANDEM.
D An invalid master/slave axis pair is specified for TANDEM.
533
7.2
SERVO TUNING
SCREEN
7.2.1 Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen.

Parameter Setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.

1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.
7.2.2 1. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [SV. PARA] in this order.
Displaying Servo
2. Press soft key [SV.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.
Tuning Screen
SERVO TUNING 01234 N12345
(PAMAMETER) (MONITOR)
(1) FUN.BIT 00000000 ALARM 1 00000000 (9)
(2) LOOP GAIN 3000 ALARM 2 00000000 (10)
(3) TURNING SET. 0 ALARM 3 10000000 (11)
(4) SET PERIOD 50 ALARM 4 00000000 (12)
(5) INT.GAIN 113 ALARM 5 00000000 (13)
(6) PROP.GAIN 1015 LOOP GAIN 2999 (14)
(7) FILER 0 POS ERROR 556 (15)
(8) VELOC.GAIN 125 CURRENT% 10 (16)
SPEED RPM 100 (17)
SV SET SV TUN OPE
(1) Function bit : PRM 2003

(2) Loop gain : PRM 1825
(3) Tuning start : (Used by automatic servo tuning function)
(4) Set period : (Used by automatic servo tuning function)
(5) Integral gain : PRM 2043
(6) Proportional gain : PRM 2044
(7) Filter : PRM 2067
(PRM 2021)+256
(8) Velocity gain Set value= 100
256
(9) Alarm 1 : DGN 200 (Details of alarm 400 and 414)

(10) Alarm 2 : DGN 201 (Details of disconnection alarm, overload)
(11) Alarm 3 : DGN 202 (Details of alarm 319)
(14) Loop gain : Actual loop gain
(15) Position error : Actual position error(DGN 300)
(16) Current(%) : Indicate current with % to the rated value.
(17) Speed RPM : Number of motor actual rotation
534
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm1 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
DGN (200) :
#7 (OVL) : Overload alarm
#6 (LV) : Insufficient voltage alarm
#5 (OVC) : Overcurrent alarm
#4 (HCA) : Abnormal current alarm
#3 (HVA) : Excessive voltage alarm
#2 (DCA) : Discharge alarm
#1 (FBA) : Disconnection alarm
#0 (OFA) : Overflow alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm2 ALD EXP
DGN (201)
Over- 0 Amplifier overheat
load
alarm 1 Motor overheat
Discon- 1 0 Builtin pulse coder disconnection

nection (Hardware)
alarm
1 1 Separate type pulse coder disconnec-
tion (Hardware)
0 0 Pulse coder disconnection (software)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm3 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
DGN (202) :
#6 (CSA) : Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal.
#5 (BLA) : Battery voltage is in low (warning).
#4 (PHA) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is abnormal.
Counting the feedback signal is in error.
#3 (RCA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Counting is in error.
If the RCA bit is set to 1 when both the FBA bit (bit 1 of alarm 1) and
ALD bit of alarm 2 are set to 1 and the EXP bit of alarm 2 (internal
hardware disconnection) is set to 1, a count miss alarm (CMAL)
occurs in the pulse coder.
#2 (BZA) : Battery voltage becomes 0.
Replace batteries and set the reference position.
#1 (CKA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Internal block has stopped.
#0 (SPH) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting the feedback signal is in error.
535
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm4 DTE CRC STB PRM
DGN (203) :
#7 (DTE) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
There is no response.
#6 (CRC) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
Transmitted data is in error.
#5 (STB) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
Transmitted data is in error.
#4 (PRM) : The alarm is detected by the servo, the values specified in the
parameter is not correct.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm5 OFS MCC LDM PMS
DGN (204) :
#6 (OFS) : A/D conversion of current value of digital servo is abnormal.
#5 (MCC) : Contacts of electromagnetic contactor of servo amplifier is blown
#4 (LDM) : LED of serial pulse coder is abnormal.
#3 (PMS) : No. of feedback pulses are in error because serial pulse coder C or
feedback cable is faulty.
536
7.3
ADJUSTING
REFERENCE
POSITION
(DOG METHOD)
7.3.1
General
Speed
Rapid traverse
(PRM1420)
FL rate
(PRM1425 )
Time
Rapid traverse acc./dec. time constant (PRM1620 )
*DEC
PCZ
Grid
Grid shift amount

Reference counter capacity
(PRM1850)
(PRM1821)
10mm/rev
10000P +
Error Proportion Speed M
CMR f gain
Command counter loop

4 (Serial)
Refere
GRID count. FFG PC
10000P/rev
Counter capacity
(Flexible feed gear)
10000P
D Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1002 DLZ
#1(DLZ)l 0 : Reference position return method is normal (dog).

1 : Dogless reference position setting is used.
537
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1005 DLZ
#1(DLZ) 0 : The normal method (dog) is used for reference position return.
1 : Reference position setting without dogs is used (axis by axis).
NOTE
A reference position can be set axis by axis by setting bit 1 of
parameter No. 1002 to 0 and setting bit 1 of parameter No.
1005. Reference position setting without dogs cannot be
used for a spindle positioning axis and Cs contour axis.
When these axes are involved, use bit 1 of parameter No.
1005.
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity [P]
No. of feedback pulses or its division by an integer is set.
PRM 1850 Grid shift amount per axis [P]
When the resolution is 0.0001mm, set the value in the unit ten times
the detection unit.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1815 APC APZ OPT
#5(APC) 0 : Position detector is other than absolute pulse coder.

1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.
#4(APZ) Zero position of absolute pulse coder is :
0 : Not established
1 : Established
(Turns to 1 after establishment)
To manually change the value of the APZ bit from 0 to 1 without first
returning to the reference position
when using serial pulse coder , follow this procedure: Back up the
data with the battery and give the motor one or more turns.
Turn the power off then on again, then change the APZ bit setting
from 0 to 1.
#1(OPT) 0 : Position detection is performed by the pulse coder built in the motor.
1 : Separate type pulse coder or linear scale is used.
538
D Separate Type Pulse

Coder or Linear Scale is
Used
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P]
Normally, the number of feedback pulses per motor revolution is set to

the reference counter capacity.
When plural reference marks are on a linear scale, a quotient of the
distance between the reference marks divided by an interfer may be used
as a reference counter capacity:
Example)
(1 m)
300mm reference counter 30000
20000
15000
10000 etc
539
7.4 When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return, this
function enables the tool to return the reference position that is set by
DOGLESS MTB.
REFERENCE When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position once
POSITION SETTING set remains also during power off. When the absolute detector is replaced
or absolute position is lost, perform this setting.
7.4.1
General
Speed
Reference position return

FL rate (PRM 1425)
Time
JOG
ZRN
+J
GRID .........................
ZP
7.4.2 1 Move the tool near the reference position using a manual operation.
Operation 2 Select the reference position return mode or switch.
3 Press a button for an axisanddirectionselectsignal + or , and the
machine moves to the next grid, then stops.
(This position is set as the reference position).
After the reference position has been set, select the reference position
return mode(SRN signal is 1) and turn on an axisanddirection
select signal, then the tool returns to the reference position.
540
7.4.3
Associated Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1002 DLZ
#1(DLZ) 0 : Dog is used for reference position return

1 : Dogless reference position setting (all axes)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1005 DLZ
#1(DLZ) 0 : The normal method (dog) is used for reference position return.
1 : Reference position setting without dogs is used (axis by axis).
NOTE
A reference position can be set axis by axis by setting bit 1
of parameter No. 1002 to 0 and setting bit 1 of parameter
No. 1005. Reference position setting without dogs cannot
be used for a spindle positioning axis and Cs contour axis.
When these axes are involved, use bit 1 of parameter No.
1005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1006 ZMI
#5(ZMI) 0 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction is +.

1 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction is .
After ZRN signal becomes 1, manual feed direction is always the
direction set by this parameter irrespective of an axis selection signal.
541
8. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B63005EN/02
8 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
This chapter outlines the serial interface and analog interface spindle
amplifiers and explains related parameters.
8.1 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . 543

8.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
8.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
8.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters . . . . . . 554
8.2 AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . 555
8.2.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
The following drawing number is indicated on the upper part of the

spindle unit of the serial interface spindle amplifier:
542
B63005EN/02 8. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
8.1
AC SPINDLE (SERIAL
INTERFACE)
8.1.1
Outline of Spindle
Control
543
S instruction M instruction
NC PMC
M03,M04,M05,M19
FIN
*SSTP(Spindle stop)
Motor speed SOVx( Spindle override)
SF,GR10,GR20,GR30
(For machining center)
GR1,GR2 (For lathe)
S SOR( Orientation)
(PRM 3735X3752)
0
1 R010XR120
Orientation speed
(PRM 3705#1, 3732, R01IXR12I
3706#5) 0 1
SIND
Output polarity
(PRM 3706#7,6) SGN(0=+,1=)
0 1
SSIN
*ESP,MRDY,
SFR,SRV,ORCM
etc.
SST, SDT, SAR, LDT1,
LDT2
ORAR, ALM etc.
Interface
function
Optical cable
Serial spindle
amplifier Interface
function
Spindle
Operators
motor
panel PC
Load meter
LM
Speed meter
SM Spindle
544
8.1.1.1
Method A of gear change Output Motor speed
for machining
center 4095 Max
Gear 2 PRM 3736

Gear 3
Gear 1
PRM 3735
0
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 S code
8.1.1.2
Method B of gear change Output Motor speed
for machining
4095 Max
center (PRM 3705#2=1)
PRM 3736
PRM 3752
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 PRM 3751
0 PRM 3735
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743
8.1.1.3
For lathe Output Motor speed
4095 Max
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
Gear 4
0 S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 PRM 3744
545
8.1.2
Spindle Setting and
Tuning Screen
8.1.2.1
Display method (1) Confirm the parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SPS
Bit1 (SPS) 0 : The spindle tuning screen is not displayed.

l 1 : The spindle tuning screen is displayed.
(2) Press the SYSTEM

key to select the screen for setting parameters and other
data.
(3) Press the continuous menu key .
(4) Press the soft key [SP.PRM]. Then, the spindle setting and tuning
screen appears.
(5) The following screens are provided. These screens can be selected
using soft keys.
1) [SP.SET] : Spindle setting screen
2) [SP.TUN] : Spindle tuning screen
3) [SP.MON] : Spindle monitor screen
PAGE
(6) With the page keys PAGE
, a spindle to be displayed can be
selected (only when multiple serial spindles are connected).
8.1.2.2
Spindle setting screen SPINDLE SETTING
(1)GEAR SELECT : 1
(2)SPINDLE : S11
(PARAMETER)
(3)GEAR RATIO 50
(4)MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000
(5)MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000
(6)MAX C AXIS SPEED 100
D Gear selection The gear select status on the machine side is displayed.
Indication CTH1 CTH2
1 0 0
2 0 1
3 1 0
4 1 1
546
D Spindle Select a spindle for which data is to be set.

S11: Main spindle amplifier for the 1st spindle
S12: Subspindle amplifier for the 1st spindle
S21: Main spindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle
S22: Subspindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle
D Parameters
S11:1st Main S12:1st Sub S21:2nd Main S22:2nd Sub
Gear ratio(HIGH) 4056 4056

4216 4216
Gear ratio(MIDIUM HIGH) 4057 4057
Gear ratio(MIDIUM LOW) 4058 4058

4217 4217
Gear ratio(LOW) 4059 4059
Max. spindle speed

3741 3741
(gear1)
Max. spindle speed
3742 3742
(gear2)
Max. spindle speed
3743 3743
(gear3)
Max. spindle speed
3744 3744
(gear4)
Max. motor speed 4020 4196 4020 4196
Max. C axis speed 4021 None 4021 None
8.1.2.3
Spindle tuning screen SPINDLE TUNING
OPERATION : SPEED CONTROL

GEAR SELECT : 1
SPINDLE : S11
(PARAMETER) (MONITOR)
PROP.GAIN 20 MOTOR SPEED 100
INT.GAIN 50 SPINDLE SPEED 150
LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERR S1 100
MOTOR VOLT 30 POS ERR S2 103
TIME CONST 100 SYN.ERR 3
REF. SHIFT 2046
D Operation mode
1 : Normal operation
2 : Orientation
3 : Synchronization control
4 : Rigid tapping
5 : Cs contour control
6 : Spindle positioning control
547
D Displayed parameters The displayed parameters vary depending on the operation mode.
Spindle position- Normal Orientation Synchronization Rigid tapping Cs contour

ing control operation control control
Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain
Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain
Loop gain Motor voltage Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain
Motor voltage Regenerative power Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage
ZRN gain (%) ORAR gain (%) Acceleration/deceleration ZRN gain ZRN gain (%)
Shift reference position Shift spindle stop position constant (%) Shift reference position Shift reference position
Shift reference position Shift reference position
Note) For the parameter numbers corresponding to the displayed

parameter items, see Section 8.1.2.5.
D Displayed monitoring The displayed monitoring items vary depending on the operation mode.
items
Spindle position- Normal Orientation Synchronization Rigid tapping Cs contour

ing control operation control control
Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed
Feedrate Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed
Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1
Position deviation S2 Position deviation Z
Synchronous deviation Synchronous deviation
Note 1)
|Spindle data|
Motor speed [rpm] + Max. Motor speed.(* 1)
16383
(*1) Parameter 4020: Main spindleParameter 4196: Subspindle
Note 2) The spindle speed in Cs contour control mode is in degrees/min.
548
8.1.2.4
Spindle monitor screen SPINDLE MONITOR SCREEN
ALARM : AL27(POSITION CODER DIS.)
OPERATION : Cs AXIS OONTROL
SPINDLE SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN
MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM
0 50 100 150 200
LOAD METER (%)
JJJJJ
CONTROL INPUT : ORCM MRDY *ESP
CONTROL OUTPUT : SST SDT ORAR
D Spindle alarm 1: Motor overheated

2: Speed deviation excessive
3: Fuse blow of DC link
4: Fuse blow of AC inputline
5: Fuse blow of DC voltage
7: Excessive speed
9: Heat sink overheat
10: Low voltage of AC input
11: Excess voltage in DC link
12: Excess current in DC link
13: CPU internal data memory error
18: ROM SUM check error
19: U phase current offset excessive
20: V phase current offset excessive
24: Serial data transmission abnormal
25: Serial data transmission stop
26: Cs axis speed detecting signal failure
27: Position coder signal disconnection
28: Cs pos.detect signal disconnection
29: Short time overload
30: Input circuit excess current
31: Speed detecting signal disconnection
32: SLC LSI internal RAM abnormal
33: DC link charging insufficient
34: Parameter abnormal setting
35: Gear ratio data excessive
36: Error counter overflow
37: Speed detecting unit error setting
38: Magnetic sensor signal abnormal
39: Alarm of one revolution signal for Cs axis control is detected
40: Alarm of one revolution signal for Cs axis control is not detected
41: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal
42: Undetection of the position coder one revolution signal
46: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal on
threading
47: Abnormal position coder signal
48: Erroneous detection of position coder one revolution signal
549
D Operation Following 6 modes are available:

a. Normal operation
b. Orientation
c. Synchronous operation
d. Rigid tapping
e. Cs contour cotrol
f. Spindle positioning control
D Load meter The load meter displays spindle load in a unit of 10%.
1) Load meter[%] + Load meter data Max.output value
32767
of load meter (*)
(*) PRM 4127: Main

PRM 4274: Sub.
D Control input signal Max.10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
TLML : Torque limit command (low) SPSL : Spindle selection signal

TLMH : Torque limit command (high) MCFN : Power line switching
CTH1 : Gear signal 1 SOCN : Soft start/stop cancel
CTH2 : Gear signal 2 RSL : Output switching request
SRV : Spindle reverse rotation RCH : Power line state confirm
SFR : Spindle forward rotation INDX : Orientation stop pos.
ORCM : Spindle orientation change
MEDY : Machine ready ROTA : Rotation direction of
ARST : Alarm reset signal ORCM
*ESP : Emergency stop NRRO : Shorcut of ORCM
INTG : Speed integral control
signal
DEFM : Referencial mode
command
D Control output signals Max. 10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
ALM : Alarm signal TML5 : Torque limitation

SST : Speed zero signal ORAR : Orientation end signal
SDT : Speed detecting signal CHP : Power line switched signal
SAR : Speed arrival signal CFIN : Spindle switch complete
LDT1 : Load detecting signal 1 RCHP : Output switch signal
LDT2 : Load detecting signal 2 RCFN : Output switch complete
signal
550
8.1.2.5
Correspondence
between operation mode
and parameters on
spindle tuning screen
D Normal operation mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:

1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4040 4206 4040 4206
Proportional gain (LOW) 4041 4207 4041 4207
Integral gain(HIGH) 4048 4048
4212 4212
Integral gain(LOW) 4049 4049
Motor voltage 4083 4236 4083 4236
Regenerative power 4080 4231 4080 4231
D Orientation mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:

4213 4213
Loop gain (HIGH) 4060 4060
4218 4218
Loop gain (MID, HIGH) 4061 4061
Loop gain (MID, LOW) 4062 4062
4219 4219
Loop gain (LOW) 4063 4063
Motor voltage 4084 4237 4084 4237
Gain change upon completion 4064 4220 4064 4220
of orientation
Stop position shift 4077 4228 4077 4228
PCtype orientation stop posi- 4031 4204 4031 4204
tion
551
D Synchronization control Numerals are parameter numbers :

mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:
Proportional gain(LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211
4214 4214
Position loop gain(HIGH) 4065 4221 4065 4221
Position loop gain(MID,HIGH) 4066 4066
Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4067 4222 4067 4222
Position loop gain(LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
Acc./Dec. time constant 4032 4032
Shift amount 4034 4034
D Rigid tapping mode Numerals are parameter numbers :
S11: S12: S21: S22:

Proportional gain(LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211
4214 4214
Position loop gain(HIGH) 4065 4221 4065 4221
Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4067 4222 4067 4222
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Grid shift amount 4073 4223 4073 4223
552
D Spindle contouring Numerals are parameter numbers :

control mode
(Cs axis control) S11: S12: S21: S22:
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4046 4046
Proportional gain (LOW) 4047 4047
Position loop gain(HIGH) 4069 4069
Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4071 4071
Motor voltage 4086 4086
ZRN gain % 4092 4092
Reference position shift 4135 4135
D Spindle positioning
control mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:
4214 4214
Position loop gain(HIGH) 4065 4065
4221 4221
Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4067 4067
4222 4222
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Reference position shift 4073 4223 4073 4223
553
8.1.3 The standard parameters related to each motor model can be set
Automatic Setting of automatically.
Standard Parameters D The specifications for controlling a motor depend on the specifications
defined by the machine tool builder. The parameters defined by the
machine tool builder are set as the standard values (initial values) by
this automatic setting function.
Therefore, when performing automatic operation, always set
parameters properly according to the parameter list (parameters
4000 and later).
1. Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.
2. Set bit 7 of parameter 4019 to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4019 LDSP
Bit 7 (LDSP) The parameters for the serial interface spindle are:
0 : Not set automatically.
l 1 : Set automatically.
3. Set a motor model code.

4133 Motor model code
Code Motor mode Amplifier

100 a 0.5 (3000/8000min1) SPM2.2
101 a 1 (3000/8000min1) SPM2.2
102 a 1.5 (1500/8000min1) SPM5.5
103 a 2 (1500/8000min1) SPM5.5
104 a 2/1500 (3000/1500min1) SPM5.5
105 a 3 (1500/8000min1) SPM5.5
106 a 6 (1500/8000min1) SPM11
107 a 8 (1500/6000min1) SPM11
108 a 12 (1500/6000min1) SPM15
109 a 15 (1500/6000min1) SPM22
110 a 18 (1500/6000min1) SPM22
111 a 22 (1500/6000min1) SPM26
112 a P8 (750/6000min1) SPM11
113 a P12 (750/6000min1) SPM11
114 a P15 (750/6000min1) SPM15
115 a P18 (750/6000min1) SPM15
116 a P22 (750/6000min1) SPM22
117 a P30 (575/4500min1) SPM22
4. Turn off the power then back on. Then, the parameters are read.
554
8.2
AC SPINDLE
(ANALOG
INTERFACE)
8.2.1
Outline of Spindle
Control
555
8.2.1.1
Block diagram
S command M command
PMC
NC
M03 A M05, M06, M19
CW/CCW command,
Spindle speed orientation, etc.
conversion
FIN Miscellaneous function end
Motor speed *SSTP
Gear 1 Gear 2 Spindle stop
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
Gear selection (16M/18M)
GR1, GR2
Gear information (16T/18T)
S
Maximum spindle speed and other

parameters
PRM 3714 to 3743, 3735, 3736,
3751 and 3752 (M series)
PRM 3741 to 3744 (T series)
*ESP, MRDY SAR, LDT
SFR, SRV SST, ORAR
ORCM, TLM SDT, ALM
Position coder interface D/A converter
PRM 3730 (gain)

PRM 3731 (offset)
DV
SVC
RV
Spindle amplifier I/O card or I/O unit
Operators panel
Spindle
PC motor Load meter
LM
Speed meter
Spindle SM
556
8.2.1.2
Calculation of S analog
voltage and related
parameters
[M series]
1 Gear change method A (bit 2 of parameter 3705 = 0)
SVC Motor speed

(4095) 10V Max
PRM 3736
PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (RPM)
PRM 3735
0V
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (RPM)
2 Gear change method B (bit 2 of parameter 3705 = 1)
SVC Motor speed

(4095) 10V Max
PRM 3736
PRM 3752
PRM 3751
PRM 3735
0V
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (RPM)
[T series]
Constant surface speed control
SVC Motor speed
Max Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 Gear 4

(4095) 10V
0V
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 PRM 3744 (RPM)
557
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 TCW CWM
TCW CWM Sign of output voltage

0 0 Analog voltage (+) with both M03 and M04
0 1 Analog voltage () with both M03 and M04
1 0 (+) with M03, () with M04
1 1 () with M03, (+) with M04
[M series]
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 SGB
SGB Spindle speed set when gear change is performed is:

0 : Maximum speed for each gear.
1 : Set by respective parameters. (Parameters 3751, 3752)
3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm]
3751 Spindle motor speed at the switch point between gear 1 and gear 2
3752 Spindle motor speed at the switch point between gear 2 and gear 3
[Data type] Word

Set a spindle motor speed at each gear switch point when gear switch
method B is used (when bit 2 (SGB) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1).
Spindle motor speed at gear switch point
Setting + 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed
3736 Upper limit of the output to the spindle motor
3735 Lower limit of the output to the spindle motor
Spindle speed (upper limitlower limit)

Setting + 4095
Max. spindle speed
[T series]
558
8.2.1.3
Tuning S analog voltage
(D/A converter)
(1) For M series, change the upper and lower limits as follows:
When gear change method A is used: Parameter 3736 = 4095,
parameter 3735 = 0
When gear change method B is used: Parameter 3751 = 4095,
parameter 3735 = 0
. For T series, these changes are not required.
(2) Tuning the D/A converter offset
Specify zero as the spindle speed. Then, by using a digital multimeter,
adjust the following parameter so that the voltage at the test pin DA2
on the spindle amplifier printed circuit board is 0 mV.
1 For M series
S0; (Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)
2 For T series (in case of Gcode system A)
G97 S0; (Specify the command by MDI in the same manner as for M series.)
3731 Spindle speed (D/A converter) offset compensation value
(3) Tuning the D/A converter gain

Specify the maximum spindle speed of gear 1. Then, by using a digital
multimeter, adjust the following parameter so that the voltage at the
test pin DA2 on the spindle amplifier printed circuit board is 10.0 V.
1 For M series
Sxxxx ; (xxxx is the value set in parameter 3741.)

(Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)
2 For T series (in case of Gcode system A)
G97 Sxxxx ; (xxxx is the value set in parameter 3741.)

(Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)
. Usually a voltage is output from the D/A converter by only

executing an S command. However, the clockwise rotation
command (M03) may be required on some machines.
559
(4) If the output voltage is not correct, perform the following calculation,
and change the value of parameter 3730 to adjust the gain of the D/A
converter:
Setting + 10V (Current value of PRM 3730)

Measured voltage
(5) Execute an S command again and confirm that the output voltage is
correct.
.Restore the original parameter values.
560
B63005EN/02 9.TROUBLESHOOTING
9 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure.
9.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . . 563

9.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
9.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . 569
9.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . 573
9.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . 578
9.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS
TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
9.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD
WHEN THE POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . 588
9.8 THE DISPLAY ON THE LCD UNIT FLASHES . . . 592
9.9 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES
CANNOT BE PERFORMED INPUT/OUTPUT
CANNOT BE PERFORMED PROPERLY . . . . . . . . 593
9.10 ALARM 85 TO 87
(READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . . 595
9.11 ALARM 90(REFERENCE POSITION
RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
9.12 ALARM 300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
9.13 ALARM 300 (V READY OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
9.14 ALARM 404 (V READY ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
9.15 ALARM 462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED) . . . . . . . 612
9.16 ALARM 417
(DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . 615
9.17 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) . . . 616
9.18 ALARM 701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) . . . . . . 617
9.19 ALARM 704 (SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION
DETECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
9.20 ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE
COMMUNICATION ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
9.21 ALARM 750
(SPINDLE SERIAL LINK STARTUP FAILURE) . . 621
9.22 ALARM 5134
(FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
9.23 ALARM 5136
(FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) . . . . . . . 628
9.24 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
9.25 ALARMS 910 AND 911 (SRAM PARITY) . . . . . . . 634
9.26 ALARMS 912 TO 919 (DRAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . 637
9.27 ALARMS 920 AND 921 (SERVO ALARMS) . . . . . 639
9.28 ALARM 926 (FSSB ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
9.29 ALARM 930 (CPU INTERRUPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
9.30 ALARM 935 (SRAM ECC ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
561
9. TROUBLESHOOTING B63005EN/02
9.31 ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) . . . . . . . . . 655

9.32 ALARM 951 (PMC WATCHDOG ALARM) . . . . . . 658
9.33 ALARM 972
(NMI ALARM ON AN OPTION BOARD) . . . . . . . 659
9.34 ALARM 973
(NMI ALARM WITH AN UNKNOWN CAUSE) . . 660
9.35 ALARM 974 (FBUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
9.36 ALARM 975 (BUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
9.37 ALARM 976 (LOCAL BUS ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . 665
9.38 SERVO ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
9.39 SPC ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
9.40 SPINDLE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
562
9.1 When a failure occurs, it is important to correctly grasp what kind of

failure occured and take appropriate action, to promptly recover the
CORRECTIVE machine.
ACTION FOR Check for the failure according to the following procedure :
FAILURES
When? With what What failure?
operation?
Grasp the kind of failure

Appropriate action

Recovery
9.1.1
Investigating the
(1) When and how many times (frequency of occurrences)
Conditions under (2) With what operation
which Failure Occurred (3) What failure occurred
1 When did the failure occur?

Date and time?
Occurred during operation? (how long was the operation?)
Occurred when the power was turned on?
Was there any lightening surge, power failure, or other disturbances
to the power supply?
How many times has it occurred
Only once?
Occurred many times ? (How many times per hour, per day, or per
month?)
2 With what operation did it occur ?
What was the NC mode when the failure occurred?
Jog mode/memory operation mode /MDI mode /reference position
return mode
If during program operation,
1) Where in the program ?
2) Which program No. and sequence No. ?
3) What program ?
4) Occurred during axial movement ?
5) Occurred during the execution of an M/S/T code ?
6) Failure specific to the program ?
Does the same operation cause the same failure ?
(Check the repeatability of the failure.)
Occurred during data input/output ?
<Feed axes and spindles>
For a failure related to feed axis servo
1) Occurred at both low feedrate and high feedrate ?
2) Ocurred only for a certain axis ?
563
For a failure related to spindles

When did the failure occur ? (during poweron, acceleration,
deceleration, or constant rotation)
3 What failure occurred ?
Which alarm was displayed on the alarm display screen?
(Check the axis along which an alarm has occurred for alarms 300 to
599.)
Is the screen correct ?
If machining dimensions are incorrect
1) How large is the error ?
2) Is the position display on the CRT correct ?
3) Are the offsets correct ?
4 Other information
Is there noise origin around machine?
If the failure has not occurred frequently, the cause may be external
noise to the power supply or inductive noise on machinery cables.
Operate other machines connected to the same power line and see
if noise come from the relays or compressors.
Is it taken any countermeasure for noise in machine side?
Check the following for the input power supply voltage :
1) Is there variation in the voltage ?
2) Are the voltages different depending on the phase ?
3) Is the standard voltage supplied ?
How high is the ambient temperature of the control unit?
Refer to manual about noise.
Has excessive vibration been applied to the control unit?
5 When you contact our service center, specify the following items :
1) Name of the NC unit
2) Name of the machine tool builder and type of machine
3) Software series/version of the NC
4) Specifications of the servo amplifier and motor
(for a failure related to the servo)
5) Specifications of the spindle amplifier and spindle motor
(for a failure related to a spindle)
See the drawing issued by the machine tool builder for the locations
of the NC unit and servo/spindle amplifiers.
We use the following specification codes :
Servo /spindle amplifier : A06BVVVVHVVV
Servo/spindle amplifier : A06BVVVVBVVV
NOTE
The mark V represents a number.
564
9.2
NO MANUAL OPERA-
TION NOR AUTOMAT-
IC OPERATION CAN
BE EXECUTED
Points (1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic
operation is done
(2) Check whether position display shows correct position
(3) Check CNC status display
(4) Check CNC internal status using diagnostic function
Causes and
Countermeasures
1. Position display (1) Check CNC status display (Refer to Section 1.9 CNC STATUS
(relative, absolute, DISPLAY for detail.)
machine coordinate) (a) Emergency stop status (Emergency stop signal is turned on)
does not change
If status display shows EMG the emergency stop signal is input.
Check the following signal using the PMCs diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1008 *ESP
G0008 *ESP
ESP=0 indicates that emergency stop signal is input.

(b) It is a reset status
When RESET is displayed, any of a reset is functioned. Check the
following signal using the PMCs diagnostic funciton
(PMCDGN).
1) An input signal from the PMC functions
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS RRW
When ERS is 1, external reset signal is input.

When RRW is 1, reset & rewing signal is input.
2) RESET key on the MDI keyboard functions
When the signals in 1) are 0, RESET key may be functioning.
Check the contact of RESET key using a tester.

When it is abnormal, change the keyboard.
565
(c) Confirm the status of modes

Operation mode status is displayed on the lower part of CRT as
follows :
If nothing is displayed, mode select signal is not input. Check mode
select signal using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
For details, refer to section 1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY.
(Example of display)
JOG : Manual operation (JOG) mode
HND : Manual handle (MPG) mode
MDI : Manual data input (MDI) mode
MEM : Automatic operation (Memory) mode
EDIT: EDIT (Memory edit) mode
<Mode select signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1

Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1
Manual handle (MPG) mode 1 0 0
Manual data input (MDI) mode 0 0 0
Automatic operation (Memory) mode 0 0 1
EDIT (Memory edit) mode 0 1 1
(2) Check diagnostic data 000 to 025 of the CNC Check an item for which
1 is displayed
No. Message Display
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0
001 MOTION :0
002 DWELL :0
a.003 INPOSITION CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
b.005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1 (Example)
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0
c.013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
d.014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0
Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and its
detail is shown below.
566
a. Inposition check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the
being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition)
DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826 Inposition width

1) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)
2) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm 400, 410, and
411.
b. Interlock or start lock There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal
signal is input is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DAU DIT ITX ITL
#0 ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)

#2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
#3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal "MITn is effective. To 3)
#4 DAU=When it is 1, the interlock signal ("MITn) is effective
even in automatic operation.
Go to 3). (Effective in the 20iT only)
Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) of the PMC.
1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.

2) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 +IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.

3) Interlock signal per axis and direction ("MITn) is input.
D M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
D T series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0004 MIT2 +MIT2 MIT1 +MIT1
"MITn=1 shows interlock signal per axis and direction is input.

* In T series, "MITn is effective only when the manual operation is
used.
567
c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
0%
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes

1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . . 0000.
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
d. NC is in a reset state In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using
the procedure of b above.
2. When machine (1) Machine lock signal (MLK) is input.

coordinate value does
not update on position
display #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0044 MLK
MLK : All axes machine lock

MLKn : Each axis machine lock
When the signal is 1, the corresponding machine lock signal is input.
568
9.3
JOG OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE
Points (1) Check whether position display is operating.

(2) Check CNC status display.
(3) Check internal status using Diagnostic funciton.
Causes and Remedies
1. Position display (1) Check mode selection status (JOG mode is not selected).
(relative, absolute, When status display shows JOG, it is normal.
machine cooordinate) When status display does not show JOG, mode select signal is not
does not change
selected correctly. Confirm the mode select signal using PMCs
diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1

Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1
(2) Feed axis and direction select signal is not input Check the signal using
PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G0102 J8 J7 J6 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1
G0086 Ja +Ja Jg +Jg
When a bit is 1, the corresponding feed axis direction

selection signal has been entered.
) J
g : Both X and Yaxes simultaneously (feed along a straight line or circle)

a : Both X and Yaxes simultaneously (feed in the normal direction)
) : Feed in the ) direction

* : Feed in the * direction
Example)
In the normal state, pressing the +X button on the operators panel
causes the signal +Jn to be displayed as 1.
* This signal becomes effective when the rise of the signal is
detected. If, therefore, the direction selection signal has been
entered before jog mode selection, axis movement is not
performed; set the bit 0 and then recheck the signal.
569
* By defining a straight line or arc in the CNC beforehand using the

R area of the PMC, +Jg and "Ja allow the tool to move along both
X and Yaxes simultaneously. The exchange of information with
the R area of the PMC is performed by the macro software or PMC
sequence program created by the MTB.
(3) Check CNCs diagnostic function 000 to 015. Check the items for
which 1 is displayed at right side.
No. Message Display
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0
001 MOTION :0
002 DWELL :0
a. 003 INPOSITION CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
b. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1(Example)
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
c. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
d. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and its
detail is shown below.
570
a. Inposition check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the
being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition)
DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826 Inpositio width
1) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)
2) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm 400, 410, and
411.
b. Interlock or start lock There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal
signal is input is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PARAM 3003 DIT ITX ITL
#0 ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)

#2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
#3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal "MITn is effective. To 3)
Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) of the PMC.
1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.

2) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 +IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.

3) Interlock signal per axis and direction (+/ MITn) is input
M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

* For the T series, "MITn is valid only for manual operation.
571
c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
0%
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes

1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . . 0000.
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
d. NC is in a reset state In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using
the procedure of 1 above.
(4) Jog feed rate setting (Parameter) is not correct.
1423 Jog feedrate per axis
(5) Manual feed per revolution is selected ( T series)

This funciton feeds an axis synchronized with spindle rotation and
whether this function is used or not is selected by the following
parameter:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV
#3 (JRV) 0 : Jog feed is of feed per minute

1 : Jog feed is of feed per revolution
(a) When parameter JRV is set to 1, feed rate of the axis is calculated
by synchronizing with rotation of the spindle. Therefore, rotate the
spindle.
(b) If the axis does not move even when the spindle is rotated, check
the detector of the spindle (position coder) and the cable between
the position coder and the CNC if it is shortcircuited or
ungrounded.Refer to 2.4 for connection diagram.
572
9.4
HANDLE OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE
Causes and actions If manual handle operation cannot be performed, the probable causes
include the following:
D The servo is not activated.
D Manual pulse generators are not connected properly to the I/O module.
D The I/O link of the I/O module is not allocated, or is not allocated
properly.
D A related input signal is not input due to a parameter setting error.
1 The servo is not Check that the LED on the servo amplifier indicates 0. If a number
activated other than 0 is indicated, the servo is not activated. In this state, even
JOG operation and automatic operation cannot be operated.
Check the servorelated parameters and the wiring.
2 Checking the manual (1) Cable failures (such as breaks)

pulse generators Examine the cables for faults such as breaks and shortcircuits,
referring to the figure below.
CNC Distributed I/O module

(motherboard) Operators panel I/O module
JA3 #1 First manual

pulse generator
IOLINK JD1B
(JD1A) Second manual
#2 pulse generator
#3 Third manual
pulse generator
CNC Distributed I/O module Manual pulse

(motherboard) Operators panel I/O module generators
JD1A Shield Shield
JD1B JA3
SIN(01) (03)SOUT HA1(01) HA1
*SIN(02) (04)*SOUT HB1(02) HB1
First
SOUT(03) (01)SIN +5V(09) +5V
*SOUT(04) (02)*SIN 0V(12) 0V
0V(11) (11)0V
0V(12) (12)0V HA2(03) HA2
0V(13) (13)0V HB2(04) HB2
0V(14) (14)0V +5V(18) +5V Second
0V(14) 0V
HA3(05) HA3
HB3(06) HB3
Third
+5V(20) +5V
0V(16) 0V
573
(2) Manual pulse generator failures

When rotated, a manual pulse generator generates the signals shown
below. Using an oscilloscope, measure the signals from the screw
terminal block located at the rear of a manual pulse generator. If no
signals are output, measure the +5 V voltage.
Screw terminal Rear of a manual pulse generator

block
HA: Manual pulse generator phase A signal
HB: Manual pulse generator phase B signal
+5V 0V HA HB
When rotated in the plus direction When rotated in the minus direction
1:1
+5V
HA On Off On Off
0V
+5V
HB On Off On Off
0V
1:1
1/4 1/4 (phase difference)
Check the on/off ratio and the phase difference between HA and HB.
3 Allocation of the I/O link If the I/O module is not allocated properly in I/O link allocation, the pulses
of the I/O module of the manual pulse generators are not transmitted to the CNC, making
it impossible to perform manual handle operation.
The I/O modules to which manual pulse generators can be connected are
listed below.
Name Specifications
I/O module for connector panel (extended module A) A03B0815C002
I/O module for operators panel (supporting matrix input) A20B20020470
I/O module for operators panel A20B20020520
Interface unit for machine operators panel A20B22010110
If a multiple number of these modules are used and are allocated so that
they use a manual pulse generator, the module nearest the CNC becomes
effective because of the I/O link connection.
574
I/O module for connec- Group 0

Control unit tor panel
This manual pulse
Allocated to generator I/F is
use a manual effective.
pulse generator
Operators panel I/O

module Group 1
Allocated to
use a manual
This manual pulse
pulse generator generator I/F is not
effective.
In this example, the manual pulse generator connected to the I/O module
for a connector panel in group 0 is effective.
Control unit I/O module for connec- Group 0

tor panel
This manual pulse
Allocated so as not generator I/F is not
to use a manual effective.
pulse generator
Operators panel I/O

module Group 1
Allocated to
use a manual
This manual pulse
pulse generator generator I/F is
effective.
If the I/O module for a connector panel in group 0 is allocated so as not

to use a manual pulse generator, as in this example, the manual pulse
generator interface of the operators panel I/O module in group 1 is
effective.
The checking of allocation requires a Ladder editing card. Selecting
[EDIT] and then [MODULE] from the PMC screen causes the allocation
edit screen to be displayed.
After editing allocation, write the changes to the FROM on the [I/O]
screen. Otherwise, the changes will be lost when the power is turned off.
If allocation is performed properly, when a manual pulse generator is
rotated, the bits count up/down in the area of the corresponding input
signal (X). Select [PMCDGN] and then [STATUS] from the PMC screen
to display the corresponding address, and rotate the manual pulse
generator to check that the bits count up/down.
575
4 Checking the parameters (1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the CRT.
and input signals When the status display shows HND, mode selection is correct.
If it is not HND, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the
mode select signal using the PMCs diagnostic function(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1

Manuale handle mode 1 0 0
(2) Manual handle feed axis select signal is not input.

Check the signals using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A
G0019 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0029 HS4D HS4C HS4B HS4A For the 20i
F only
When axis select switch for manual handle feed is selected on the
machine operators panel, if the signals are input as follows, it is
normal.
Selected axis HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA
no selection 0 0 0 0
1st axis 0 0 0 1
2nd axis 0 0 1 0
3rd axis 0 0 1 1
4th axis 0 1 0 0
5th axis 0 1 0 1
6th axis 0 1 1 0
7th axis 0 1 1 1
8th axis 1 0 0 0
Both X and Yaxes simulta- 1 1 1 0
neously (guidance handle)
Both X and Yaxes simulta- 1 1 1 1
neously (approach handle)
NOTE
1 In the above table, n is the number of the manual pulse
generator
(MPG) and up to 3 MPGs can be used.
A feed axis is selected by 4bit code of A to D.
In the 20iF, up to four manual pulse generators can be
effective.
2 By defining a straight line or arc in the CNC beforehand
using the R area of the PMC, the guidance handle and the
approach handle allow the tool to move along both X and
Yaxes simultaneously. The exchange of information with
the R area of the PMC is performed by the macro software
or PMC sequence program created by the MTB.
576
(3) Manual handle feed multiplication is not correct

Check the following signals using PMCs PCDGN. Also confirm the
following parameters based on the parameter list.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0019 MP2 MP1
G0087 MP42 MP41 MP32 MP31 MP22 MP21
In handle mode, the travel distance per step can be changed.

MPn2 MPn1 Step feed Handle feed
0 0 1 1
0 1 10 10
1 0 100 Mn
1 1 1000 Nn
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PARAM 7100 MPX
#5(MPX) The manual handle feed distance selection signals are:

0 Signals common to all manual handles MP1, MP2 (G019#4, 5)
First manual handle MP1, MP2 (G019#4, 5)

1
Second manual handle MP21, MP22 (G087#0, 1)
Effective in
the
Third manual handle MP31, MP32 (G087#0, 1)
20i only
Fourth manual handle MP41, MP42 (G087#0, 1)
PARAM 7113 Magnification of manual handle feed (first manual handle) M1 (1 to 127)
PARAM 7114 Magnification of manual handle feed (first manual handle) N1 (1 to 1000)
PARAM 7131 Magnification of manual handle feed (second manual handle) M2 (1 to 127)
PARAM 7132 Magnification of manual handle feed (second manual handle) N2 (1 to 1000)
For the
PARAM 7133 Magnification of manual handle feed (third manual handle) M3 (1 to 127) 20i
only
PARAM 7134 Magnification of manual handle feed (third manual handle) N3 (1 to 1000)
PARAM 7135 Magnification of manual handle feed (fourth manual handle) M4 (1 to 127)
For
PARAM 7136 Magnification of manual handle feed (fourth manual handle) N4 (1 to 1000) the
20iF
only
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PARAM 7102 HNGx
#0(HNGx) The direction of rotation of the manual pulse generator and the direction
of the travel of the machine are:
0 : Same
1 : Opposite
PARAM 7110 Number of manual pulse generators used (1 to 4). 4 is for the 20iF only.
577
9.5
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE
Points (1) Check manual operation is possible.
(2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operators manual.
(3) Check status of CNC.
Causes and Remedies When manual operation is either impossible, perform countermeasure,
based on the previous item Jog operation cannot be done.
Confirm that a correct mode is selected according to the mode select status
of CNC status display. Also, by confirming the automatic operation
status it is possible to identify cycle operation, feed hold and cycle stop
state.
1. When cycle operation is **** is displayed at status display on CRT.

not started (Cycle start (1) Mode select signal is not correct.
LED does not light)
When the mode select signal is input correctly, following status
display is done.
MDI :Manual data input mode (MDI)
MEM :Memory operation mode
RMT :Remote operation mode
If status display does not show a correct status, check the mode signal
with following diagnosis function of PMC side (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1
DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1 Mode select

0 0 0 Manual data input mode
0 0 0 1 Memory operation mode
1 0 0 1 Remote operation mode
(2) Cycle start signal is not input

This signal turns 1 when cycle start button is pressed and turns 0 when
it is released. The cycle start actuates when it changes from 1 to 0.
Check the state of the signal using PMCs diagnostic
function(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0007 ST
#2 (ST) : Cycle start signal

(3) Feed hold signal is input
Under normal state, the feed hold signal is 1 when the feed hold button
is not pressed.
Check the state of this signal using the PMCs diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) .
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP
#5 (*SP) : Feed hold signal
578
2. When an automatic CNCs status display shows STRT on the CRT.

operation is in progress (1) Check the contents of diagnostic nos. 000 to 015.
(Cycle start LED is lit)
No. Message Display
a. 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL : 1(Example)
b. 001 MOTION :0
c. 002 DWELL :0
d. 003 INPOSITION CHECK :0
e. 004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
f. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK :0
g. 006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
h. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
i. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
Items with a to i relate with an automatic operation and their details
are as follows :
a. An auxiliary function is An auxiliary function (M/S/T/B) specified in a program is not ended.
being executed (waiting Check according to the following procedure.
for FIN signal) At first, confirm the kind of interface of an auxiliary function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 HSIF
#7(HSIF) 0 : M/S/T/B is of normal interface.

1 : M/S/T/B is of highspeed interface.
1) Normal interface
When the auxiliary function finish signal turns from 1 to 0, the
auxiliary function is supposed to be ended and the next block is read
for operation. Confirm the status of this signal using PMCs
diagnostic function(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0004 FIN
#3 (FIN) : Auxiliary function finish signal

2) Highspeed interface
The auxiliary function is supposed to be ended when the signals are
in the following state. Confirm it using PMCs diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
579
<M series>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0005 BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN
#0(MFIN) : M function finish signal

#2(SFIN) : S function finish signal
#3(TFIN) : T function finish signal
#4(BFIN) : 2nd auxiliary function finish signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0007 BF TF SF MF
#0(MF) : M function strobe signal

#2(SF) : S function strobe signal
#3(TF) : T function strobe signal
#7(BF) : 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal
<T series>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0005 BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN
#0(MFIN) : M function completion signal

#2(SFIN) : S function completion signal
#3(TFIN) : T function completion signal
#4(BFIN) : Second auxiliary function completion signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0007 BF TF SF MF
#0(MF) : M function strobe signal

#2(SF) : S function strobe signal
#3(TF) : T function strobe signal
#4(BF) : Second auxiliary function strobe signal
<M/T series>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0004 MFIN3 MFIN2
#4(MFIN2) : Second M function completion signal

#5(MFIN3) : Third M function completion signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0008 MF3 MF2
#4(MF2) : Second M function strobe signal

#5(MF3) : Third M function strobe signal
* The second and third M functions are enabled only when bit 7 (M3B)
of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1.
580
Signal End state

Finish signal 0 1
store signal 0 1
b. Travel command is being CNC is reading an axis command (X,Y,Z,...) in a program and giving the
executed command to the axis.
c. A dwell command is CNC is reading a dwell command (G04) in a program and is executing
being executed the dwell command.
d. Inposition check Positioning (G00) to a specified position of a specified axis is not

(confirming positioning) completed.
is being done Whether positioning is completed or not is checked as the servo position
error amount. Check it CNCs diagnostic function as follows:
DGN no.300 Position Error > PARAM 1826 Inposition width
Position error amount almost becomes 0, when positioning of an axis
completes and when the amount becomes within the inposiiton width,
it is assumed that positioning completes and the next block is exected.
If position error amount does not become within the inposition width,
refer to servo alarm 400, 4n0 and 4n1.
e. Feedrate override is at Actual feedrate is overridden by the override signals to a programmed

0% feedrate. Check the override signals using the PMCs diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
<Normal override signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
*FVn :Feedrate override

<2nd override signal (option)>
Feed rate is overridden more finely using the signals below:
See MTBs manual whether this feature is equipped.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0
*AFVn :2nd feed rate override

<State of override signal>
*FV7@@@@@@@*FV0 *AFV7@@@@@@*AFV0
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 0% 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 0%
11 1 1 1 1 1 0 1% 11 1 1 1 1 1 0 1%
: : : :
10 0 1 1 0 1 1 100% 10 0 1 1 0 1 1 100%
: : : :
00 0 0 0 0 0 1 254% 00 0 0 0 0 0 1 254%
00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0%
581
f. Interlock signal or start <T series only>

lock signal is input
Start lock signal is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0007 STLK
#1 (STLK) With this signal being 1, start lock signal is input.

<Common to T series and M series>
There are a plural number of interlock functions. Parameters are set by
machine tool builders for which interlock function is used.
Therefore, confirm the following parameters at first:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DAU DIT ITX ITL
#0 (ITL) 0 : Interlock signal(*IT) is valid.

#2 (ITX) 0 : Interlock signal (*ITn) is valid.
#3 (DIT) 0 : Interlock signal ("MITn) is valid.
#4 (DAU) 1 : The interlock signal "MITn is effective even in automatic operation.
(Effective in the 20iT only)
Confirm which interlock signal is activated by the PMCs diagnostic
function (PMCDGN) .
1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
#0 (*IT) : When this bit is 0, interlock signal is input.

2) Interlock signal per each axis (*ITn) is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*ITn When the bit is 0, the corresponding axiss interlock signal is input.
3) Interlock signal per axis and direction(+/ MITn) is input
M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

* For the T series, "MITn is valid only for manual operation. In
the 20iT, "MITn is effective even in automatic operation if DAU
(bit 4 of parameter No. 3003) is set to 1.
4) Controlled axis detach function is running. A detached axis is
specified for travelling.
*This function is valid when CNC parameter No.1005#7=1. For
whether this function is running or not, confirm the following signal
using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN). Check the axis
concerned.
582
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0110 MDTCH8 MDTCH7 MDTCH6 MDTCH5 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1
When signal MDTHn is 1, the axis detach function is in valid.

The control axis detach function becomes valid by the following
signal issued from the PMC or a CNC side parameter. Check as in the
following procedure :
1) The control axis detach signal (DTCHn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1
If it is 1, the corresponding axis is detached.

2) The following parameter enables the control axis detach function to
the corresponding axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 RMVx
#7(RMVx)0 : Controlled axis is connected

1 : Controlled axis is detached
g. CNC is waiting for Actual spindle speed does not arrive at a speed specified in a program.
spindle speed arrival Confirm the signal state using the PMCs diagnostic function
signal to be input (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0029 SAR
#4(SAR) : When this signal is 0, spindle speed does not arrive at the specified speed.
This function is valid when PARAM 3708#0=1.
h. Manual feedrate override Normally manual feedrate override function is used for jog feed.
is 0% (dry run) But when DRN(dry run) signal turns on during an auomatic
operation,override values set with these signals become valid to the
following speed set by a parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 DRN
#7(DRN) : Dry run signal is input with this signal being 1.

1410 Dry run rate
The rate when the following override value is 100%.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 +JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 +JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8
When override value is 0%, all bits of the above address is

[1111 . . . 1111] or [0000 . . . 0000].
583
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
:
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
:
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
i. NC is in a reset state In this case, the CNCs status display shows RESET. Refer to item 1.
(2) Only rapid traverse in positioning (G00) does not function Confirm
the following parameter and signals from the PMC.
(a) Setting value of rapid traverse rate
1420 Rapid traverse rate per axis
(b) Rapid traverse override signals

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0014 ROV2 ROV1
G0096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
(HROV0) (HROV=1)
ROV1 ROV2 Override *HROV6 *HROV0 Override

0 0 100% 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0%
1 1 50% 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1%
0 1 25% : :
1 1 Fo 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100%
1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate
(3) Only feed (other than G00) does not function

(a) Maximum feedrate set by parameter is incorrect.
1422 Maximum feedrate
Feedrate is clamped at this upper feedrate.

(b) Feedrate is specified by feed per revolution (mm/rev)
1) Position coder does not rotate
Check the connection between spindle and position coder
The following failure is considered:
T iming belt is broken
Key is removed
Coupling is loose
Connector of signal cable is loosened
2) Position coder is faulty
(c) Thread cutting does not operate
1) Position coder does not rotate
Check the connection between spindle and position coder
The following failure is considered:
Timing belt is broken
584
Key is removed
Coupling is loose
Connector of signal cable is loosened
2) Position coder is faulty
Position coder is connected to the spindle amplifier when serial
interface spindle is used or connected to the CNC when analog
interface spindle is used.
For details of connection, refer to the following.
<T series>
Whether A/B phase signals from the position coder are read
correctly, can be judged also by the spindle speed display on the
CRT screen (position screen). (However, it is not displayed
when PARAM 3105#2=0).
< series spindle amplifier>
CNC Position
coder
JA7B JY2
JA41
SPM
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor
Position
coder
JA7B JY2
SPM
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor
<Analog interface spindle amplifier>
CNC
JA41 Position
coder
Analog spindle Spindle

JA40 motor
amplifier
(d) A cutting feed block containing a feedrate command (F command)

with a feedrate of 0 is specified.
(For the 20i only)
If FCO (bit 7 of parameter No. 1404) is set to 1, P/S alarm 11 is not
issued even if a feedrate command (F command) with a feedrate of
0 is issued.
585
9.6
CYCLE START LED
SIGNAL HAS
TURNED OFF
Points (1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows:
(2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operators panel.
(3) Confirm CNCs diagnostic function.
Causes and Remedies The reason why cycle start LED signal (STL) has turned off are displayed
on CNCs diagnostic numbers 020 to 025 as follows:
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
a. Emergency stop signal

b. External reset signal
c. Reset button on MDI
d. Reset & rewind signal
e. Servo alarm
f. Feed hold by switching mode
g. Single block stop
Details of signals a to g are as follows:

Confirm the signals concerned using diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
a. Emergency stop is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1008 *ESP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *ESP
*ESP=0 : Emergency stop signal is input :
586
b. External reset signal is

input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS
#7(ERS) : When the bit is 1, external reset signal is input.

This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M02 when an M02
is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M02 is executed, this signal is input.
c. Reset button on the MDI An automatic operation is put into a reset status when RESET key on the
is pressed MDI panel is pressed.
d. Reset & rewind signal is

input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 RRW
#6(RRW) : When this signal is 1, the reset & rewind signal is input.
This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M30 when an M30
is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M30 is executed, this signal is input.
e. Servo alarm has When any servo alarm has generated, cycle operation is put into the reset
generated state and operation stop.
f. Cycle operation is in a The cycle operation becomes feed hold state in the following cases:
feed hold state 1) Modes are switched from an automatic operation mode to a manual
operation mode.
2) Feed hold signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
memory edit(EDIT) 0 1 1
Automatic Automatic operation 0 0 1
operation (AUTO)
Manual data input (MDI) 0 0 0
Jog feed (JOG) 1 0 0
Manual Handle/step 1 0 1
operation
TEACH IN HANDLE 1 1 1
TEACH IN JOG 1 1 0
<Feed hold signal>

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP
#5(*SP) : When this signal is 0, the feed hold signal is input.
g. It become single block

stop during automatic
operation
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 SBK
#1(SBK) When this signal is 1, the single block signal is input.
587
9.7
NOTHING IS
DISPLAYED ON THE
LCD WHEN THE
POWER IS TURNED
ON
Causes and actions If nothing is displayed on the LCD or the LCD is locked with GRAPHIC
IS READY.BOOT START. displayed when the power is turned on, the
probable causes include the following:
D For the LCDmounted D The LCD cable or backlight cable is not connected.
type D For a motherboard with a PC, the ambient temperature of the control
unit is outside the prescribed temperature range.
D The necessary software is not installed.
D The motherboard, display control card, personal computer card, or
inverter board is defective.
D For the standalone type D The LCD unit is not connected to the power supply.
D The LCD cable or backlight cable is not connected.
D The LCD unit is not connected to the CNC with the optical cable
(HSSB), or the cable is broken.
D The necessary software is not installed.
D The main CPU board, display control card, or LCD unit is defective.
If GRAPHIC IS READY.BOOT START. is displayed, this indicates
that the display control circuit has started up normally but that the CNC
has not started up.
[For the LCDmounted

type]
Inverter printed circuit
board
Connector for connecting

the backlight cable
the LCD cable
Motherboard (without a PC)
588
D LED display Referring to the hardware chapter, check the LED on/off status of the
motherboard.
If the motherboard has started up normally and the LED display indicates
normal operation, a probable cause is a fault of the display system, such
as a cable not connected or a defective inverter board.
If the LED display is locked in the middle of the startup process, the
probable causes include defective hardware (or installation failure) and
the necessary software not installed.
D Connection of the LED Check that the LED and backlight cables are connected firmly to the
and backlight cables corresponding connectors.
These cables are connected before shipment from FANUC. This check
is, however, required because the cables may be disconnected during
maintenance.
D For a motherboard with For a motherboard with a PC, if the ambient temperature of the control
a PC unit is outside the prescribed temperature range, the CNC does not start
up until the ambient temperature falls within the prescribed temperature
range. This is required to observe the operating temperature range of the
hard disk. This situation can occur especially in the morning of cold days.
If this occurs, the LED display indicates a temperature error.
D The necessary software If the necessary software is not installed in the FROM module, there may
is not installed be cases in which nothing is displayed on the screen.
D Defective printed circuit If the motherboard, display control card, or personal computer card is
board defective or if there is an installation failure, there may be cases in which
nothing is displayed on the screen.
Check that the card PCBs are engaged firmly with the connectors on the
motherboard.
If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the display
control card (personal computer card), CPU card, and motherboard.
589
D Installation positions of
the display control card,
personal computer card,
and CPU card
Display control
card or personal CPU card
computer card
Motherboard
[For the standalone

type]
D Power supply of the LCD Check that the power cable is connected to the connector CP1A of the
unit LCD unit.
Connector for connecting the backlight cable

Inverter printed circuit board

the LCD cable
LCD control printed

circuit board
Optical cable
COP20B
24 V input
CP1A
For 24 V branch
CP1B
590
D LED display Referring to the hardware chapter, check the LED on/off status of the main
CPU board.
If the main CPU board has started up normally and the LED display
indicates normal operation, a probable cause is a fault of the display
system, such as the cable of the LCD unit not connected or a defective
inverter board.
If the LED display is locked in the middle of the startup process, the
probable causes include defective hardware (or installation failure) and
the necessary software not installed.
D Optical cable Check that the optical cable is free from excessive force and that it is not
excessively bent. Check that the optical cable is connected firmly.
If no problems are found with the connection of the optical cable, replace
the optical cable.
D Connection on the LCD Check that the backlight and LCD cables are connected firmly to the
unit corresponding connectors.
These cables are connected before shipment from FANUC. This check
is, however, required because the cables may be disconnected during
maintenance.
D Display control card Check that the display control card installed on the main CPU board is
engaged with the connector. If it is engaged properly, replace this card.
D LCD unit Replace the LCD unit or the control printed circuit board located at the
rear of the LCD unit
D Main CPU board If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the main
CPU board and the CPU card.
the display control card
and the CPU card
CPU card
Display control
card
Axis control
card
Main CPU board
591
9.8
THE DISPLAY ON
THE LCD UNIT
FLASHES
Causes and actions This situation can occur only with the standalone type.
If a break is detected in the optical cable (HSSB) that connects the LCD
unit to the main CPU board, the display on the LCD unit flashes.
The same situation occurs if the main CPU board is turned off while the
power is on.
D Power supply of the The display on the LCD unit flashes if the main CPU board is turned off,
main CPU board with the LCD kept on, while the power is on.
D Break of the optical Check that the optical cable is free from excessive force and that it is not
cable excessively bent.
If no problems are found with the connection of the cable, replace the
optical cable.
D Display control card Replace the display control card installed on the main CPU board.
D LCD unit Replace the LCD unit or the control printed circuit board located at the
rear of the LCD unit
D Installation position of
the display control card
CPU card
Display control
card
Axis control
card
Main CPU board
592
9.9
INPUT FROM AND
OUTPUT TO I/O
DEVICES CANNOT
BE PERFORMED
INPUT/
OUTPUT CANNOT BE
PERFORMED
PROPERLY
Causes and actions If the I/O Link is not established, if the signals from an I/O device cannot
be input normally to the CNC, or if the signals from the CNC cannot be
output to an I/O device, the probable causes include the following:
D The I/O device is not turned on, or the power supply is not at the
appropriate voltage.
D The I/O Link cable is not connected correctly or appropriately.
D The input/output signals are not connected correctly.
D I/O Link allocation is not performed, or is not performed properly.
D PMC alarm NO I/O If NO I/O DEVICE is displayed on the alarm screen of the PMC, no I/O
DEVICE devices are recognized.
D IOCHK screen of the By selecting [PMCDGN], [IOCHK], and [IOLNK] in this order from the
PMC PMC screen, the I/O devices recognized by the CNC are displayed. From
this screen, the devices that are connected normally can be determined.
Screen display example
GROUP ID KIND OF UNIT00
00 A9 I/O MODULE01
01 A8 OTHER UNIT
This example indicates that the I/O Link is as shown in the figure below.
I/O module for

Control unit connector panel
Group 0
Operators panel
I/O module
Group 1
593
D Checking the power Check that the connected I/O devices are connected properly to the power
supplies of the I/O supplies and that the voltages are as prescribed.
devices Check that the poweron sequence is correct.
Time at which an I/O device is to be turned on
Before the CNC is turned on or within 500 ms after the CNC is
turned on
When the CNC is turned off, the I/O devices must also be turned off.
(Otherwise, the I/O Link may not be established the next time the CNC
is turned on.)
D Connection of cables As in the example shown on the previous page, I/O Link cables are used
to connect JD1As and JD1Bs.
JD1A represents an upper unit while JD1B represents a lower unit.
Check that the cables are connected correctly.
D Connection of I/O signals Check that the input/output signals to be connected to each I/O device are
connected correctly.
For operators panel I/O modules and for connector panel I/O modules,
also check that the 0 V or +24 V input signal is connected to the common
pin and that the +24 V output signal is connected to the DO common pin.
D I/O Link allocation Check that I/O Link allocation has been performed correctly. The
checking of allocation requires a Ladder editing card.
Selecting [EDIT] and then [MODULE] from the PMC screen causes the
allocation edit screen to be displayed.
The checking of allocation requires a Ladder editing card.
Selecting [EDIT] and then [MODULE] from the PMC screen causes the
allocation edit screen to be displayed.
594
9.10
ALARM 85 TO 87
(READER/PUNCHER (START)
INTERFACE ALARM)
YES
Alarm 85?
NO Check baud rate

and other I/O pa
rameters
YES I/O device is
Alarm 86?
faulty
NO
Is I/O NO
parameter
correct?
YES Set correct parameters
OFF
Is power of I/O ?
ON
Turn on I/O device
Is cable NO
connection right?
YES
Connect the cable
I/O device is faulty

I/O interface
module is faulty
Alarm 87
I/O device is faulty

I/O interface mod
ule is faulty
Causes (a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.

Check the following setting data and parameters.
(b) External I/O device or host computer is faulty.
(c) I/O board is faulty.
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.
Countermeasures (a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.
Check the following setting data and parameters:
<Setting>
PUNCH CODE=0 OR 1 (0: EIA,1:ISO)
Select ISO or EIA according to the type of I/O device.
If punch code does not match, alarm 86 will generate.
595
<Parameter>
Value of parame-
ter 0020 0 1 2 3
Function
Feed 0101#7 0111#7 0121#7 0131#7
Data input code 0101#3 0111#3 0121#3 0131#3
Stop bit 0101#0 0111#0 0121#0 0131#0
Type of I/O device 102 112 122 132
Baud rate 103 113 123 133
Commu- 0135#3 0 1
nication
method RS232C RS422
MAIN CPU BOARD OPTION1 BOARD

Connector
JD36A JD36B JD28A JD6A
NOTE
1 Numbers in the table indicate parameters and bit numbers.
Example) 101#7: bit7 of parameter 101.
2 For data communications by RS422, refer to parameters
134 and 135.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
0111
0121
0131
#7(NFD) 0 : Feed is output before and after data in data output (FANUC PPR)
1 : Feed is not output (standard).
#3(ASI) 0 : Data input code is EIA or ISO (automatic recognition)
1 : Data input code is ASCII.
#0(SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.
1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
596
0102 Type of I/O device

0112
0122
Value TYPE OF I/O DEVICE
0132
0 RS232C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used)
1 FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2 (bubble cassette)
2 FANUC CASSETTE F1 (Old type FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAP-

TOR)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate,

FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR,
FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL H,
FANUC Handy File
4 Not used
6 FANUC PPR, FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL G,

FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL H
0103 Baud rete

0113
0123 Value Baud rate 10 4800
0133 7 600 11 9600
8 1200 12 19200
9 2400
When bit#3 of parameter no. 0135=1 (RS422 interface), the following

setting is also available.
Value Baud rate
13 38400
14 76800
15 86400
Check the following parameters also, when parameter no.0020 is 3.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0134 CLK NCD SYN PRY
#5(CLK) 0 : Internal clock is used for baud rate clock of RS422 interface.
1 : External clock is used for baud rate clock of RS422 interface.
#4(NCD) 0 : CD (signal quality detection) of RS232C interface is checked.
1 : CD (signal quality detection) of RS232C interface is not checked.
#2(SYN) 0 : In protocol B, NC reset/alarm is not informed to the host.
1 : In protocol B, NC reset/alarm is informed to the host by SYN and
NAK code.
#1(PRY) 0 : No parity bit
1 : With parity bit
597
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0135 RMS R42 PRA ETX ASC
#7(RMS) In protocol A, status of remote / tape operation of SAT command is

0 : Always transmitted by 0.
1 : Transmitted by the contents of remote / tape switching request issued
by SET command from the CNC.
#3(R42) 0 : Interface is of RS232C.
1 : Interface is of RS422.
#2(PRA) 0 : Communication protocol is protocol A
1 : Communication protocol is protocol B
#1(ETX) 0 : End code of protocol A or extended protocol A is CR of ASCII/ISO.
1 : End code of protocol A or extended protocol A is ETX of ASCII/ISO.
#0(ASC) 0 : All the communication codes except for NC data is ISO code.
1 : All the communication codes except for NC data is ASCII code.
(b) External I/O device or Host computer is in trouble
(i) Check whether the setting on communication of external I/O
device or host computer is the same as that of the CNC. (baud
rate, stop bits,etc.) If they are not the same, change the setting.
(ii) When spare I/O device presents, check whether it is possible to
realize communication using the spare I/O device.
598
(c) Spindle module or communication control module is faulty

(i) When parameter no.0020 is 0 or 1 or 2 (JD36A,JD36B of Main
CPU board) Replace the module since spindle module may be
faulty.
(ii) When parameter no. 0020 is 3 (JD28A,JD6A of option 1 board)
Because communication control module (5) may be faulty,
replace the module.
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.
Check the cable for disconnection or wrong connection.
<Connection>
Mother board
R232C(JD36A)
Punch panel
R232C(JD36B)
Tape reader
Serial
communication R232C(JD28A)
Host computer
R232C(JD6A)
Host computer
599
< Cable connection>
R232C (JD36A)
Punch panel
R232C (JD36B)
RD (01) (03) RD
0V (02)
DR (03) (06) DR
0V (04)
CS (05) (05) CS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
SD (11) (02) SD
0V (12)
ER (13) (20) ER
0V (14)
RS (15) (04) RS
0V (16) (07) SG
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
(20) (01) FG
Shield
G G Connector :DBM25S
Connector : Halfpitch 20pins
R232C (JD28A) Host computer
RD (01) (02) SD
0V (02)
DR (03) (20) ER
0V (04)
CS (05) (04) RS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
SD (11) (03) RD
0V (12)
ER (13) (06) DR
0V (14)
RS (15) (05) CS
0V (16) (07) SG
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
(20) (01) FG
Shield
G Connector DSUB 25 pins
Connector : Halfpitch 20pins
600
CAUTION
1 When CS is not used, connect it to RS.
2 For protocol A or extended protocol A: When DR is not used,
connect it to ER. Always connect CD to ER.
RS422(JD6A) Host computer
RD (01) (04) RD
*RD (02) (22) *RD
RT (03) (17) TT
*RT (04) (35) *TT
CS (05) (07) RS
*CS (06) (25) *RS
DM (07) (12) TR
Note) *DM (09) (30) *TR
0V (08) (19) SG
(+24V) (10)
SD (11) (06) RD
*SD (12) (24) *RD
TT (13) (08) RT
*TT (14) (26) *RT
RS (15) (09) CS
*RS (16) (27) *CS
TR (17) (11) DM
*TR (18) (29) *DM
(+24V) (19)
(20) (01) FG
Shield
G
Connector : Halfpitch 20 pins (PCR) Connector : DSUB 25 pins
CAUTION
Always use a twisted pair cable.
601
9.11
ALARM 90
(REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
IS ABNORMAL)
Contents Reference position return was executed when the following condition is
not satisfied:
The CNC received one rotation signal at least one time when the axis is
moving to the reference position at a speed higher than a speed equivalent
to 128 pulses of position error amount(DGN300).
Countermeasures
(START)
Position error
Check whether position gain is greater than 128 pulses amount : 300
(DGN 300) before or during reference position return.
YES
128 or more (1) Next page
NO
Raise the speed

Check feed rate command:
PRM 1420 F : Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
PRM 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
PRM 1825 G : Servo loop gain (0.01sec1)
F 5000/3
Position error=
G detection unit[m/PLUSE]
Detection unit : Move amount to a command pulse (usually 1m)
In metric machine, if the no. of digits below decimal point is 4 on the position
display screen, detection unit is 0.1 mm.
Check rapid traverse override signals :

ROV1 DGN 014.0 ROV1 ROV2 Override
1014.0 (For TT series)
ROV2 DGN 014.1 0 0 100%
1014.1 (For TT series) 0 1 50%
PRM 1421 Fo rate 1 0 25%
1 1 Fo rate
Check reference position return deceleration signal

DEC1 DEC8 DGN 009.0 009.7
When reference position return is started from deceleration signal 0, feed rate
becomes FL rate.
PRM 1425 FL rate
602
(1)
Check whether the motor ratated more than one rota-

tion (one rotation signal is issued ) at faster than 128
pulses of position error amount.
NO Return start position is too close

Rotated ?
Chagne the return start position.
YES Move the machine at faster that 128
pulses for more than one rotation to
wards RP.
Check that voltage of pulse coder is higher than 4.75 V.

To measure pulse coder voltage, remove the motor cover and measure on
pulse coder PCB at across + and or +5V and 0V terminals.
NO
More than 4.75V
YES
Hardware failure Pulse coder power voltage is low
Pulse coder is faulty

Change pulse coder or motor
CAUTION
After the pulse coder or motor is exchanged, reference
position or machines standard point may be different from
former one. Please set it correctly.
D Reference A speed more than 128 pulses is required because if speed is lower that
this, onerotation signal does not function stably, causing improper
position detection.
If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a speed corresponding to a
positional deviation of 1280 pulses or more is required.
Parameter No. 1836 can be set to 128 or less, as the minimum positional
deviation with which reference position return is possible. (If the
parameter is set to 0, 128 is assumed as the minimum positional deviation.
If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value equal to ten times the
set value is used for checking.)
603
9.12 Absolute position data in the serial pulse coder was lost.
(This alarm will be generated when serial pulse coder is exchanged or
ALARM 300 position feedback signal cable of the serial pulse coder is disconnected).
(REQUEST FOR
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN)
Remedies Machine position must be memorized using the following method:
D When reference position (1) Execute manual reference position return only for an axis for which
return function is this alarm was generated.When manual reference position return
present cannot be executed because of an another alarm, set parameter 1815#5
to 0 and release the alarm and perform manual operation.
(2) Press RESET key at the end of reference position return to release the
alarm.
D When reference position Execute dogless reference position setting to memorize the reference
return function is not position.
present
D When serial pulse coder Since the reference position is different from the former one, change the
is changed grid shift value (PRM 1850) to correct the position.
Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APC x APZx
#5(APCx) 0 : Position detector is incremental pulse coder.

1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.
#4(APZx) Reference position of absolute pulse coder is :
0 : not established
1 : established
604
9.13
ALARM 300
(V READY OFF)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of a servo amplifier
does not turn on or if the signal turns off during operation.
There are cases in which this alarm is issued because another servo alarm
is issued. If this occurs, first take the action for the first alarm.
Check the power magnetic circuit around the amplifier. The servo
amplifier or the axis control cards on the CNC may be defective.
D VRDY
CNC Servo amplifier

(main CPU board)
MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier
(subCPU board) (Turn MCC on to request the activation of the
servo motor)
VRDY: From the servo amplifier to

the CNC
(Notifies that the servo is ready)
The exchange of this information is performed via the FSSB (optical

cable).
605
D Example of connection
around the amplifier
(Typical example)
(servo (servo
amplifier) amplifier) Control
power
supply
Emergency stop
circuit
Serial spindle
Servo Servo Spindle

motor motor motor
3phase
Breaker AC
reactor
Single
phase
Breaker
Check items
D Is the PSM control power supply on?
D Has an emergency stop been canceled?
D Is a terminating connector connected to the JX1B connector of the
terminating amplifier?
D Is MCC on? If there is an external MCC sequence in addition to the
MCC contact of the PSM, check that sequence also.
D Is the power for driving MCC supplied?
D Is the breaker on?
D Has some alarm been issued in the PSM or SPM?
D Replacing the servo If no problem is found in the power magnetic circuit around the amplifier,
amplifier replace the servo amplifier.
D Replacing the axis If the above action does not solve the problem, replace the axis control
control cards cards.
606
the axis control cards
[For the LCDmounted

type]
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
SubCPU board
Axis control card
607
[For the standalone

type]
Axis control card Axis control card
Main CPU board SubCPU board
608
9.14
ALARM 404
(V READY ON)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of a servo amplifier
remains on.
The servo amplifier or the axis control cards on the CNC may be
defective.
D VRDY
CNC Servo amplifier

(main CPU board)
MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier
(subCPU board) (Turn MCC on to request the activation of the
servo motor)
VRDY: From the servo amplifier to

the CNC
(Notifies that the servo is ready)
The exchange of this information is performed via the FSSB (optical

cable).
This alarm is issued if VRDY remains on when the CNC turns MCON
off or if VRDY turns on before the CNC turns MCON on.
D Replacing the servo The servo amplifier may be defective. Replace the servo amplifier.
amplifier
D Replacing the axis If replacing the servo amplifier does not solve the problem, replace the
control cards axis control cards.
609
[For the LCDmounted

type]
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
SubCPU board
Axis control card
610
[For the LCDmounted

type]
611
9.15
ALARM 462
(SEND CNC DATA
FAILED)
Alarm 463 (SEND SLAVE

DATA FAILED)
Causes and actions Alarm 462 is issued if a slave (servo amplifier) cannot receive correct data
due to an FSSB communication error.
Alarm 463 is issued if the CNC cannot receive correct data due to an FSSB
communication error.
If these alarms are issued, the alarm message indicates the number of the
defective axis (axis name).
D Servo amplifier or optical Any of the optical cables between the CNC control unit and the amplifier
cable corresponding to the axis number indicated in the alarm message may be
defective.
Or, any of the first amplifier to the amplifier corresponding to that axis
number may be defective.
D Axis control cards The axis control cards installed on the CNC may be defective.
612
[For the LCDmounted

type]
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
SubCPU board
Axis control card
613
[For the LCDmounted

type]
614
9.16 Digital servo parameters are abnormal.

(Digital servo parameters are set incorrectly.)
ALARM 417 (DIGITAL When alarm 315 is occured at the same time, check the cause of alarm 351
SERVO SYSTEM IS of section 9.16.
ABNORMAL)
D Causes
1 Confirm the setting value of the following parameters:
PRM 2020 : Motor format number
PRM 2022 : Motor rotation direction
PRM 2023 : Number of pulses of velocity feedbacks
PRM 2024 : Number of pulses of position feedback
PRM 1023 : Servo axis number
PRM 2084 : Flexible feed gear ratio
PRM 2085 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Confirm the details with diagnosis function of CNC side.
2 Change the setting of this parameter to 0.
PRM 2047 : Observer parameter
3 Perform initial setting of digital servo parameters.
Refer to setcion 5.1 Initial Setting of Servo Parameters .
This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC.
If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203)
is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT
#0(MOT) : The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
#2(PLC) : The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
#3(PLS) : The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
#4(DIR) : The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter No.
2022 (the value is other than 111 or 111).
#6(AXS) : In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside the
range of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For example, 4 is
specified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values specified in the
parameter are not consecutive.
615
9.17
ALARM 700
(OVERHEAT:
CONTROL UNIT)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if the ambient temperature of the CNC control unit
is abnormally high. As an installation condition, the ambient temperature
of the CNC must not exceed 55C.
D Ambient temperature A temperature monitoring circuit is installed on the motherboard (main

CPU board), and causes this alarm to be issued if the ambient temperature
is abnormally high.
Take appropriate action to the cabinet that houses the CNC control unit
so that the temperature falls within the proper temperature range (0 to
55C).
If it is obvious that the ambient temperature is not abnormal, the
motherboard (main CPU board) may be defective.
616
9.18
ALARM 701
(OVERHEAT: FAN
MOTOR)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a fault occurs in any of the fan motors, such as the
stoppage of a fan motor during the operation of the CNC.
D Fan motors Fan motors are installed in the uppermost portion of the CNC control unit.
Each fan motor is attached with an alarm detector circuit, which notifies
the CNC of a fault such as the stoppage of the fan motor, thereby issuing
this alarm.
If this alarm is issued, replace the fan motor.
[For the LCDmounted For units without option slots

type]
Fan motor
Specifications of fan motors

Ordering Quantity
information required
Unit without option slots A02B0236K120 Two
Unit with two option slots A02B0236K121 Two
Unit with three option slots A02B0236K121 Two
A02B0236K122 Two
Unit with four option slots A02B0236K121 Four
617
[For the standalone For the standalone type, a fan can be replaced together with its case.
type]
Fan motor for Fan motor for

2slot track 1slot track
Specifications of fan motors

Ordering information
For 1slot track A02B0265C101
For 2slot track A02B0260C021
618
9.19 Spindle speed changes abnormally due to load.

ALARM 704
(SPINDLE SPEED
FLUCTUATION
DETECTION ALARM)
Remedies
Check whether spindle speed is constant by view

of the speed meter on CRT.
YES
Constant ?
NO
Is a heavy cutting being per-

formed ? Confirm spindle load
on CRT.
Confirm the follow-

ing parameter :
YES
Heavy cutting? PRM 4911
PRM 4912
Reduce cutting condition PRM 4913
NO PRM 4914
Doesnt the cutting tool worn ?
YES
Worn ?
Replace tool
NO
Spindle servo unit is faulty

Spindle motor is faulty
Remedies PRM 4911 : A ratio of spindle speed at which actual spindle speed is
regarded as arrived at a command spindle speed.
PRM 4912 : Spindle speed fluctuation ratio up to which the spindle

speed fluctuation detection alarm is not issued.
PRM 4913 : Spindle speed fluctuation that is not regarded as the spindle
speed fluctuation alarm.
PRM 4914 : Time when a spindle speed changed to when spindle speed
fluctuation detection is started.
619
9.20
ALARM 749
(SERIAL SPINDLE
COMMUNICATION
ERROR)
Causes and actions An error occurred in the communication between the serial spindle
amplifier (SPM) and the CNC. The probable causes include:
D Contact failure of the connection cable
D Defective printed circuit board on the CNC
D Defective spindle amplifier
D Noise
D Connection cable Check that the cable connecting the serial spindle amplifier (SPM) to the
CNC is in contact.
Check that the cable is inserted firmly into the connectors and that it does
not have any conductors likely to be cut off.
Check that the cable used is a twistedpair cable and that it is connected
as described in the connection manual.
D Printed circuit boards on A spindle control circuit for the CNC is installed on the motherboard
the CNC (main CPU board) and the subCPU board. If this alarm is issued from
the main CPU, replace the motherboard (main CPU board). If it is issued
from the subCPU, replace the subCPU board.
D Noise environment If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, examine the noise
environment of the connection cable.
See the section on the measures against noise, take appropriate actions
such as the reinforcement of the cable shield and the separation of the
cable from the power line.
620
9.21
ALARM 750
(SPINDLE SERIAL
LINK
STARTUP FAILURE)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a serial spindle amplifier (SPM) does not enter the
normal startup state when the CNC is turned on.
This alarm is not issued once the CNC system including the spindle
amplifiers has started up normally. It is issued if a fault occurs in the
poweron process.
The probable causes include the following:
D Contact failure, wiring error, or connection error of the connection
cable
D The CNC is turned on when a spindle amplifier is in the alarm state.
D Parameter setting error
D Defective printed circuit board on the CNC
D Detective spindle amplifier
D Connection Up to four serial spindle amplifiers (SPMs) can be connected per path.
Note, however, the number of amplifiers that can be connected differs
depending on the model, number of paths, and configuration. Refer to the
Connection Manual (Hardware).
[Diagram of connection
of up to two amplifiers
per path]
Motherboard
(Main CPU board)
SubCPU board
PSM (first)
PSM (second)
621
[Diagram of connection
of three or four
amplifiers per path]
Motherboard
(Main CPU board)
SubCPU board
Connector panel PSM (first)
JA41 JA48
JA7A1 JA7B
JA7A2 JA7A
PSM (second)
JA7B
JA7A
PSM (third)
JA7B
JA7A
PSM (fourth)
JA7B
JA7A
Check that the cables are connected as shown in the figure above. Check
that JA7Bs and JA7As are connected correctly.
Check that the cables are latched firmly and are not loose.
Refer to the Connection Manual (Hardware) to check that the cables are
connected correctly.
D States of the spindle This alarm is issued if the CNC is turned on when the LED of a spindle
amplifiers amplifier indicates a number other than 24.
On the spindle amplifier, remove the cause of the alarm. Turn off the
spindle amplifier and the CNC, then turn on the system again.
622
D Details of the alarm If this alarm is issued, its details can be checked with diagnosis number
409.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SPE: 0: In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters satisfy the
spindle amplifier startup conditions.
1 : In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do not satisfy
the spindle amplifier startup conditions.
S2E: 0: In the startup of spindle serial control, spindle 2 is normal.
1 : In the startup of spindle serial control, a fault was detected on spindle
2.
S1E: 0: In the startup of spindle serial control, spindle 1 is normal.
1 : In the startup of spindle serial control, a fault was detected on spindle
1.
SHE: 0: The serial communication control circuit on the CNC is normal.
1 : A fault was detected in the serial communication control circuit on the
CNC.
1) If SPE is set to 1
Recheck the serial spindle parameters with numbers 4000 to 4999.
2) If S2E is set to 1
Because a fault was detected on spindle 2, check its connection and
parameter settings. This alarm is issued if the parameter settings are
such that spindle 2 is used although only spindle 1 is used.
3) If S1E is set to 1
Because a fault was detected on spindle 1, check its connection and
parameter settings.
If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, the motherboard
(main CPU board), servo CPU board, or spindle amplifier may be
defective.
4) If SHE is set to 1
Replace the motherboard (main CPU board) or subCPU board.
623
9.22
ALARM 5134
(FSSB: OPEN
READY TIME OUT)
ALARM 5135 (FSSB:

ERROR MODE)
ALARM 5137 (FSSB:

CONFIGURATION
ERROR)
ALARM 5197 (FSSB:

OPEN TIME OUT)
ALARM 5198 (FSSB:

ID DATA NOT READ)
Causes and actions These alarms are issued if any of the axis control cards and the slaves
(such as servo amplifiers) and optical cables connected to the FSSB is
defective.
No. Message Description
5134 FSSB: OPEN READY TIME The FSSB did not become ready to
OUT open during initialization.
5135 FSSB: ERROR MODE The FSSB entered an error mode.
5137 FSSB: CONFIGURATION The FSSB detected a configuration er-

ERROR ror.
5197 FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT The FSSB did not open when the CNC
had allowed the FSSB to open.
5198 FSSB: ID DATA NOT READ The initial ID information for the amplifi-
er cannot be read because of a failure
in the temporary assignment.
D Processing of the FSSB The processing of the FSSB at power on is as described below:
at power on 1 The CNC initializes the FSSB and the servo.
2 The servo returns the first ready signal.
3 The first ITP interrupt is generated.
4 The CNC waits for the FSSB to become ready to open.
5 The CNC checks that the FSSB did not detect a configuration error.
6 The CNC allows the FSSB to open.
7 The CNC checks that the FSSB has opened.
8 The servo returns the second ready signal.
9 Normal operation
624
If the FSSB does not become ready to open in 4, alarm 5134 is issued.
If an error is detected in 5, alarm 5137 is issued.
If the FSSB does not open within a fixed period of time, alarm 5197 is
issued.
If the ready signal is not returned within a fixed period of time, alarm 5198
is issued.
D Checking the parameter Check that the FSSBrelated parameters are set correctly.
settings
D Power supplies of the Check the power supplies of the servo amplifiers connected to the FSSB.
servo amplifiers
D Replacing the axis Replace the axis control cards on the CNC.
control cards, optical Replace the optical cables and servo amplifiers connected to the FSSB,
cables, and servo one at a time, to identify the defective item.
amplifiers
625
[For the LCDmounted

type]
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
SubCPU board
Axis control card
626
[For the standalone

type]
627
9.23
ALARM 5136
(FSSB: NUMBER OF
AMPS IS SMALL)
Causes and actions The number of servo amplifiers recognized by the FSSB is insufficient,
compared with the number of controlled axes.
D FSSB setting screen If this alarm is issued, display the amplifier setting screen from the FSSB
setting screen. Only the servo amplifiers recognized on the FSSB are
displayed.
D Optical cable or servo The optical cable that connects together the last recognized amplifier and
amplifier the next one may be defective.
Or, either of the amplifiers connected together with that optical cable may
be defective. Check the power supplies of the amplifiers.
D Power fault of a servo This alarm may be issued if a power fault occurs in a servo amplifier. A
amplifier power fault occurs if the amplifier control power supply voltage drops,
if the +5 V conductor of the pulse coder cable is ground, or for other
reasons.
D Axis control cards The axis control cards installed on the CNC may be defective.
628
[For the LCDmounted

type]
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
SubCPU board
Axis control card
629
[For the LCDmounted

type]
630
9.24
ALARM 900
(ROM PARITY)
Causes and actions A ROM parity error occurred.
The software including the CNC system software, servo software, PMC
management software, and PMC Ladder is stored in the flash memory on
the FROM module. It starts execution after being loaded into the RAM
of the DRAM module or servo card at power on.
A ROM parity error occurs if the software stored in the FROM module
is destroyed.
D Rewriting the software On the screen, the series of the software in which a fault was detected is
component displayed. Rewrite the software using the boot system.
The software stored in the FROM module includes a variety of FANUC
software components, as well as those created by the MTB, such as the
PMC Ladder.
D Replacing the FROM Replace the FROM module

module After replacement, all the software that was once stored must be written.
To write the software, use the boot system.
D Replacing the main CPU If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the main
board CPU board.
the FROM module
[For the LCDmounted

type]
631
FROM module
16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i motherboard
NOTE
This drawing shows a motherboard without a PC
(A20B8100014x). For motherboards with a PC
(A20B8100014x and A20B8100046x), the positions
and the orientations of the connectors and the DIMM
module socket differ slightly, but their relative positions are
the same.
FROM module
632
[For the standalone

type]
FROM module
The FROM module is

installed under the display
control card.
Main CPU board
633
9.25
ALARMS 910 AND
911 (SRAM PARITY)
Causes and actions A parity error occurred in the SRAM used to store data such as parameters
and machining programs.
This alarm is issued if the battery has run down or if the data in the SRAM
is destroyed due to some external cause. Or, the SRAM module or
motherboard (main CPU board) may be defective.
D Checking the battery The battery is rated 3 V. A battery alarm is issued and BAT flashes on
the screen if the voltage of the battery drops to 2.6 V.
If a battery alarm is issued, replace the battery with a new one promptly.
D Performing memory all Perform a memory all clear operation, then start up the CNC.
clear Alternatively, if a backup of the data in the SRAM has been made, use the
backup to restore the data. To back up and restore the data in the SRAM,
use the boot system.
D Replacing the SRAM If memory all clear or the restoration of the data with a backup does not
module solve the problem, replace the SRAM module.
After replacing the SRAM module, perform a memory all clear operation
and start up the CNC. All the data must be reloaded.
If a backup is available, restore the data using the backup, then start up
the CNC.
D Motherboard (main CPU If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the
board) motherboard (main CPU board).
the SRAM module
[For the LCDmounted

type]
634
SRAM module
NOTE
the same.
SRAM module
635
[For the standalone

type]
SRAM module
The SRAM module is

installed under the
axis control card.
Main CPU board
D SRAM parity on the If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that an SRAM parity error
loader control board or occurred on the loader or CAPII, take appropriate action on the loader
CAPII board control board or CAPII board.
The SRAM for the loader control board and the CAPII board is installed
on the boards themselves.
SYSTEM ALARM
972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER MODULE
SLOT 01
910 SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) <LC
636
9.26
ALARMS 912 TO 919
(DRAM PARITY)
Causes and actions The management software for the CNC is loaded from the FROM to the
DRAM at power on, so that it is executed on the DRAM.
A parity error occurred on this DRAM.
These alarms occur if the data on the DRAM is destroyed due to some
external cause or if the DRAM module or CPU card is defective.
D Replacing the DRAM Replace the DRAM module installed on the CPU card.
module
D Replacing the CPU card. If the above action does not solve the problem, replace the CPU card.
the CPU card (DRAM
module)
[For the LCDmounted

type]
The DRAM module is installed on the CPU card.
CPU card
Motherboard
NOTE
(A20B8100014x, A20B8100046x, and
A20B8100054x), the positions and the orientations of
the connectors and the DIMM module socket differ slightly,
but their relative positions are the same.
637
[For the standalone

type]
CPU module
The DRAM module is

installed on the CPU
card.
Main CPU board
D DRAM parity on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a DRAM parity error
option board occurred on an option board, take appropriate action on the option board
on which the DRAM parity error occurred.
Some option boards have a circuit equivalent to the CPU card installed
on the boards themselves. See the hardware chapter for details.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) <SUB
638
9.27
ALARMS 920 AND
921 (SERVO
ALARMS)
Causes and actions A watchdog error or RAM parity error occurred in the circuit on an axis
control card.
Alarm 920 indicates that either of the above errors occurred in the control
circuit for axes 1 to 4. Alarm 921 indicates that either of the above errors
occurred in the control circuit for axes 5 to 8.
The axis control cards, CPU card, or motherboard (main CPU board) may
be defective.
D Watchdog error The servo control circuit monitors the operation of the main CPU. If a
fault occurs in the CPU or its peripheral circuit, so that the watchdog timer
is not reset, a watchdog error occurs.
D Replacing the axis Replace the axis control cards.

control cards
D Replacing the CPU card Replace the CPU card and the DRAM module.
D Replacing the If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the
motherboard (main CPU motherboard (main CPU board).
board)
639
each card and module
[For the LCDmounted

type]
The DRAM module is

installed on the CPU card.
Motherboard
NOTE
(A20B8100014x, A20B8100046x, and A20B8100
054x), the positions and the orientations of the connectors
and the DIMM module socket differ slightly, but their relative
positions are the same.
640
[For the standalone

type]
CPU module
The DRAM module

is installed on the
CPU card.
Axis control card
Main CPU board
D Servo alarm on the If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a servo alarm occurred
subCPU board or loader on the subCPU or loader, take appropriate action on the subCPU board
control board or loader control board.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
920 SERVO ALARM <SUB
641
[For the LCDmounted

type]
CPU card
Axis control card
SubCPU board
[For the standalone

type]
DRAM module
The DRAM
module is installed
on the CPU card.
CPU card
Axis control card
SubCPU board
642
9.28
ALARM 926 (FSSB ALARM)
Causes and actions A fault occurred on the FSSB (serial servo bus) that connects servo
amplifiers to the CNC.
This alarm is issued if a fault occurs in any of the axis control cards
making up the FSSB, optical cables, and servo amplifiers.
D Identifying the defective Use the LEDs on the servo amplifiers.
location Using the 7segment LEDs installed on the servo amplifiers, the
defective location can be identified.
FSSB connection
example
Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier

CNC 0 1 2 3 4 5
B A
If portion A, indicated by dotted line, contains the defective location, the

LEDs on the servo amplifiers will be as shown in the table below.
Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier
No. 0 1 2 3 4 5
L
LED
or U U U
display

In this case, any of the following locations may be defective:

(1) Optical cable connecting together the servo amplifier whose LED is
L or and that whose LED is U. In the above figure, the optical
cable in portion A may be defective.
(2) Either of the servo amplifier whose LED is L or and that whose
LED is U. In the above figure, either amplifier 2 or 3 may be
defective.
If portion B, indicated by dotted line, contains the defective location, the
LEDs on the servo amplifiers will be as follows:
Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier
No. 0 1 2 3 4 5
LED
or U
display
In this case, any of the following locations may be defective:

(1) Optical cable connected to the CNC. In the above figure, the optical
cable in portion B may be defective.
(2) Any of the axis control cards in the CNC
(3) First servo amplifier connected. In the above figure, amplifier 0 may
be defective.
643
D Identifying the defective Use the display on the CNC screen

location If alarm 926 is issued, information such as the following is displayed at
the bottom of the CNC screen. It can be used to identify the defective
location.
MODE STATUS
information information
Bits Bits
Bits 12 to 15 of the MODE information indicate the number of the slave

in which the alarm occurred. The unit nearest the CNC (such as a servo
amplifier) is assigned a slave number of 0. For a 2axis amplifier, for
example, one number is assigned for the first axis, and the next number
is assigned for the second.
Details of the MODE information

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 0
De- Number of the slave in No meaning

scrip- which the alarm oc-
tion curred
0000: Indicates that the alarm occurred in slave 0.

0001: Indicates that the alarm occurred in slave 1.
:
:
Indicates that the alarm occurred in slave 9.
Using the bits of the STATUS information, the fault can be estimated.
Details of the STATUS information

Bit 15 12 11 10 9 87 6 5 4 3 0
No meaning
No meaning
No meaning
Broken master port
No meaning
External alarm
Broken master port
Broken slave port

Description
Error on slave
A xxxx 0 0 0 xxx 1 x 0 xxxx
A xxxx 0 1 0 xxx 0 x 1 xxxx
B xxxx 0 0 1 xxx 0 x 1 xxxx
C xxxx 1 0 0 xxx 0 x 1 xxxx
The STATUS information matches any of the patterns A, B, and C.

(x indicates a bit that may be either 0 or 1.)
644
If the pattern of the STATUS information is A

(1) The optical cable that connects together the slave corresponding to bits
12 to 15 of the MODE information and the preceding slave may be
defective. Or, either of the slaves connected together with that optical
cable may be defective.
(2) The voltage of the power supplied to the slave amplifier dropped, or
a power fault occurred in the amplifier.
(3) Any of the axis control cards in the CNC may be defective.
If the pattern of the STATUS information is B
(1) The optical cable that connects together the slave corresponding to bits
12 to 15 of the MODE information and the preceding slave may be
defective. Or, either of the slaves connected together with that optical
cable may be defective.
If the pattern of the STATUS information is C
(1) The slave corresponding to bits 12 to 15 of the MODE information
may be defective.
D Power fault in a servo If a power fault occurs in a servo amplifier, the FSSB alarm is issued. A
amplifier power fault occurs, causing the FSSB alarm to be issued, if the amplifier
control power supply voltage drops, if the +5 V conductor of the pulse
coder cable is ground, or for other reasons.
D Replacing the axis If any of the axis control cards are found defective because of the above
control card diagnosis, replace the axis control card on the motherboard (main CPU
board).
645
the axis control card
[For the LCDmounted

type]
Axis control card
Motherboard
NOTE
(A20B8100014x, A20B8100046x, and A20B8100
646
[For the standalone

type]
Axis control card
Main CPU board
D FSSB alarm on the If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that an FSSB alarm
subCPU board or loader occurred on the subCPU or loader, take appropriate action on the
control board subCPU board or loader control board.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
926 FSSB ALARM <SUB
647
[For the LCDmounted

type]
Axis control card
SubCPU board
Axis control card
Loader control card
[For the standalone

type]
Axis control card
SubCPU board
648
9.29
ALARM 930
(CPU INTERRUPT)
Causes and actions An interrupt that can never be generated during normal operation was
generated.
The cause of the fault cannot be identified, but the fault may have occurred
in the peripheral circuit of the CPU.
If the problem is solved by turning the power off and then on again, the
problem may be attributable to noise.
D Replacing the CPU card,

DRAM module, and main
CPU board
[For the LCDmounted

type]
The DRAM module is installed

on the CPU card.
CPU card
Motherboard
NOTE
(A20B8100014x, A20B8100046x, and A20B8100
649
[For the standalone

type]
CPU module
The DRAM module is

installed on the CPU
card.
Main CPU board
D Examining the noise See the section on the measures against noise, examine the noise
environment environment of the CNC.
D CPU interrupt on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a CPU interrupt was
option board generated on an option board, take appropriate action on the option board
on which the CPU interrupt was generated.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
930 CPU INTERRUPT <SUB
650
9.30
ALARM 935
(SRAM ECC ERROR)
Causes and actions An ECC error occurred in the SRAM used to store data such as parameters
and machining programs.
This alarm is issued if the battery installed in the face plate of the main
CPU board has run down or if the data in the SRAM is destroyed due to
some external cause. Or, the SRAM module or motherboard may be
defective.
D ECC check This is the method of checking the data stored in the SRAM. It has been
employed instead of the conventional parity check.
With the ECC check method, 8bit correction data is provided for 16bit
data, so that if a data error occurs in one of these 16 bits, the error is
automatically corrected with the correction data, allowing the CNC to
continue operation. This alarm is issued if a data error occurs in two or
more bits.
With the conventional parity check method, a system alarm is issued if a
data error occurs even in one bit.
D Checking the battery The battery is rated 3 V. A battery alarm is issued and BAT flashes on
the screen if the voltage of the battery drops to 2.6 V.
If a battery alarm is issued, replace the battery with a new one promptly.
D Performing memory all Perform a memory all clear operation, then start up the CNC.
clear Alternatively, if a backup of the data in the SRAM has been made, use the
backup to restore the data. To back up and restore the data in the SRAM,
use the boot system.
D Replacing the SRAM If memory all clear or the restoration of the data with a backup does not
module solve the problem, replace the SRAM module.
After replacing the SRAM module, perform a memory all clear operation
and start up the CNC. All the data must be reloaded.
If a backup is available, restore the data using the backup, then start up
the CNC.
D Motherboard (main CPU If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the
board) motherboard (main CPU board).
651
the SRAM module
[For the LCDmounted

type]
652
SRAM module
NOTE
the same.
SRAM module
653
[For the standalone

type]
SRAM module
The SRAM module is
installed under the
axis control card.
Main CPU board
654
9.31
ALARM 950
(PMC SYSTEM
ALARM)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a fault is detected in the PMC.
The probable causes include an I/O link communication error and a
defective PMC control circuit
D Connecting the I/O Link The I/O Link is a serial interface that connects the CNC to various I/O
devices and allows transfers of I/O signals between devices at high speed.
When multiple devices are connected using the I/O Link, there forms a
relationship that a certain device is a master and the other devices are
slaves. The states of the input signals from the slaves are transferred to
the master at fixed intervals. The output signals from the master are
transferred to the slaves at fixed intervals. In a CNC system, the master
is the CNC (motherboard or main CPU board).
The I/O signals transferred via the I/O link can be used with the PMC
Ladder.
Master station (CNC) Slave station #0

Group 0
Slave station #1
Group 1
Up to 16 groups
D I/O Link communication If alarm 950 is issued, displaying PC050 on the screen, an I/O link
error PC050 communication error may have occurred.

SYSTEM ALARM
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM

PC050 NMI SLCxx:yy
In this screen display example, the cause of the alarm can be estimated
using xx:yy. xx and yy are hexadecimal representations.
655
1) If bit 0 of the binary representation of xx is 1, this indicates that the

master station (CNC) received invalid communication data. For
example, assume that the following is displayed on the screen:
SYSTEM ALARM

PC050 NMI SLC 41:42
xx is equal to 41, or 01000001 in binary notation. Bit 0, which is

the lowest (rightmost) bit, is 1.
In this case, check the following:
(1) Noise environment of the I/O Link cable
The data on the I/O Link may be disturbed by noise, possibly
causing malfunctions.
(2) Contact of the I/O Link cable
Check that the I/O link cable is in contact. Check that the cable is
not loose and is latched firmly.
(3) Cable failure
Check that the I/O Link cable is connected properly.
(4) Device failure
The motherboard (main CPU board) or any of the I/O devices
connected to the I/O Link may be defective. Replace the devices,
one at a time, to identify the defective device.
Refer to 2) if bit 1 (second bit from the right) is also 1.
2) If bit 1 of the binary representation of xx is 1, this indicates that an
error was detected on a slave station (I/O device). For example,
assume that the following is displayed on the screen:
SYSTEM ALARM

PC050 NMI SLC 43:82
xx is equal to 43, or 01000011 in binary notation. Bit 1 (second bit

from the right) is 1.
In this case, yy indicates the following:
Number equal to the number indicated by bits 0 to 4 of yy minus 1:
Group number of the slave station on which an error was detected
Bit 5 of yy:
Invalid communication data was detected on the slave.
Bit 6 of yy:
Another error was detected on the slave.
Bit 7 of yy:
A watchdog or parity error was detected on the slave.
In the example shown in the figure above, yy is equal to 82, or
10000010 in binary notation. Bits 0 to 4 are 00010 (2 in decimal
notation). The number 1, which is equal to that number minus 1, is
the group number of the slave station on which an error was detected.
Bit 7 is 1. Thus, a watchdog or parity error was detected on the slave
station in group 1.
656

(1) If bit 5 of yy is 1
Perform examination with the same procedure as that in 1).
(2) If bit 6 of yy is 1 or if bit 7 of yy is 1
First, replace the device of the slave station of the indicated group
number.
If the problem is not solved, perform examination with the same
procedure as that in 1) to identify the defective location.
3) If bit 2 of the binary representation of xx is 1, this indicates that the
link between the master station (CNC) and the slave station was
canceled. For example, assume that the following is displayed on the
screen:
SYSTEM ALARM

PC050 NMI SLC 84:00
xx is equal to 84, or 1000100 in binary notation. Bit 2, which is the

third bit from the right, is 1.
(1) Disconnection of the slave station from the power supply
Check that the slave station is not turned off, that there are no
instantaneous power failures, and that the capacity of the power
supply is enough.
(2) Disconnection of the I/O link cable
Check that the I/O link cable has not fallen off or has not been
disconnected.
(3) If the problem is not solved, perform a check with the same
procedure as that in 1).
4) If bit 3 or 4 of the binary representation of xx is 1, this indicates that
a parity error occurred in the PMC control circuit on the motherboard
(main CPU board).
In this case, replace the motherboard (main CPU board).
D Other cases The motherboard (main CPU board) may be defective. Replace the
motherboard (main CPU board).
D PMC system alarm on For sequence control on the loader control board, a PMC control circuit
the loader control board is installed on the loader control board.
If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a PMC system alarm
occurred on the loader, take appropriate action on the loader control
board.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM >LC
657
9.32
ALARM 951
(PMC WATCHDOG
ALARM)
Causes and actions This alarm is issued if a fault (watchdog alarm) is detected in the PMC.
A probable cause is that the MC control circuit is defective.
D Replacing the main CPU The PMC control circuit is installed on the main CPU board. Replace the
board main CPU board.
D PMC watchdog alarm on For sequence control on the loader control board, a PMC control circuit
the loader control board is installed on the loader control board.
If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a PMC watchdog
alarm occurred on the loader, take appropriate action on the loader control
board.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
951 PMC WATCH DOG ALARM >LC
658
9.33
ALARM 972
(NMI ALARM ON AN
OPTION BOARD)
Causes and actions This alarm indicates that an error was detected on an option board, not on
the main CPU board.
D Screen display If alarm 972 is issued, the following is displayed on the screen:
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 02
930 CPU INTERRUPT <SUB
SLOT indicates the number of the slot into which the option board is
inserted. Alternatively, it may indicate the number of the alarm that
occurred on the option board. Take the action related to that alarm to the
option board. In the above example, alarm 930 occurred on the subCPU
board.
D Slot number The slot number of each option slot is as shown in the figure below.
D Replacing the option Replace the option board inserted into the slot with the indicated slot
board number.
659
9.34
ALARM 973
(NMI ALARM WITH
AN UNKNOWN
CAUSE)
Causes and actions An error that can never occur during normal operation occurred. The
cause of the error cannot be identified.
D Replacing printed circuit Replace all the printed circuit boards installed (including cards, modules,
boards and the back panel), one at a time, to identify the defective printed circuit
board.
Replace the CPU card, motherboard (main CPU board), and other printed
circuit boards, one at a time.
660
9.35
ALARM 974
(FBUS ERROR)
Causes and actions A bus error occurred on the FANUCBUS connecting each option board.
This alarm indicates that a fault occurred during the exchange of data
between the main CPU and an option board.
This alarm is also issued if an error occurs during the exchange of data
between the main CPU and the PMC control circuit.
D Replacing the CPU card Replace the CPU card on the motherboard (main CPU board).
D Replacing the Replace the motherboard (main CPU board).

motherboard (main CPU
board)
D Replacing the option Replace the installed option boards, one at a time.
boards
D Replacing the back panel Replace the back panel.
661
the CPU card
[For the LCDmounted

type]
CPU card
Motherboard
NOTE
(A20B8100014x, A20B8100046x, and A20B8100
662
[For the standalone

type]
CPU card
Motherboard
D FBUS error on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that an FBUS error
option board occurred on an option board, replace the CPU card on the option board
on which the FBUS error occurred or the option board itself.
In this case, the back panel or main CPU board may be defective. Take
the actions described on the previous page.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
974 FBUS ERROR <SUB
663
9.36
ALARM 975
(BUS ERROR)
Causes and actions A bus error occurred on the motherboard (main CPU board). This alarm
indicates that an error occurred during the exchange of data within the
motherboard (main CPU board).
D Replacing other cards Replace the display control card, axis control cards, DRAM module,
and modules FROM module, and SRAM module, one at time.

board)
D BUS error on an option If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a BUS error occurred
board on an option board, replace the CPU card on the option card, DRAM
module, axis control cards, and option card, one at a time.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
975 FBUS ERROR <SUB
664
9.37
ALARM 976
(LOCAL BUS ERROR)
Causes and actions A bus error occurred on the local bus on the motherboard (main CPU
board).
This alarm indicates that an error occurred during the exchange of data
within the motherboard (main CPU board).
D Replacing other cards Replace the display control card, axis control cards, DRAM module,
and modules FROM module, and SRAM module, one at a time.

board)
D Local BUS error on an If alarm 972 is issued, indicating on the screen that a local BUS error
option board occurred on an option board, replace the CPU card on the option card,
DRAM module, axis control cards, and option card, one at a time.
SYSTEM ALARM
SLOT 01
976 LBUS ERROR <SUB
665
9.38 For an explanation of the following servo alarms, refer to the FANUC
CONTROL MOTOR Series Maintenance Manual (B65165).
SERVO ALARMS
Number Message Contents *
417 nTH AXISPARAMETER INCORRECT The setting of a servorelated parameter is 417

incorrect.
430 n AXIS: SV. MOTOR OVERHEAT A servo motor overheat occurred. 400
431 n AXIS: CNV. OVERLAOD PSM: Overheat occurred.
432 n AXIS: CNV. LOWVOLT CON./ PSM: Phase missing occurred in the input 414
POWERFAULT voltage.
PSMR: The control power supply voltage
has dropped.
433 n AXIS: CNV. LOW VOLT DC LINK PSM: The DC link voltage has dropped.
PSMR: The DC link voltage has dropped.
434 n AXIS: INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL SVM: The control power supply voltage has
dropped.
435 n AXIS: INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK SVM: The DC link voltage has dropped.
436 n AXIS: SOFTTHERMAL (OVC) The digital servo software detected the soft
thermal state (OVC).
437 n AXIS: CNV. OVERCURRENT POWER PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the input cir-
cuit.
438 n AXIS: INV. ABNORMAL CURRENT SVM: The motor current is too high.
439 n AXIS: CNV. OVERVOLT POWER PSM: The DC link voltage is too high.
440 n AXIS: CNV. EX DECELERATION POW. PSMR: The regenerative discharge amount
is too large.
441 n AXIS: ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an ab-
normality in the motor current detection cir-
cuit.
442 n AXIS: CNV. CHARGE FAULT/INV. DB PSM: The spare discharge circuit of the DC
link is abnormal.
PSMR: The spare discharge circuit of the
DC link is abnormal.
443 n AXIS: CONV. COOLING FAN FAILURE PSM: The internal stirring fan failed.
PSMR: The internal stirring fan failed.
444 n AXIS: INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE SVM: The internal stirring fan failed.
445 n AXIS: SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a broken 416
wire in the pulse coder.
446 n AXIS: HARD DISCONNECT ALARM A broken wire in the builtin pulse coder was
detected by hardware.
NOTE
The alarm numbers mentioned in the above manual are
those shown in the * column.
666
If the hardware on the CNC is suspected to be defective as a result of

examination, replace the axis control cards.
[For the LCDmounted

type]
Axis control card
Motherboard
Axis control card
SubCPU board
Axis control card
Loader control card
667
[For the standalone

type]
668
9.39 For an explanation of the following SPC alarms (serial pulse coder
alarms), refer to the FANUC CONTROL MOTOR Series Maintenance
SPC ALARMS Manual (B65165).
Number Message Contents *
360 n AXIS: ABNORMAL CHECKSUM (INT) A checksum error occurred in the builtin 350
pulse coder.
361 n AXIS: ABNORMAL PHASE DATA (INT) A phase data error occurred in the builtin
pulse coder.
362 n AXIS: ABNORMAL REV. DATA (INT) A rotation speed count error occurred in the
builtin pulse coder.
363 n AXIS: ABNOMAL CLOCK (INT) A clock error occurred in the builtin pulse
coder.
364 n AXIS: SOFT PHASE ALARM (INT) The digital servo software detected invalid
data in the builtin pulse coder.
365 n AXIS: BROKEN LED (INT) An LED error occurred in the builtin pulse
coder.
366 n AXIS: PULSE MISS (INT) An LED error occurred in the builtin pulse
coder.
367 n AXIS: COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the builtin pulse
coder.
368 n AXIS: SERIAL DATA ERROR (INT) Communication data from the builtin pulse 351
coder cannot be received.
369 n AXIS: DATA TRANS. ERROR (INT) A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the com-
munication data being received from the
builtin pulse coder.
NOTE
The alarm numbers mentioned in the above manual are
669
9.40 For an explanation of the following spindle alarms, refer to the FANUC
CONTROL MOTOR Series Maintenance Manual (B65165).
SPINDLE ALARMS
Number Contents *
7101 to 7199 Spindle 1 alarm (AL01 to 99) 751
7201 to 7299 Spindle 2 alarm (AL01 to 99) 761
7301 to 7399 Spindle 3 alarm (AL01 to 99)
7401 to 7499 Spindle 4 alarm (AL01 to 99)
NOTE
1 The alarm numbers mentioned in the above manual are
2 Although the above manual does not contain a description
of the spindle 3/4 alarms, the lower two digits (spindle
amplifier alarm number) are the same as those of the
spindle 1/2 alarms.
670
APPENDIX
B63005EN/02 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST
A ALARM LIST
A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES (CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

A.2 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
A.3 ALARMS (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . 724
673
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B63005EN/02
A.1
LIST OF ALARM
CODES (CNC)
(1) Program errors /Alarms on program and operation (P/S alarm)
Number Message Contents
000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power.
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input).
Correct the tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will
be generated only when the TV check is effective.
003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input.
(Refer to the item of max. programmable dimensions.)
004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign was input without an address at the beginning
of a block. Modify the program .
005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was followed
by another address or EOB code. Modify the program.
006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN Sign input error (Sign was input after an address with which it
cannot be used. Or two or more signs were input.)
Modify the program.
007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT Decimal point . input error (A decimal point was input after an address
with which it can not be used. Or two decimal points were input.)
Modify the program.
009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT Unusable character was input in significant area.
Modify the program.
010 IMPROPER GCODE An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not pro-
vided is specified. Modify the program.
011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was in-
adequate. Modify the program.
CAN NOT COMMAND G95 A synchronous feed is specified without the option for threading / syn-
(M series) chronous feed.
014 ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND In variable lead threading, the lead incremental and decremental out-
(T series) putted by address K exceed the maximum command value or a com-
mand such that the lead becomes a negative value is given.
Modify the program.
TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED An attempt was made to move the machine along the axes, but the num-
(M series) ber of the axes exceeded the specified number of axes controlled simul-
taneously. Modify the program.
TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED An attempt has been made to move the tool along more than the maxi-
015 (T series) mum number of simultaneously controlled axes. Alternatively, no axis
movement command or an axis movement command for two or more
axes has been specified in the block containing the command for skip
using the torque limit signal (G31 P99/98). The command must be ac-
companied with an axis movement command for a single axis, in the
same block.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), difference of the distance between
the start point and the center of an arc and that between the end point
and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No.
3410.
021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS COMMAN- An axis not included in the selected plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was
DED commanded in circular interpolation. Modify the program.
022 NO CIRCLE RADIUS The command for circular interpolation lacks arc radius R or coordinate
I, J, or K of the distance between the start point to the center of the arc.
674
023 ILLEGAL RADIUS COMMAND In circular interpolation by radius designation, negative value was com-
(T series) manded for address R. Modify the program.
025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN G02/G03 F0 (fast feed) was instructed by F1 digit column feed in circular inter-
(M series) polation. Modify the program.
027 NO AXES COMMANDED IN No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length offset type
G43/G44 (M series) C.
Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool length offset
type C. Modify the program.
028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT In the plane selection command, two or more axes in the same direction
are commanded.
Modify the program.
ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by H code is too large.
(M series) Modify the program.
029
ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by T code is too large.
(T series) Modify the program.
ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number specified by D/H code for tool length offset or cutter
(M series) compensation is too large. Alternatively, the number of an additional
workpiece coordinate system specified with the P code is too large.
030 Modify the program.
ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number in T function specified for tool offset is tool large.
031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number following address
P was excessive or it was not specified.
Modify the program.
032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by sys-
tem variables, the offset amount was excessive.
NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be determined for cutter compensation.
033
NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be determined for tool nose radius com-
(T series) pensation. Modify the program.
NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP /EXT The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03
BLK (M series) mode in cutter compensation C. Modify the program.
034
NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP /EXT The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03
BLK (T series) mode in tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program.
CAN NOT COMMANDED G39 G39 is commanded in cutter compensation B cancel mode or on the
(M series) plane other than offset plane. Modify the program.
035
CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Skip cutting (G31) was specified in tool nose radius compensation
(T series) mode. Modify the program.
036 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutter compensation mode.
CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN CRC G40 is commanded on the plane other than offset plane in cutter com-
(M seires) pensation B. The plane selected by using G17, G18 or G19 is changed
037 in cutter compensation C mode. Modify the program.
CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN NRC The offset plane is switched in tool nose radius compensation.
(T seires) Modify the program.
INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C because the arc start
BLOCK (M seires) point or end point coincides with the arc center.
Modify the program.
038
INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation because the arc
BLOCK (T series) start point or end point coincides with the arc center.
Modify the program.
675
039 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN NRC Chamfering or corner R was specified with a startup, a cancel, or
(T series) switching between G41 and G42 in tool nose radius compensation. The
program may cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner R.
Modify the program.
040 INTERFERENCE IN G90/G94 Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation in canned cycle
BLOCK (T series) G90 or G94. Modify the program.
INTERFERENCE IN CRC Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C. Two or more blocks are
(M seires) consecutively specified in which functions such as the auxiliary function
and dwell functions are performed without movement in the cutter com-
041 pensation mode. Modify the program.
INTERFERENCE IN NRC Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation.
(T seires) Modify the program.
042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in cutter compensation. Modify
(M series) the program.
044 G27G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode.
CYC (M series) Modify the program.
045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND In canned cycle G73/G83, the depth of each cut (Q) is not specified. Al-
(G73/G83) (M series) ternatively, Q0 is specified. Correct the program.
046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded for 2nd, 3rd and 4th refer-
COMMAND ence position return command.
047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT Two or more parallel axes (in parallel with a basic axis) have been speci-
(M series) fied upon startup of threedimensional tool compensation or threedi-
mensional coordinate conversion.
048 BASIC 3 AXIS NOT FOUND Startup of threedimensional tool compensation or threedimensional
(M series) coordinate conversion has been attempted, but the three basic axes
used when Xp, Yp, or Zp is omitted are not set in parameter No. 1022.
050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Optional chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting
BLK (M series) block.
Modify the program.
CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting block.
BLK(T series) Modify the program.
051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block
(M series) next to the optional chamfering or corner R block.
Modify the program.
MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block
(T series) next to the chamfering or corner R block.
Modify the program.
CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01,G02 or
(M series) G03.
CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01.
TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS For systems without the arbitary angle chamfering or corner R cutting,
(M series) a comma was specified. For systems with this feature, a comma was fol-
lowed by something other than R or C Correct the program.
053
TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I, K and R
(T seires) are specified. Otherwise, the character after a comma(,) is not C or R
in direct drawing dimensions programming. Modify the program.
NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER CHF/ A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the corner R was
054
CNR (T series) specified includes a taper command. Modify the program.
676
MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR In the arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R block, the move distance
(M series) is less than chamfer or corner R amount.
055
MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than chamfer
(T series) or corner R amount.
056 NO END POINT & ANGLE IN CHF/ Neither the end point nor angle is specified in the command for the block
CNR (T series) next to that for which only the angle is specified (A). In the chamfering
comman, I(K) is commanded for the X(Z) axis.
057 NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct dimension drawing
(T series) programming.
END POINT NOT FOUND In a arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R cutting block, a specified axis
(M series) is not in the selected plane. Correct the program.
058
END POINT NOT FOUND Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing programming.
(T series)
059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND In an external program number search, a specified program number
was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for searching is being
edited in background processing. Check the program number and ex-
ternal signal. Or discontinue the background eiting.
060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Commanded sequence number was not found in the sequence number
search. Check the sequence number.
061 ADDRESS P/Q NOT FOUND IN Address P or Q is not specified in G70, G71, G72, or G73 command.
G70G73 (T series) Modify the program.
062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G71G76 1. The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero or negative value.
(T series) 2. The repetitive count in G73 is zero or negative value.
3. the negative value is specified to i or k is zero in G74 or G75.
4. A value other than zero is specified to address U or W though i or
k is zero in G74 or G75.
5. A negative value is specified to d, thoughthe relief direction in G74
or G75 is determined.
6. Zero or a negative value is specified to the height of thread or depth
of cut of first time in G76.
7. The specified minimum depth of cut in G76 is greater than the height
of thread.
8. An unusable angle of tool tip is specified in G76.
Modify the program.
063 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND The sequence number specified by address P in G70, G71, G72, or G73
(T series) command cannot be searched. Modify the program.
064 SHAPE PROGRAM NOT MONOTO- A target shape which cannot be made by monotonic machining was
NOUSLY (T series) specified in a repetitive canned cycle (G71 or G72).
065 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G71G73 1. G00 or G01 is not commanded at the block with the sequence num-
(T series) ber which is specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73 command.
2. Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded in the block with a sequence
number which is specified by address P in G71 or G72, respectively.
Modify the program.
066 IMPROPER GCODE IN G71G73 An unallowable G code was commanded beween two blocks specified
(T series) by address P in G71, G72, or G73. Modify the program.
067 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE G70, G71, G72, or G73 command with address P and Q.
069 FORMAT ERROR IN G70G73 The final move command in the blocks specified by P and Q of G70,
(T series) G71, G72, and G73 ended with chamfering or corner R.
Modify the program.
677
070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient.

Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with speci-
fied program number was not found in program number search.
Check the data.
072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option),
200 (option), 400 (option) or 1000 (option). Delete unnecessary pro-
grams and execute program registeration again.
073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration again.
074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER The program number is other than 1 to 9999.
Modify the program number.
075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number was pro-
tected.
076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Address P (program number) was not commanded in the block which
includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program.
077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR The subprogram was called in five folds. Modify the program.
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence number which was specified by ad-
dress P in the block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not
found. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement was not
found. Otherwise, a called program is being edited in background pro-
cessing. Correct the program, or discontinue the background editing.
079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR In memory or program collation,a program in memory does not agree
with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in
memory and those from the external device.
G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT In the automatic tool length measurement function (G37), the measure-
ASSERTED ment position reach signal (XAE, YAE, or ZAE) is not turned on within
(M series) an area specified in parameter 6254 6255 (value ).
This is due to a setting or operator error.
080
G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT In the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37), the measure-
ASSERTED ment position reach signal (XAE or ZAE) is not turned on within an area
(T series) specified in parameter 6254 (value ).
This is due to a setting or operator error.
OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN Tool length automatic measurement (G37) was specified without a H
G37 code. (Automatic tool length measurement function) Modify the pro-
081 (M series) gram.
OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN Automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) was specified without a T
G37 (T series) code. (Automatic tool compensation function) Modify the program.
HCODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 H code and automatic tool compensation (G37) were specified in the
(M series) same block. (Automatic tool length measurement function) Modify the
program.
082
TCODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 T code and automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) were specified in
(T series) the same block. (Automatic tool compensation function)
Modify the program.
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 In automatic tool length measurement, an invalid axis was specified or
(M series) the command is incremental. Modify the program.
083
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 In automatic tool compensation (G36, G37), an invalid axis was speci-
(T series) fied or the command is incremental. Modify the program.
085 COMMUNICATION ERROR When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bits
of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is in-
correct.
678
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was turned off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is de-
fective.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
though the read terminate command is specified, input is not interrupted
after 10 characters read. I/O unit or P.C.B. is defective.
088 LAN FILE TRANS ERROR File data transfer via OSIETHERNET has been stopped due to a trans-
(CHANNEL1) fer error.
089 LAN FILE TRANS ERROR File data transfer via OSIETHERNET has been stopped due to a trans-
(CHANNEL2) fer error.
090 REFERENCE RETURN The reference position return cannot be performed normally because
INCOMPLETE the reference position return start point is too close to the reference posi-
tion or the speed is too slow. Separate the start point far enough from
the reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speed for reference
position return. Check the program contents.
091 REFERENCE RETURN Manual reference position return cannot be performed when automatic
INCOMPLETE operation is halted.
092 AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE The commanded axis by G27 (Reference position return check) did not
POINT return to the reference position.
094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the au-
(COORD CHG) tomatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate system setting opera-
tion was performed.)
Perform the correct operation according to th operators manual.
095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the
(EXT OFS CHG) automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece offset
amount changed.)
Perform the correct operation according to th operators manual.
096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the au-
(WRK OFS CHG) tomatic operation was interrupted, the workpiece offset amount
changed.)
Perform the correct operation according to the operators manual.
097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted. (After power
(AUTO EXEC) ON, after emergency stop or P / S 94 to 97 reset, no automatic operation
is performed.) Perform automatic operation.
098 G28 FOUND IN SEQUENCE A command of the program restart was specified without the reference
RETURN position return operation after power ON or emergency stop, and G28
was found during search.
Perform the reference position return.
099 MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWED After completion of search in program restart, a move command is given
AFT. SEARCH with MDI. Move axis before a move command or dont interrupt MDI op-
eration.
100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE On the PARAMETER(SETTING) screen, PWE(parameter writing en-
abled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, then reset the system.
101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power turned off while rewriting the memory by program edit opera-
tion. If this alarm has occurred, press <RESET> while pressing
<PROG>, and only the program being edited will be deleted.
Register the deleted program.
109 P/S ALARM A value other than 0 or 1 was specified after P in the G08 code, or no
value was specified.
110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the al-
lowable range. Modify the program.
679
111 CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW The result of calculation turns out to be invalid, an alarm No.111 is is-
sued.
1047 to 1029, 0, 1029 to 1047
Modify the program.
112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified. (including tan 90)
Modify the program.
113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro is commanded.
Modify the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO There is an error in other formats than <Formula>.
Modify the program.
115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER A value not defined as a variable number is designated in the custom
macro or in highspeed cycle machining.
The header contents are improper. This alarm is given in the following
cases:
High speed cycle machining
1. The header corresponding to the specified machining cycle number
called is not found.
2. The cycle connection data value is out of the allowable range
(0 999).
3. The number of data in the header is out of the allowable range
(0 32767).
4. The start data variable number of executable format data is out of
the allowable range (#20000 #85535).
5. The last storing data variable number of executable format data is
out of the allowable range (#85535).
6. The storing start data variable number of executable format data is
overlapped with the variable number used in the header.
Modify the program.
116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose substitution
is inhibited. Modify the program.
118 PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit (quintuple).
Modify the program.
119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative. Or BCD argument is negative, and
other values than 0 to 9 are present on each line of BIN argument.
Modify the program.
122 FOUR FOLD MACRO MODALCALL The macro modal call is specified four fold.
Modify the program.
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND Macro control command is used during DNC operation.
IN DNC Modify the program.
124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO END does not correspond to 1 : 1. Modify the program.
125 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO <Formula> format is erroneous. Modify the program.
126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1x n x3 is not established. Modify the program.
127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME NC and custom macro commands coexist.
BLOCK Modify the program.
128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 to
NUMBER 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. Modify the program.
129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS An address which is not allowed in <Argument Designation > is used.
Modify the program.
130 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION An axis control command was given by PMC to an axis controlled by
CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis con-
trolled by PMC. Modify the program.
680
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message.
MESSAGES Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the cause.
132 ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear.
Check the PMC ladder diagram.
133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. ALARM MSG Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message or external
operator message. Check the PMC ladder diagram.
ILLEGAL ANGLE COMMAND The index table indexing positioning angle was instructed in other than
(M series) an integral multiple of the value of the minimum angle.
SPINDLE ORIENTATION PLEASE Without any spindle orientation , an attept was made for spindle index-
(T series) ing. Perform spindle orientation.
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND In index table indexing.Another control axis was instructed together with
(M series) the B axis.
C/HCODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as
BLK. (T series) spindle indexing addresses C, H. Modify the program.
137 MCODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as M
BLK. code related to spindle indexing. Modify the program.
138 SUPERIMPOSED DATA OVER- The total distribution amount of the CNC and PMC is too large during
FLOW superimposed control of the extended functions for PMC axis control.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL An axis is selected in commanding by PMC axis control.
AXIS Modify the program.
141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN CRC G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the tool offset mode.
142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE Scaling magnification is commanded in other than 1 999999.
(M series) Correct the scaling magnification setting (G51 Pp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
or parameter 5411 or 5421).
143 SCALED MOTION DATA OVER- The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and circular radius
FLOW exceed the maximum command value. Correct the program or scaling
(M series) mangification.
144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane and arc or cutter compensation C plane
(M series) must be the same. Modify the program.
145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR The conditions are incorrect when the polar coordinate interpolation
COORDINATE INTERPOLATION starts or it is canceled.
1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1 was specified.
2) An error is found in the plane selection. Parameters No. 5460 and
No. 5461 are incorrectly specified.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
146 IMPROPER G CODE G codes which cannot be specified in the polar coordinate interpolation
mode was specified. See section II4.4 and modify the program.
148 ILLEGAL SETTING DATA Automatic corner override deceleration rate is out of the settable range
(M series) of judgement angle. Modify the parameters (No.1710 to No.1714)
149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was specified as the life count type
(M series) in the extended tool life management.
150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value.
Modify the program.
151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT The tool group commanded in the machining program is not set.
FOUND Modify the value of program or parameter.
152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY The number of tools within one group exceeds the maximum value re-
gisterable. Modify the number of tools.
681
153 TCODE NOT FOUND In tool life data registration, a T code was not specified where one should
be. Correct the program.
154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP When the group is not commanded, H99 or D99 was commanded.
(M series) Correct the program.
155 ILLEGAL TCODE IN M06 In the machining program, M06 and T code in the same block do not cor-
(M series) respond to the group in use. Correct the program.
ILLEGAL TCODE IN M06 Group No. which is specified with T 88 of the machining program
(T series) do not included in the tool group in use. Correct the program.
156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool
group is set. Correct the program.
157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maximum allowable
value. (See parameter No. 6800 bit 0 and 1) Modify the program.
158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modify the setting value.
159 TOOL DATA SETTING During executing a life data setting program, power was turned off.
INCOMPLETE Set again.
MISMATCH WAITING MCODE Diffrent M code is commanded in heads 1 and 2 as waiting M code.
(T series (At twopath)) Modify the program.
160
G72.1 NESTING ERROR A subprogram which performs rotational copy with G72.1 contains
(M series) another G72.1 command.
161 G72.1 NESTING ERROR A subprogram which performs parallel copy with G72.2 contains anoth-
(M series) er G72.2 command.
COMMAND G68/G69 INDEPEN- G68 and G69 are not independently commanded in balance cut.
163
DENTLY T series (At twopath) Modify the program.
169 ILLEGAL TOOL GEOMETRY DATA Incorrect tool figure data in interference check.
(At twopath) Set correct data, or select correct tool figure data.
175 ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND Conditions when performing circular interpolation start or cancel not
correct. To change the mode to the cylindrical interpolation mode, spec-
ify the command in a format of G07.1 rotationaxis name radius of cylin-
der.
IMPROPER GCODE IN G107 Any of the following G codes which cannot be specified in the cylindrical
(M series) interpolation mode was specified.
1) G codes for positioning: G28,, G73, G74, G76, G81 G89,
including the codes specifying the rapid traverse cycle
2) G codes for setting a coordinate system: G52,G92,
3) G code for selecting coordinate system: G53 G54G59
Modify the program.
176
IMPROPER GCODE IN G107 Any of the following G codes which cannot be specified in the cylindrical
(T series) interpolation mode was specified.
1) G codes for positioning: G28, G76, G81 G89, including the
codes specifying the rapid traverse cycle
2) G codes for setting a coordinate system: G50, G52
3) G code for selecting coordinate system: G53 G54G59
Modify the program.
177 CHECK SUM ERROR Check sum error
(G05 MODE) Modify the program.
178 G05 COMMANDED IN G41/G42 G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 mode.
MODE Correct the program.
179 PARAM. (NO. 7510) SETTING The number of controlled axes set by the parameter 7510 exceeds the
ERROR maximum number. Modify the parameter setting value.
180 COMMUNICATION ERROR Remote buffer connection alarm has generated. Confirm the number of
(REMOTE BUF) cables, parameters and I/O device.
682
181 FORMAT ERROR IN G81 BLOCK G81 block format error (hobbing machine)
(Hobbing machine, EGB) (M series) 1) T (number of teeth) has not been instructed.
2) Data outside the command range was instructed by either T, L, Q or
P.
3) An overflow occurred in synchronization coefficient calculation.
Modify the program.
182 G81 NOT COMMANDED G83 (C axis servo lag quantity offset) was instructed though synchro-
(Hobbing machine) (M series) nization by G81 has not been instructed. Correct the program. (hobbing
machine)
183 DUPLICATE G83 (COMMANDS) G83 was instructed before canceled by G82 after compensating for the
(Hobbing machine) (M series) C axis servo lag quantity by G83. (hobbing machine)
184 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G81 A command not to be instructed during synchronization by G81 was
(Hobbing machine, EGB) (M series) instructed. (hobbing machine)
1) A C axis command by G00, G27, G28, G29, G30, etc. was
instructed.
2) Inch/Metric switching by G20, G21 was instructed.
185 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT G81 was instructed without performing reference position return after
(Hobbing machine) (M series) power on or emergency stop. (hobbing machine) Perform reference
position return.
186 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR Parameter error regarding G81 (hobbing machine)
(Hobbing machine, EGB) (M series) 1) The C axis has not been set to be a rotary axis.
2) A hob axis and position coder gear ratio setting error
Modify the parameter.
190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT In the constant surface speed control, the axis specification is wrong.
(See parameter No. 3770.) The specified axis command (P) contains an
illegal value.
Correct the program.
194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A contour control mode, spindle positioning (Csaxis control) mode, or
SYNCHROMODE rigid tapping mode was specified during the serial spindle synchronous
control mode. Correct the program so that the serial spindle synchro-
nous control mode is released in advance.
197 CAXIS COMMANDED IN SPINDLE The program specified a movement along the Csaxis when the signal
MODE CON(DGN=G027#7) was off. Correct the program, or consult the PMC
ladder diagram to find the reason the signal is not turned on.
199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro.
200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is not specified.
Modify the program.
201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID In the rigid tap, no F value is specified.
TAP Correct the program.
202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large. (System error)
203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M code (M29) or an S command is in-
correct. Modify the program.
204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In the rigid tap, an axis movement is specified between the rigid M code
(M29) block and G84 or G74 for M series (G84 or G88 for T series) block.
Modify the program.
205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF Rigid mode DI signal is not ON when G84 or G74 for M series (G84 or
G88 for T series) is executed though the rigid M code (M29) is speci-
fied.Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the reason the DI signal
(DGNG061.1) is not turned on.
206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE Plane changeover was instructed in the rigid mode.
(M series) Correct the program.
683
210 CAN NOT COMAND M198/M199 M98 and M99 are executed in the schedule operation. M198 is
executed in the DNC operation. Modify the program.
1) The execution of an M198 or M99 command was attempted during
scheduled operation. Alternatively, the execution of an M198 com-
mand was attempted during DNC operation. Correct the program.
The execution of an M99 command was attempted by an interrupt
macro during pocket machining in a multiple repetitive canned
cycle.
211 G31 (HIGH) NOT ALLOWED IN G99 G31 is commanded in the per revolution command when the high
speed skip option is provided. Modify the program.
ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The arbitrary angle chamfering or a corner R is commanded or the plane
(M series) including an additional axis. Correct the program.
212
ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The direct drawing dimensions programming is commanded for the
(T series) plane other than the ZX plane. Correct the program.
213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Movement is commanded for the axis to be synchronously controlled.
SYNCHROMODE Any of the following alarms occurred in the operation with the simple
synchronization control.
1) The program issued the move command to the slave axis.
2) The program issued the manual continuous feed/manual handle
feed/incremental feed command to the slave axis.
3) The program issued the automatic reference position return com-
mand without specifying the manual reference position return after
the power was turned on.
4) The difference between the position error amount of the master and
slave axes exceeded the value specified in parameter NO.8313.
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN A move command has been specified for an axis subject to synchro-
SYNCHROMODE (T series) nous control.
214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Coordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shift type is
SYNCHROMODE executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program.
217 DUPLICATE G51.2 (COMMANDS) G51.2/G251 is further commanded in the G51.2/G251 mode. Modify
(T series) the program.
218 NOT FOUND P/Q COMMAND IN P or Q is not commanded in the G251 block, or the command value is
G251 (T series) out of the range. Modify the program.
219 COMMAND G250/G251 G251 and G250 are not independent blocks.
INDEPENDENTLY (T series)
220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the NC pro-
SYNCHRMODE (T series) gram or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous axis.
221 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Polygon machining synchronous operation and axis control or balance
SYNCHRMODE (T series) cutting are executed at a time. Modify the program.
222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN Input and output are executed at a time in the background edition.
BG.EDIT (M series) Execute a correct operation.
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return has not been performed before the automatic
(M series) operation starts. Perform reference position return only when bit 0 of pa-
rameter 1005 is 0.
TURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return is necessary before cycle start.
(T series)
684
225 SYNCHRONOUS/MIXED CONTROL This alarm is generated in the following circumstances. (Searched for
ERROR during synchronous and mixed control command.
T series (At twopath) 1 When there is a mistake in axis number parameter (No. 1023) set-
ting.
2 When there is a mistake in control commanded.
Modify the program or the parameter.
226 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHRO A travel command has been sent to the axis being synchronized in syn-
MODE T series (At twopath) chronous mode. Modify the program or the parameter.
229 CAN NOT KEEP SYNCHROSTATE This alarm is generated in the following circumstances.
(T series) 1 When the synchro/mixed state could not be kept due to system over-
load.
2 The above condition occurred in CMC devices (hardware) and syn-
chrostate could not be kept.
(This alarm is not generated in normal use conditions.)
230 R CODE NOT FOUND The infeed quantity R has not been instructed for the G161 block. Or
(Hobbing machine) (M series) the R command value is negative. Correct the program.
231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 Any of the following errors occurred in the specified format at the pro-
grammableparameter input.
1 Address N or R was not entered.
2 A number not specified for a parameter was entered.
3 The axis number was too large.
4 An axis number was not specified in the axistype parameter.
5 An axis number was specified in the parameter which is not an axis
type. Correct the program.
6 In the locked state set by the password function, an attempt was
made to set bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3204 to 0 or change the con-
tents of parameter No. 3210.
7 An attempt was made to change a program encryption parameter
(parameter No. 3220 to 3223).
232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS Three or more axes (in the normal direction control mode two or more
COMMANDS (M series) axes) were specified as helical axes in the helical interpolation mode.
233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that connected via the
RS232C interface, other users were using it.
239 BP/S ALARM While punching was being performed with the function for controlling ex-
ternal I/O units ,background editing was performed.
240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed during MDI operation.
241 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.2/G03.2 The end point, I, J, K, or R is missing from a command for involute inter-
(M series) polation.
242 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN An invalid value has been specified for involute interpolation.
G02.2/G03.2 S The start or end point is within the basic circle.
(M series)
S I, J, K, or R is set to 0.
S The number of rotations between the start of the involute curve and
the start or end point exceeds 100.
243 OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT The end point is not on the involute curve which includes the start point
(M series) and thus falls outside the range specified with parameter No. 5610.
244 P/S ALARM In the skip function activated by the torque limit signal, the number of ac-
(T series) cumulated erroneous pulses exceed 32767 before the signal was input.
Therefore, the pulses cannot be corrected with one distribution.
Change the conditions, such as feed rates along axes and torque limit,
and try again.
685
245 TCODE NOT ALOWEE IN THIS One of the G codes, G50, G10, and G04, which cannot be specified in
BLOCK (T series) the same block as a T code, was specified with a T code.
246 During read of an encrypted program, an attempt was made to store the
program with a number exceeding the protection range.
(See parameter Nos. 3222 and 223.)
247 When an encrypted program is output, EIA is set for the punch code.
Specify ISO.
250 Z AXIS WRONG COMMAND (ATC) A value for the Zaxis has been specified in a block for the tool ex-
(M series) change command (M06T_) on a system with DRILLMATE ARC
installed.
251 ATC ERROR This alarm is issued in the following cases (DRILLMATE):
(M series) S An M06T_ command contains an unusable T code.
S An M06 command has been specified when the Z machine coordi
nate is positive.
S The parameter for the current tool number (No. 7810) is set to 0.
S An M06 command has been specified in canned cycle mode.
S A reference position return command (G27 to G44) and M06 com-
mand have been specified in the same block.
S An M06 command has been specified in tool compensation mode
(G41 to G44).
S An M06 command has been specified without performing reference
position return after poweron or the release of emergency stop.
S The machine lock signal or Zaxis ignore signal has been turned on
during tool exchange.
S A pry alarm has been detected during tool exchange.
Refer to diagnosis No. 530 to determine the cause.
252 ATC SPINDLE ALARM An excessive error arose during spindle positioning for ATC. For details,
(M series) refer to diagnosis No. 531. (Only for DRILLMATE)
253 G05 IS NOT AVAILABLE Alarm details
(M series) Binary input operation using highspeed remote buffer (G05) or high
speed cycle machining (G05) has been specified in advance control
mode (G08P1). Execute G08P0; to cancel advance control mode, be-
fore executing these G05 commands.
4500 REPOSITIONING INHIBITED A repositioning command was specified in the circular interpolation
(G02, G03) mode.
4502 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN BOLT In a bolt hole circle (G26) command, the radius (I) was set to zero or a
HOLE negative value, or the number of holes (K) was set to zero. Alternatively,
I, J, or K was not specified.
4503 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LINE AT In a line-at-angle (G76) command, the number of holes (K) was set to
ANGLE zero or a negative value. Alternatively, I, J, or K was not specified.
4504 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN ARC In an arc (G77) command, the radius (I) or the number of holes (K) was
set to zero or a negative value. Alternatively, I, J, K, or P was not speci-
fied.
4505 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN GRID In a grid (G78, G79) command, the number of holes (P, K) was set to
zero or a negative value. Alternatively, I, J, K, or P was not specified.
4506 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SHARE In a shear proof (G86) command, the tool size (P) was set to zero, or the
PROOFS blanking length (I) was 1.5 times larger than the tool size (P) or less. Al-
ternatively, I, J, or P was not specified.
4507 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SQUARE In a square (G87) command, the tool size (P,Q) was set to zero or a neg-
ative value, or the blanking length (I, J) was three times larger than the
tool size (P, Q) or less. Alternatively, I, J, P, or Q was not specified.
686
4508 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN RADIUS In a radius (G88) command, the traveling pitch (Q) or radius (I) was set
to zero or a negative value, or the traveling pitch (Q) was greater than
or equal to the arc length. Alternatively, I, J, K, P, or Q was not specified.
4509 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN CUT AT In a cut-at-angle (G89) command, the traveling pitch (Q) was set to zero,
ANGLE negative value, or another value larger than or equal to the length (I).
Alternatively, I, J, P, or Q was not specified.
4510 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In a linear punching (G45) command, the traveling distance was set to
LINE-PUNCH zero or a value 1.5 times larger than the tool size (P) or less. Alternative-
ly, P was not specified.
4511 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In a circular punching (G46, G47) command, the same position was
CIRCLE-PUNCH specified for both start and end points of the arc, radius (R) of the arc was
set to zero, or the pitch (Q) was set to a value exceeding the arc length.
Alternatively, R or Q was not specified.
4520 T, M INHIBITED IN T code, M code, G04, G70 or G75 was specified in the nibbling mode.
NIBBLING-MODE
4521 EXCESS NIBBLING MOVEMENT In the nibbling mode, the X-axis or Y-axis traveling distance was larger
(X, Y) than or equal to the limit (No. 16188 to 16193).
4522 EXCESS NIBBLING MOVEMENT In the circular nibbling (G68) or usual nibbling mode, the C-axis traveling
(C) distance was larger than or equal to the limit (No. 16194).
4523 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In a circular nibbling (G68) command, the traveling pitch (Q) was set to
CIRCLE-NIBBL zero, a negative value, or a value larger than or equal to the limit (No.
16186, 16187), or the radius (I) was set to zero or a negative value. Al-
ternatively, I, J, K, P, or Q was not specified.
4524 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In a linear nibbling (G69) command, the traveling pitch (Q) was set to
LINE-NIBBL zero, negative value, or a value larger than or equal to the limit (No.
16186, 16187). Alternatively, I, J, P, or Q was not specified.
4530 A/B MACRO NUMBER ERROR The number for storing and calling by an A or B macro was set to a value
beyond the range from 1 to 5.
4531 U/V MACRO FORMAT ERROR An attempt was made to store a macro while storing another macro us-
ing a U or V macro.
A V macro was specified although the processing to store a macro was
not in progress.
A U macro number and V macro number do not correspond with each
other.
4532 IMPROPER U/V MACRO NUMBER The number of an inhibited macro (number beyond the range from 01
to 99) was specified in a U or V macro command.
4533 U/V MACRO MEMORY OVERFLOW An attempt was made to store too many macros with a U or V macro
command.
4534 W MACRO NUMBER NOT FOUND Macro number W specified in a U or V macro command is not stored.
4535 U/V MACRO NESTING ERROR An attempt was made to call a macro which is defined three times or
more using a U or V macro command.
An attempt was made to store 15 or more macros in the storage area
for macros of number 90 to 99.
4536 NO W, Q COMMAND IN W or Q was not specified in the command for taking multiple workpieces
MULTI-PIECE (G73, G74).
4537 ILLEGAL Q VALUE IN MULTI-PIECE In the command for taking multiple workpieces (G73, G74), Q is set to
a value beyond the range from 1 to 4.
4538 W NO. NOT FOUND IN Macro number W specified in the command for taking multiple work-
MULTI-PIECE pieces (G73, G74) is not stored.
687
4539 MULTI-PIECE SETTING IS ZERO The command for taking multiple workpieces (G73, G74) was specified
although zero is specified for the function to take multiple workpieces
(No. 16206 or signals MLP1 and MLP2 (PMC address G231, #0 and
#1)).
4540 MULTI-PIECE COMMAND WITHIN The command for taking multiple workpieces (G73, G74) was specified
MACRO when a U or V macro was being stored.
4542 MULTI-PIECE COMMAND ERROR Although G98P0 was specified, the G73 command was issued.
Although G98K0 was specified, the G74 command was issued.
4543 MULTI-PIECE Q COMMAND Although G98P0 was specified, the Q value for the G74 command was
ERROR not 1 or 3.
Although G98K0 was specified, the Q value for the G73 command was
not 1 or 2.
4544 MULTI-PIECE RESTART ERROR In the command for resuming taking multiple workpieces, the resume
position (P) is set to a value beyond the range from 1 to total number of
workpieces to be machined.
4549 ILLEGAL TOOL DATA FORMAT The quantity of tool data patterns to be saved is too large to fit the usable
area (16 KB).
4600 T, C COMMAND IN In the linear interpolation (G01) mode or circular interpolation (G02,
INTERPOLATION G03) mode, a T command or C-axis command was specified.
4601 INHIBITED T, M COMMAND In the block of G52, G72, G73, or G74, a T or M command was specified.
4602 ILLEGAL T-CODE The specified T command is not cataloged on the tool register screen.
4603 C AXIS SYNCHRONOUS ERROR The difference between the position deviation value of C1 axis and C2
axis exceeds the parameter value (No. 16364, 16365) with the Caxis
synchronous control function.
4604 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION A C-axis command was specified in the block containing a T command
for multiple tools.
4630 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LASER In the laser mode, a nibbling command or pattern command was speci-
MODE fied.
In the tracing mode, an attempt was made to make a switch to the
punching mode.
4631 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN PUNCH In the punching mode, a G code of laser control (G13, G24, G31, etc.)
MODE was specified.
4650 IMPROPER G-CODE IN OFFSET In the cutter compensation mode, an inhibited G code (pattern com-
MODE mand, G73, G74, G75, etc.) was specified.
4700 PROGRAM ERROR (OT +) The value specified in the X-axis move command exceeded the positive
value of stored stroke limit 1. (Advance check)
4701 PROGRAM ERROR (OT ) The value specified in the X-axis move command exceeded the nega-
tive value of stored stroke limit 1. (Advance check)
4702 PROGRAM ERROR (OT +) The value specified in the Y-axis move command exceeded the positive
4703 PROGRAM ERROR (OT ) The value specified in the Y-axis move command exceeded the nega-
4704 PROGRAM ERROR (OT +) The value specified in the Z-axis move command exceeded the positive
4705 PROGRAM ERROR (OT ) The value specified in the Z-axis move command exceeded the nega-
5000 ILLEGAL COMMAND CODE The specified code was incorrect in the highprecision contour control
(M series) (HPCC) mode.
5003 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (HPCC) There is an invalid parameter.
(M series)
688
5004 HPCC NOT READY (M series) Highprecision contour control is not ready.
5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE BLOCK The number of words specified in a block exceeded 26 in the HPCC
(M series) mode.
5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE (M series) In the HPCC mode, the machine moved beyond the limit.
5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRY RUN) The maximum feedrate (parameter No. 1422) or the feedrate in dry run
(M series) (parameter No. 1410) is 0 in the HPCC model.
5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified.
I/O is incorrect. modify the program.
5011 PARAMETER ZERO(CUT MAX) The maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1422, No. 1430, No.
(M series) 1431, No. 1432) is 0 in the HPCC mode.
5012 G05 P10000 ILLEGAL START UP Function category:
(HPCC) Highprecision contour control
(M series) Alarm details:
G05 P10000 has been specified in a mode from which the system can-
not enter HPCC mode.
5013 HPCC: CRC OFS REMAIN AT CAN- G05P0 has been specified in G41/G42 mode or with offset remaining.
CEL (M series)
5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND Transfer cannot be performed because no trace data exists.
(M series)
5015 The specified rotation axis does not exist for tool axis direction handle
(M series) feed.
5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M M codes which belonged to the same group were specified in a block.
CODE Alternatively,an M code which must be specified without other M codes
in the block was specified in a block with other M codes.
5018 POLYGON SPINDLE SPEED ER- Function category:
ROR Polygon turning
(T series) Alarm details:
In G51.2 mode, the speed of the spindle or polygon synchronous axis
either exceeds the clamp value or is too small. The specified rotation
speed ratio thus cannot be maintained.
5020 PARAMETER OF RESTART ERROR An erroneous parameter was specified for restarting a program.
A parameter for program restart is invalid.
5030 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100) The end command (G110) was specified before the registratioin start
(T series) command (G101, G102, or G103) was specified for the Baxis.
5031 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100, G102, While a registration start command (G101, G102, or G103) was being
G103) (T series) executed, another registration start command was specified for the B
axis.
5032 NEW PRG REGISTERED IN BAXS While the machine was moving about the Baxis, at attempt was made
MOVE (T series) to register another move command.
5033 NO PROG SPACE IN MEMORY B Commands for movement about the Baxis were not registered be-
AXS (T series) cause of insufficient program memory.
5034 PLURAL COMMAND IN G110 Multiple movements were specified with the G110 code for the Baxis.
(T series)
5035 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED B A feedrate was not specified for cutting feed about the Baxis.
AXS (T series)
5036 ADDRESS R NOT DEFINED IN Point R was not specified for the canned cycle for the Baxis.
G81G86 (T series)
5037 ADDRESS Q NOT DEFINED IN G83 Depth of cut Q was not specified for the G83 code (peck drilling cycle).
(T series) Alternatively, 0 was specified in Q for the Baxis.
5038 TOO MANY START MCODE COM- More than six M codes for starting movement about the Baxis were
MAND (T series) specified.
689
5039 START UNREGISTERED BAXS An attempt was made to execute a program for the Baxis which had
PROG (T series) not been registered.
5040 CAN NOT COMMANDED BAXS The machine could not move about the Baxis because parameter
MOVE (T series) No.8250 was incorrectly specified, or because the PMC axis system
could not be used.
5041 CAN NOT COMMANDED G110 Blocks containing the G110 codes were successively specified in tool
BLOCK (T series) tip radius compensation for the Baxis.
5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING Threedimensional coordinate conversion G68 has been specified
(M series) three or more times.
5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR A G68 command block contains a format error. This alarm is issued in
(M series) the following cases:
1. I, J, or K is missing from a G68 command block (missing coordinate
rotation option).
2. I, J, and K are 0 in a G68 command block.
3. R is missing from a G68 command block.
5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (ST.COMP) The parameter settings for straightness compensation contain an error.
Possible causes are as follows:
1. A parameter for a movement axis or compensation axis contains an
axis number which is not used.
2. More than 128 pitch error compensation points exist between the
negative and positive end points.
3. Compensation point numbers for straightness compensation are
not assigned in the correct order.
4. No straightness compensation point exists between the pitch error
compensation points at the negative and positive ends.
5. The compensation value for each compensation point is too large
or too small.
5050 ILLCOMMAND IN CHOPPING A command for switching the major axis has been specified for circular
MODE threading. Alternatively, a command for setting the length of the major
(M series) axis to 0 has been specified for circular threading.
5051 MNET CODE ERROR Abnormal character received (other than code used for transmission)
5052 MNET ETX ERROR Abnormal ETX code
5053 MNET CONNECT ERROR Connection time monitoring error (parameter No. 175)
5054 MNET RECEIVE ERROR Polling time monitoring error (parameter No. 176)
5055 MNET PRT/FRT ERROR Vertical parity or framing error
5057 MNET BOARD SYSTEM DOWN Transmission timeout error (parameter No. 177)
ROM parity error
CPU interrupt other than the above
5058 G35/G36 FORMAT ERROR A command for switching the major axis has been specified for circular
(T series) threading. Alternatively, a command for setting the length of the major
axis to 0 has been specified for circular threading.
5059 RADIUS IS OUT OF RANGE A radius exceeding nine digits has been specified for circular interpola-
(T series) tion with the center of the arc specified with I, J, and K.
5060 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN There is a parameter setting error.
G02.3/G03.3 Parameter No. 5641 (setting of the linear axis) is not set.
The axis set in parameter No. 5641 is not a linear axis.
Parameter No. 5642 (setting of a rotation axis) is not set.
The axis set in parameter No. 5642 is not a rotation axis.
The linear and rotation axes cannot be controlled by the CNC. (The val-
ue set in parameter No. 1010 is exceeded.)
690
5061 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.3/G03.3 The exponential interpolation command (G02.3/G03.3) has a format er-
ror.
Address I, J, or K is not specified.
The value of address I, J, or K is 0.
5062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN The value specified in an exponential interpolation command
G02.3/G03.3 (G02.3/03.3) is illegal. A value that does not allow exponential interpola-
tion is specified. (For example, a negative value is specified in In.)
5063 IS NOT PRESET AFTER REF. Function category:
(M series) Workpiece thickness measurement
Alarm details
The position counter was not preset before the start of workpiece thick-
ness measurement. This alarm is issued in the following cases:
(1) An attempt has been made to start measurement without first estab-
lishing the origin.
(2) An attempt has been made to start measurement without first pre-
setting the position counter after manual return to the origin.
5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT (ISB, Circular interpolation has been specified on a plane consisting of axes
ISC) having different increment systems.
(M series)
5065 DIFFERENT AXIS UNIT (PMC AXIS) Axes having different increment systems have been specified in the
(M series) same DI/DO group for PMC axis control. Modify the setting of parameter
No. 8010.
5066 RESTART ILLEGAL SEQUENCE Sequence number 7xxx has been read during search for the next se-
NUMBER quence number at program restart for the return/restart function.
(M series)
5067 HPCC mode cannot be canceled during G51 (scaling) or G68 (coordi-
(HPCC) (M series) nate system rotation).
5068 G31 P90 FORMAT ERROR The continuous highspeed skip command has one of the following er-
(M series) rors:
1. The axis along which the tool is moved is not specified.
2. More than one axis is specified as the axis along which the tool is
moved.
Alternatively, the EGB skip command has one of the following errors:
1. A move command is specified for the EGB axis (workpiece axis).
2. More than one axis is specified.
3. P is not specified.
4. The specified Q value exceeds the allowable range.
5069 WHLC:ILLEGA The P data in selection of the grindingwheel wear compensation cen-
PDATA ter is illegal.
(M series)
5073 NO DECIMAL POINT No decimal point has been specified for an address requiring a decimal
point.
5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address has been specified two or more times in a single
block. Alternatively, two or more G codes in the same group have been
specified in a single block.
5082 DATA SERVER ERROR This alarm is detailed on the data server message screen.
5085 The command format of a smooth interpolation command block has an
error.
691
5110 IMPROPER GCODE An illegal G code was specified in simple highprecision contour control
(G05.1 G1 MODE) mode.
(M series) A command was specified for the index table indexing axis in simple
highprecision contour control mode.
5111 IMPROPER MODAL GCODE An illegal G code is left modal when simple highprecision contour con-
(G05.1 G1) trol mode was specified.
(M series)
5112 G08 CAN NOT BE COMMANDED Lookahead control (G08) was specified in simple highprecision con-
(G05.1 G1) tour control mode.
(M series)
5113 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE Simple highprecision contour control (G05.1) was specified in MDI
(G05.1) mode.
(M series)
5114 NOT STOP POSITION At the time of restart after manual intervention, the coordinates at which
(G05.1 Q1) the manual intervention occurred have not been restored.
(M series)
5115 SPL : ERROR There is an error in the specification of the rank.
(M series)
No knot is specified.
The knot specification has an error.
The number of axes exceeds the limits.
Other program errors
5116 SPL : ERROR There is a program error in a block under lookahead control.
(M series)
Monotone increasing of knots is not observed.
In NURBS interpolation mode, a mode that cannot be used together is
specified.
5117 SPL : ERROR The first control point of NURBS is incorrect.
(M series)
5118 SPL : ERROR After manual intervention with manual absolute mode set to on, NURBS
(M series) interpolation was restarted.
5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SPIRAL A spiral interpolation or conical interpolation command has an error.
(M series) Specifically, this error is caused by one of the following:
1) L = 0 is specified.
2) Q = 0 is specified.
3) R/, R/, C is specified.
4) Zero is specified as height increment.
5) Three or more axes are specified as the height axes.
6) A height increment is specified when there are two height axes.
7) Conical interpolation is specified when the helical interpolation
function is not selected.
8) Q < 0 is specified when radius difference > 0.
9) Q > 0 is specified when radius difference < 0.
10) A height increment is specified when no height axis is specified.
5123 OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT The difference between a specified end point and the calculated end
(M series) point exceeds the allowable range (parameter 3471).
692
5124 CAN NOT COMMAND SPIRAL A spiral interpolation or conical interpolation was specified in any of the
(M series) following modes:
1) Scaling
2) Programmable mirror image
3) Polar coordinate interpolation
In cutter compensation C mode, the center is set as the start point or
end point.
5134 FSSB : OPEN READY TIME OUT Initialization did not place FSSB in the open ready state.
5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE FSSB has entered error mode.
5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL In comparison with the number of controlled axes, the number of amplifi-
ers recognized by FSSB is not enough.
5137 FSSB : CONFIGURATION ERROR FSSB detected a configuration error.
NOTE
HPCC : High precision contour control
(2) Program errors/Alarms on program and operation (P/S alarm)

5138 FSSB : AXIS SETTING NOT COM- In automatic setting mode, axis setting has not been made yet.
PLETE Perform axis setting on the FSSB setting screen.
5139 FSSB : ERROR Servo initialization did not terminate normally.
The optical cable may be defective, or there may be an error in connec-
tion to the amplifier or another module.
Check the optical cable and the connection status.
5155 NOT RESTART PROGRAM BY G05 During servo leaning control by G05, an attempt was made to perform
restart operation after feed hold or interlock. This restart operation can-
not be performed. (G05 leaning control terminates at the same time.)
5156 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In simple highprecision contour control mode, the controlled axis
(SHPCC) selection signal (PMC axis control) changes.
(M series) In simple highprecision contour control mode, the simple synchronous
axis selection signal changes.
5157 PARAMETER ZERO (AICC) Zero is set in the parameter for the maximum cutting feedrate (parame-
(M series) ter No. 1422 or 1432).
Zero is set in the parameter for the acceleration/deceleration before in-
terpolation (parameter No. 1770 or 1771).
Set the parameter correctly.
5195 DIRECTION CAN NOT BE JUDGED When the touch sensor with a single contact signal input is used in the
(T series) direct input B function for tool offset measurement values, the stored
pulse direction is not constant. One of the following conditions exists:
The stop state exists in offset write mode.
Servo off state
The direction varies.
Movement takes place simultaneously along two axes.
5196 ILLEGAL OPERATION (HPCC) Detach operation was performed in HPCC mode. (If detach operation
(M series) is performed in HPCC mode, this alarm is issued after the currently
executed block terminates.)
5197 FSSB : OPEN TIME OUT The CNC permitted FSSB to open, but FSSB was not opened.
5198 FSSB : ID DATA NOT READ Temporary assignment failed, so amplifier initial ID information could not
be read.
693
5199 FINE TORQUE SENSING PARAME- A parameter related to the fine torque sensing function is illegal.
TER The storage interval is invalid.
An invalid axis number is set as the target axis.
Correct the parameter.
5212 SCREEN COPY : PARAMETER ER- There is a parameter setting error. Check that 4 is set as the I/O channel.
ROR
5213 SCREEN COPY : COMMUNICATION The memory card cannot be used. Check the memory card. (Check
ERROR whether the memory card is writeprotected or defective.)
5214 SCREEN COPY : DATA TRANSFER Data transfer to the memory card failed.
ERROR Check whether the memory card space is insufficient and whether the
memory card was removed during data transfer.
5218 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (INCL. There is an inclination compensation parameter setting error.
COMP) Cause:
1. The number of pitch error compensation points between the nega-
tive () end and positive (+) end exceeds 128.
2. The relationship in magnitude among the inclination compensation
point numbers is incorrect.
3. An inclination compensation point is not located between the nega-
tive () end and positive (+) end of the pitch error compensation
points.
4. The amount of compensation per compensation point is too large or
too small.
Correct the parameter.
5220 REFERENCE POINT ADJUSTMENT A parameter for automatically set a reference position is set. (Bit 2 of
MODE parameter No. 1819 = 1)
Perform automatic setting.
(Position the machine at the reference position manually, then perform
manual reference position return.)
Supplementary: Automatic setting sets bit 2 of parameter No. 1819 to
0.
5222 SRAM CORRECTABLE ERROR The SRAM correctable error cannot be corrected.
Cause:
A memory problem occurred during memory initialization.
Action:
Replace the master printed circuit board (SRAM module).
5227 FILE NOT FOUND A specified file is not found during communication with the builtin
Handy File.
5228 SAME NAME USED There are duplicate file names in the builtin Handy File.
5229 WRITE PROTECTED A floppy disk in the builtin Handy File is write protected.
5231 TOO MANY FILES The number of files exceeds the limit during communication with the
builtin Handy File.
5232 DATA OVERFLOW There is not enough floppy disk space in the builtin Handy File.
5235 COMMUNICATION ERROR A communication error occurred during communication with the builtin
Handy File.
5237 READ ERROR A floppy disk in the builtin Handy File cannot be read from. The floppy
disk may be defective, or the head may be dirty. Alternatively, the Handy
File is defective.
5238 WRITE ERROR A floppy disk in the builtin Handy File cannot be written to. The floppy
disk may be defective, or the head may be dirty. Alternatively, the Handy
File is defective.
694
5242 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER The axis number of the synchronous master axis or slave axis is incor-
(M series) rect. (This alarm is issued when flexible synchronization is turned on.)
Alternatively, the axis number of the slave axis is smaller than that of the
master axis.
5243 DATA OUT OF RANGE The gear ratio is not set correctly. (This alarm is issued when flexible
(M series) synchronization is turned on.)
5244 TOO MANY DI ON Even when an M code was encountered in automatic operation mode,
(M series) the flexible synchronization mode signal was not driven on or off.
Check the ladder and M codes.
5245 OTHER AXIS ARE COMMANDED One of the following command conditions was present during flexible
(M series) synchronization or when flexible synchronization was turned on:
1. The synchronous master axis or slave axis is the EGB axis.
2. The synchronous master axis or slave axis is the chopping axis.
3. In reference position return mode
5251 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G54.2 A fixture offset parameter (No. 7580 to 7588) is illegal. Correct the pa-
rameter.
5252 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G54.2 The P value specifying the offset number of a fixture offset is too large.
5257 G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI G41/G42 (cutter compensation C: M series, toolnose radius com-
MODE pensation: T series) was specified in MDI mode. (Depending on the set-
ting of bit 4 of parameter No. 5008)
5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR A touch panel error occurred.
Cause:
1. The touch panel is kept pressed.
2. The touch panel was pressed when power was turned on.
Remove the above causes, and turn on the power again.
NOTE
SHPCC stands for simple highprecision contour control.
AICC designates simplified highprecision contour control.
(3) Background edit alarm
??? BP/S alarm BP/S alarm occurs in the same number as the P/S alarm that occurs in
ordinary program edit. (070, 071, 072, 073, 074 085,086,087 etc.)
140 BP/S alarm It was attempted to select or delete in the background a program being
selected in the foreground. (Note)
Use background editing correctly.
NOTE
Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line of the background edit screen instead
of the ordinary alarm screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.
695
(4) Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm

300 nthaxis origin return Manual reference position return is required for the nthaxis (n=1 8).
301 APC alarm: nthaxis communication nthaxis (n=1 8) APC communication error. Failure in data transmis-
sion
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
302 APC alarm: nthaxis over time nthaxis (n=1 8) APC overtime error.
Failure in data transmission.
303 APC alarm: nthaxis framing nthaxis (n=1 8) APC framing error. Failure in data transmission.
304 APC alarm: nthaxis parity nthaxis (n=1 8) APC parity error.
Failure in data transmission.
305 APC alarm: nthaxis pulse error nthaxis (n=1 8) APC pulse error alarm.
APC alarm.APC or cable may be faulty.
306 APC alarm: nthaxis battery nthaxis (n=1 8) APC battery voltage has decreased to a low level so
voltage 0 that the data cannot be held.
APC alarm. Battery or cable may be faulty.
307 APC alarm: nthaxis battery low 1 nthaxis (n=1 8) axis APC battery voltage reaches a level where the
battery must be renewed.
APC alarm. Replace the battery.
308 APC alarm: nthaxis battery low 2 nthaxis (n=1 8) APC battery voltage has reached a level where the
battery must be renewed (including when power is OFF).
APC alarm .Replace battery.
309 APC ALARM: Return to the origin has been attempted without first rotating the motor
n AXIS ZRN IMPOSSIBL one or more times. Before returning to the origin, rotate the motor one
or more times then turn off the power.
(5) Serial pulse coder

(SPC) alarms
360 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CHECKSUM A checksum error occurred in the builtin pulse coder.
(INT)
361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE DATA A phase data error occurred in the builtin pulse coder.
(INT)
362 n AXIS : ABNORMAL REV.DATA A rotation speed count error occurred in the builtin pulse coder.
(INT)
363 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CLOCK (INT) A clock error occurred in the builtin pulse coder.
364 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE ALARM (INT) The digital servo software detected invalid data in the builtin pulse
coder.
365 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (INT) An LED error occurred in the builtin pulse coder.
366 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (INT) A pulse error occurred in the builtin pulse coder.
367 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the builtin pulse coder.
368 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR Communication data from the builtin pulse coder cannot be re-
(INT) ceived.
369 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ERROR A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being
(INT) received from the builtin pulse coder.
380 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (EXT) The separate detector is erroneous.
381 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE A phase data error occurred in the separate linear scale.
(EXT LIN)
696
382 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (EXT) A pulse error occurred in the separate detector.
383 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (EXT) A count error occurred in the separate detector.
384 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE ALARM The digital servo software detected invalid data in the separate de-
(EXT) tector.
385 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR Communication data from the separate detector cannot be received.
(EXT)
386 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ERROR A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being
(EXT) received from the separate detector.
D The details of serial

pulse coder alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
202 CSA BLA PHA PCA BZA CKA SPH
#6 (CSA) : Check sum alarm has occurred.

#5 (BLA) : Battery low alarm has occurred.
#4 (PHA) : Phase data trouble alarm has occurred.
#3 (PCA) : Speed count trouble alarm has occurred.
#2 (BZA) : Battery zero alarm has occurred.
#1 (CKA) : Clock alarm has occurred.
#0 (SPH) : Soft phase data trouble alarm has occurred.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
203 DTE CRC STB PRM
#7 (DTE) : Data error has occurred.

#6 (CRC) : CRC error has occurred.
#5 (STB) : Stop bit error has occurred.
#4 (PRM) : Parameter error alarm has occurred. In this case, a servo parameter error
alarm (No. 417) is also output.
(6) Servo alarms
401 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS VRDY The nth axis (axis 18) servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off.
OFF Refer to procedure of trouble shooting.
402 SERVO ALARM: SV CARD NOT EX- The axis control card is not provided.
IST
403 SERVO ALARM: CARD/SOFT MIS- The combination of the axis control card and servo software is illegal.
MATCH The possible causes are as follows:
A correct axis control card is not provided.
Correct servo software is not installed on flash memory.
404 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS VRDY Even though the nth axis (axis 18) READY signal (MCON) went off,
ON the servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) is still on. Or, when the power
was turned on, DRDY went on even though MCON was off.
Check that the servo interface module and servo amp are connected.
405 SERVO ALARM: (ZERO POINT RE- Position control system fault. Due to an NC or servo system fault in the
TURN FAULT) reference position return, there is the possibility that reference position
return could not be executed correctly. Try again from the manual refer-
ence position return.
697
407 SERVO ALARM: EXCESS ERROR The difference in synchronous axis position deviation exceeded the set
value.
409 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS TORQUE Abnormal servo motor load has been detected. Alternatively, abnormal
ALM spindle motor load has been detected in Cs mode.
410 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS EX- The position deviation value when the nth axis (axis 18) stops is larg-
CESS ERROR er than the set value.
Refer to procedure of trouble shooting.
411 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS EX- The position deviation value when the nth axis (axis 18) moves is
CESS ERROR larger than the set value.
Refer to procedure of trouble shooting.
413 SERVO ALARM: nth AXIS LSI The contents of the error register for the nth axis (axis 18) exceeded
OVERFLOW "231 power. This error usually occurs as the result of an improperly set
parameters.
415 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS EX- A speed higher than 524288000 units/s was attempted to be set in the
CESS SHIFT nth axis (axis 18). This error occurs as the result of improperly set
CMR.
417 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS PA- This alarm occurs when the nth axis (axis 18) is in one of the condi-
RAMETER INCORRECT tions listed below. (Digital servo system alarm)
1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020 (motor form) is out of the speci-
fied limit.
2) A proper value (111 or 111) is not set in parameter No.2022 (motor
revolution direction).
3) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2023
(number of speed feedback pulses per motor revolution).
4) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2024
(number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution).
5) Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 (flexible field gear rate) have not
been set.
6) A value outside the limit of {1 to the number of control axes} or a non
continuous value (Parameter 1023 (servo axis number) contains a
value out of the range from 1 to the number of axes, or an isolated
value (for example, 4 not prceded by 3).was set in parameter No.
1023 (servo axisnumber).
420 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS SYNC During simple synchronous control, the difference between the torque
TORQUE commands for the master and slave axes exceeded the value set in pa-
(M series) rameter No. 2031.
421 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS EXCESS The difference between the errors in the semiclosed loop and closed
ER (D) loop has become excessive during dual position feedback. Check the
values of the dual position conversion coefficients in parameters No.
2078 and 2079.
422 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS In torque control of PMC axis control, a specified allowable speed
has been exceeded.
423 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS In torque control of PMC axis control, the parameterset allowable
cumulative travel distance has been exceeded.
430 n AXIS : SV. MOTOR OVERHEAT A servo motor overheat occurred.
431 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD 1) PSM: Overheat occurred.
2) series SVU: Overheat occurred.
432 n AXIS : CNV. LOWVOLT CON./ 1) PSM: Phase missing occurred in the input voltage.
POWFAULT 2) PSMR: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
3) series SVU: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
698
433 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT DC LINK 1) PSM: The DC link voltage has dropped.
2) PSMR: The DC link voltage has dropped.
3) series SVU: The DC link voltage has dropped.
4) series SVU: The DC link voltage has dropped.
434 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL SVM: The control power supply voltage has dropped.
435 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK SVM: The DC link voltage has dropped.
436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL (OVC) The digital servo software detected the soft thermal state (OVC).
437 n AXIS : CNV. OVERCURRENT PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the input circuit.
POWER
438 n AXIS : INV. ABNORMAL CUR- 1) SVM: The motor current is too high.
RENT 2) series SVU: The motor current is too high.
3) series SVU: The motor current is too high.
439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT POWER 1) PSM: The DC link voltage is too high.
2) PSMR: The DC link voltage is too high.
3) series SVU: The C link voltage is too high.
4) series SVU: The link voltage is too high.
440 n AXIS : CNV. EX DECELERATION 1) PSMR: The regenerative discharge amount is too large.
POW. 2) series SVU: The regenerative discharge amount is too large. Al-
ternatively, the regenerative discharge circuit is abnormal.
441 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CURRENT The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the motor cur-
OFFSET rent detection circuit.
442 n AXIS : CNV. CHARGE FAULT/INV. 1) PSM: The spare discharge circuit of the DC link is abnormal.
DB 2) PSMR: The spare discharge circuit of the DC link is abnormal.
3) series SVU: The dynamic brake circuit is abnormal.
443 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING FAN FAIL- 1) PSM: The internal stirring fan failed.
URE 2) PSMR: The internal stirring fan failed.
3) series SVU: The internal stirring fan failed.
444 n AXIS : INV. COOLING FAN FAIL- SVM: The internal stirring fan failed.
URE
445 n AXIS : SOFT DISCONNECT The digital servo software detected a broken wire in the pulse coder.
ALARM
446 n AXIS : HARD DISCONNECT A broken wire in the builtin pulse coder was detected by hardware.
ALARM
447 n AXIS : HARD DISCONNECT (EXT) A broken wire in the separate detector was detected by hardware.
448 n AXIS : UNMATCHED FEEDBACK The sign of feedback data from the builtin pulse coder differs from
ALARM that of feedback data from the separate detector.
449 n AXIS : INV. IPM ALARM 1) SVM: IPM (intelligent power module) detected an alarm.
2) series SVU: IPM (intelligent power module) detected an alarm.
460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECT FSSB communication was disconnected suddenly. The possible
causes are as follows:
1) The FSSB communication cable was disconnected or broken.
2) The power to the amplifier was turned off suddenly.
3) A lowvoltage alarm was issued by the amplifier.
461 n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP INTERFACE The axes of the 2axis amplifier were assigned to the fast type inter-
face.
699
462 n AXIS : SEND CNC DATA FAILED Because of an FSSB communication error, a slave could not receive
correct data.
463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE DATA Because of an FSSB communication error, the servo system could
FAILED not receive correct data.
464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA FAILED An attempt was made to write maintenance information on the ampli-
fier maintenance screen, but it failed.
465 n AXIS : READ ID DATA FAILED At powerup, amplifier initial ID information could not be read.
466 n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP COMBINA- The maximum current rating for the amplifier does not match that for
TION the motor.
467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTING OF The servo function for the following has not been enabled when an
AXIS axis occupying a single DSP (corresponding to two ordinary axes) is
specified on the axis setting screen.
1. Learning control (bit 5 of parameter No. 2008 = 1)
2. Highspeed current loop (bit 0 of parameter No. 2004 = 1)
3. Highspeed interface axis (bit 4 of parameter No. 2005 = 1)
D Details of servo alarm The details of servo alarm are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 200
and No.204) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
#7 (OVL) : An overload alarm is being generated.

#6 (LV) : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
#5 (OVC) : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.
#4 (HCA) : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in servo amp.
#3 (HVA) : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
#2 (DCA) : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being generated in servo amp.
#1 (FBA) : A disconnection alarm is being generated.
#0 (OFA) : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
201 ALD EXP
When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 400 is
being generated):
#7 (ALD) 0 : Motor overheating
1 : Amplifier overheating
When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 416 is
being generated):
ALD EXP Alarm details

1 0 Builtin pulse coder disconnection (hardware)
1 1 Separately installed pulse coder disconnection
(hardware)
0 0 Pulse coder is not connected due to software.
700
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
#6 (OFS) : A current conversion error has occured in the digital servo.

#5 (MCC) : A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier has welded.
#4 (LDA) : The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is defective
#3 (PMS) : A feedback pulse error has occured because the feedback cable is
defective.
(7) Over travel alarms
500 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the nth axis (axis 18) + side stored stroke check I.
(Parameter No.1320 or 1326 NOTE)
501 OVER TRAVEL : n Exceeded the nth axis (axis 18) side stored stroke check I.
(Parameter No.1321 or 1327 NOTE)
502 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the nth axis (axis 18) + side stored stroke check II.
(Parameter No.1322 )
503 OVER TRAVEL : n Exceeded the nth axis (axis 18) side stored stroke check II.
(Parameter No.1323)
504 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the nth axis (axis 18) + side stored stroke check III.
505 OVER TRAVEL : n Exceeded the nth axis (axis 18) side stored stroke check III.
506 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the nth axis (axis 18) + side hardware OT.
507 OVER TRAVEL : n Exceeded the nth axis (axis 18) side hardware OT.
508 INTERFERENCE: +n A tool moving in the positive direction along the n axis has fouled anoth-
(T series (twopath control)) er tool post.
509 INTERFERENCE: n A tool moving in the negative direction along the n axis has fouled anoth-
(T series (twopath control)) er tool post.
510 OVER TRAVEL: +n Alarm for stroke check prior to movement. The end point specified in a
block falls within the forbidden area defined with the stroke check in the
positive direction along the N axis. Correct the program.
511 OVER TRAVEL: n Alarm for stroke check prior to movement. The end point specified in a
block falls within the forbidden area defined with the stroke check in the
negative direction along the N axis. Correct the program.
NOTE
Parameters 1326 and 1327 are effective when EXLM(stroke check switch signal) is on.
701
(8) Overheat alarms

700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT Control unit overheat

Check that the fan motor operates normally, and clean the air filter.
701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR The fan motor on the top of the cabinet for the contorl unit is overheated.
Check the operation of the fan motor and replace the motor if necessary.
704 OVERHEAT: SPINDLE Spindle overheat in the spindle fluctuation detection
(1) If the cutting load is heavy, relieve the cutting condition.
(2) Check whether the cutting tool is share.
(3) Another possible cause is a faulty spindle amp.
(9) Rigid tapping alarms

740 RIGID TAP ALARM: EXCESS ER- The positional deviation of the stopped spindle has exceeded the set
ROR value during rigid tapping.
741 RIGID TAP ALARM: EXCESS ER- The positional deviation of the moving spindle has exceeded the set val-
ROR ue during rigid tapping.
742 RIGID TAP ALARM: LSI OVER- An LSI overflow has occurred for the spindle during rigid tapping.
FLOW
(10)Serial spindle alarms

749 SSPINDLE LSI ERROR It is serial communication error while system is executing after power
supply on. Following reasons can be considered.
1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cable
is cut.
2) MAIN CPU board or option 2 board is fault.
3) Spindle amp. printed board is fault.
If this alarm occurs when CNC power supply is turned on or when
this alarm can not be cleared even if CNC is reset, turn off the power
supply also turn off the power supply in spindle side.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START This alarm is generated when the spindle control unit is not ready for
FAULT starting correctly when the power is turned on in the system with the
serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as follows:
1) An improperly connected optic cable, or the spindle control units
power is OFF.
2) When the NC power was turned on under alarm conditions other
than SU01 or AL24 which are shown on the LED display of the
spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier power off once and perform
startup again.
3) Other reasons (improper combination of hardware)
This alarm does not occur after the system including the spindle con-
trol unit is activated.
4) The second spindle (when SP2, bit 4 of parameter No. 3701, is 1)
is in one of the above conditions 1) to 3).
See diagnostic display No. 409 for details.
752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE CHANGE This alarm is generated if the system does not properly terminate a
FAULT mode change. The modes include the Cs contouring, spindle position-
ing, rigid tapping, and spindle control modes. The alarm is activated if
the spindle control unit does not respond correctly to the mode change
command issued by the NC.
702
754 SPINDLE1 ABNORMAL TORQUE Abnormal first spindle motor load has been detected.
ALM
762 SECOND SPINDLE MODE Refer to alarm No. 752.(For 2nd axis)
CHANGE FAULT
764 SPINDLE2 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as alarm No. 754 (for the second spindle)
ALM
772 SPINDLE3 MODE CHANGE ER- Same as alarm No. 752 (for the third spindle)
ROR
774 SPINDLE3 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as alarm No. 754 (for the third spindle)
ALM
782 SPINDLE4 MODE CHANGE ER- Same as alarm number 752 (for the fourth spindle)
ROR
784 SPINDLE4 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as alarm number 754 (for the fourth spindle)
ALM
D The details of spindle The details of spindle alarm No. 750 are displayed in the diagnosis display
alarm No.750 (No. 409) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
409 SPE S2E S1E SHE
#3 (SPE) 0 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters fulfill the
spindle unit startup conditions.
1 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do not fulfill
the spindle unit startup conditions.
#2 (S2E) 0 : The second spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup.
1 : The second spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle
serial control startup.
#1 (S1E) 0 : The first spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup.
1 : The first spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle axis
serial control startup.
#0 (SHE) 0 : The serial communications module in the CNC is normal.
1 : The serial communications module in the CNC was detected to have a
fault.
(11)Safety zone alarms
4800 ZONE : PUNCHING INHIBITED 1 When a safety zone check was executed, a punch command was
specified in area 1 where punching is inhibited.
4810 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 +X When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving in the
positive X direction entered area 1 into which entry is inhibited.
4811 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving in the
X negative X direction entered area 1 into which entry is inhibited.
703
4830 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 +Y When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving in the
Y negative Y direction entered area 1 into which entry is inhibited.
positive Y direction entered area 2 into which entry is inhibited.
4870 AUTO SETTING FEED ERROR The feed rate of safety zone auto setting is other than the parameter
value (No. 16538, No. 16539).
4871 AUTO SETTING PIECES ERROR In safety zone auto setting, the safety zone pieces are not correct. Or
the position detector has gone wrong, please tell your machine tool
builder.
4872 AUTO SETTING COMMAND M code, S code or T code is specified with safety zone auto setting
ERROR command (G32).
G32 is specified in the nibbling mode, in the cutter compensation, in
the rotation mode or the scaling mode.
(12) System alarms (These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.)
Number Message Description
900 ROM PARITY A parity error occurred in the CNC, macro, or servo ROM. Correct
the contents of the flash ROM having the displayed number.
910 SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) A RAM parity error occurred in the part program storage RAM. Clear
the RAM, or replace the SRAM module or motherboard. Subse-
911 SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 1) quently, reset the parameters and all other data.
704
Number Message Description
912 DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) A RAM parity error occurred in the DRAM module. Replace the
DRAM module.
913 DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 1)
920 SERVO ALARM (14 AXIS) Servo alarm (first to fourth axis). A watchdog alarm condition oc-
curred, or a RAM parity error occurred in the axis control card.
Replace the axis control card.
921 SERVO ALARM (58 AXIS) Servo alarm (fifth to eighth axis). A watchdog alarm condition oc-
curred, or a RAM parity error occurred in the axis control card.
926 FSSB ALARM FSSB alarm.
930 CPU INTERRUPT CPU error (abnormal interrupt).
The motherboard or CPU card may be faulty.
935 SRAM ECC ERROR An error occurred in RAM for part program storage.
Action:
Replace the master printed circuit board (SRAM module), perform
allclear operation, and set all parameter and other data again.
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM An error occurred in the PMC.
The PMC control circuit on the motherboard may be faulty.
951 PMC WATCH DOG ALARM An error occurred in the PMC.
(Watchdog alarm)
The motherboard may be faulty.
972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER MOD- An NMI occurred on a board other than the motherboard.
ULE The option board may be faulty.
973 NON MASK INTERRUPT An NMI occurred as a result of an unknown cause.
974 FBUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the FANUC bus.
The motherboard or option board may be faulty.
975 BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the motherboard.
976 LBUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the local bus.
705
A.2
LIST OF ALARMS
(PMC)
(1) Alarm messages (PMC)

Message Contents and solution
ALARM NOTHING Normal status
ER00 PROGRAM DATA The sequence program in the ROM is not written correctly.
ERROR(ROM) (solution) Please exchange ROM for the sequence program.
ER01 PROGRAM DATA The sequence program in the debugging RAM is defective.
ERROR(RAM) (solution) Please clear the debugging RAM and input LADDER again.
The debugging RAM is not installed though the RAM is selected.
(solution) Please install the debugging RAM or install ROM for sequence program
and select ROM with K17#3=0.
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER The size of sequence program exceeds the maximum size of LADDER(PMCSC
only).
(solution) Please change MAX LADDER AREA SIZE at the SYSPRM screen and
restart the system.
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE The size of sequence program exceeds the option specification size.
ERROR(OPTION) (solution) Please increase the option specification size.
Or, reduce the size of sequence program.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH The PMC model setting of the sequence program is not corresponding to an actual
model.
(solution) Please change the PMC model setting by the offline programmer.
ER05 PMC MODULE TYPE The module type of the PMC engine is not correct.
ERROR
(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine for a correct one.
ER07 NO OPTION There is no step number option of LADDER.

(LADDER STEP)
ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING The management software for the PMCSB has not been transferred.
(series name) (solution) The software installation is not consistent with the order. Contact FANUC.
ER11 OPTION AREA NOTHING The management software for the PMC C board has not been transferred.
(series name) (solution) The software installation is not consistent with the order. Contact FANUC.
ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR The series of the management software for the PMCRB differs between BASIC and
(series name) OPTION.
(solution) Contact FANUC.
ER13 OPTION AREA ERROR The series of the management software for the PMC C board differs between BASIC
(series name) and OPTION.
ER14 OPTION AREA VERSIION The edition of the management software for the PMCRB differs between BASIC
ERROR (series name) and OPTION.
ER15 OPTION AREA VERSIION The edition of the management software for the PMC C board differs between BASIC
ERROR (series name) and OPTION.
ER 16 RAM CHECK ERROR The debugging RAM cannot be read/written normally.

(PROGRAM RAM) (solution) Please exchange the debugging RAM.
706

ER17 PROGRAM PARITY The parity error occurred on ROM for sequence program or the debugging RAM.
(solution) ROM: The deterioration of ROM may be deteriorated
Please exchange ROM for the sequence program
RAM: Please edit the sequence program once on PMC
Still the error occurs, exchange the debugging RAM.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Transferring the sequence program from offline programmer was interrupted by the
BY I/O power off etc.
(solution) Please clear the sequence program and transfer the sequence program
again.
ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Editing the LADDER was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to the CNC
screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit LADDER once on PMC.
Or, please input LADDER again.
ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT Editing the symbol and comment was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to
DATA ERROR the CNC screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit symbol and comment once on PMC.
Or, please input symbol and comment again.
ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR Editing the message data was interrupted by the power off or the switch to the CNC
screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit message data once on PMC.
Or, please input message data again.
ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING There is no sequence program
ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POW- There is a change in setting LADDER MAX AREA SIZE etc.
ER (solution) Please restart the system to make the change effective.
ER24 LADDER, LANGUAGE The C program area overlaps the ladder program area.
AREA OVERLAP (solution) Adjust the address range assigned to C programs.
ER25 SOFTWARE VERSION The PMCSB management software editions are inconsistent.
ERROR (PMCAOPT) (solution) Contact FANUC.
ER26 SOFTWARE VERSION The PMCSB management software cannot be initialized.

ERROR (PMCAOPT) (solution) Contact FANUC.
ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS The parameter number for function instruction TMR, TMRB, CTR, DIFU, or DIFD is
OUT OF RANGE not in the range.
(solution) Correct the number so that it is within the range.
*When ER00 to ER27 occur, sequence program is not available.

ER32 NO I/O DEVICE Any DI/DO unit of I/O Unit or the connection unit etc. is not connected. When builtin
I/O card is connected, this message is not displayed.
(solution) When builtin I/O card is used:
Please confirm whether the builtin I/O card is certainly connected with.
When I/O Link is used:
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turning on. Or please confirm
the connection of the cable.
ER33 SLC ERROR The LSI for I/O Link is defective.

(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine.
707

ER34 SLC ERROR(xx) The communication with the DI/DO units of the xx group failed.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable connected to the DI/DO
units of the xx group.
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turned on earlier than CNC and
PMC. Or, please exchange the module of PMC engine on the DI/DO
units of the xx group
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT The number of the output data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which
DATA IN GROUP(xx) exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective.
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group.
FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A connecting and maintenance manual
(B61813E)
FANUC I/O UnitMODEL B connecting manual(B62163E)
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA The number of the input data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which
IN GROUP(xx) exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective.
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group.
FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A connecting and maintenance manual
(B61813E)
FANUC I/O UnitMODEL B connecting manual(B62163E)
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
DATA OVER(xx) (The assignment data of output side of xx group or later become ineffective.)
(solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number
of
the output data of each group.
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
DATA OVER(xx) (The assignment data of input side of xx group or later become infective.)
(Solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number
of
the input data of each goup.
ER98 ILLEGAL LASER CON- An I/O unit for the laser and assigned data do not match.
NECTION (solution) Check that the ladder assignment data and actual I/O units match.
ER99 X, Y96127 ARE ALLO- When the laser I/O link is provided, ladder I/O is assigned to X96X127 and
CATED Y96Y127.
(solution) Delete the data assigned to X96X127 and Y96Y127.
WN02 OPERATE PANEL The address setting data of the operators panel for FS0 is illegal.
ADDRESS ERROR (solution) Please correct the address setting data.
WN03 ABORT NCWINDOW/ LADDER was stopped while CNC and PMC were communicating.
EXIN The functional instruction WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, DISPB, and etc. may not work nor-
mally.
(solution) When restarting the system, this alarm will be released. Execute the
sequence program(Press RUN key) after confirming whether there is a
problem in LADDER or not.
WN04 UNAVAIL EDIT MODULE The LADDER editing module cannot be recognized.(PMCSAx/SBxx=1 to 3)
(solution) Please confirm the slot position installed.
Please confirm the installed module.
WN05 PMC TYPE NO CONVER- A ladder program for the PMCSA3/SA5 was transferred to the PMCSB5.
SION (solution) Correct the ladder type.
WN06 TASK STOPPED BY DE- Some user tasks are stopped by break point of the debugging function.
BUG FUNC
WN07 LADDER SP ERROR When functional instruction CALL(SUB65) or CALLU(SUB66) was executed, the stack
(STACK) of the LADDER overflowed.
(solution) Please reduce the nesting of the subprogram to 8 or less.
708

WN17 NO OPTION (LANGUAGE) There is no C language option.
WN18 ORIGIN ADDRESS The LANGUAGE ORIGIN address of the system parameter is wrong
ERROR (solution) Please set the address of symbol RC_CTLB_INIT in the map file to the
LANGUAGE ORIGIN of the system parameter.
WN19 GDT ERROR The value of BASE, LIMIT or ENTRY of user defined GDT is illegal.
(BASE,LIMIT) (solution) Please correct the address in link control statement and build file.
WN20 COMMON MEM. COUNT The number of common memories exceeds 8.

OVER (solution) Please reduce the number of common memories to 8 or less. It is
necessary to correct a link control statement,build file and the source file
for the common memory.
WN21 COMMON MEM. ENTRY GDT ENTRY of the common memory is out of range.
ERROR (solution) Please correct the address of GDT ENTRY of the common memory in the
link control statement.
WN22 LADDER 3 PRIORITY The priority of LADDER LEVEL 3 is out of range.

ERROR (solution) Please correct the value of LADDER LEVEL 3 in the link control statement
within the range of 0 or 1099 or 1.
WN23 TASK COUNT OVER The number of user tasks exceeds 16.
(solution) Please confirm TASK COUNT in the link control statement. When the
number of tasks is changed, it is necessary to correct the link control
statement, build file and the composition of the files to be linked.
WN24 TASK ENTRY ADDR The selector of the entry address to the user task is out of range.
ERROR (solution) Please correct the table of GDT in build file to the value within
32(20H)95(5FH).
WN25 DATA SEG ENTRY The entry address of the data segment is out of range.
ERROR (solution) Please correct DATA SEGMENT GDT ENTRY in the link control statement
and the table of GDT in build file within 32(20H)95(5FH).
WN26 USER TASK PRIORITY The priority of the user task is out of range.
ERROR (solution) Please correct the TASK LEVEL in link control statement within the
range of 1099 or 1.
Note: Only one task can have TASK LEVEL 1 (including LADDER
LEVEL 3).
WN27 CODE SEG TYPE ERROR The code segment type is illegal. The code segment of RENAMESEG in the binding
control file is wrong.
(solution) Please correct the entry of the code segment in the link control statement
to correspond to the entry in the build file.
WN28 DATA SEG TYPE ERROR The data segment type is illegal. The data segment of RENAMESEG in the binding con-
trol file is wrong.
(solution) Please correct the entry of the code segment in the link control statement
WN29 COMMON MEM SEG The segment type of common memory is illegal. The segment of RENAMESEG in the
TYPE ERROR building control file of the common memory is wrong.
(solution) Please correct the entry of common memory in the link control statement
WN30 IMPOSSIBLE ALLOCATE The memories for the data and stack etc. cannot be allocated.
MEM. (solution) Please confirm whether the value of code segment in build file and USER
GDT ADDRESS in link control statement is correct or not.
Or please reduce the value of MAX LADDER AREA SIZE of the system
parameter and the size of the stack in link control statement at the least
709

WN31 IMPOSSIBLE EXECUTE The library function cannot be executed.
LIBRARY (solution) Please confirm the object model of the library.
Or, system ROM of PMC must be replaced with one of later version.
WN32 LNK CONTROL DATA ER- Link control statement data is illegal.
ROR (solution) Please confirm whether the address of symbol RC_ CTLB_INIT in map file
is set to LANGUAGE ORIGIN of the system parameter. Or, please make
the link control statement again.
WN33 LNK CONTROL VER. ER- A link control statement data version error occurred.
ROR (Solution) Correct the link control statement in the C program.
WN34 LOAD MODULE COUNT The number of independent load modules exceeds eight.
OVER (solution) Decrease the number of independent load modules to eight or small
er.
WN35 CODE AREA OUT OF The specified code area is beyond the address range.
RANGE (solution) Correct the C program.
WN36 LANGUAGE SIZE ERROR The size of a C program exceeds the option size.
(OPTION) (solution) Decrease the size of the C program.
WN37 PROGRAM DATA ERROR A C program is destroyed.

(LANG.) (solution) Transfer the C program again.
WN38 RAM CHECK ERROR A C program is destroyed.

WN39 PROGRAM PARITY A parity mismatch occurred in a C program.

WN40 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Transfer of a C program was interrupted by, for example, a power failure.
BY I/O (LANG.) (solution) Clear the C program, then transfer the C program again.
WN41 LANGUAGE TYPE A C program type mismatch occurred.

UNMATCH (solution) Correct the C program.
WN42 UNDEFINE LANGUAGE No language origin address is set.

ORIGIN ADDRESS (solution) Set the language origin address.
NOTE
Alarms WN17 to WN42 indicate errors related to PMC user
C programs.
710
(2) System alarm messages (PMCSA5/SB5/SB6)

1 PC004 CPU ERR A CPU error occurred in the PMC.
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy indicate internal error code.
PC006 CPU ERR
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy If this error occurs, the motherboard may be faulty.
PC009 CPU ERR
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy Replace the motherboard, then check whether the error recurs. If the error still
PC010 CPU ERR occurs even after the replacement of the motherboard, report the conditions un-
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy der which the error occurred (system configuration, operation, time and frequen-
cy of error occurrences, etc.) to FANUC.
2 PC030 RAM PARITY aa:bb A RAM parity error occurred in the PMC.
aa and bb indicate internal error code.
If this error occurs, the motherboard may be faulty.
Solution)
Replace the motherboard, then check whether the error recurs. If the error still
occurs even after the replacement of the motherboard, report the conditions un-
der which the error occurred (system configuration, operation, time and frequen-
cy of error occurrences, etc.) and the indicated internal error code to FANUC.
3 PC050 NMI SLC aa:bb A communication error occurred in the I/O Link.
aa and bb indicate internal error code.
If this error occurs, the possible causes are as follows:

(1) Although the base expansion is assigned when the I/O Unit A is used, the
base is not connected.
(2) A cable is not connected securely.
(3) Cabling is faulty.
(4) I/O equipment (I/O unit, Power Mate, etc.) is faulty.
(5) The motherboard is faulty.
Solution)
(1) Check whether the I/O assignment data and the actual I/O equipment con-
nection match.
(2) Check whether the cables are connected correctly.
(3) According to FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A Connection and Maintenance
Manual (B61813E) or FANUC I/O UnitMODEL B Connection manual
(B62163E), check for an error in the cable specifications.
(4) Replace the I/O unit interface module, cable, or motherboard. Then, check
whether the error still occurs.
4 PC060 FBUS A bus error occurred in the PMC.

xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy aa, xxxxxxxx, and yyyyyyyy indicate internal error code.
PC061 FLR
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy If this error occurs, the hardware may be faulty.
PC062 FLW
aa: xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy Solution)
Report the conditions under which the error occurred (system configuration, op-
eration, time and frequency of error occurrences, tc.), the indicated internal error
code, and the LED status on each board to FANUC.
711

5 PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK) A stack error occurred during execution of ladder function instruction
CALL/CALLU.
Solution)
Check the correspondence between the CALL/CALLU instruction and SPE
instruction. If the error cannot be located, report the conditions under which the
error occurred and the ladder program to FANUC.
6 PC080 SYS EMG A system alarm was caused by another software.

xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
PC081 FL EMG Solution)
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy Report the conditions under which the error occurred (system configuration, op-
eration, time and frequency of error occurrences, etc.), the indicated internal er-
ror code, and the LED status on each board to FANUC.
7 PC097 PARITY ERR A parity error occurred in the PMC system.

(LADDER)
PC098 PARITY ERR (DRAM) If this error occurred, the motherboard may be faulty.
Solution)
Replace the motherboard, then check whether the error recurs. If the error still
occurs even after the replacement of the motherboard, report the conditions un-
der which the error occurred (system configuration, operation, time and frequen-
cy of error occurrences, etc.) to FANUC.
(3) System alarm messages (for the C language board)

1 PC1nn CPU INTERRT CPU error (abnormal interrupt)
xxxxyyyyyy nn : Exception code
Exception code of the i80486. For details, refer to the relevant
manual that describes the CPU.
00 Division error. For example, the divisor in a division instruction is 0.
12 Stack exception caused by, for example, stack segment limit viola
tion
13 General protection exception generated when, for example, a seg
ment limit is exceeded
xxxx : Segment selector where the system error occurred
A value 0103 to 02FB indicates the C execution area.
yyyyyy : Offset address at which the system error occurred
(Solution)
If a C program is not used, or if the cause of the error cannot be determined
STATUS LED lL even by checking the C program, contact FANUC.
2 PC130 RAM PRTY aa A parity error occurred in user RAM or DRAM on the C language board.
xxxxyyyyyy aa : RAM parity error occurrence information
xxxx : Segment selector where the system error occurred
STATUS LED jL yyyyyy : Offset address at which the system error occurred
5 PC160 FBUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the C language board.

xxxxyyyyyy xxxx : Segment selector where the system error occurred
PC161 FBUS ERROR
xxxxyyyyyy yyyyyy : Offset address at which the system error occurred
PC162 FBUS ERROR
xxxxyyyyyy
STATUS LED Lj
712

6 PC170 FBUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the C language board.
xxxxyyyyyy xxxx : Segment selector where the system error occurred
PC171 FBUS ERROR
xxxxyyyyyy yyyyyy : Offset address at which the system error occurred
PC172 FBUS ERROR
xxxxyyyyyy
STATUS LED Lj
7 PC199 ROM PARITY eeeeeeee A parity error occurred in system ROM on the C language board.
STATUS LED Ll eeeeeeee : ROM parity error information
STATUS LED (green)

j : Off J : On lL : Blink
(4) Alarm messages (For EDIT 1)

ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The address of the relay/coil is not set.
FUNCTION NOT FOUND There is no functional instruction of the input number.
COM FUNCTION MISSING The funcitonal instruction COM (SUB29) is not correctly dealt with.
Correspondence of COM and COME (SUB29) is incorrect.
Or, the number of coil controlled by COM is specified by the model which the number
cannot be specified.
EDIT BUFFER OVER There in no empty area of the buffer for the editing.
(solution) Please reduce NET under editing.
END FUNCTION MISSING Functional instruction END1,END2,END3 and END do not exist. Or, there are error net
in END1,END2,END3,END.
Or, order of END1,END2,END3, and END is not correct.
ERROR NET FOUND There is an error net.
ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO. The wrong number of the functional instruction is searched.
FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL The functional instruction is not correctly connected.
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal line of the net is not connected.
ILLEGAL NET CLEARED Because the power had been turn off while editing LADDER, some net under editing
was cleared.
ILLEGAL OPERATION Operation is not correct.

The value is not specified and only INPUT key was pushed.
The address data is not correctly inputted.
Because the space to display the instruction on screen is not enough, the functional
instruction cannot be made.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED The symbol which was inputted is not defined.
INPUT INVALID There is an incorrect input data.

Nonnumerical value was inputted with COPY, INSLIN,CUP,CDOWN etc.
The input address was specified for write coil.
An illegal character was specified for the data table.
NET TOO LARGE The input net is larger than the editing buffer.
(solution) Please reduce the net under editing.
713

JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The functional instruction JMP(SUB10) is not correctly dealt with.
Correspondence of JMP and JMPE(SUB30) is incorrect.
The number of coil to jump is specified by the model which the number of coil cannot
specified. (It is possible to specify the coil number only on PMCRB/RC.)
LADDER BROKEN LADDER is broken.
LADDER ILLEGAL There is an incorrect LADDER.
IMPOSSIBLE WRITE You try to edit sequence program on the ROM.
OBJECT BUFFER OVER The sequence program area was filled.

(solution) Please reduce the LADDER.
PARAMETER NOTHING There is no parameter of the functional instruction.
PLEASE COMPLETE NET The error net was found in LADDER.

(solution) After correcting the error net, please continue operating.
PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO. Please input the number of the functional instruction.
(solution) If you do not input the functional instruction, please push soft key FUNC
again.
PROGRAM MODULE NOTHING You tried to edit though there was neither RAM for debugging nor ROM for sequence
program.
RELAY COIL FORBIT There is an unnecessary relay or coil.
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING The relay or the coil does not suffice.
PLEASE CLEAR ALL It is impossible to recover the sequence program.

(solution) Please clear the all data.
SYMBOL DATA DUPLICATE The same symbol name is defined in other place.
COMMENT DATA OVERFLOW The comment data area was filled.

(solution) Please reduce the number of the commnet.
SYMBOL DATA OVERFLOW The symbol data area was filled.

(solution) Please reduce the number of the symbol.
VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL There is an incorrect vertical line of the net.
MESSAGE DATA OVERFLOW The message data area was filled.

(solution) Please reduce the number of the message.
1ST LEVEL EXECUTE TIME The 1st level of LADDER is too large to complete execution in time.
OVER (solution) Please reduce the 1st level of LADDER.
PARA NO. RANGE ERR: The parameter number for a function instruction is not in the range.
(solution) Correct the number so that it is within the range.
PARA NO. DUPLICATE: The parameter number for a function instruction is used more than once.
(solution) If the duplicate numbers pose the problem of simultaneous operation,
change the parameter number to an unused number.
714
(5) Error Messages (at Automatic Write to Flash ROM after Ladder Editing)
Error message Contents and solution
PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM. (At BLANK)
PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM.

(EXEC?) (Remedy) When the message is displayed, pressing the EXEC key again causes
write or erasure operation. (At write or erasure)
PROGRAM NOTHING There is no program on flash ROM.
ERASE ERROR Flash ROM is abnormal. Replacement is required.

FROM WRITE ERROR 13 Ask FANUC Service Representative for replacement.
FROM WRITE ERROR 28
WRITE ERROR
FROM WRITE ERROR 12
FROM WRITE ERROR 29
READ ERROR
ANOTHER USED Flash ROM is used by other than PMC.

FROM WRITE ERROR 9
FROM WRITE ERROR 36
MUST BE IN EMG STOP The CNC is not in the emergency stop state.
NOT EMG STOP
FROM WRITE ERROR 10
FROM WRITE ERROR 37
NO OPTION There is no ROM cassette option.
SIZE ERROR The sequence program is larger than the flash ROM size. (At write)
IMPOSSIBLE WRITE (SIZE (Remedy) Try the condense function. (EDIT/CLEAR screen) If the same phenome-
OVER) non is still observed, the flash ROM size must be enlarged.
NO SPACE The sequence program to be read is larger than the RAM size. (At read)
FROM WRITE ERROR 1 (Remedy) RAM must be enlarged.
FROM WRITE ERROR 15
FROM WRITE ERROR 35
715
(6) Error Messages (at Assignment Data Editing)

ERR: GROUP NO. (015) The group number must be 0 to 15.
ERR: BASE NO. (01) The base number must be 0 or 1.
WARN: BASE NO. MUST BE 0 For I/O UnitB, the base number must be 0. The base number was set to 0 forcibly.
ERR: SLOT NO. (110) For I/O UnitA, the slot number must be 1 to 10.
ERR: SLOT NO. (0, 130) For I/O UnitB, the slot number must be 0 or a number 1 to 30.
ERR: SLOT NO. MUST BE 0 When power on/off information for I/O UnitB is set, the slot number must be 0.
ERR: ILLEGAL NAME The input assignment name is illegal or not supported. Enter a correct name.
INPUT INVALID The input character string is illegal. Enter a character string in a correct input format
again.
IMPOSSIBLE WRITE An attempt was made to edit ROM data. ROM data cannot be edited.
ERR: ADDRESS ALREADY The specified address is already assigned. Assign another address. Alternatively, de-
ASSIGNED lete the existing data, then set the address again.
ERR: ADDRESS OVER A set address exceeds the maximum value (X127, Y127). Check the addresses dedi-
cated to the unit to be set.
ERR: SLOT ALREADY DEFINED The specified slot is already assigned. Check the existing data.
WARN: SLOT ALREADY The specified slot is already assigned. Check the existing data.
DEFINED
ERR: UNIT TYPE MISMATCH An output module cannot be allocated to an X address, or an input module cannot be
(IN OR OUT) allocated to a Y address.
ERR: UNIT TYPE MISMATCH I/O UnitA and I/O UnitB are assigned to the same group. These units cannot exist
(MODEL) together within the same group.
716
(7) Alarm messages (For I/O)

PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM. (At BLANK)
PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS A program already exists on flash ROM.

(EXEC ?) Remedy) When the message is displayed, pressing the EXEC key again
causes write or erasure operation. (At write or erasure)
PROGRAM NOTHING There is no program on flash ROM.
ERASE ERROR Flash ROM is abnormal. Replacement is required. Ask FANUC Service
F Representative for replacement.
L WRITE ERROR
A
S READ ERROR
H
ANOTHER USED Flash ROM is used by other than PMC.
R
O MUST BE IN EMG STOP The CNC is not in the emergency stop state.
M NOT EMG STOP
NO OPTION There is no ROM cassette option.
SIZE ERROR The sequence program is larger than the flash ROM size. (At write)
Remedy) Try the condense function. (EDIT/CLEAR screen) If the same
phenomenon is still observed, the flash ROM size must be en-
larged.
The sequence program to be read is larger than the RAM size. (At read)
Remedy) RAM must be enlarged.
I/O OPEN ERROR nn nn = 1: RS232C is used by other than PMC.

Remedy) Check whether RS232C is used by other than PMC.
On the online setting screen (see Section 8.5.1 in III), check
that NOT USE is indicated for RS232C.
nn = 6: The RS232C option is not found.
nn = 20: RS232C connection is incorrect.
Remedy) Check whether channel setting, connection, baud rate, and
H other settings are correct.
O
I/O WRITE ERROR nn nn = 20: RS232C connection is incorrect.
S
T
other settings are correct.

F nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed correctly.
D Remedy) Check whether the cable is broken.
C
I/O READ ERROR nn nn = 20: RS232C connection is incorrect.
A
S
other settings are correct.

O nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed correctly.
T Remedy) Check whether the cable is broken.
H
ADDRESS IS OUT OF RANGE Data for other than the PMC debugging RAM area was transferred.
E
(xxxxxx) xxxxxx: Indicates the transfer address.
R
S DATA ERROR Illegal data was read.
Remedy) Check the cable and setting (speed).
When a program in C was being read into the 16i/18i/21i:
Remedy) Press soft keys [EDIT], [CLEAR], [CLRLNG], then [EXEC] to
clear the C area.
PROGRAM DATA ERROR An attempt was made to output data, but the data was illegal.
Remedy) Check the alarm on the alarm screen.
717

CREATE ERROR The specified file name is illegal.
Remedy) Specify a file name in the MSDOS form. (See 7.2 (5))
NO MORE SPACE or WRITE ERROR There is not enough free space on the memory card.
Remedy) Delete files to create free space.
NOT READY No memory card is installed.

Remedy) Check whether a memory card is installed.
MOUNT ERROR Unformatted.

Remedy) Perform formatting. (See 7.3.4 (a))
WRITE PROTECT The memory card is protected.

Remedy) Set the protect switch of the memory card to OFF.
BATTERY ALARM The battery for the memory card is too weak.
Remedy) Replace the memory card battery.
M
E FILE NOT FOUND The specified file number or file name is not found.
M Remedy) With LIST, check the file name or file number.
O
R DELETE ERROR The file cannot be deleted.
C Remedy) Change the file attribute.
A
R PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS There are duplicate file names.
D Remedy) Use another file name.
I/O WRITE ERROR nn nn = 30: No memory card is installed.

I/O READ ERROR nn Remedy) Check whether a memory card is installed.
I/O COMPARE ERROR nn nn = 31: The memory card cannot be written to.
I/O DELETE ERROR nn Remedy) Set the protect switch of the memory card to OFF.
I/O LIST ERROR nn Replace the memory card with an SRAM card.
I/O FORMAT ERROR nn nn = 32: The battery for the memory card is too weak.
Remedy) Replace the memory card battery.
nn = 102: There is not enough free space on the memory card.
Remedy) Delete files to create free space.
nn = 135: The memory card is unformatted.
nn = 105: The memory card is unformatted.
Remedy) Format the memory card.
nn = 114: The specified file is not found.
Remedy) With LIST, check the file name or file number.
nn = 115: The specified file is protected.
Remedy) Check the file attribute.
COMPARE ERR XXXXXX=AA : BB Data differs between the device and PMC.
CONT? (Y/N) XXXXXX: Address
aa: Data on the PMC
bb: Data on the device
C Remedy) To continue operation, enter Y; otherwise, enter N. Then, press
O the INPUT key.
M
DATA ERROR Illegal data has been read.
M
Remedy) Check the cable and setting (speed).
O
When a program in C was being read into the 16i/18i/21i:
N
Remedy) Press soft keys [EDIT], [CLEAR], [CLRLNG], then [EXEC] to
clear the C area.
PROGRAM DATA ERROR An attempt was made to output data, but the data was illegal.
Remedy) Check the alarm on the alarm screen.
718
A.3
ALARMS
(SERIAL SPINDLE)
NOTE*1
Note that the meanings of the SPM indications differ
depending on which LED, the red or yellow LED, is on.
When the red LED is on, the SPM indicates a 2digit alarm
number. When the yellow LED is on, the SPM indicates an
error number that designates a sequence problem (for
example, when a rotation command is entered with the
emergency stop state not released).
See Appendix A.4, Error Codes (Serial Spindle).
Alarm Numbers and Alarms Displayed on the Series Spindle Amplifier
SPM
No. Message indica- Faulty location and remedy Description
tion(*1)
(750) SPINDLE SERIAL LINK A0 1 Replace the ROM on the SPM The program does not start normally.
ERROR A control printed circuit board. ROM series error or hardware ab-
2 Replace the SPM control printed normality on the SPM control printed
circuit board. circuit board
(749) SSPINDLE LSI ERROR A1 Replace the SPM control printed cir- An abnormality was detected in the
cuit board. CPU peripheral circuit of the SPM
control circuit.
7n01 SPN_n_ : MOTOR 01 1 Check and correct the peripheral The thermostat embedded in the mo-
OVERHEAT temperature and load status. tor winding operated.
2 If the cooling fan stops, replace it. The internal temperature of the motor
exceeds the specified level.
The motor is used in excess of the
continuous rating, or the cooling
component is abnormal.
7n02 SPN_n_ : EX SPEED ER- 02 1 Check and correct the cutting The motor speed cannot follow a spe-
ROR conditions to decrease the load. cified speed.
2 Correct parameter No. 4082. An excessive motor load torque is de-
tected.
The acceleration/deceleration time in
parameter No. 4082 is insufficient.
7n03 SPN_n_ : FUSE ON DC 03 1 Replace the SPM unit. The PSM becomes ready (00 is indi-
LINK BLOWN 2 Check the motor insulation status. cated), but the DC link voltage is too
3 Replace the interface cable. low in the SPM.
The fuse in the DC link section in the
SPM is blown. (The power device is
damaged or the motor is ground
fault.)
The JX1A/JX1B connection cable is
abnormal.
7n04 SPN_n_ : INPUT FUSE/ 04 Check the PSM input power supply The PSM detects open phase of pow-
POWER status. er. (PSM alarm indication: 5)
FAULT
719
SPM
tion(*1)
7n07 SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED 07 Check for a sequence error. (For ex- The motor speed has exceeded
ample, check whether spindle syn- 115% of its rated speed.
chronization was specified when the When the spindle axis was in position
spindle could not be turned.) control mode, positional deviations
were accumulated excessively (SFR
and SRV were turned off during
spindle synchronization.)
7n09 SPN_n_ : OVERHEAT 09 1 Improve the heat sink cooling sta- Abnormal temperature rise of the
MAIN CIRCUIT tus. power transistor radiator
2 If the heat sink cooling fan stops,
replace the SPM unit.
7n11 SPN_n_ : OVERVOLT 11 1 Check the selected PSM. Overvoltage of the DC link section of
POW CIRCUIT 2 Check the input power voltage the PSM was detected. (PSM alarm
and change in power during motor indication: 7)
deceleration. If the voltage ex- PSM selection error. (The maximum
ceeds 253 VAC (for the 200V output specification of the PSM is ex-
system) or 530 VAC (for the 400V ceeded.)
system), improve the power sup-
ply impedance.
7n12 SPN_n_ : OVERCUR- 12 1 Check the motor insulation status. The motor output current is abnor-
RENT POW 2 Check the spindle parameters. mally high.
CIRCUIT 3 Replace the SPM unit. A motorspecific parameter does not
match the motor model.
Poor motor insulation
7n15 SPN_n_ : SP SWITCH 15 1 Check and correct the ladder se- The switch sequence in spindle
CONTROL quence. switch/output switch operation is ab-
ALARM 2 Replace the switching MC. normal.
The switching MC contact status
check signal and command do not
match.
7n16 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT 16 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
cuit board. component is detected. (RAM for ex-
ternal data is abnormal.)
7n18 SPN_n_ : SUMCHECK 18 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
ERROR PGM cuit board. component is detected. (Program
DATA ROM data is abnormal.)
7n19 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET 19 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
CURRENT U detected. (The initial value for the U
phase current detection circuit is ab-
normal.)
7n20 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET 20 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
CURRENT V detected. (The initial value of the V
phase current detection circuit is ab-
normal.)
7n24 SPN_n_ : SERIAL 24 1 Place the CNCtospindle cable The CNC power is turned off (normal
TRANSFER away from the power cable. poweroff or broken cable).
ERROR 2 Replace the cable. An error is detected in communica-
tion data transferred to the CNC.
720
SPM
tion(*1)
7n26 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 26 1 Replace the cable. The signal amplitude of the detection
CVELO DE- 2 Readjust the preamplifier. signal (connector JY2) on the Cs con-
TECT tour control motor side is abnormal.
(Unconnected cable, adjustment er-
ror, etc.)
7n27 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 27 1 Replace the cable. 1 The spindle position coder (con-
POSCODER 2 Readjust the BZ sensor signal. nector JY4) signal is abnormal.
2 The signal amplitude (connector
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is ab-
normal.
(Unconnected cable, adjustment
error, etc.)
7n28 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT 28 1 Replace the cable The position detection signal (con-
CPOS DE- 2 Readjust the preamplifier. nector JY5) for Cs contour control is
TECT abnormal.
(Unconnected cable, adjustment er-
ror, etc.)
7n29 SPN_n_ : SHORTTIME 29 Check and correct the load status. Excessive load has been applied
OVERLOAD continuously for a certain period of
time. (This alarm is issued also when
the motor shaft has been locked in
the excitation state.)
7n30 SPN_n_ : OVERCUR- 30 Check and correct the power supply Overcurrent is detected in PSM main
RENT POW voltage. circuit input. (PSM alarm indication:
CIRCUIT 1)
Unbalanced power supply.
PSM selection error (The maximum
PSM output specification is exceed-
ed.)
7n31 SPN_n_ : MOTOR LOCK 31 1 Check and correct the load status. The motor cannot rotate at a speci-
OR VSIG LOS 2 Replace the motor sensor cable fied speed. (A level not exceeding
(JY2 or JY5). the SST level for the rotation com-
mand has existed continuously.)
Abnormality in the speed detection
signal.
7n32 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT 32 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
SERIAL LSI cuit board. component is detected. (The LSI de-
vice for serial transfer is abnormal.)
7n33 SPN_n_ : SHORTAGE 33 1 Check and correct the power sup- Charging of direct current power sup-
POWER ply voltage. ply voltage in the power circuit sec-
CHARGE 2 Replace the PSM unit. tion is insufficient when the magnetic
contractor in the amplifier is turned on
(such as open phase and defective
charging resistor).
7n34 SPN_n_ : PARAMETER 34 Correct a parameter value according Parameter data exceeding the allow-
SETTING ER- to the manual. able limit is set.
ROR If the parameter number is unknown,
connect the spindle check board, and
check the indicated parameter.
7n35 SPN_n_ : EX SETTING 35 Correct the value according to the pa- Gear ratio data exceeding the allow-
GEAR RATIO rameter manual. able limit is set.
721
SPM
tion(*1)
7n36 SPN_n_ : OVERFLOW 36 Check whether the position gain val- An error counter overflow occurred.
ERROR ue is too large, and correct the value.
COUNTER
7n37 SPN_n_ : SPEED DE- 37 Correct the value according to the pa- The setting of the parameter for the
TECT PAR. rameter manual. number of pulses in the speed detec-
ERROR tor is incorrect.
7n39 SPN_n_ : 1ROT Cs 39 1 Adjust the 1rotation signal in the An incorrect relationship between the
SIGNAL ER- preamplifier. 1rotation signal and the number of
ROR 2 Check the cable shield status. AB phase pulses was detected dur-
3 Replace the cable. ing Cs contour control.
7n40 SPN_n_ : NO 1ROT Cs 40 1 Adjust the 1rotation signal in the The 1rotation signal is not gener-
SIGNAL DE- preamplifier. ated during Cs contour control.
TECT 2 Check the cable shield status.
3 Replace the cable.
7n41 SPN_n_ : 1ROT POS 41 1 Check and correct the parameter. 1 The 1rotation signal of the
CODER ER- 2 Replace the cable. spindle position coder (connector
ROR 3 Readjust the BZ sensor signal. JY4) is abnormal.
2 The 1rotation signal (connector
normal.
3 Parameter setting error
7n42 SPN_n_ : NO 1ROT. 42 1 Replace the cable. 1 The 1rotation signal of the
POSCODER 2 Readjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector
DETECT JY4) is disconnected.
2 The 1rotation signal (connector
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is dis-
connected.
7n43 SPN_n_ : DISCON. PC 43 Replace the cable. The differential speed position coder
FOR DIF. SP. signal (connector JY8) in SPM type 3
MODE is abnormal.
7n44 SPN_n_ : CONTROL 44 Replace the SPM control printed cir- Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
CIRCUIT(AD) cuit board. component was detected (A/D con-
ERROR verter abnormality).
7n46 SPN_n_ : SCREW 46 1 Check and correct the parameter. An abnormality equivalent to alarm
1ROT POS 2 Replace the cable. 41 was detected during thread cut-
COD. ALARM 3 Readjust the BZ sensor signal. ting operation.
7n47 SPN_n_ : POSCODER 47 1 Replace the cable. 1 The A/B phase signal of the
SIGNAL AB- 2 Readjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector
NORMAL 3 Correct the cable layout (vicinity of JY4) is abnormal.
the power line). 2 The A/B phase signal (connector
normal.
The relationship between the A/B
phase and 1rotation signal is incor-
rect (Pulse interval mismatch).
722
SPM
tion(*1)
7n49 SPN_n_ : HIGH CONV. 49 Check whether the calculated differ- In differential speed mode, the speed
DIF. SPEED ential speed value exceeds the maxi- of the other spindle converted to the
mum motor speed. speed of the local spindle has ex-
ceeded the allowable limit (the differ-
ential speed is calculated by multiply-
ing the speed of the other spindle by
the gear ratio).
7n50 SPN_n_ : SPNDL CON- 50 Check whether the calculated value In spindle synchronization, the speed
TROL OVER- exceeds the maximum motor speed. command calculation value exceed-
SPEED ed the allowable limit (the motor
speed is calculated by multiplying the
specified spindle speed by the gear
ratio).
7n51 SPN_n_ : LOW VOLT DC 51 1 Check and correct the power sup- Input voltage drop was detected.
LINK ply voltage. (PSM alarm indication: 4) (Momen-
2 Replace the MC. tary power failure or poor MC contact)
7n52 SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL 52 1 Replace the SPM control printed NC interface abnormality was de-
ABNORMAL I circuit board. tected (the ITP signal stopped).
2 Replace the spindle interface
printed circuit board in the CNC.
7n53 SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL 53 1 Replace the SPM control printed NC interface abnormality was de-
ABNORMAL II circuit board. tected (the ITP signal stopped).
2 Replace the spindle interface
printed circuit board in the CNC.
7n56 SPN_n_ : INNER COOL- 56 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the SPM control
ING FAN STOP circuit stopped.
7n57 SPN_n_ : EX DECEL- 57 1 Decrease the acceleration/decel- An overload was detected in the re-
ERATION eration duty. generative resistance. (PSMR alarm
POWER 2 Check the cooling condition (pe- indication: 8)
ripheral temperature). Thermostat operation or shorttime
3 If the cooling fan stops, replace the overload was detected.
resistor. The regenerative resistor was dis-
4 If the resistance is abnormal, re- connected, or an abnormal resis-
place the resistor. tance was detected.
7n58 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD IN 58 1 Check the PSM cooling status. The temperature of the radiator of the
PSM 2 Replace the PSM unit. PSM has increased abnormally.
(PSM alarm indication: 3)
7n59 SPN_n_ : COOLING FAN 59 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the PSM stopped.
STOP IN PSM (PSM alarm indication: 2)
723
A.4
ERROR CODES
(SERIAL SPINDLE) NOTE*1
Note that the meanings of the SPM indications differ
depending on which LED, the red or yellow LED, is on.
When the yellow LED is on, an error code is indicated with
a 2digit number. The error code is not displayed on the
CNC screen.
When the red LED is on, the SPM indicates the number of
an alarm generated in the serial spindle.
See Appendix A.3, Alarms (Serial Spindle).
Errors Displayed on the Series Spindle Amplifier

SPM
indica- Faulty location and remedy Description
tion(*1)
01 Check the *ESP and MRDY sequence. (For MRDY, pay Although neither *ESP (emergency stop signal; there
attention to the parameter setting regarding the use of the are two types of signals including the PMC signal and
MRDY signal (bit 0 of parameter No. 4001).) PSM contact signal(*2)) nor MRDY (machine ready sig-
nal) is input, SFR (forward rotation signal)/SRF (reverse
rotation signal)/ORCM (orientation command) is input.
02 Check the spindle motor speed detector parameter (bits When the spindle motor has a highresolution magnet-
2, 1, and 0 of parameter No. 4011). ic pulse coder (Cs sensor) (bits 6 and 5 of parameter
No. 4001 are set to 0 and 1, respectively), 128 /rev is
to be set for the speed detector (bits 2, 1, and 0 of pa-
rameter No. 4011 are set to 0, 0, and 1, respectively).
However, a value other than 128 /rev is set. In this
case, the motor is not excited.
03 Check the parameters for the detector for Cs contour Although use of a highresolution magnetic pulse cod-
control (bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 and bit 4 of parame- er (bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 = 1) or use of the Cs con-
ter No. 4018). tour control function by the sensor (bit 4 of parameter
No. 4018 = 1) is not set, a Cs control command is input.
In this case, the motor is not excited.
04 Check the position coder signal parameter (bit 2 of pa- Although use of the position coder signal (bit 2 of pa-
rameter No. 4001). rameter No. 4001 = 1) is not set, a servo mode (rigid tap-
ping, spindle positioning) or spindle synchronization
command is input. In this case, the motor is not excited.
05 Check the orientation software option. Although the orientation option is not set, an orientation
command (ORCM) is input.
06 Check the spindle output switching software option and Although the output switching option is not set, the low
power line status signal (RCH). speed winding is selected (RCH = 1).
07 Check the sequence (CON, SFR, SRV). Although the Cs contour control mode is specified,
SFR/SRV is not input.
08 Check the sequence (SFR, SRV). Although the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle posi-
tioning) is specified, SFR/SRV is not input.
09 Check the sequence (SPSYC, SFR, SRV) Although spindle synchronization mode is specified,
SFR/SRV is not input.
10 During execution of the Caxis control command, do not Although Cs contour control mode is set, another op-
specify another operation mode. Before entering anoth- eration mode (servo mode, spindle synchronization, or
er mode, cancel the Cs contour control command. orientation) is specified.
11 During execution of the servo mode command, do not Although servo mode (rigid tapping, or spindle position-
specify another operation mode. Before entering anoth- ing) is set, another operation mode (Cs contour control,
er mode, cancel the servo mode. spindle synchronization, or orientation) is specified.
724
SPM
indica- Faulty location and remedy Description
tion(*1)
12 During execution of the spindle synchronization com- Although spindle synchronization is being performed,
mand, do not specify another operation mode. Before another operation mode (Cs contour control, servo
entering another mode, cancel the spindle synchroniza- mode, or orientation) is specified.
tion command.
13 During execution of the orientation command, do not Although the orientation command is being executed,
specify another operation mode. Before entering anoth- another operation mode (Cs contour control, servo
er mode, cancel the orientation command. mode, or synchronization) is specified.
14 Input the SFT or SRV signal. The SFT and SRV signals are both input at the same
time.
15 Check bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 and PMC signal When bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 is set to 1 to indicate
(CON). the presence of the differential speed mode function,
Cs contour control is specified.
16 Check bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 and PMC signal When bit 5 of parameter No. 4000 is set to 0 to indicate
(DEFMD). the absence of the differential speed mode function, the
differential speed mode command (DEFMD) is input.
17 Check bits 2, 1, and 0 of parameter No. 4011. Setting of the speed detector parameter (bits 2, 1, and
0 of parameter No. 4011) is invalid. (The corresponding
speed detector is not present.)
18 Check bit 2 of parameter No. 4001 and PMC signal Although bits 2 of parameter No. 4001 is set to 0 not to
(ORCM). use the position coder signal, a command for orienta-
tion by a position coder (ORCMA) is input.
19 During execution of the orientation command, do not Although orientation by a magnetic sensor is being per-
specify another operation mode. Before entering anoth- formed, another operation mode is specified.
er mode, cancel the orientation command.
20 Check bit 5 of parameter No. 4001, bit 5 of parameter No. When the use of the slave operation mode function is
4014, and bit 4 of parameter No. 4018. set (bit 5 of parameter No. 4014 = 1), the use of a high
resolution magnetic pulse coder (bit 5 of parameter No.
4001 = 1) or the use of the Cs contour control function
by the sensor (bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 = 1) is speci-
fied. These items cannot be set at the same time.
21 Input the slave operation mode command (SLV) in nor- Although position control (such as servo mode or
mal operation mode. orientation) is being performed, a slave operation mode
command (SLV) is input.
22 Input the position control command in normal operation Although slave operation mode is set (SLVS = 1), a
mode position control command (such as servo mode or
orientation) is input.
23 Check bit 5 of parameter No. 4014 and PMC signal Although bit 5 of parameter No. 4014 is set to 0 not to
(SLV). use the slave operation mode function, a slave opera-
tion mode command (SLV) is input.
24 Check the PMC signal (INCMD). Perform orientation by Orientation is performed in incremental operation mode
specifying an absolute position first. (INCMD = 1) first, then the absolute position command
(INCMD = 0) is input.
25 Check the spindle amplifier specifications and parameter Although the spindle amplifier SPM type 4 is not used,
setting (bit 4 of parameter No. 4018). the use of the Cs contour control function by the sensor
is set (bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 = 1).
NOTE*2
PSM contact signal
Between ESP1 and ESP2 on the PSM Contact open: Emergency stop
Contact closed: Normal operation
725
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS APPENDIX B63005EN/02
B LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
B.1 MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
726
B63005EN/02 APPENDIX B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
B.1
MAINTENANCE PARTS
Item Ordering information Remarks
Fuse Control unit of LCD A02B0236K100

mounted type (without PC)
Control unit of LCD A02B0236K101

mounted type (with PC)
Control unit of standalone A02B0265K100

type
LCD unit of LCDmounted A02B0265K101

type
Separate detector interface A60L00010290#LM20 Rated at 2 A

unit
I/O module for operators A03B0815K001

panel
Connector panel I/O module A03B0815K002
Distributed I/O machine op- A03B0815K001

erators panel
Interface unit of machine op- A02B0120K107

erators panel
Connection unit of operators A02B0163K111

panel
Battery For control unit memory A02B0200K102

backup
Fan motor For control unit with no ex- A02B0236K120

for LCD pansion slot
mounted
type For control unit with expan- A02B0236K121
sion slot
For control unit with three A02B0236K122

expansion slots
Fan unit for For 1slot case A02B0265C101

standalone
type For 2slot case A02B0260C021
Backlight For 7.2 LCD A02B0236K112
For 8.4 LCD A02B0236K113
For 9.5 LCD A02B0236K114
For 10.4 LCD (old type) A02B0236K115
For 10.4 highintensity A02B0236K116

LCD
Touch panel protection sheet A02B0236K110
Pen for touch panel A02B0236K111
727
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B63005EN/02
C BOOT SYSTEM
C.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729

C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING
PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED
ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
728
B63005EN/02 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM
C.1 The boot system load the CNC system software (flash RAMDRAM),
then starts it so that software can be executed.
OVERVIEW The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the
CNC:
(1) Registering a file in flash ROM
Reads a file from a memory card, in FAT format, into flash ROM.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash ROM
(3) Deleting a file from flash ROM
(4) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs
backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a memory card
(5) Saving a file in flash ROM to a memory card
(6) Formatting of a memory card
(7) Deleting a file from a memory card
This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the
screen displays and operation for the functions listed above.
CAUTION
This control unit supports the use of a memory card as an
input/output device. When a flash card is used, however,
data can be written to a FANUCrecommended card only.
Data can be read in the same way as with an ordinary SRAM
card, provided the data has been saved in FAT format. Note
that, when a flash card is used, the card capacity is reduced
by 128KB.
See the order list for details of the supported memory card
types.
C.1.1 In ordinary system activation, the boot system automatically transfers

Starting the Boot files from flash ROM to DRAM in the background.
The user is not aware of this operation. However, the boot system must
System be operated manually, from menu screen, when maintenance is to be
carried out or when the flash ROM does not contain a required file.
1 In system maintenance, for example, to replace a file in ROM
Operation : Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two soft
keys at the right end.
Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.
If soft keys are not provided (for example, when a touch pad is being
used), use the MDI numeric keys. Hold down the 6 and 7
keys until the boot system screen appears.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
729
2 When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start the
CNC
Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system starts
transferring files from flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason, a
file required to start the CNC (NC basic) is not in flash ROM or has
been destroyed, the boot system is automatically started.
C.1.2 The boot system organizes files in flash ROM into two main groups :
System Files and User system files and user files. These two file types have the following
characteristics :
Files
D System files CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC
D User files PMC sequence program (ladder), PCODE macro program, and other
usercreated files
C.1.3 When CAPII board or LCB (loader control board) is mounted on the
Boot Slot CNC, we have to access to SRAM that mounted on additional board. So,
the boot system displays BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION screen that
Configuration Screen to select a access board.
D Screen configuration
(1) BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION 60M102
NO. BOARD FROM SRAM

(2) 0. MAIN 4MB 1.0MB
1. PMCRE 6MB 256KB
2. CAPII 512KB
3. LCB 512KB
*** MESSAGE ***

(3) SELECT SLOT AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(1) : Screen title.

(2) : Flash memory size and SRAM size of each board.
(3) : Message
D Operation Press the [ UP ] or [DOWN] soft key to move the cursor, and select board
to press the [SELECT] soft key.
730
C.2 When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen is
displayed. This screen is described below :
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION
AND OPERATING
PROCEDURE
D MAIN MENU screen
(1) SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1-01
(2) 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING

(3) 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
(4) 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
(5) 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
(6) 5. SRAM DATA BACKUP
(7) 6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
(8) 7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT
(9) 10.END
*** MESSAGE ***

(10) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(1) : Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system appear at
the right end.
(2) : Function for writing data to flash ROM.
(3) : Function for checing the edition of a file in ROM.
(4) : Function for deleting a file from flash ROM.
(5) : Function for making a backup copy of the data stored on the memory
card.
(6) : Function for making a backup copy of the data in SRAM.
(7) : Function for deleting a file from a memory card.
(8) : Function for formatting a memory card.
(9) : Function for terminating the boot system and starting the CNC.
(10) : Condensed guidance or error message
D Operating procedure Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. After
positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] soft
key. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmation
from the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
D Basic operation
Position the Select a Check the

cursor. function selection Execute
[UP] [SELECT] [YES] the Select END
[DOWN] [NO] function
Return to
original state
731
C.2.1
System Data Loading
Screen
D Description This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card into
flash ROM.
(1) SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1
FILE DIRECTORY
(2) B1F1A_B.MEM
B1F1A_AI.MEM
(3) END
*** MESSAGE ***

(4) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(1) : Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m)
are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end.
(2) : Files on the memory card
(3) : Option for returning to previous menu Message
(4) : Message
D Operating procedure 1 Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card and
written to flash ROM. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key.
A single page can list up to eight file names. If the memory card
contains nine or more files, the remaining files are displayed on
another page.
To display the next page, press the soft key.
To display the previous page, press the soft key. The END option
is displayed on the last page.
The END option is displayed on the last page.
2 After a file has been slected, the system asks whether that file is to be
loaded.
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
732
3 To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO]
key.
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
4 When loading terminates normally, the system displays the following

message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs, see D.3
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
D Others 1 Counter display while a file is being loaded

While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently being
accessed is displayed.
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
ADDRESS 001: The counter appears under the
(1) message fild.
(1) : Number of 128KB management unit in flash ROM

2 File name in flash ROM
The boot system identifies a file in flash ROM by the first four
characters of the ID in the header. If flash ROM has a file of the same
type as a file to be read from the memory card, the file in flash ROM
is deleted before the file on the memory card is read. The following
table lists the IDs in the header and the contents. Note that these IDs
are subject to change without prior notice.
File name Contents File type
NC BASIC Basic System file

DG SERVO Servo System file
GRAPHIC Graphic System file
NCj OPTN Optional System file
PMCj**** PMC control software, etc. System file
PCD **** PCODE macro file/ OMM User file
CEX **** Clanguage executor User file
PMC - **** Ladder software User file
PMC@**** Ladder software for the loader User file
V : A numeric character, * : An alphabetic character
733
C.2.2
System Data Check
Screen
D Description This screen is used to list files in flash ROM, together with the
corresponding numbers of 128KB management units in each file and the
series and edition of the software.
(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK 1/1

(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)
(3) 1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 DG SERVO ( 1)
3 PMC0BSC ( 2)
4 PMCRB ( 1)
5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)
(4) END
*** MESSAGE ***

(1) : Screen title

(2) : Names of accessing board
(3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
(4) : Returning to the previous menu
(5) : Message
734
D Operating procedure 1 Select the file whose details are required. For example, select 1 NC
BASIC (10).
2 The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed,
together with the series and edition of the software in each
management unit. After checking the listed data, select the
[SELECT] soft key to return to the file selection screen.
ROM FILE CHECK

NC BASIC
0 B1F1 801A 000

1 B1F1 802A 001 0 B1F1 801A 000

2 B1F1 841A 002
3 B1F1 842A 003

4 B1F1 881A 004 Internal managementunit

5 B1F1 882A 005 number
6 B1F1 8C1A 006 ROM number and edition
7 B1F1 8C2A 007 Series
*** MESSAGE ***

HIT SELECT KEY.
D Others Parity information for the system file and user file
The NC BASIC, DG SERVO, and other system files in flash ROM
contain parity information in each management unit. If the file name field
or parity field on the check screen contains a nonASC II character or an
@ , the flash ROM may have been destroyed or a damaged file may
have been read. Reread the data from the memory card.
The PMCRB, PCD 0.5M, and other user files do not contain parity
information in each management unit. A nonASCII character or an @
may appear in the series/edition information. In this case, it does not
indicate that the file has been damaged.
735
C.2.3
System Data Delete
Screen
D Description This screen is used to delete a user file from flash ROM.
(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK 1/1

(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
(3) 1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 DG SERVO ( 1)
3 PMC0BSC ( 2)
4 PMCRB ( 1)
5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)
(4) END
(5) *** MESSAGE ***

SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(1) : Screen title

(3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units
name.
(5) : Message
D Operating procedure 1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the
[SELECT] soft key.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message :
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 To start the deletion, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETING ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.
4 When deletion terminates normally, the system displays the following

message. Press the [SELECT] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
736
D Others 1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen
The system files are protected from accidental deletion. User files,
however, are not protected. Protected system files can be
overwritten from the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.
C.2.4
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
Screen
D Description This screen is used to write a user file in flash ROM to a memory card.
Only user files can be saved from flash ROM to a memory card. System
files cannot be saved.
(1) SYSTEM DATA SAVE

(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
(3) 1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 DG SERVO ( 1)
3 PMC0BSC ( 2)
4 PMCRB ( 1)
5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)
(4) END
*** MESSAGE ***

(1) : Screen title

(3) : Names of files in flash memory The number of management units
name.
(5) : Message
737
D Operating procedure 1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the
[SELECT] soft key.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message :
*** MESSAGE ***

SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].
*** MESSAGE ***

WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000
4 When saving terminates normally, the system displays the

following message. Press the [SELECT] key. The names of files
written to the memory card are listed. Check the file names by, for
example, making a note of the list.
*** MESSAGE ***

FILE SAVE COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000
D Others 1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen
The SYSTEM DATA SAVE function provides a safeguard against free
copying of the system files.
User files, however, are not protected.
2 Names of saved files
Files saved from flash ROM to a memory card have the following
names :
Flash ROM File name in
Memory card
PMCRB PMC_RB. XXX

PMC 0.5M PCD_0.5M.XXX
PMC 1.0M PCD_10M.XXX
PMC 1.5M PCD_15M.XXX
CEX1.0M CEX_10M.XXX
CEX 2.0M CEX_20M.XXX
XXX corresponds to the file extension of MSDOS format files. A

number from 000 to 031 is specified for XXX. For example, if the
PMCRB file in flash ROM is saved to a memory card that does not yet
contain a file whose name begins with PMCRB, the saved file is
named PMCRB.000. If, however, that file is saved to a memory card that
already contains a file named PMCRB.000, the saved file is named
PMCRB.001. As files are added, the extension is incremented up to a
maximum of PMCRB.031. Any nolonger used numbers in the
sequence of the extension numbers are used in as cending order. If two
or more files having identical names but different extension numbers are
normally saved to the memory card, check the file names displayed
subsequently.
738
C.2.5
SRAM DATA BACKUP
Screen
D Description This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, programs,
and other data, retained after the CNC power in SRAM is turned off, to
and from a memory card.
D Screen configuration Select 4 SRAM DATA BACKUP on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN
MENU screen. The following screen is displayed.
(1) SRAM DATA BACKUP

(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
(3) 1. SRAM BACKUP (CNC MEMORY CARD)
2. RESTORE SRAM (MEMORY CARD CNC)
(4) END
(5) SRAM SIZE : 256K (BASIC)

(6) FILE NAME : SRAM256A. FDB
*** MESSAGE ***

(7) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(1) : Screen title

(3) : Menu
(5) : Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC
(6) : File name
(7) : Message
739
D Operating procedure
[Backing up data] 1 Select 1. SRAM BACKUP. The following confirmation message is
displayed. The backup file name may be displayed according to the
SRAM capacity.
2 Press [YES] to start backup.
*** MESSAGE ***

BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 If a backup file is already on the memory card, you will be prompted

to confirm whether to permit overwriting.
4 The name of the file being written to the memory card is displayed in
the FILE NAME: field.
SRAM SIZE : 0.5MB (BASIC)

FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A.FDB MEMORY CARD
Name of the file being

*** MESSAGE *** saved
SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.
5 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following

message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***

SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
[Restoring the data] 1 Select 2. RESTORE SRAM. The system displays the following
message. Press the [YES] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
2 The system displays the following message during restoration.
*** MESSAGE ***

RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.
3 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following

message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***

RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
740
D Others 1 Name of backup file

The name of the backup file written to the memory card by the SRAM
backup function depends on the size of the SRAM installed in the
CNC.
When the size of SRAM is 1MB or larger, backup files are created in
units of 512 KB.
Number
of 1 2 3 4 5 6
files
SRAM
size
256KB SRAM256A.FDB
0.5MB SRAM0_5A.FDB
1.0MB SRAM1_0A.FDB SRAM1_0B.FDB
2.0MB SRAM2_0A.FDB SRAM2_0B.FDB SRAM2_0C.FDB SRAM2_0D.FDB
3.0MB SRAM3_0A.FDB SRAM3_0B.FDB SRAM3_0C.FDB SRAM3_0D.FDB SRAM3_0E.FDB SRAM3_0F.FDB
The backup file for SRAM on the PMCRE, CAPII, or LCB board
will have the following extension:
Board MAIN PMCRE CAPII LCB
Extension FDB PMC CAP LCB
CAUTION
If data such as parameters was restored from a memory
card to SRAM in a system using an absolute pulse coder,
set bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 to 0, and set the
reference point again.
741
C.2.6
MEMORY CARD FILE
DELETE Screen
D Description This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.
(1) SRAM DATA LOADING 1/1

FILE DIRECTORY
(2) B1F1A_B.MEM
B1F1A_A1.MEM
(3) END
*** MESSAGE ***

(1) : Screen title. Tlhe current page number (n) and the total number
of pages (m) are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end.
(2) : Files on the memory card
(3) : Option for returning to the previous menu
(4) : Message
D Operating procedure 1 Press the [SELECT] key to select the name of the file to be deleted
from the memory card.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the
[YES] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 When a file has been deleted normally, display the following message.
Press the [SELECT] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
742
C.2.7
MEMORY CARD
FORMAT Function
D Description This function is used to format a memory card. Memory cards must be
formatted before they can be used for the first time or before they can be
reused after their data has been destroyed or lost because of, for example,
battery failure.
D Operating procedure 1 From the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select 7.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message.
Press the [YES] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
3 The system displays the following message during formatting :
*** MESSAGE ***

FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.
4 When a card has been formatted normally, the system display the
following message.
Press the [SELECT] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
743
C.2.8
LOAD BASIC SYSTEM
Function
D Description The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.
D Operating procedure From the MAIN MENU screen, select 9. END. The system displays
the ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO message. To terminate the
boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. Press the
[NO] soft key, and you will be brought back to the main menu.
*** MESSAGE ***

ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
1 After pressing the [YES] soft key

The system checks the NC BASIC system file in the flash ROM. The
system displays the following message :
*** MESSAGE ***

CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM.
When the NC BASIC system file is found to be normal, the system

sends the system file to DRAM and starts the NC basic system. During
loading, the system blinks the following message.
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING BASIC TO DRAM
If the contents of the NC BASIC SYSTEM file are found to have been
damaged or destroyed, the system returns to the processing selection
state, in exactly the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed.
744
2 If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing
selection state as shown below :
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1-01
1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING

2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5. SRAM DATA BACKUP
6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT
10.END
*** MESSAGE ***

SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
745
C.3 The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical
order.
ERROR MESSAGES
AND REQUIRED
ACTIONS
Message Description and required action
B BOOT ROM PARITY. The contents of flash memory containing boot software was de-
PLEASE POWER OFF. stroyed. Replace the CPU card.
C CHANGE MEMORY CARD. The memory card becomes full in the middle of SRAM backup op-
AND HIT YES OR NO. eration. Replace the card with a memory card containing enough
free space.
D DELETE ERROR. An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful. Retry the
HIT SELECT KEY. deletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may have
been damaged or destroyed. Replace the flash ROM module.
DEVICE ERROR (CNC x) An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful. Retry the
write operation. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may
have been damaged or destroyed. Repalce the flash ROM module.
F FILE SAVE ERROR. An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful. Check
HIT SELECT KEY. that the memory card is not damaged.
Note) Check that the memory cards battery is not exhusted, that its
circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted
into its slot.
FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file. Delete
any unnecessary files from flash ROM.
FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST. The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system. Put the
HIT SELECT. flash ROM module on the board.
I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE The selected file cannot be read into flash memory. The selected file
or the header information for flash ROM may have been damaged or
destroyed.
ILLEGAL FROM MODULE. The flash ROM module ID is illegal. Check the drawing No. of the flash
HIT SELECT KEY. ROM module.
ILLEGAL SRAM MODULE. The SRAM module ID is illegal. Check the drawing No. of the SRAM
HIT SELECT KEY. module.
L LOADING ERROR. An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.
HIT SELECT KEY. Do not touch the memory card while loading data.
746
Message Description and required action
M MAX EXTENSION OVER. The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031. Delete any
HIT SELECT KEY. unnecessary backup files from the memory card.
MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. The memory cards battery is exhausted. Replace the battery.
HIT SELECT.
MEMORY CARD FULL. The memory card is full. Delete any unnecessary files from the
HIT SELECT KEY. memory card. Alternatively, replace the memory card with another
card having sufficient free space.
MEMORY CARD IS NOT The use of this memory card is not supported. Use only FANUC
AVAILABLE. HIT SEL. recommended memory cards, as described in the order list.
MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. The memory card could not be accessed. Check that the memory card
HIT SELECT KEY is normal.
MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. The memory card is not inserted into its slot. Check that the memory
HIT SELECT KEY. card is pushed fully home.
MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HIT Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write inhibit
SELECT KEY. switch is set. Disable the write inhibit switch.
into its slot.
MEMORY CARD TYPE IS NOT Write has been attempted to an incompatible flash memory card. Use
AVAILABLE. only the flash ROM cards recommended by FANUC. Recommended
flash ROM cards are listed in the ordering list.
MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. Access to a memory card failed. The memory cards battery may have
HIT SELECT KEY. gone dead, the memory card may have been damaged electrically, or
the memory card may not be inserted in the slot securely.
MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. Access to the memory card has failed. Check whether the memory
HIT SELECT KEY. card is defective.
into its slot.
N NMI OCCURRED. A hardware or software error occurred. Determine the procedure

PLEASE POWER OFF. which causes the error, and report it to FANUC together with the series
and edition of the boot software.
P PLEASE FORMAT FLASH TYPE It is not possible to delete only specific files from a flash ROM card, due
CARD.HIT SEL. to the characteristics of the memory used. To delete a file it is neces-
sary to delete all files on the card, by using the FORMAT function.
R ROM PARITY ERROR: The NC BASIC is parity error. Check whether NC BASIC is in flash
NC BASIC. HIT SELECT. ROM, using SYSTEM DATA CHECK.
S SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR. An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed.
HIT SELECT KEY. Check that the memory card is normal.
into its slot.
SRAM PARITY OCCURRED. A parity error was detected during backup operation of SRAM (Cau-
PLEASE POWER OFF. tion).
747
CAUTION
1 Action to be taken when an SRAM parity error is detected during backup of SRAM in the boot
system
The SRAM area of each CNC shipped from the factory is cleared and is free of parity errors.
However, shock applied to the CNC during transportation may cause a parity error in the SRAM
area. A parity error may also occur in the SRAM area when the CNC was kept switched off for
one year or longer, and the battery has been exhausted. If a parity error occurs in the SRAM
area, the data held in the SRAM area is not guaranteed. However, the CNC does not always
use the entire SRAM area. A parity error is not detected by hardware unless the part containing
the error is read. Therefore, if a parity error occurs in an area not accessed by the CNC, the
CNC may operate normally. The SRAM backup function of the boot system reads the entire
SRAM area. So, a parity error may occur in the middle of backup operation even when the CNC
has operated normally. In this case, the SRAM data of the CNC is not guaranteed, and the data
cannot be backed up using the SRAM backup function of the boot system. Nevertheless, the
CNC may operate normally. So, it is recommended that necessary data be backed up using
the Floppy Cassette or Handy File, data all clear operation be performed, then the backed up
data be restored in the CNC. Once all clear operation is performed, the parity error can be
removed. Then, the SRAM backup function of the boot system can be used.
748
B63005EN/02 APPENDIX D. MEMORY CARD SLOT
D MEMRY CARD SLOT
D.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) . . . . . . . . 751
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
749
D. MEMORY CARD SLOT APPENDIX B63005EN/02
D.1 Whether a memory card slot is provided or not and the types (functions)
of memory cards usable in the slot vary depending on the hardware
OVERVIEW configuration as shown below:
Hardware Card slot on LCD unit Card slot on control unit
Type 1 Type A, type B No card slot
Type 2 Type A Type B

Type 6
Type 3 No card slot Type A, type B
Type 4 No card slot Type B

Type 5 (See NOTE given below.)
(Supplementary)
Types A and B indicate the types (functions) of memory cards. See
Section D.2. Types 1 to 6 indicate hardware configuration. See Section
D.3.
NOTE
The functions of type A (such as a software write function)
are implemented by open CNC functions.
750
D.2 Type A: SRAM memory card

FROM memory card Data I/O
MEMORY CARD Flash ATA card
TYPES (FUNCTIONS) Modem card (for remote diagnosis)
Type B: Ladder edit card (PMC ladder edit function)
NOTE
For details of the types of usable memory cards, see the
ordering list.
751
D. MEMORY CARD SLOT APPENDIX B63005EN/02
D.3
HARDWARE
CONFIGURATION
D Type 1 LCDmounted type
LCD
MDI
Card slot on
LCD unit
Control unit (LCDmounted type)
D Type 2 Standalone type (with an LCD unit)
Card slot on Optical cable LCD

control unit LCD MDI
link
card
Card slot on
LCD unit LCD unit for stand
alone type
Control unit
D Type 3 Standalone type (with a CRT/MDI unit)
Card slot on CRT

CRT Electrical wire
control unit
link
card
CRT/MDI unit
(The CRT/MDI unit for the Power
Control unit Mate i series is usable.)
752
D Type 4 Standalone type (with an intelligent terminal and FA keyboard)
Card slot on
control unit
PC
Optical cable
FA keyboard
HSSB
board
Intelligent terminal or
Control unit personal computer
D Type 5 Standalone type (with an intelligent terminal and FA keyboard)
Card slot on
MDI Electric wire Standard
control unit
card MDI
Optical cable
HSSB PC
board
Control unit
Intelligent terminal or
personal computer
D Type 6 Standalone type (with an LCD unit and MDI, and an intelligent terminal
and FA keyboard)
Card slot on
LCD unit
LCD
Card slot on Optical cable
control unit LCD MDI
link
card LCD unit for stand
alone type
HSSB Optical cable

board
PC
Control unit FA keyboard
Intelligent terminal or personal computer
753
E. LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE
OF STANDALONE TYPE UNIT APPENDIX B63005EN/02
E LED DISPLAY AND MAINTENANCE OF STANDALONE

TYPE UNIT
E.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755

E.2 LAYOUT OF THE 7SEGMENT LED AND
SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
E.3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
E.4 SUPPORTED EDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
754
B63005EN/02 APPENDIX OF STANDALONE TYPE UNIT
E.1 FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i (referred to as FS16i hereinafter) of

standalone type is equipped with a 7segment LED, rotary switch, and
OVERVIEW push switch.
When no CRT/MDI is included in the system configuration or when the
CRT/MDI becomes defective and cannot be used, battery backedup data
can be saved and restored by using the rotary switch and push switch.
When the CRT/MDI can be used, use these switches for maintenance of
the boot function.
755
E.2 The 7segment LED, rotary switch, and push switch are located as shown
below.
LAYOUT OF THE
7SEGMENT LED
AND SWITCHES
7segment LED (STATUS)
Rotary switch (MTSW)
Push switch (PSW)
756
E.3
OPERATION
E.3.1 Before turning on the power, select a function number by using the rotary
switch. When the power is turned on after the selection with the rotary
Operation Before
switch, the number corresponding to the selected function number is
PowerOn indicated on the LED. The indication blinks at intervals of about one
second.
E.3.2 Each function is assigned a number. This number is called a function

Function Number number hereinafter in this manual. The function numbers that can be
selected with the rotary switch are listed below. Do not set the reserved
function numbers. (If a reserved function number is set, the system
operates as if function number 0 were selected.)
Function
Explanation Remarks
number
0 Normal state. After terminating maintenance operation,

always set this number.
1 Reserved
2 Sets a device number for the display link function. (NOTE)
3 Reserved
4 Maintenance switch (NOTE)
5 Memory all clear (NOTE)
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Saves battery backedup main board data in a memory

card at a time.
9 Reserved
A Restores battery backedup main board data from a

memory card at a time.
B Reserved
C Reserved
D Reserved
E Reserved
F Reserved
NOTE
If the software edition is old, it cannot sometimes be used.
(See Section E.4, Supported Editions.)
757
E.3.3
SevenSegment LED
Display
E.3.3.1
NC status display Number displayed on LED Blink/not blink Description
Not blink Automatic operation is

paused, stopped, or reset.
(Rotation of character ) Not blink Automatic operation start

signal
When STL (F000#5) = 1
Number ( X ) Blink System alarm status
Number ( X ) Not blink Status change at poweron
E.3.3.2
LED display during LED indication Description
automatic operation
Automatic operation start signal
When STL (F000#5) = 1
E.3.3.3
LED display when the Number displayed on LED Blink/not blink Description
push switch is pressed
Not blink The push switch has been
pressed normally.
NOTE
If the software edition is old, the above indication may not
appear. (See Section E.4, Supported Editions.)
758
E.3.3.4 When a system alarm is issued, a number blinks on the 7segment LED.
LED display when a Number on LED System alarm
Type of system alarm
system alarm is issued (blinking) number
In the 900s ROM PARITY
In the 910s SRAM PARITY,

DRAM PARITY
In the 920s SERVO ALARM
In the 930s CPU INTERRUPT,

SRAM ECC ERROR
In the 950s PMC SYSTEM ALARM
In the 970s NON MASK INTERRUPT,

BUS ERROR
Others Other system alarms
759
E.3.3.5
Display on the Number displayed On/off status of
Meaning
7segment LED at on LED 4 LEDs
poweron jjjj Power is not on.
JJJJ Power is turned on, but the CPU

does not yet start.
JJJJ NC system loading is started by the

boot system.
jJJJ The NC system has started, and

RAM initialization has terminated.
JjJJ Wait for ID setting for each board
jjJJ ID setting for each board has termi-

nated, and CRT initialization has ter-
minated.
JJjJ FANUC bus initialization has termi-

nated.
jJjJ Loading from FROM has termi-

nated, PMC initialization has termi-
nated, and the series/edition screen
is displayed.
JjjJ Hardware configuration information

setting for each module has com-
pleted.
jjjJ PMC ladder initialization has com-

pleted.
jJJj Wait for digital servo and spindle ini-

tialization
JJJj Digital servo and spindle initialization

has completed.
Jjjj Initialization has completed. In nor-

mal operation state.
j : Off J : On
760
E.3.4
Operation of Each
Function
D Function number 2 This function sets a device number for the display link function.
(1) Check that number 2 blinks on the LED, and press the push switch.
(2) Number 2 is displayed on the LED. Press the push switch.
(3) Sixteen numbers from 0 to F are displayed on the LED one by one at
intervals of about one second. When the device number you want to
set appears on the LED, press the push switch.
(4) The selected device number blinks on the LED. Press the push switch.
(5) The device number used for the display link function is displayed on
the LED.
D Function number 4 This function allows the maintenance switches to be used to display data
without using any display unit.
(1) Check that number 4 blinks on the LED. Press the push switch.
(4) Numbers 0 and 2 are displayed alternately on the LED at intervals of
about one second. When 2 is displayed, press the push switch.
(5) The device number used for the display link function is displayed on
the LED.
D Function number 5 This function clears all the battery backedup SRAM data. The device
number for the display link function is also cleared. Once the device
number has been cleared, the device number is set to 0.
(1) Check that number 5 blinks on the LED. Press the push switch.
(3) The display on the LED changes from to F to 9 to 8 to 7 to 6 to 5 to
4 to 3 to 2 to 1 to 0 in this order.
(4) After allclear operation terminates normally, the LED display stops
changing at number 0.
(5) Turn off the power, set the rotary switch to 0 (normal state), then turn
on the power again.
761
D Function number 6 This function saves battery backedup main board data in a memory card
at a time. The data saved using this function can be restored at a time by
performing the operation for function number A or by using the
SRAMDATABACKUP function of the boot function.
(1) In the memory card slot (MEMORY CARD CNM1B) of the control
unit, insert a formatted memory card having at least 512 KB of
available space.
(2) Check that number 8 blinks on the LED, and press the push switch.
(3) While data is being saved in the memory card, the LED indication
turns clockwise.
(4) If the data cannot fit in one memory card, number 3 blinks. Replace
the memory card with another one, and press the push switch.
(5) If the protect switch of the memory card is not released or if the battery
capacity of the memory card is insufficient, number 2 blinks on the
LED. Replace the memory card with another one, and press the push
switch.
(6) When the data has been saved normally, number 0 is displayed on the
LED. If the data cannot be saved normally, number 1 is displayed on
the LED.
(7) If SRAM PARITY occurs during data save operation, number 1 blinks
on the LED. In this case, it is impossible to save the data at a time.
Back up individual data items one by one, then perform allclear
operation.
D Function number A This function restores battery backedup main board data from a memory
card at a time.
(1) Insert the memory card in the memory card slot (MEMORY CARD
CNM1B) of the control unit.
(2) Check that A blinks on the LED, and press the push switch.
(3) While data is being restored from the memory card, the LED
indication turns counterclockwise.
(4) If the entire data cannot be restored from the single memory card,
number 3 blinks. Replace the memory card with the next memory
card, and press the push switch.
(5) If the memory card cannot be recognized correctly, number 2 blinks
on the LED. Check the memory card status, and press the push switch.
(6) When the data has been restored normally, number 0 is displayed on
the LED. If the data cannot be restored normally, number 1 is
displayed on the LED.
762
E.4 If an old software edition is used, part of the functions cannot be used.
SUPPORTED D NC software (common to each series)/edition 02
EDITIONS D Boot software (60M3 series)/edition 11
When editions earlier than those mentioned above are used, the following
functions cannot be used:
Function number 2 (display link function: Setting a device number)
Function number 4 (display link function: Displaying a device
number)
Function number 5 (memory all clear)
LED display immediately after the push switch is pressed (See Section
E.3.3.3.)
763
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC
(BOOTUP AND IPL) APPENDIX B63005EN/02
F MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOTUP AND IPL)
F.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765

F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
F.3.1 BOOT SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
F.3.2 IPL SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
F.4 OTHER SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
F.4.1 CNC ALARM SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
F.4.2 STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
F.4.3 OPTION SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
764
B63005EN/02 APPENDIX (BOOTUP AND IPL)
F.1 Ncboot32.exe provides the following functions:

OVERVIEW S BOOT screen (for CNC system data maintenance, SRAM backup, and
so forth)
S IPL screen (for clearing SRAM, and so forth)
S Display of the CNC poweron screen
S Display of CNC alarm screen
S Reconnection in case of the occurrence of a communication error
S Start of a registered application program
In the open CNC, CNC maintenance can be performed with
Ncboot32.exe. Ncboot32.exe is copied in the System folder of Windows
(System32 folder in Windows NT) at driver installation. At the start of
Windows, Ncboot32.exe starts automatically, and resides in the system
tray.
(Icon at the center)
Supplementary 1: Multiconnection
Ncboot32.exe supports HSSB multiconnection. The CNCs connected
by HSSB are managed as nodes. The boot, IPL, and system alarm screens
are displayed in windows that are opened independently for each node.
Supplementary 2: Termination method

Normally, Ncboot32.exe need not be terminated. However, to terminate
Ncboot32.exe, rightclick the icon in the system tray, and click End in the
popup menu. When the Ncboot32.exe window is open, End cannot be
selected.
765
F.2 With the rotary switch on the HSSB board on the CNC side (when the
CNC does not have the PC function) or on the motherboard of the CNC
CHANGING START (when the CNC has the PC function), the start sequence can be changed.
SEQUENCES Position 0 can be selected as required to perform maintenance using the
boot and IPL screens.
Position 0 (maintenance)
1. Wait until communication with the CNC is established.
2. Display the boot screen.
3. Display the IPL screen.
4. Display the CNC poweron screen.
5. Initialize the work area for the data window library.
6. Start a registered application program.
7. Perform monitoring for communication errors and CNC system
alarms.
Position 1 (normal operation)
1. Wait until communication with the CNC is established.
alarms.
Position 2 (asynchronous start)
1. The CNC starts without waiting for communication to be established.
2. After communication is established, the PC performs initialization
described below.
alarms.
766
D Rotary switch position D 160i/180i/210i motherboard with the PC function

A20B8100014x
Rear of the unit
Rotary switch
A20B8100046x
Rear of the unit
Rotary switch
767
D 160is/180is/210is motherboard with the PC function

A20B8100054x
Rear of the unit
Rotary switch
D HSSB interface board of 160i/180i/210i of LCDmounted type
Rotary switch
768
D HSSB interface board of 160i/180i/210i of standalone type
Rotary switch
769
F.3
EXPLANATION OF
NOTE
SCREENS
A mouse is required to display Ncboot32.exe screens.
F.3.1
Boot Screen
When the subboard is provided, select a board in the [Board] list.

The area where the file is to be placed can be changed by using the
[Setting...] button.
Select the memory card on the CNC or a PC folder. The file location may
be changed at any time.
770
F.3.1.1 The following screen is used for manipulating system data (including
System data control software and ladder programs) on the NC.
manipulation
[Load...] opens the file selection screen. Specify a file to be loaded.

[Save] saves the selected NC system data in a file.
[Check] checks the selected NC system data.
[Delete] deletes the selected NC system data.
771
F.3.1.2 This screen is used to store and restore NC SRAM data.

SRAM operation
[Backup] stores SRAM data, and [Restore] restores SRAM data. In the
center of the screen, the progress status is displayed. As with the NC, the
backup file name is determined automatically from the SRAM size, and
cannot be renamed.
772
F.3.1.3 The following screen is used for operating files on a memory card in the
File operation CNC or in a folder of the PC.
[Delete] deletes a selected file.

[Format] formats the memory card. This button is valid when the memory
card is selected by [Setting...]
[Refresh] updates the file list to the latest state. After changing memory
cards or floppy disks, click this button.
773
F.3.2
IPL Screen
NOTE
The contents of the IPL screen vary depending on the CNC
model. Follow the instructions displayed in the menu.
The CNC allows functions to be performed according to the key status set
at poweron.
The open CNC does not allow this operation. On the IPL screen, however,
equivalent functions can be executed.
For details of the menu on the IPL screen and supported functions, see the
table given in Section F.3.2.1.
774
F.3.2.1
Functions on the IPL Corresponding MDI
screen key operation at
Title on IPL screen poweron
(Operation with a
standard CNC)
0. EXIT
1. 0. CANCEL
MEMORY
CLEAR 1. ALL MEMORY 0. CANCEL
1. ALL <DELETE> + <RESET>
2. SUB <CAM> + <2>
3. LOADER <CAN> + <5>
2. PARAMETER AND 0. CANCEL

OFFSET 1. MAIN <RESET>
2. SUB <RESET> + <2>
3. LOADER <RESET> + <5>
3. ALL PROGRAM 0. CANCEL

1. ALL <DELETE>
2. MAIN <DELETE> + <1>
3. SUB <DELETE> + <2>
4. LOADER <DELETE> + <5>
4. ADDITIONAL SRAM 0. CANCEL

1. ALL <O> + <DELETE>
2. MAIN <O> + <1>
3. SUB <O> + <2>
5. PMC 0. CANCEL
1. 0. CANCEL
PARAMETER 1. CNC <Z> + <O>
2. LOADER <Z> + <5>
2. PROGRAM 0. CANCEL
1. CNC <Z> + <O>
2. LOADER <Z> + <5>
6. CAPII 0. CANCEL
1. SUB <SP>
MEMORY
2. CONVERSA- <I>
TIONNAL
DATA
775
Corresponding MDI
key operation at
Title on IPL screen poweron
(Operation with a
standard CNC)
2. 0. CANCEL
SETTING
1. IGNORE OVER 0. CANCEL
TRAVEL ALARM 1. CNC <CAN> + <P>
2. LOADER <CAN> + <L>
2. START WITHOUT 0. CANCEL

LADDER 1. CNC SIDE <CAN> + <Z>
2.
LOADER SIDE < . > + <5>
3. CLANGUAGE 0. CANCEL
EXECUTOR 1. MAKE VOID <M> + <0>
CEXEC
2. BOOTS UP <M> + <3>
CEXEC APL
9. 0. CANCEL
OTHERS
1. PCODE LOADER <CAN> + <PROG>
776
F.4
OTHER SCREENS
F.4.1
CNC Alarm Screen
This screen appears when a system alarm is issued in the CNC. (The
above screen is an example. The displayed information varies depending
on the system alarm issued in the CNC.)
777
F.4.2 To open the status screen, doubleclick the icon in the system tray.
Status Screen Alternatively, in the menu popped up by rightclicking, click OPEN.
Node: Node number

Name: Node name. (Define the node name in advance by using the
device manager in Windows 95/98 or the HSSB applet on the
control panel in Windows NT.)
Bus: Hardware communication status (0: Communication error, 1:
Communication established)
Status: Status (in hexadecimal)
Bit 1: Rotary switch position 1
Bit 2: End of boot processing
Bit 3: End of IPL processing
Bit 4: Rotary switch position 2
Bit 8: CNC system alarm
Pop up this window on communication error: By checking this item,
this screen is opened automatically when a communication error
occurs.
Clicking the [Close] button closes the screen.
Clicking the [Setting...] button opens the option setting screen.
Clicking the [About...] button opens the version information screen.
778
F.4.3 On the option setting screen, application programs can be registered.

Option Setting Screen When a program uses the data window library, the program does not run
unless it is started after the work area for the data window library is
initialized. By registering such a program in Ncboot32.exe, it can be
executed after the initialization of the work area for the data window
library.
Application programs are registered for each node.
[Node] selects a node. In the list box in the center of the screen, the
programs registered for the selected node are displayed.
[New...] registers a new program. When a blank character is included in
the path, it is enclosed with double quotation marks.
[Remove] deletes a selected line.
[Edit] allows editing of a selected line. This button is used to edit
arguments. The character string %d in the command line is replaced by
a node number. To represent % itself, describe %%.
Example: To start basic operation package 1 after initialization of the

work area for the data window library of the node, describe the
following:
C:\Program Files\Basic Operation Package 1\WinBOP32.exe

/Node=%d
779
G. FSSB STARTUP PROCEDURE/
MATERIALS APPENDIX B63005EN/02
G FSSB STARTUP PROCEDURE/MATERIALS
G.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781

G.2 SLAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
G.3 AUTOMATIC SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
G.3.1 [SAMPLE SETTING 1] GENERAL
CONFIGURATION (SEMICLOSED LOOP) . 785
G.3.2 [SAMPLE SETTING 2] GENERAL
CONFIGURATION (CLOSED LOOP) . . . . . . . 786
G.3.3 [SAMPLE SETTING 3] WHEN
THE CAXIS IS A Cs AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
G.3.4 [SAMPLE SETTING 4] TANDEM
CONTROL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
G.3.5 [SAMPLE SETTING 5] WHEN THE SIMPLE
ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (EGB)
FUNCTION IS USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
G.4 MANUAL SETTING 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
G.5 MANUAL SETTING 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
G.6 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
G.7 ACTIONS FOR TROUBLE ENCOUNTERED
AT STARTUP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
G.8 EXAMPLES OF SETTINGS USING
OTHER CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
G.8.1 EXAMPLE 1: LEARNING CONTROL . . . . . . . 808
G.8.2 EXAMPLE 2: WHEN A 2AXIS AMPLIFIER
IS SHARED BY TWO PATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
G.9 FSSB DATA DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
G.9.1 AMPLIFIER SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . 812
G.9.2 AXIS SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
G.9.3 AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE SCREEN . . . . . 814
780
B63005EN/02 APPENDIX MATERIALS
G.1 With a system that uses the FSSB, the parameters below need to be set for
axis setting. (Set other parameters as usually done.)
OVERVIEW
D No. 1023
D No. 1905
D No. 1910 to 1919
D No. 1936, 1937
For setting of these parameters, three methods are available.
1. Automatic setting
By entering data including the relationship between axes and
amplifiers on the FSSB setting screen, a calculation for axis setting is
made automatically, and parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through
1919, 1936, and 1937 are automatically set.
2. Manual setting 2
Enter desired values directly in all of parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910
through 1919, 1936, and 1937.
Before setting the parameters, fully understand the functions of the
parameters.
3. Manual setting 1(NOTE)
Based on the setting of No. 1023, default axis setting is performed.
Parameter Nos. 1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937 need not be
set. Automatic setting is not performed.
NOTE
With manual setting 1, usable functions are limited. So,
when starting up the FSSB, use automatic setting or manual
setting 2 whenever possible.
781
G.2 In a system using the FSSB, the CNC, servo amplifiers, and pulse
modules are connected with each other via optical cables. These
SLAVE amplifiers and pulse modules are referred to as slaves. Assume that a
2axis amplifier consists of two slaves, and a 3axis amplifier consists
of three slaves. Slave numbers (1, 2, 3, ..., 10) are assigned to the slaves
in ascending order; a younger number is assigned to a slave that is closer
to the CNC.
Slave
No.
Control Program
axis axis name
No. No. 1020 1 axis AMP
Laxis
2 axis AMP
Maxis
Laxis
2 axis AMP
Maxis
M1
1 axis AMP
M2
Note) M1/M2: Pluse Module 1st/2nd
782
G.3 When the following parameters are set, automatic setting can be
performed using the FSSB setting screen:
AUTOMATIC
Bit 0 of No. 1902 = 0
SETTING Bit 1 of No. 1902 = 0
For automatic setting on the FSSB setting screen, use the procedure
below.
1 Set a servo axis number in No. 1023.
Be sure to match an axis number set in No. 1023 with the total number
of axes of the servo amplifiers connected via optical cables.
2 On the servo initialization screen, initialize the servo parameters.
3 Turn off then on the power to the CNC.

.
5 Pressing the continuous menu key several times displays

[FSSB].
6 Pressing soft key [FSSB] switches the screen display to the amplifier
setting screen (or the FSSB setting screen selected previously), and
displays the following soft keys:
[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
7 Press soft key [AMP].

8 On the amplifier setting screen, set a controlled axis number connected
to each amplifier.
The amplifier setting screen lists the slaves in ascending order of slave
numbers from top to bottom. So, when setting controlled axis
numbers, consider which amplifier axis is to be connected to which
CNC axis, sequentially, starting with the amplifier axis closest to the
NC. On this setting screen, 0 and duplicate numbers cannot be entered.
No. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. [AXIS] NAME

1 A1L SVM 40AL [ 1 ] X
2 A1M SVM 12A [ 2 ] Y
3 A2L SVU 20A [ 3 ] Z
4 A3L SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
5 A3M SVM 80A [ 5 ] B
7 A4L SVM 40AS [ 6 ] C
NO. EXTRA PCB ID

>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINT ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
9 Press soft key [SETING]. (This soft key appears when a value is
entered.)

.
783

[FSSB].
setting screen, and displays the following soft keys:
13 Press soft key [AXIS].

14 On the axis setting screen, set information on each axis.
15 The axis setting screen lists the CNC axes in ascending order of axis
numbers from top to bottom.
When any of the following is to be performed for each axis, the setting
of this screen is required:
S Use of a separate detector
S Exclusive use of a DSP (CPU for servo control) by one axis (for use
of a current loop period of 125 s or learning control, for example)
S Use of a CS axis controlled axis
S Use of tandem control
(AXIS SETTING)
AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 IDSP Cs TNDM
1 X A1L 1 0 0 0 0
2 Y A1M 0 1 0 0 0
3 Z A2L 0 0 0 0 0
4 A A3L 2 0 0 0 0
5 B A3M 0 2 0 0 0
6 C A4L 0 0 0 0 0
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
16 Press soft key [SETING]. (This soft key appears when a value is
entered.)
This operation starts an automatic calculation, and parameter Nos. 1023,
1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937 are automatically set.
Bit 1 of parameter No. 1902 is set to 1 to indicate that each of these
parameters has been set. When the power is turned off then back on, axis
settings are made according to each parameter.
m Notes on using the simple electronic gear box (EGB) function
When using the simple electronic gear box (EGB) function, perform
EGB axis setting (parameter No. 7771) before automatic setting using
the FSSB setting screen. Without EGB axis setting, correct values
cannot be set by automatic setting using the FSSB setting screen.
784
G.3.1
[Sample Setting 1]
General Configuration
(SemiClosed Loop)
Zaxis
Aaxis
Xaxis
Yaxis
Step 1 Set the following with parameter No. 1023:

X:1
Y:2
Z:3
A:4
Step 2 Initialize the servo parameters for each axis.
Step 3 Turn on then off the power to the CNC.
Step 4 Enter the axis numbers on the amplifier setting screen.
(AMPLIFIER SETTING)
1 A1L SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y
2 A2L SVM 40A [ 1 ] X
3 A3L SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
4 A3M SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
Step 5 Press soft key [SETING]. (This soft key appears when a value
is entered.)
Step 6 Press function key SYSTEM
.
785
Step 7 Pressing the continuous menu key several times displays

[FSSB].
Step 8 Pressing soft key [FSSB] switches the screen display to the
amplifier setting screen, and displays the following soft keys:
Step 9 Press soft key [AXIS].

Step 10 Press soft key [(OPRT)] without entering any data, then press soft
key [SETING].
Step 11 Turn off then on the power to the CNC. This completes the
setting.
G.3.2
[Sample Setting 2]
General Configuration
(Closed Loop)
Connector 1 (CN1)
Connector 2 (CN2)
Zaxis
Aaxis scale
Xaxis
scale
Yaxis
Machine side

X:1
Y:2
Z:3
A:4
786
(Amplifier setting)
1 A1L SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y
2 A2L SVM 40A [ 1 ] X
3 A3L SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
4 A3M SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)

.

[FSSB].

Step 10 Set the separate detector on the axis setting screen. (Pulse
module: M1/M2)
(AXIS SETTING)
AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1DSP Cs TNDM
1 X A2L 0 0 0 0 0
2 Y A1L 1 0 0 0 0
3 Z A3M 0 0 0 0 0
4 A A3L 2 0 0 0 0
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
Step 11 Press soft key [SETING]. (This soft key is displayed when a
value is entered.)
Step 12 Set bit 1 of parameter No. 1815 to 1 for the Yaxis and Aaxis.
setting.
787
G.3.3
[Sample Setting 3]
When the CAxis is a
Cs Axis
Zaxis
Aaxis
Xaxis
Yaxis
Caxis
1 Spindle Amplifiers Cs contour axis control

X:1
Z:2
C : 1
Y:3
A:4
Step 3 Initialize the spindle parameters for the spindle.
788
(AMPLIFIER SETTING)
1 A1L SVM 40A [ 2 ] Z
2 A2L SVM 40A [ 1 ] X
3 A3L SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
4 A3M SVM 80A [ 3 ] Y
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)

.

[FSSB].

Step 11 Set the Cs contour axis on the axis setting screen. (Cs)
(AXIS SETTING)
1 X A2L 0 0 0 0 0
2 Z A1L 0 0 0 0 0
3 C 0 0 0 1 0
4 Y A3M 0 0 0 0 0
5 A A3L 0 0 0 0 0
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)
setting.
789
G.3.4 The following two pairs of axes are tandem axes:

[Sample Setting 4] [The Xaxis is a master axis, and the Aaxis is a slave axis.]
Tandem Control [The Yaxis is a master axis, and the Baxis is a slave axis.]
Configuration
4 servo amplifiers Baxis
Zaxis
Aaxis
Xaxis
Yaxis
Machine side

X:1
Y:3
Z:5
A:2
B:4
No.1010=3
No.1817#6=1 (X axis, A axis, Y axis, B axis)
Tandem control option
790
(AMPLIFIER SETTING)
1 A1L SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y
2 A2L SVM 40A [ 1 ] X
3 A3L SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
4 A3M SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z
5 A4L SVM 40A [ 5 ] B
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)

.

[FSSB].

Step 10 Set the tandem axes on the axis setting screen. (TNDM)
(AXIS SETTING)
1 X A2L 0 0 0 0 1
2 Y A1L 0 0 0 0 3
3 Z A3M 0 0 0 0 0
4 A A3L 0 0 0 0 2
5 B A4L 0 0 0 0 4
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)
setting.
791
G.3.5 [EGB workpiece axis: Aaxis, EGB dummy axis: Baxis (No. 7771 =
[Sample Setting 5] 5)]
When the Simple
Electronic Gear Box
(EGB) Function is Used
Connector 1 (CN1)
3 Servo Amplifiers
Baxis
scale
Zaxis
Aaxis
Xaxis
Yaxis Machine side

X:1
Y:2
Z:5
A:3
B:4
No.7771=5
No.7772, No.7773
No.2011#0=1 (A axis, B axis)
Option parameter
792
(AMPLIFIER SETTING)
1 A1L SVM 40A [ 2 ] Y
2 A2L SVM 40A [ 1 ] X
3 A3L SVM 40A [ 4 ] A
4 A3M SVM 80A [ 3 ] Z
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)

.

[FSSB].

Step 10 Set the EGB dummy axis on the axis setting screen. (M1)
(AXIS SETTING)
1 X A2L 0 0 0 0 0
2 Y A1L 0 0 0 0 0
3 Z A3M 0 0 0 0 0
4 A A3L 0 0 0 0 0
5 B 1 0 0 0 0
>
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
is entered.)
setting.
793
G.4 When the following parameters are set, each axis can be set manually:
MANUAL SETTING 2 No.1902#0=1
No.1902#1=0
When performing manual setting, set parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910
through 1919, 1936, and 1937, fully understanding their functions.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1902 ASE FMD
[Data type] Bit

#0 (FMD) The FSSB setting mode is:
0 : Automatic setting mode. (When data including the relationship
between axes and amplifiers is set on the FSSB setting screen,
parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937 are
automatically set.)
1 : Manual setting 2 mode. (Parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through
1919, 1936, and 1937 are set manually.)
#1 (ASE) When the FSSB setting mode is the automatic setting mode (when bit 0 of
parameter No. 1902 = 0), automatic setting is:
0 : Not completed.
1 : Completed.
(This bit is automatically set to 1 when automatic setting is
completed.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1905 PM2 PM1 FSL
[Data type] Bit axis

#0 (FSL) The type of interface between servo amplifiers and servo software is:
0 : Fast type.
1 : Slow type.
Two servo data transfer interface types are available: the fast type and
slow type.
Set this bit so that the following conditions are satisfied:
D When a 1axis amplifier is used, both of the fast and slow types can
be used.
D When a 2axis amplifier is used, the fast type must not be used for
both axes. The slow type can be used for both axes.
D When a 3axis amplifier is used, the first and second axes must
satisfy the condition for a 2axis amplifier, and the third axis must
satisfy the condition for a oneaxis amplifier.
D With an axis for which an odd number is set in parameter No. 1023,
the fast type must be used. The slow type can also be used,
however, for an EGB workpiece axis, learningcontrol axis,
highspeed current loop axis, and highspeed interface axis.
D Only the slow type can be used with an axis for which an even
number is set in parameter No. 1023. (Be sure to set this bit to 1).
794
Con- Program Servo Interface

trolled axis name axis No. type
axis No. No.1020 No.1023 Fast/Slow
2axis AMP
1axis AMP
2axis AMP
1axis AMP
#6 (PM1) The first pulse module is:

0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
#7 (PM2) The second pulse module is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
This parameter is automatically set by data input on the FSSB setting
screen when the FSSB setting mode is the automatic setting mode (when
bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 = 0). When the manual setting 2 mode is used
(when bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 = 1), be sure to enter necessary data
directly.
When a pulse module is used, connector numbers (parameter Nos. 1936
and 1937) need to be set.
PRM 1910 Address conversion table value for slave 1 (ATR)
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 16, 40, 48
Set an address conversion table value for each of slave 1 through 10.
795
The slave is the generic name of a servo amplifier or pulse module

connected to the CNC via an FSSB optical cable. The numbers from 1
to 10 are assigned to the slaves in ascending order; a younger number is
assigned to a slave that is closer to the CNC. A 2axis amplifier consists
of two slaves, and a 3axis amplifier consists of three slaves. Set each of
the parameters as described below according to which of the three cases
is applicable: the slave is an amplifier, the slave is a pulse module, or there
is no slave.
` When the slave is an amplifier:
Set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting of parameter No.
1023 for the axis to which the amplifier is assigned.
` When the slave is a pulse module:
S For the first pulse module (closest to the CNC), set 16.
S For the second pulse module (farthest from the CNC), set 48.
` When there is no slave:
Set 40.
When using the simple electronic gear box (EGB) function, observe the
note below.
NOTE
When using the simple electronic gear (EGB) function
An EGB axis (axis set in parameter No. 7771) actually
requires no amplifier. However, make a setting, assuming
that the EGB axis is connected to a dummy amplifier. That
is, as the address conversion table value for a nonexistent
slave, set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting
of parameter No. 1023 for the EGB axis instead of 40.
These parameters are automatically set by data input on the FSSB setting
directly.
796
` Axis configuration and example of parameter setting
Slave ATR
No. No.1910 AXIS
Control Axis Name Servo
X1919
No. No.1020 Axis No.
No.1023 1 axis AMP
Laxis
2 axis AMP
Maxis
Laxis
2 axis AMP
Maxis
M1
1 axis AMP
M2
Slave ATR
No. No.1910 AXIS
Control Axis Name Servo
X1919
No. No.1020 Axis No.
No.1023 1 axis AMP
Laxis
2 axis AMP
Maxis
Laxis
2 axis AMP
Maxis
M1
1 axis AMP
M2
797
` Axis configuration and example of parameter setting when the simple

electronic gear box (EGB) function is used
(EGB workpiece axis: Aaxis, EGB axis: Baxis (parameter No.
7771 = 5))
Slave ATR
No. No.1910 AXIS
Control Axis Name Servo X1919
Axis No. No.1020 Axis No.
No.1023
1 axis AMP
Laxis
2 axis AMP
Maxis
Laxis
2 axis AMP
Maxis
M1
M2
PRM 1936 Connector number for the first pulse module
PRM 1937 Connector number for the second pulse module
[Data type] Byte axis

When using a pulse module, set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from
the pulse module connector number for each axis. That is, for connector
numbers 1 to 8, set the values 0 to 7. Moreover, set bits 6 and 7 of
parameter No. 1905. Set 0 for an axis for which no pulse module is used.
The user can freely determine which connector to use for which axis. Use
connector numbers, starting with younger numbers. For example,
connector number 4 cannot be used without using connector number 3.
798
Example:
Con- First con- Second No.1936 No.1937 No.1905
trolled nector connector (#7,#6)
axis number number
X 1 Not used 0 0 0,1
Y Not used 2 0 1 1,0
Z Not used 1 0 0 1,0
A Not used Not used 0 0 0,0
B 2 Not used 1 0 0,1
C Not used 3 0 2 1,0
These parameters are automatically set by data input on the FSSB setting
directly.
` Axis configuration and example of parameter setting in the manual
setting 2 mode
AXIS
Control Axis Name Pulse Module

Axis No. No.1020 Connector
1 axis AMP
Laxis
2 axis AMP
Maxis
Laxis
2 axis AMP
Maxis
M1
1 axis AMP
M2
No. 1902#0
FSBMD
799
No. 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919
0 1 2 3 4 16 5 48 40 40
No. 1023 1905#0 1905#6 1905#7 1936 1937

FSBSL FSBM1 FSBM2
X 1 0 1 0 0 0
Y 3 0 0 1 0 1
Z 4 1 0 1 0 0
A 2 1 0 0 0 0
B 5 0 1 0 1 0
C 6 1 0 1 0 2
800
G.5 When the following parameters are set, manual setting 1 is enabled:
MANUAL SETTING 1 Bit 0 of No. 1092 = 0
Bit 1 of No. 1902 = 0
Nos. 1910 through 1919 = 0 (all set to 0)
In manual setting 1, a setting is made at poweron so that the value set in
parameter No. 1023 is assumed to be a slave number. That is, an axis for
which the value of parameter No. 1023 is 1 is connected to the amplifier
closest to the CNC. An axis for which the value of parameter No. 1023
is 2 is connected to the amplifier next closest to the CNC.
Bit 0 of No. 1092 = 0
Bit 1 of No. 1902 = 0
Nos. 1910 through 1919 = 0 (all set to 0)
Control Program Servo

Axis No. Axis Name Axis
No.1020 Name
No.1023
Note) M1/M2 : Pluse Module 1 st/2 nd
Note that some functions and settings cannot be used in manual setting
1 as described below.
D No pulse module can be used.
This means that no separate position detector can be used.
D Set sequential numbers in parameter No. 1023.
For example, 3 cannot be set for an axis without setting 2 for any axis.
D The following servo functions cannot be used:
- Learning control
- Highspeed current loop
- Simple electronic gear box (EGB)
801
G.6 Alarms related to pulse coders

ALARMS NC
alarm Message Description
No.
360 n AXIS : ABNORMAL A checksum error occurred in the builtin

CHECKSUM (INT) pulse coder.
361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE A phase data error occurred in the builtin
DATA (INT) pulse coder.
362 n AXIS : ABNORMAL A rotation speed count error occurred in the

REV.DATA (INT) builtin pulse coder.
363 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CLOCK A clock error occurred in the builtin pulse
(INT) coder.
364 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE A soft phase data error occurred in the built
ALARM (INT) in pulse coder.
365 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (INT) An LED error occurred in the builtin pulse
coder.
366 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (INT) A feedback error occurred in the builtin
pulse coder.
367 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the builtin pulse
coder.
368 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ER- A data error occurred in the builtin pulse
ROR (INT) coder.
369 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ER- A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the
ROR (INT) builtin pulse coder.
380 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (EXT) An LED error occurred in the separate pulse
coder.
381 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE A phase data error occurred in the separate
(EXT LIN) linear scale.
382 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (EXT) A count error occurred in the separate pulse
coder.
383 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (EXT) A feedback error occurred in the separate
pulse coder.
384 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE A soft phase data error occurred in the sep-
ALARM (EXT) arate pulse coder.
385 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ER- A data error occurred in the separate pulse
ROR (EXT) coder.
386 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ER- A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the
ROR (EXT) separate pulse coder.
802
Alarms related to servo amplifiers

NC
No.
430 n AXIS : SV. MOTOR OVER- A servo module overheat occurred.

HEAT
431 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD A converter (PSM) overheat occurred.
432 n AXIS : CNV. LOWVOLT The control power supply voltage (24 V) has
CON./POWFAULT dropped.
433 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT DC The DC link voltage has dropped.
LINK
436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL The digital servo software detected the soft
(OVC) thermal state (OVC).
438 n AXIS : INV. ABNORMAL The current of the main circuit is too high.
CURRENT
439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT The DC link voltage is too high.

POWER
440 n AXIS : CNV. EX DECEL- The regenerative discharge amount is too

ERATION POW. high.
441 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CUR- The digital servo software detected an ab-
RENT OFFSET normality in the motor current detection cir-
cuit.
443 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING FAN The internal stirring fan failed.
FAILURE
445 n AXIS : SOFT DISCON- The digital servo software detected a broken
NECT ALARM wire in the detector.
446 n AXIS : HARD DISCON- A broken wire in the builtin pulse coder
NECT ALARM was detected by hardware(NOTE).
447 n AXIS : HARD DISCON- A broken wire in the separate detector was
NECT (EXT) detected by hardware.
448 n AXIS : UNMATCHED The sign of feedback data from the builtin
FEEDBACK ALARM pulse coder differs from the sign of the feed-
back data from the separate detector.
NOTE
This alarm is not issued with the FS16C and FS16i.
FBAL (bit 1 of alarm 1) may be set to 1 in the following cases:
S Hard broken wire in the separate pulse coder (bit 1 of
alarm 1 = 1, bit 7 of alarm 2 = 1, bit 4 of alarm 2 = 1
S Soft broken wire (bit 1 of alarm 1 = 1)
S Count error alarm (bit 1 of alarm 1 = 1, bit 7 of alarm 2 =
1, bit 3 of alarm 3 = 1)
803
Alarms related to servo amplifiers

NC
No.
460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCON- FSSB communication was disconnected

NECT suddenly. The possible causes are as fol-
lows:
1) The FSSB communication cable is dis-
connected or broken.
2) The power to the amplifier dropped sud-
denly.
3) The amplifier issued a lowvoltage
alarm.
461 n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP IN- Both axes of a 2axis amplifier were as-
TERFACE signed to the fast type interface.
462 n AXIS : SEND CNC DATA Because of an FSSB communication error, a

FAILED slave could not receive correct data.
463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE DATA Because of an FSSB communication error,

FAILED the servo system could not receive correct
data.
464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA An attempt to write maintenance information

FAILED on the amplifier maintenance screen failed.
465 n AXIS : READ ID DATA At powerup, initial amplifier ID information

FAILED could not be read.
466 n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP COM- The maximum current value of the amplifier
BINATION does not match the maximum current value
of the motor.
467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTING The following servo functions are not en-
OF AXIS abled even when an axis using a DSP ex-
clusively is set on the axis setting screen:
1) Learning control (bit 5 of parameter No.
2008 = 1)
2) Highspeed current loop (bit 0 of param-
eter No. 2004 = 1)
3) Highspeed interface axis (bit 4 of pa-
rameter No. 2005 = 1)
804
P/S alarms
NC
No.
5134 FSSB : OPEN READY TIME The FSSB did not become ready to open
OUT duringinitialization.
5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE The FSSB entered an error mode.
5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS The number of amplifiers recognized by the

IS SMALL FSSB is insufficient, compared with the
number of controlled axes.
5137 FSSB : CONFIGURATION The FSSB detected a configuration error.

ERROR
5138 FSSB : AXIS SETTING NOT Axis setting has not been performed in auto-
COMPLETE matic setting mode. Perform axis setting
using the FSSB setting screen.
5139 FSSB : ERROR The servo system could not be initialized

normally. The cause may be an optical
cable failure or incorrect connection with an
amplifier and other modules.
5197 FSSB : OPEN TIME OUT The FSSB did not open when the CNC had
allowed the FSSB to open.
5198 FSSB : ID DATA NOT READ The initial ID information for the amplifier
cannot be read because of a failure in the
temporary assignment.
805
G.7 D MDI input is abnormal (each time data is entered, the power needs to
be turned off).
ACTIONS FOR
First, disconnect the optical cable of the NC, then turn off then on the
TROUBLE
power. Next, check the items below.
ENCOUNTERED AT
(A) Check parameter No. 1902.
STARTUP TIME
Action: hen parameter
No. 1902 = 00000000, set the following:
No. 1905 = 00000000
Nos. 1910 through 1919 = 0
Action: hen parameter
No. 1902 = 00000001 or 00000010, set the following:
No. 1905 = Appropriate value
Nos. 1910 through 1919 = Appropriate value
(B) When bit 1 of parameter No. 1815 = 1, check parameter Nos.
1910 through 1919 to see if 16 or 48 is set.
Action: If neither 16 nor 48 is set, set bit 1 of No. 1815 to 1.
(C) Check if communication is open (the green LED is on).
Action: If communication is not open, check the power supply
for the amplifier and optical cable connection.
D The separate detector can be recognized, but feedback pulses from the
separate detector are abnormal.
(A) Check parameter No. 1902.
Action: The setting of parameter
No. 1902 = 00000000 is incorrect. When parameter
No. 1902 = 00000001, set the following:
No. 1905 = 01000000 or 10000000
Nos. 1910 through 1919 = Appropriate value
Nos. 1936 and 1937 = Appropriate value
Action: When parameter No. 1902 = 00000010, set connector
numbers for M0 and M1 in axis setting on the FSSB
screen.
D In axis setting on the FSSB screen, connector numbers for M1 and M2
cannot be set.
Action: Check the FSSB screen to see if pulse module IDs are read
correctly. If pulse module IDs are not read correctly, check
the pulse module connections.
D The settings on the FSSB screen are canceled when the power is turned
off then back on.
Action: After setting desired values, press soft key [SETING] on the
amplifier setting screen and axis setting screen.
D P/S alarm 5138 AXIS SETTING NOT COMPLETE is issued.
Action: Automatic setting on the FSSB screen is not terminated
normally. Make settings correctly on the FSSB amplifier
setting screen and axis setting screen, and press soft key
[SETING] on both screens. At this time, be sure to make
settings on the amplifier setting screen and the axis setting
screen in this order.
806
Action: When automatic setting on the FSSB screen is not

performed, set all of parameter Nos. 1902, 1905, 1910
through 1919, 1936, and 1937 to 0 before starting manual
setting.
D The invalid amplifier/motor combination alarm (466) is issued.
Action: Check if the maximum current value of the amplifier read on
the ID screen matches the setting of parameter No. 2165.
Recheck the amplifier/motor combination.
Action: Initialize the servo parameters of each axis.
D When the power is turned off then back on after modifying parameter
No. 1902, the system alarm (920) is issued.
Action: Disconnect the optical cable of the CNC, then turn off then
on the power.
Set all of parameter Nos. 1902, 1905, 1910 through 1919,
1936, and 1937 to 0, then turn off then on the power, then
make an FSSB setting all over again.
D When 2path control is used, automatic setting on the FSSB screen is
not executed normally.
Action: Use Version 04 and later of the CNC software
(B0F1/B1F1/BDF1/BEF1).
D When 2path control is used, a setting for using axes of the other path
(for example, a setting for assigning a motor connected via an optical
cable with the board of path 2 to an controlled axis of path 1) cannot
be made normally.
Action: Use Version 04 and later of the CNC software
(B0F1/B1F1/BDF1/BEF1).
807
G.8
EXAMPLES OF
SETTINGS USING
OTHER
CONNECTIONS
G.8.1
Example 1: Learning
Control
D Conceptual diagram of When learning control is used, one NC controlled axis uses one DSP (two
FSSB parameter setting axes of the servo axis card) exclusively.
for using learning (1) Set bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 to 1 to disable automatic setting.
control
(2) Assign two axes of the axis card to each of learning control axes X and
C. (Parameter No. 1023 X = 1, C = 3)
(3) Assign the remaining controlled axes to the axis card (Parameter No.
1023 Z = 5, A = 6, B = 7)
(4) Set bit 0 of parameter No. 1905 to 1 for the Aaxis, for which an even
number is set in parameter No. 1023.
(5) When using a 2axis amplifier, one of the two axes must always be set
for the slow type. So, set bit 0 of parameter No. 1905 to 1.
(6) Set the attributes of parameter Nos. 1910 through 1914 to 0, 2, 4, 5,
and 6, and set the attributes of the remaining parameters to 40 (for
absence of a slave).
Axis card Amplifi-

Axis Name
er/motor
Path 1
808
G.8.2 Example: FSSB setting for the following:

Example 2: When a Hardware connection
2Axis Amplifier is Mother board 2axis amplifier (LX/LZ) 2axis amplifier
Shared by Two Paths (LA/RA) 2axis amplifier (LC/RC)
Subboard 2axis amplifier (RX/RZ) 2axis amplifier
(LY/RY)
Controlled axis configuration
Mother board: LX, LZ, LC, LA, LY
Subboard: RX, RZ, RC, RA, RY
Method of setting
When the servo system of another path is controlled as in this example,
automatic FSSB setting is not possible. Manual setting needs to be
used.
D FSSB setting procedure When a motor connected to a path other than the local path is to be used
for controlling servo in using a 2axis amplifier, set the axis card number (DSP) of the
axes of another path in a remote path in parameter No. 1023.
multipath system Procedure for setting
(1) Set bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 to 1 to use the manual setting mode.
(2) By hardware connection, the slave number of each motor is
determined. So, in parameter Nos. 1910 through 1919, set (slave
number 1) and 40 (for absence of a slave).
809
Path 1
Axis Name Axis card Amplifi-

er/motor
Path 2
er/motor
(3) Set an axis card number (DSP number) in parameter No. 1023 to
connect an NC controlled axis with a motor.
(4) For an axis for which an even number is set in parameter No. 1023, set
bit 0 of parameter No. 1905 to 1.
With the settings above, a servo motor connected to another path can be
controlled.
When a pulse module is connected to use a separate scale, bits 7 and 6 of
parameter No. 1905, and parameter Nos. 1936 and 1937 need also be set.
810
Path 1
er/motor
Path 2
er/motor
811
G.9 The FSSB setting screen displays FSSBbased amplifier and axis
information, and allows amplifier and axis information to be set.
FSSB DATA DISPLAY
.

[FSSB].
setting screen (or the FSSB setting screen selected previously), and
displays the following soft keys:
There are three types of FSSB setting screens: the amplifier setting screen,
axis setting screen, and amplifier maintenance screen.
Pressing soft key [AMP] switches the screen display to the amplifier
setting screen.
Pressing soft key [AXIS] switches the screen display to the axis setting
screen.Pressing soft key [MAINT] switches the screen display to the
amplifier maintenance screen.
G.9.1 The amplifier setting screen displays slave information divided into
Amplifier Setting amplifier information and pulse module information.
Screen
(AMPLIFIER SETTING) O1000 N00001
NO.
2 A1M SVM 12A 2 Y
3 A2L SVM 40A 3 Z
4 A3L SVM 20A 4 A
5 A3M SVM 40A 5 B
7 A4L SVU 240A 6 C
NO. PCB ID
8 M2 B 12AB
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
The amplifier setting screen displays the items below.

D NO.: Slave number
The serial numbers for to up to ten slaves (up to eight amplifiers and
up to two pulse modules) connected via the FSSB are displayed
sequentially. A younger number is assigned to a slave closer to the
CNC.
D AMP: Amplifier type
Amplifier type information starts with the character A, which stands
for amplifier. The character A is followed by the ordinal number of
an amplifier counted from the amplifier closest to the CNC, then is
followed by a letter indicating which axis of the amplifier is used (L
for the first axis, and M for the second axis).
812
D AXIS NO: Controlled axis number

The controlled axis numbers set in parameter Nos. 1920 through 1929
are displayed.
When a value outside the range 1 to the maximum number of
controlled axes is set, 0 is displayed.
D NAME: Controlled axis name
The axis name set in the parameter No. 1020 corresponding to a
controlled axis number is displayed. When the controlled axis number
is 0, is displayed.
D As amplifier information, the following information items are
displayed:
S UNIT: Type of servo amplifier unit
S SERIES: Servo amplifier series
S CURRENT: Maximum current value
D As pulse module information, the information items below are
displayed.
S EXTRA
The character M, which stands for pulse module, is followed by
the ordinal number of a pulse module counted from the pulse
module closest to the CNC.
S TYPE
The type of a pulse module is displayed by a letter.
S PCB ID
The ID of a pulse module is displayed using four digits in
hexadecimal. For a separate detector module (8 axes),
DETECTOR (8AXES) is displayed after the pulse module ID. For
a separate detector module (4 axes), DETECTOR (4AXES) is
displayed after the pulse module ID.
G.9.2 The axis setting screen displays axis information.

Axis Setting Screen
(AXIS SETTING) O1000 N00001
M1 M2 Cs
1 X A1L 0 0 0 0 1
2 Y A1M 1 0 1 0 0
3 Z A2L 0 0 0 1 0
4 A A3L 0 0 0 0 2
5 B A3M 0 0 0 0 0
6 C A4L 0 0 0 0 0
>_
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56
The axis setting screen displays the items below.
813

The NC controlled axis numbers are displayed sequentially.
D AMP: Type of amplifier connected to each axis
D M1: Connector number for pulse module 1
The connector number for pulse module 1 set in parameter No. 1931
is displayed.
D M2: Connector number for pulse module 2
The connector number for pulse module 2 set in parameter No. 1932
is displayed.
D 1DSP
The value set in bit 0 (1DSP) of parameter No. 1904 is displayed. The
value 1 is displayed for an axis (leaning control axis, highspeed
current loop axis, highspeed interface axis) that exclusively uses a
DSP.
D CS: Cs contour control axis
The value set in parameter No. 1933 is displayed. The value 1 is
displayed for a Cs contour control axis.
D TANDEM (M series only)
The value set in parameter No. 1934 is displayed. For a master axis
and slave axis used for tandem control, an odd number and a
subsequent even number are displayed.
G.9.3 The amplifier maintenance screen displays servo amplifier maintenance

Amplifier Maintenance information. There are two types of amplifier maintenance screens as
shown below. The user can switch between the two screens with the page
Screen
keys and .
(AMPLIFIER SETTING) O1000 N00001
1 X A1L SVMHV 2 40AL

2 Y A1M SVM 2 12A
3 Z A2L SVM 1 40A
4 A A3L SVM 2 20A
5 B A3M SVM 2 40A
6 C A4L SVU 1 240A
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56

814
(AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE) O1000 N00001

NO.
1 X 01A 970123 01
2 Y 01A 970123 01
3 Z 01A 970123 01
4 A 02B 970123 01
5 B 02B 970123 01
6 C 02B 970123 01
MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56

The amplifier maintenance screens display the following items:

D AMP: Type of an amplifier connected to each axis
D SERIES: Series of a servo amplifier connected to each axis
D UNIT: Unit type of a servo amplifier connected to each
axis
D NO. OF AXES: Maximum number of axes of an amplifier
connected to each axis
D CURRENT: Maximum current value of an amplifier connected
to each axis
D VERSION: Version of an amplifier unit connected to each axis
D TEST: Test date of an amplifier connected to each axis
Example) 970123: January 23, 1997
D MAINTENANCE: Engineering change drawing number of an
amplifier connected to each axis
815
H. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS APPENDIX B63005EN/02
H NOTATION OF MDI KEYS
Series 16i/18i/160i/180iMODEL A have two types of MDI keypads : English type and Symbolic type.
The table below shows correspondence between English keys and Symbolic keys.
This manual uses English type in the text.
Therefore when a user uses Symbolic type MDI keypads and encounters an English key in the text, please refer
to the correspondence table shown below.
Name English key Symbolic key
CANCEL key CAN
POSITION key POS
PROGRAM key PROG
OFFSET/ OFFSET
SETTING key SETTING
CUSTOM key CUSTOM
SYSTEM key SYSTEM
MESSAGE key MESSAGE
GRAPH key GRAPH
SHIFT key SHIFT
INPUT key INPUT
816
B63005EN/02 APPENDIX H. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS
Name English key Symbolic key
ALTER key ALTER
INSERT key INSERT
DELETE key DELETE
PAGE UP key
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE DOWN key
HELP key HELP
RESET key RESET
CUSTOM
CUSTOM/GRAPH key
GRAPH
817
B63005EN/02 Index
Symbols Amplifier setting screen, 812
Associated parameters, 541
[Sample setting 1] general configuration (semiclosed loop),
785 Automatic operation cannot be done, 578
[Sample setting 2] general configuration (closed loop), 786 Automatic setting, 783
[Sample setting 3] when the Caxis is a Cs axis, 788 Automatic setting of standard parameters, 554
[Sample setting 4] tandem control configuration, 790 Axis setting screen, 813
[Sample setting 5] when the simple electronic gear box (FGB)
function is used, 792
B
Basic unit, 245
A Basic units, 335
AC spindle (analog interface), 555 Block diagram, 556
AC spindle (serial interface), 542, 543 Boot screen, 770
Actions for trouble encountered at startup time, 806 Boot slot configuration screen, 730
Address, 451 Boot system, 728
Adjusting reference position (dog method), 537 Builtin debug function, 453
Alarm 300 (request for reference position return), 604
Alarm 300 (V ready off), 605
Alarm 404 (V ready on), 609 C
Alarm 417 (digital servo system is abnormal), 615 C board, serial communication board, 322
Alarm 462 (send CNC data failed), 612 C board, serial communication board, CAPII board, and
symbol CAP iT board, 208
Alarm 5134 (FSSB: open ready time out), 624
Cable clamping and shielding, 389
Alarm 5136 (FSSB: number of amps is small), 628
Calculation of S analog voltage and related parameters, 557
Alarm 700 (overheat: control unit), 616
CAPII board, 325
Alarm 701 (overheat: fan motor), 617
Changing start sequences, 766
Alarm 704 (spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm), 619
Clearing alarm history, 30
Alarm 749 (serial Spindle communication error), 620
Clearing CAPII data (16iT), 420
Alarm 750 (spindle serial link startup failure), 621
Clearing CAPII memory, 421
Alarm 85 to 87 (reader/puncher interface alarm), 595
CNC alarm screen, 777
Alarm 90 (reference position return is abnormal), 602
CNC state display, 82
Alarm 900 (ROM parity), 631
Color setting, 116
Alarm 926 (FSSB alarm), 643
Color setting screen, 116
Alarm 930 (CPU interrupt), 649
Configuration display of software, 26
Alarm 935 (SRAM ECC error), 651
Configuration of PCBs, 27
Alarm 950 (PMC system alarm), 655
Configuration of printed circuit board connectors and cards,
Alarm 951 (PMC watchdog alarm), 658 162
Alarm 972 (NMI alarm on an option board), 659 Confirming the parameters required for data output, 396
Alarm 973 (NMI alarm with an unknown cause), 660 Connector and card configurations of printed circuit boards,
304
Alarm 974 (FBUS error), 661
Contents displayed, 57
Alarm 975 (BUS error), 664
Contrast adjustment, 120
Alarm 976 (local BUS error), 665
Corrective action for failures, 563
Alarm display, 30
Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on
Alarm history screen, 30 spindle tuning screen, 551
Alarm list, 673 Countermeasures Against Noise, 382
Alarms, 802 Cycle start LED signal has turned off, 586
Alarms (serial spindle), 719
Alarms 910 and 911 (sram parity), 634
Alarms 912 to 919 (dram parity), 637 D
Alarms 920 and 921 (servo alarms), 639 Data input/output on the all IO screen, 422
Amplifier maintenance screen, 814 Data input/output using a memory card, 437
i1
INDEX B63005EN/02
Data sampling for storage type waveform diagnosis, 90

G
Data server board, 221
General of interface, 448
Deleting file name and files, 420 Graphic of wave diagnosis data, 88
Deletion of external operator messages record, 31 Graphic screen (M series), 22
Demounting a card PCB, 362 Graphic screen (T series), 21
Demounting a DIMM module, 365 Grounding, 384
DeviceNet board, 330
DeviceNet interface board, 244
Digital servo, 523 H
Display and operation, 1 Handle operation cannot be done, 573
Display method, 27, 54, 96, 456, 546 Hardware, 294
Display on the 7segment LED at poweron, 760 Hardware configuration, 295, 752
Hardware overview, 296
Displaying diagnostic page, 57
Heat generated in each unit, 291
Displaying servo tuning screen, 534
Heat generation of the units, 358
Distributed I/O setting, 373
Help function, 54
Dogless reference position setting, 540
Help screen, 20
Dump/restore of CAPII data (16iT), 419
HSSB interface board, 233, 323
E I
Enthernet board, 327 I/O linkII board, 236 326
Environmental conditions outside cabinet, 381 Initial setting servo parameters, 524
Error codes (serial spindle), 724 Input and output of CAP data (super CAP T), 407
Error messages and required actions, 746 Input and output of data, 393
Input and output of each file (super CAP M), 407
Ethernet board, 240
Input and output of each file (super CAP T), 414
Example 1: learning control, 808
Input from and output to I/O devices cannot be performed
Example 2: when a 2axis amplifier is shared by two paths, 809 input/output cannot be performed properly, 593
Examples of settings using other connections, 808 Input/output of conversational data in a lump(super CAP M),
405
Execution period of PMC, 455
Input/output super cap data, 405
Explanation of screens, 770
Inputting and outputting floppy files, 432
External operator messages record, 31
Inputting and outputting offset data, 430
Inputting and outputting parameters, 429
Inputting and outputting programs, 425
F Inputting and outputting the operation history data, 47
FANUC twobyte character code table, 141 Inputting CNC parameters, 400
File operation, 773 Inputting custom macro variable values, 402

Inputting part programs, 403
FLnet board, 334
Inputting pitch error compensation amount, 402
For lathe, 545
Inputting PMC parameters, 401
FS16i/18i/21i/20i motherboard, 162
Inputting tool compensation amount, 403
FSSB data display, 812
Inputting/ outputting CAPII data (16iT), 417
FSSB startup procedure/materials, 780
Inputting/ outputting data, 396
Function keys and soft keys, 2 Interface between CNC and PMC, 447
Function keys and soft keys (for 20i), 23 Inverter PCBs and connector units, 202
Function number, 757 Investigating the conditions under which failure occurred, 563
Functions on the IPL screen, 775 IPL screen, 774
i2
B63005EN/02 INDEX
J Module configuration screen, 29

Mounting a card PCB, 363
Jog operation cannot be done, 569
Mounting a DIMM module, 365
Mounting and Demounting Card Pcbs, 361
Mounting and Demounting Dimm Modules, 364
K Mounting and removing a minislot option board (except
Kind of data in sub memory, 419 DeviceNet board), 343
Mounting and removing an option board, 341
Mounting and removing the back panel, 346
L Mounting and removing the DeviceNet board, 344

Mounting and removing the main CPU board and a fullsize
Layout of the 7segment LED and switches, 756 option board, 341
LCDmounted type i series hardware, 147 Mounting and replacing the CE card, 271
LCD/MDI unit, 339 Mounting and replacing the PC card (MMX pentium), 267
LED display and maintenance of standalone type unit, 754 Mounting the back panel, 346
LED display during automatic operation, 758 Mounting the board, 342, 343, 344
LED display when a system alarm is issued, 759
LED display when the push switch is pressed, 758
Liquid crystal display (LCD), 370 N
List input/output signals, 477 NC status display, 758
List of addresses, 497 No manual operation nor automatic operation can be executed,
565
List of alarm codes (CNC), 674
Noise suppressor, 388
List of alarms (PMC), 706
Notation of MDI keys, 816
List of maintenance parts, 726
Notes on using the MDI unit, 392
List of operations, 98
Nothing is displayed on the LCD when the power is turned on,
List of signals by each mode, 475 588
List of units and printed circuit boards, 245
LOAD BASIC SYSTEM function, 744
Loader control board, 229 O
Offset/setting screen (M series), 15
Offset/setting screen (T series), 13
M Operating monitor, 96
Maintenance information input/output, 115 Operation, 419, 540, 757
Maintenance information screen, 112 Operation Before PowerOn, 757
Maintenance of heat exchanger of heat pipe type, 366 Operation history, 33
Maintenance of open CNC (bootup and IPL), 764 Operation of each function, 761
Maintenance parts, 727 Option setting screen, 779
Manual setting 1, 801 Other screens, 777

Other units, 340
Manual setting 2, 794
Others, 263
Matters common to both LCDmounted type and standalone
type i series (hardware), 360 Outline of spindle control, 543, 555
MDI unit, 255 Outputting CNC parameters, 397
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen, 742 Outputting custom macro common variables, 431
MEMORY CARD FORMAT function, 743 Outputting custom macro variable values, 399
Memory card types (functions), 751 Outputting part program, 399
Memory display (M.SRCH), 465 Outputting pitch error compensation amount, 398
Memry card slot, 749 Outputting PMC parameters, 398
Message screen, 20 Outputting tool compensation amount, 399
Method A of gear change for machining center, 545 Outputting waveform diagnosis data (storage type), 92
Method B of gear change for machining center (PRM Overview of hardware, 149
3705#2=1), 545
i3
INDEX B63005EN/02
P Series 16i/160i/160is, 149

Series 18i/180i/180is, 151, 152
Parameter, 32, 121
Series 20i, 153
Parameter input/output, 128
Series 21i/210i, 299
Parameter setting, 33, 534
Servo alarms, 666
Parameters, 97, 118
Servo tuning screen, 534
PC functionequipped FS160i/180i/210i motherboard, 173
Setting input/outputrelated parameters, 423
PC functionequipped FS160is/180is/210is motherboard, 189
Setting module screen, 26
Periodic maintenance screens, 131
Setting parameters, 84
PMC PRM Screen, 469
Setting parameters for input/output, 394
PMC screen, 456
Setting screen display and setting, 137
PMCDGN screen, 461
Setting the input signal or output signal to be recorded in the
PMCLAD screen, 457 operation history, 38
Position screen, 3 Sevensegment LED display, 758
Power motion manager, 121 Signal ground (SG) connection of control unit, 386
Printed circuit boards of control unit, 335 Slave, 782
Printed circuit boards of the control unit, 257 Slot status display, 25
PROFIBUS board, 238
Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH , 21, 22
PROFIBUS master board, 332
PROFIBUS slave board, 333
Soft key transition triggered by the function key HELP , 20
Program screen, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11
Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE

, 20
R OFFSET
Soft key transition triggered by the function key SETTING , 13,
Registered data input/output, 139
15
Removing the board, 341, 343, 344
Removing the panel, 346 Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS ,3
Replacing a fan unit, 353
Replacing battery, 277 Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG (When
Replacing fan motors, 281 the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed in all modes), 11
Replacing fuse on control unit, 275
Replacing fuses on various units, 376 Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the
Replacing LCD backlight, 284 EDIT mode, 6
Replacing the battery, 350

Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the
Replacing the fuse of the control unit, 348
HNDL, JOG, or REF mode, 9
Replacing the fuse of the LCD unit, 354
Replacing the LCD backlight, 355 Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the
Replacing the motherboard, 264 MDI mode, 8
RISC Board, 218
RISC board, data server board, RISC + data server board, 316
MEM mode, 4

S TJOG or THDL mode, 10
Screen configuration and operating procedure, 731
Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM , 17
Screen display, 30, 31, 34, 116, 121
Screen display and operation, 112 Soft keys, 2
Screen display and setting, 131 Software configuration screen, 29
Screen displayed immediately after power Is turned on, 25 SPC alarms, 669
Separation of Signal Lines, 382 Specification, 449
Series 16i/160i, 296, 298 Specification of PMC, 449
i4
B63005EN/02 INDEX
Spindle alarms, 670 System screen, 17

Spindle monitor screen, 549
Spindle setting and tuning screen, 546
Spindle setting screen, 546 T
Spindle tuning screen, 547 The display on the LCD unit flashes, 592
SRAM DATA BACKUP screen, 739 Total connection diagram, 154
SRAM operation, 772 Total connection diagrams, 300
Starting the boot system, 729 Troubleshooting, 561
Status screen, 778 Tuning S analog voltage (D/A converter), 559
Status screen display and setting, 132
Structure, 148
SubCPU board, 214, 312 U
Supported editions, 763
Units and printed circuit boards, 335
System configuration screen, 27
System data check screen, 734
System data delete screen, 736
W
System data loading screen, 732
Warning screen displayed when an option is changed, 109
System data manipulation, 771
Warning screen displayed when system software is replaced
SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen, 737 (system label check error), 111
System files and user files, 730 Waveform diagnostic function, 84
System reserve area of internal relay, 453 Waveform diagnostic parameter screen, 85
i5
Revision Record
FANUCSeries 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is-MODEL A MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B63005EN)
D All pages were changed.

02 Oct., 99
D StandAlone type and LCDmounted type were added.
01 Apr., 97
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

63005en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

63005en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

63005en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 16i / 18i / 21i / 20i Model A

GFZ-63005EN02 October 1999

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

Copyright 1999 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s2

2. WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s3

3. WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s5

4. WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s6

5. WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . s7

1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

2 WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION

3 WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT

4 WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

5 WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY

1. Memory backup battery replacement

2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

Description of 1.Display and operation

Applicable models Product name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 16iTA 16iTA

FANUC Series 16iMA 16iMA

FANUC Series 18iTA 18iTA

FANUC Series 18iMA 18iMA

FANUC Series 180iMA 180iMA M series

FANUC Series 180isMA 180isMA

FANUC Series 21iTA 21iTA

FANUC Series 210iTA 210iTA T series

FANUC Series 210isTA 210isTA

FANUC Series 21iMA 21iMA

FANUC Series 210iMA 210iMA M series

FANUC Series 210isMA 210isMA

FANUC Series 20isTA 20iTA T series for Lathe

FANUC Series 20isFA 20iFA M series for Milling

*1) With twopath control function.

Product name Abbreviations

FANUC PMCMODEL SA1 PMCSA1

FANUC PMCMODEL SA5 PMCSA5

FANUC PMCMODEL SB5 PMCSB5

FANUC PMCMODEL SB6 PMCSB6

Table 1 Related Manuals

CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B63003EN

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B63003EN1

OPERATORS MANUAL FOR LATHE B63004EN

OPERATORS MANUAL FOR MACHINING B63014EN

MAINTENANCE MANUAL B63005EN *

PARAMETER MANUAL B63010EN

PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler/Macro Executer) B61803E1

FAPT MACRO COMPILER PROGRAMMING MANUAL B66102E

FANUC Symbol CAPi T OPERATORS MANUAL B63304EN

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING B61804E1

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING B61804E2

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING B61874E1

FANUC Super CAPi T OPERATORS MANUAL B63284EN

FANUC Super CAPi M OPERATORS MANUAL B63294EN

FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR series PARAMETER MANUAL B65150E

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS B65152E

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series PARAMETER MANUAL B65160E